675 10 13615 https://digitalcollections.lakeheadu.ca/files/original/7b68d9d02c3a082382cf6359ff7506c9.pdf e17e98321a5f81d1c72815b9f1595a1d PDF Text Text LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY Index to Financial Reports at April 30 1 1972 Page ( 1. Comptroller's comments on the financial reports 2. Financial Statements for the year ended April 30, 1972 3. Projected Operating Income and Expenditures for the year ending April 30, 1973 4. Commitment on Unexpended Capital Funds 5. Out I ine of Capital Work to be done during 1972/73 fiscal year 6. Statement of Development Fund 1 2 - 10 11 - 12 13 14 - 16 17 - --··=·- = = = 1 r = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = - - = - - -71·- i'. �LAKEHEAD UNIVERSIJl Corrrnents on Financial Report for the Year Ended April 30. 1972 General The fiscal year .of Ontario universities was changed to April 30th commencing in 1972; therefore, no comparative figures have been incorporated in the reports. I Operating Due in part to the change of year end and seeing the possibility of future deficits, the University adopted a pol icy of budgeting for a 22 month period, July 1, 1971 to Apri I 30, 1973. It was estimated that a sizeable deficit would occur in the year ending April 30, 1973 (see budget page 11); therefore, we budgeted for an excess of income over expenditures of approximatel_y $560,000 to be- appropriated for future years. Our financial statements show an appropriation of $596,704. Capital and Development Fund ( The two major capital projects consisted of the additions to the Athletic complex and the construction of an academic building. The total assets of the university increased by $4,822,468 during the period and unexpended capital funds increased by $249,000. This increase was made up primarily of development fund receipts and interest earned on investments. The supporting schedule of "Commitment on Unexpended Capital Funds" ·(Page 13) shows that an estimated free balance of $374,000 could result at April 30, 1973. Scholarship Fund No .additional endowment funds were received during the period, but we were able to increase our total fund by way of changes in our investment pol icy. The increase in expendable funds amounted to $5,152. ~ z t < ' [ / y ~7-?--a 4c2 -c::::::: Grant H. Thompson Comptro I I er ,;> II ( I !, 11 11 Page 1 =====--=;IF==== - = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = - d !i H ,!I' ·---,:..-=-~;=. �LAKEHEAD UNIVER§IJY (Incorporated by Special Act of the Province of Ontario) .. Statement 1 BALANCE SHEET APBlb 30. 1972 ~ LJABIUifES OPERATJNG FUND Accounts receivable Inventory of books for resale, at cost Prepaid expenses Investments, at cost (which approximates market value) Accrued interest Deferred charges $ Due to bankers Due to building fund Accounts payable end accrued charges Purchase conrnitments Deferred revenue Due to Department of Colleges and Universities 192,522 120,872 10,71~ •l,.325,000 .32,77.3 13,050 Provision for study and sabbatical leave Provision for Biology station Provision for repairs end replacements - residence Appropriation for future years Surplus - Statement 2 PLANT 2.&.ll2 fUND Due to bankers Accounts peyable Debentures payable Mortgages payable Note payable 1,.351 145,480 19,21.3 1,465,000 9,899 843,277 28,660,545 2,531,983 45,000 lz.■.22.2 32,090,-;'CL 1,648,999 Capital projects Cor.ipleted Uriccmpleted 44,487 17,955 501,224 132,455 63,5.36 151.000 910,557 125,000 15,373 41,470 596,704 1.694.9~ 1.694.929 Unexpended funds: Accounts receivable Federal sales tax recoverable Accrued interest Investments, et cost (which epproxtmetes market velue) Due from operating fund S Equity in capitel projects - Statement 4 32,850,596 10.759,464 43.610.060 ~5.259.0!i~ i3,15S,355 45.259.059 SCHOLARSHIP TRUST AND ENDOYlt\ENT FUND ) Cas~ Lo~ns receivable Investments Scholarship, endov,ment end loan funds Expendable funds 616 5,245 ~ 355,453 45,252 402. 705 402,705 S~22...~~ HL.22Ll22 (not ·ed) Page 2 �=====#----=======================================~ Statement 2 LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY STATEMENT OF OPERATING REVENUE AND EXPENDITURE AND SURPLUS EQB THE YEAR ENDED APRIL 30. 1972 (10 month period) Revenue: Provincial government grants - operating - debenture interest $ 6,867,622 1 1 408 1 397 8 1 276,019 1 ,,i Fees: Tuition 1.847, 183 ii 1- 293.795 Assisted research i Other: Interest Sundry 71,074 59.655 130,729 Total revenue ( 101547.726 Expenditures - Schedule 1: Academic Administration Plant student services Assisted research Debenture interest Other Total operating expenditures 5,971,676 842,126 1,054,399 52,407 293,795 1,408,397 19~.537 9,817,337 25,000 Provision for sabbatical and study leave 9,842,337 Surplus for year before anci I lary 705,389 Ancillary enterprises Deficit for year Surplus for year (92,316) Schedule 2 613,073 Deficit at beginning of year (10,654) Surplus before appropriation for future years Appropriation for future years surplus at end of year 602,419 596,704 $ ~:fZl~ I II. (not audited) Page 3 -i �statement 3 LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY STATEMENT OF SCHOLARSHIP. TRUST AND ENDOWMENT FUNDS FOR THE YEAR ENDED APRIL 30 1 1972 (10 month period) $383.126 Balance at beginning of year Receipts: Scholarship and endowment Interest Transfer from operating fund 18,949 16,502 16.695 52.146 435.272 Total funds ava i I able Disbursements: Scholarships and bursaries Endowment - Scholarships - Faculty _grants Administrative expense ( 27,158 3,241 1,418 750 32.567 $402,705 Balance at end of year SUfNMRY Principal of trust and endowment funds $356,453 46.252 Expendable funds $1Q~LIQ2 l (not audited) Page 4 I 11 i; ---···- - · · - - - - - · - - - - · t p = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = - = = = = = = = - - - · = · - -- - - - ---::/;-:- �-----··---- - - - -- - - - = - = - = - = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =~ statement 4 LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY STATEMENT OF EQUITY IN CAPITAL PROJECTS FOR THE YEAR ENDED APRIL 30. 1972 (10 month period) $11,882,802 Ba1ance at beginning of year Furniture, equipment, I ibrary books from operating 657,917 Grants from Province of Ontario Principal on debentures 288;821 Development Fund and Capital Donations 229,180 Transfer from Operating Fund Mortgage and loan principal Computer 4,662 34,238 Interest on investments 68,250 Rentals - Mal I and other 8.924 ( 13.174.794 Deduct: Development Fund expenses Other expenses 3,054 3.385 6.439 $13,168,355 Balance at end of year ii i (not audited) Page 5 =-================================-:-=----· �Page 6 LAKEHEAD UNIV~RSITY NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS APRIL 30. 1972 1. Debentures Payable The debentures payable balance of $28,660,545 represents debentures issued to the Ontario Universities Capital Aid Corporation. The debentures are redeemable over a thirty year period from date of issue through blended payments of principal and interest at rates which vary from 5½% to 8½%. As the payments of principal and interest fal I due, the Ontario Ministry of Colleges and Universities is granting funds to the University in the amount of the annual payment, and accordingly no accrued interest has been provided nor has the current portion payable been shown separately in the accompanying statements. 2. Campaign Furids Collections of $175,693 on the Development Fund in the year under review have been included in the statement of Equity in Capital Projects on the accompanying financial statements. The amount the University wil I receive on outstanding pledges is $1,105,000. No provision· is included for possible pledge cancel lat ions. Accordingly, col lect1ons wil I be credited to Equity in Capital Projects as they are received. ( 3. Corrm i tments The I iabilities do not include the cost of completing and furnishing projects under construction. Capital projects for which final approval have been received are expected to require approximately $2,100,000 to complete. A balance of $1,695,500 in provincial grants, relative to these projects was outstanding at April 30, 1972. In addition $70,649 has been expended upon contracts for which final approval has not been received and on which the .University has received advances on grants of $67,000. Budgeted costs of these projects amount to $978,100 which are expected to be financed in ful I from provincial grants. (See Schedule 4). 4. Contingent Liability The University has guaranteed and is contingently I iable tn the amount of $142,791 for bank loans to employees for their first residence. 5. Comparative Figures Comparative figures for 1971 have not been incorporated due to the change in the financial year to April 30th. 6. Expenses al located to Ancillary Enterprises I l· Certain shared expenses have been al located to ancillary enterprises on an 1• estimated basis. More precise methods of al location are being researched and should be instituted in the coming yenr. However, it is not expected i!· that any change in the method of a I I ocat ion wi I I resu It in a mater i a I !I retroactive adjustment to operating results of ancillary enterprises. ·=~ �Schedule 1 LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY SCHEDULE ·oF OPERATING EXPENDlTURES YEAR ENDED APRIL 30. 1972 Academic: Salaries Pension and fringe benefits Instructional supplies and sundry Library - books and sundry Library - salaries Travel Moving Computer Audio-Visual Aids Study leave $3,988,996 295,047 496,463 327,560 327,089 140,167 29,812 190,684 47,517 128.341 $5,971,676 Administration: Salaries Pension and fringe benefits Computer Other expenses $ $ ( Plant: Salaries and wages Pension and fringe benefits Maintenance and sundry Heat, I ight and water Insurance $ 518,708 47,318 190,684 85.416 842,.126 627,504 54,781 116,854 226,842 28.418 $1LQ54L399 Student services Assisted research Debenture interest Other: Convocation Sundry Municipal taxes (not audited) $ 1,670 119,617 73.250 $ 194.z.537 �• -------- - - - = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = # Schedule 2 LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ANCILLARY ENTERPRISES SCHEDULE OF SURPLUS (DEFICIT) YEAR ENDED APRIL 30 1 1972 (10 month period) ( Current Income Current Expense Residence $661,428 $656,676 Bookstore 53,911 61,165 (7,254) Cafeteria 13,331 16,608 (3,277) Athletics 66,127 152,664 (86,537) Parking 22.082 22.082 $816,879 $909,195 NOTE: surplus (Deficit) 4,752 $ $(92,316) Parking expense includes $769 representing revenue deferred for the 1971/72 year. (not audited) Page 8 -···=·--=··-=·-~-F======================================---------- �Schedule 3 LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY SCHEDULE OF CAPITAL PROJECTS APRIL 30. 1972 Cost at April 30, Cost at June .30, Additions · 1971 Comeleted Erojects Land Site development Bui Id i ngs -Furniture and equipment Capital expenditures from operating - Library books and equipment ( I I I I, $ 256,571 . 1,841,208 19,459,468 3,744,268 81,190 $ 17,451 37,746 3.229.158 657.917 2815~0.672 . z9~,20~ Uncomeleted Projects No. 8 - Library addition 1,236,914 No. 17 - Property acquisition 106,709 No. 19 - University Centre extension 3,466,245 No. 24 - 480 bed residence 2,866,102 No. 25 - · Athletic building Phase I 353,216 No. 28 - Site services - 1969 667,204 No. 30 - Powerhouse - 1970 250,559 No. 32 - Academic building 620,996 No. 33 Site services - 1970 210,940 No. 34 - Site services - 1971 200 No. 35 - Utilities extension 164,587 No. 37 - Powerhouse equipment 102,558 No. 38 - Athletic building Phase 11 53,705 No. 39 - Temporary accommodation 59 No. 40 - Alterations (Faculty of Education) No. 42 - Land acquisition 58,896 No. 43 - Alterations 98,029 - 100 bed residence 1972 Transfers $ 53,896 3,424,334 47,389 391,657 1,841,208 22,901,253 3,829,403 ~,525.619 ~.887.075 22,850.596 $ 1,311,383 106,709 74,469 5,478 31,786 1972 (3,471,723) 2,897,888 166,923 57,667 5,494 1,540,447 215,218 57,704 553,567 520,139 724,871 256,053 2,161,443 426,158 : 200 222,291 656,125 921,162 101,582 974,867 101,641 203,433 (5,000) 94,642 3,592 $10.256.919 $ 4.028.164 $38 2 787 2 592 $ 4 2 822 2 468 203,433 i (53,896) 192,671 I 3,592 . $(3.525.619) 1 $10 • 759.464 1, $43 2 6l0 2 Q§Q I I I I i i I I ( I I i (not audited) ------·--··---- Page 9 ----------·- -- �Schedule 4 LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY SCHEDULE OF UNCOMPLETED PROJECTS AT APRIL 30. 1972 1 3 2 Approved Expenditures Budget to April 30/72 incl. acct. pa~. PROJECTS WITH FINAL APPROVAL LAK 8 Library addition 17 Property acquisition 19 University Centre 24 New residence New residence mortgage 28 Site services 1969 1,467,880 120,000 3,470,574 ( 591,000 (2,321,846 801 1 69~ Balance to Complete 1 - 2 4 Accounts Pa~able 5 6 7 8 Remaining cost incl. acct. pay. ---3 + 4 Approved Grant Received Grants Receivable 1,247,700 114,000 3,297,100 561,500 2,321,846 761.700 8.30j.846 1,247,700 114,000 3,297,100 561,500) 2,321,846) 761,700 8.3021846 108,852 425,060 548,000 259,000 2,513,400 374,500 328,500 861,500 548,000 259,000 1,761,200 374,500 231,000 594,600 290,320 1,158,353 1,159 1,208,000 102,800 709,000 102,800 499,000 27,573 64,941 4 19,420 2.567.60~ 174,000 53,900 199.000 5.007.000 66,800 842.~60 240,800 53,900 212.100 6.702.500 409,600 325,000 243,500 67,000 342,600 325,000 243,500 978.100 67,000 911.100 2.1.:Z2§.i.~24 12~2§4.i.44§ !2,..2ZL.~4§ ~.i.§Q§.,_§QQ 1,311,383 106,709 3,471,723 576,042 156,497 13,291 (1,149) 14,958 724.871 8 1 512 1 574· 76.82i 260.421 811 817 77.641 261.2j8 548,000 259,000 2,513,400 374,500 328,500 981,500 520,139 256,053 2,161,443 359,301 7,507 35,368 2,947 751,490 656,125 27,861 2,947 351,957 15,199 106,209 325,375 1,842,900 102,800 974,867 101,641 868,033 1,159 240,800 203,432 53,896 192.670 2.zo1~858 37,368 4 19.430 1.z22,5i2 66,857 200 342,743 324,800 243,500 (3,592) 907.451 81772.995 6 - ] ___ 156,497 13,291 (1,149) 14,958 g 25 Athletic Building 30 32 33 35 37 38 39 40 42 43 Phase I Powerhouse 1970 Academic bui I ding Site services 1970 Utilities extension Powerhouse equipment Athletic Building Phase 11 Temporary accorrmodation Alterations (Faculty of Education) Property acquisition Alterations PROJECTS WITHOUT FINAL APPROVAL 33 Site. services 1970 34 Site services 1971 37 Powerhouse equipment 100 bed residence 1972 53,900 212,100 Z1i!2Z1iOO 409,600 325;000 243,500 222,291 978,100 3.592 70,649 17_...~Q§~~2~ !4:..1.~§2..1.Q§! ~.1.2~2.1.414: '-- 399,533 15,199 2,643 99,685 g §42.1.~ZZ 342,743 324,800 243,500 p .592) 907.451 - 752,200 97,500 266,900 12,100 1.695.500 Page 10 �LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY PROJECTED OPERATING REVENUE 1972/73 1972/73 1972/73 June 10 Official Projection Ful I-time equivalent students 3,775 3,644 Basic income units 5.116 5,017 Unit value Basic operating income Emerging grant ( Revised $ 1,765 $ 1,765 9,029,740 8,855,005 715,000 833z000 $ 9,744,740 $ 9,688,005 Less formula fees Net grant 2,026.055 1.975.080 7,718,685 7,712,925 Add: 2,248,500 2,150,000 20,000 20,000 Tuition fees Sundry Estimated . income $ 9,987,185 $ Estimated expense per Exhibit "A" Deficit Add: Appropriation from prior year Appropriation for subsequent years 9,882,925 10.451,949 $ (569,024) 596,704 $ &Z~~~~ ( Page 11 �Exhibit "A" LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY PRELIMJNARY OPERATING BUDGET 1972/73 ACADEMIC ( Salaries academic Salaries - non-academic Pension and fringe benefits Instructional supplies and sundry Library - books and sundry Library - salaries Travel Moving Computer Media Services study leave Contingency - durables Total ADMINISTRATION Salaries Pension and fringe benefits Computer Other expenses Total (including durables $12,000) PLANT Salaries Pension and fringe benefits Maintenance and sundry Heat, I ight and water Insurance Total (including durables of $45,000) STUDENT SERVICES (including durables of $200) OTHER Convocation Sundry Contingencies - Graduate students - General university Anc i 11 ary $ 4,158,143 654,630 352,705 575,498 339,122 450,191 129,900 15,500 227,240 48,782 161,559 167.965 $ 7,281.235 722,513 74,283 227,239 185.047 $ 1.209.082 $ 932,661 70,170 32,821 455,000 26.000 $ 1.516.652 $ $ ____7__2_,__4__8__ 0 $ $ 50,000 200,000 $ 2,400 10,100 250,000 110,000 372.500 TOTAL UNIVERSITY BUDGET ACADEMIC ALLOCATIONS Faculty of Arts Faculty of Science Faculty of University Schools Faculty of Education Summer School Indirect academic (Library, Computer, Media Services, etc.) $ 2,013,647 1,527,388 1,456,301 598,540 491,375 1. 193,984 $ 1L~~!L~22 ( Page 12 �LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY CO,YN,ITMENT ON UNEXPENDED CAPITAL FUNDS $.OOO's Unexpended funds at June 30, 1971 Add: Receipts for period Less: Purchase of fixed assets Unexpended funds at April 30, 1972 $1,390 $3,950 3.701 249 $1,639 Deduct corrmitment on uncompleted projects Pre-Formula LAK 8 Library LAK 17 Property acquisition LAK 24 New residence LAK 28 Site services Formula (current ptojects) Non-Formula (cu~rent projects) Athletic Building Phase I I Powerhouse equipment $ 156 13 15 77 60 194 635 120 1.270 $ ( Planned expenditures for 1972/73 Alterations - Faculty of Education Building Alterations - Main Building Renovations and equipment - Engineering & Forestry Utility metering President's residence 10 20 100 50 50 230 $ Add: Estimated Development Fund receipts for 1972/73 Interest and other revenue for 1972/73 Estimated uncommitted funds at April 30, 1972 NOTE: 369 139 145 90 The estimated cash flow for the year is $2,606,600, but the Government Grants anticipated at this time amount to $1,959,000. Temporary borrowing may be required for this difference. Page 13 �CAPITAL REPORT OUTLINE OF CAPITAL WORK TO BE DONE 1972-1973 FISCAL YEAR LAK 28 LIBRARY ADDITION After non-library users vacate the Library Building the ground floor and 4th. floor have to be remodelled to accommodate Library usage. The ground floor will be Library service areas while the 4th. floor will be readers space. LAK 17 PROPERTY ACQUISITION See LAK 33 LAK 24 RESIDENCE Upgrade heating and electrical systems to provide adequate controls. LAK 28 SITE SERVICES 1969 See LAK 33 ( LAK 25 ATHLETIC BUILDING EXTENSION PHASE I Completion of Project LAK 32 ACADEMIC BUILDING Completion of Project LAK 33 SITE SERVICES & DEVELOPMENT 1970 This project combined with LAI< 17 and LAK 28 will provide exterior lighting, road paving, walkways, landscaping and planting on the entire campus. The main areas of work will be adjacent to the Field House, Academic Building, Power House, Faculty of Education and Library with the major roads all being paved. The bulk of this work should be completed by the fall of this year. LAK 35 UTILITIES EXTENSION Completion of Project Page 14 �CAPITAL REPORT, CAPITAL WORK TO BE DONE 1972-1973 FISCAL YEAR. LAK 37 Page Two. POWER HOUSE EQUIPMENT Completion up to partial approval. Balance (central control system} scheduled for 1973-1974 fiscal year. LAK 38 ATHLETIC BUILDING EXTENSION PHAS.E II Completion of Project LAK 39 TEMPORARY STRUCTURE Completion of Project LAK 40 ALTERATION & ADDITION FACULTY OF EDUCATION BLDG Completion of Project LAK 43 ALTERATIONS 1970-1971 Completion of Project ( ( Page 15 �CAPITAL REPORT. Page Three. PROPOSED ADDITIONAL CAPITAL WORK TO BE DONE 1972-1973 FISCAL YEAR 1) CENTENNIAL BUILDING RENOVATIONS The new programmes in Forestry and Engineering will necessitate extensive renovations which along with furniture and equipment will require an appropriation of $100,000. 2) UTILITY ME'IERING In order to properly assess the cost of operation of Residences, Regional School of Nursing, Cafeteria, etc., it is desirable to metre all the utilities at several points on campus. This will require an appropriation of $50,000. 3} ( PRESIDENT'S RESIDENCE Purchase of Residence. This will require an appropriation of $50,000. 4) FACULTY OF EDUCATION (a) (b) Dean's Office Storage Area for Gymnasium This will require an appropriation of $10,000. 5) MAIN BUILDING (a) (b) Physical Planning & Construction Office Area Media Services Office & Work Area This will require an appropriation of $20,000. ( CLA~~T~4. JUNE 13, 1972 PHYSICAL PLANNING & CONSTRUCTION. Page 16 �LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY STATEMENT OF DEVELOPMENT FUND FOR THE XEAR ENDED APRIL 30. 1972 (10 month period) Pledges after write-offs to June 30, 1972 Pledge increases Pledge decreases $3,703,272 $ Deduct payments - to June 30, 1972 - year ended April 30, 1972 - pledges - capital donations 50,127 26,776 2,382,434 177,943 51.246 Pledges receivable as at ApriJ 30, 1972 Less: 2.611.623 $1,105,000 City of Thunder Bay Other pledges receivable ( 12,251 $3,716,623 $ 780.:000 325,000 Estimated Receipts - Future Years 1972 1973 1974 1975 1976 1977 - 1973 1974 1975 1976 1977 1981 Estimated cancel lat ions $ 145,000 138,000 118,000 104,000 110,000 430.000 $1,045,000 60.000 $1,105,000 Page 17 � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Lakehead University Collection Description An account of the resource Photographs from Lakehead University's history: people, events, and campus. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Lakehead University Index to Financial Reports Subject The topic of the resource Universities Description An account of the resource Financial reports for Lakehead University, year ending April 30, 1972. Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Lakehead University Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1972 Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource PDF Language A language of the resource English Type The nature or genre of the resource Text Coverage The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant Canada - Ontario - Thunder Bay https://digitalcollections.lakeheadu.ca/files/original/9b2a5f9f40284219d46d0d77649d5b53.pdf b08e5452ac4fc157e5a9c07c473b778b PDF Text Text �GRADUATE NEWSLETTER, issue No. 1 FEB. L969 HELLO~!! We hope that you will welcome the very first issue of "Technology Tidings." This publication is the idea and effort of the graduates of the first class of Library Technology at Lakehead University. This Graduate Newsletter was contemplated and produced by the second year students (Potential Graduates) and by the Graduate themselves. This medium will keep us "in touch" with each other. You see, many of our fellow graduates have accepted positions in other parts of the province, and, as well, in other Provinces. It is hoped that each .gradu- ate at some time will contribute a "Regional Report", a book review, or an editorial. Neectless to say--our publication policy will be as follows: WHENEVER THE CONTRIBUTIONS HAVE BEEN PLENTIFUL~~ANOTHER ISSUE WILL BE COMPILED AND DESSEMINATED. With the co-operation of the Potential and Actual Graduates, this Newsletter will thrive and will be continued to be mailed out to those interested. --C. E. Notes and Reminders N.B. The OLA 1968 Conference at Sudbury will be hel~ at Laurentian Univ ersity from May 2-4, 1969. 00 Are you interested?????????????????????????? )E )E )C )C X )E lC )C >< >E )( )C >E X DID YOU KNOW? The thought that a library is indeed to be considered as an arsenal of democratic freedom within our society, was instilled within us during our two years of training and orientation. However, words always connote beautiful thoughts or ideas, yet it is action that solidly enforces REALITYo It was interesting to note the following in Vol. 14, No. 1, 2, 3, issue of "Feliciter". Library Associations around the world, including the Canadian Library Association, sent letters of protest, through diploma.tic channels, regarding the occupation of the State Library of Czechoslovakia and the obstruction of all activity by the occupation of the UoSaSoR. The protest was effective and the library was permitted to resume occupations. --C. E. ~ Mrs. Dorothy Reid has accomplished another amazing feat! Our multi-talented story-teller has her Tales of Nanabozho on record. We all know that her book won an award for Book of the Year for Children presented by the CLA. This recording is produced by the Provincial Library Service. Congradulations! ~ The Library Technology Department is pleased to announce that Mrs. Dorothy Reid has established "The Nanabozho Bursary", for the amount of $100.00 to be paid at the conclusion of the first year to a successful student and to one who is in finaf1cial need. �ENROLEMENT THIS YE.AR Many of you in the Region are acquainted with our Second year Students so you are aware through their Practice Work training at the local libraries that there are 21 females in the class that will be graduating this May. HOWEVER, a few words should be said about our new class of students. There"are 22 enrolled at present. 8 are from Port Arthur 4 are from Fort William OTHERS hail from-----------London Hunta Port Elgin Fergus Dundas ONTARIO Richmond Hill Fort Frances Hillsport Smooth Rock Falls and one young lady is from Mt. Ste. Hiliare, Quebec~ This distribution is quite good as there a.re six other programs in Ontario, 3 or 4 in Quebec and one in British Columbia as well as one in Alberta. It may interest you to know that in Ontario, this school is so far the ONLY one certified by the Minister of Education, as the following regulation stipulates. (OLR, Dec. 1968, p. 222) = GRADUATES FROM THE LAKEHEAD SCHOOL OF LIBRARY TECHNOLOGY MAY BE ISSUED A CERTIFICATE 2 UPON COMPLETION OF SIX MONTHS, CONTINUOUS SATISFACTORY SERVICE IN A LIBRARY, TO BE CERTIFIED BY A QUALIFIED CHIEF LIBRARIAN OR REGIONAL DIRECTOR. ~ ~ SPOTLIGHT Mrs. Debby Krupa, assistant to the Childr1:ll 1 s Librarian, Miss Betsy English, at the Fort William Public Library, have embarked upon a new program--Puppet shows. Miss English's groups of children will present Tom Sawyer and the Princess and the pea whereas Debby's groups will present The Emperor's new clothes and Cinderella. Debby also goes out to the Public Schools on Tuesday afternoons and Wednesday mornings to tell all school cbildren about the Fort William Children's DepartmEnt and its services. Zori, has formed a Library Club this *September at the Atikokan High School. How about a report about members----Kind, Sweet Zori--we ·want to know????~ This club has extended an invitation to Charlotte to speak about the Library Technology Program on February 28. • Interest has been shown about our Program as Charlotte has already spoken to three Guidance classes at Selkirk High School. * Barbara Davison moved to Kingston in July and now has written that she and the family are happily settled Although Barbara. is not working at present, we hope that she wi.11 send in contributions for our Newsletter. We all know that her ideas were always good ones after our two years of studying with her. In addition, have a wonderful time in England this spring., Barb., just think you might even visit the British Museum--then you can report to us~ o Library technologists may work for CUSO. A letter was received at the end of January which stated that we are needed .. Wonderful isn't it???? Information can be obtained through the local Committee at the Lakehead. TRAVEL AND HELP OTHERS THEREBY HELPING YOURSELF. �Miss Iris Conchie 341 Nortn Brodie Street FORT WILLIAM, Ontario Miss Charlotte Elwert 282 Pearl Street - Apt. 3 PORT ARTH1.JR, Ontario Mrs. Helen Fowler (Fedor) 131 Autumnwood Drive PORT ARTHUR, Ontario 623-0651 Northwestern Regional Library System 344-7877 Department of Library Technology, L.U. 345-2416 Northwestern Regional System 623-6701 Mrs. Agnes Harris 1414 Isabella Street FORT WILLIAM, Ontario Confederation College Library Mrs. R. Ke:cr ( Shirley Hall) 2225 West Eigth Ave., 212 v1mc0UVER ~9' B. C. McGee High School Library, Vancouver Mrs. Debby Krupa (Bryant) 609 Avondale Place FORT WILLIAM, Ontario :fort William Public Library Miss Carol Lee Park 60 Gordon Avenue PORT ARTHUR, Ontario Port Arthur Public Library Miss Zori Podbrscek c/o General Delivery ATIKOKAN, Ontario Atikokan High School Library Mrs. Ruth RoseP~eld (Murdoch) 241 Redpath Avt. ~, Apt. 604 TORQNTO, Ontario Toronto Public Library Branch (Gerrard) Miss Deirdre Smythe 12 Prospect Ave. (Basement) PORT ARTHUR, Ontario Lakehead University Library Mrs. Denise Watson (Humphrey) 11 Ruddington Drive, Apt. 931 WILLOWDALE, Ontario c/o Scarborough Public Library Mrs. Joan Zachary (Perry) 363 Brock Street FORT WILLIAM, Ontario Fort William Public Library .L �e l!A.PPmESS IS ........................................................ . knowing a delightful young lady like Charlotte. knowing her friend Zori. Frustration is getting up enough courage to ask for Sex and the teenage revolution. Frustration is finding that it is outo going to the library every night not in the pursuit of knowled 5e but in the pursuit of that cute little blonde page. reading Winnie the Pooh in the stacks during your lunch hour. is n---ing in the stacks standing under the sign SILENCE. is taking your little brother to Story Hour. is being on the reserve list for Brown's Sex and the single girl. Frustration comes after reading it when one decides that the title was very misleading. is paying ten ~ents for a now library card. Frustration comes a week later when the lady at the Circ. Desk calls to tell you that Mr. :Honest Citizen has returned the lost card. DO YOU OTHER BRIGHTLIGHTS WANT TO SHARE YOUR HUMOUR WITH US???????? MAY I MAKE A SUGGESTION? For the next issue, send your contributions to the following address: Library Technology Dept. LAUGH-IN, c/o Good Hunour, Lakehead University, PORT .P.RTHUR, Ontario . , ' �A REPORT ON BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Tle Upon looking at the revised L~brary Technology Program, you will soon not ice that all first year students are taking a NEW course which was added to our program in September 1968--------Business Administration Tle. The sessional lecturer is Mr. M. Zobata.r, Accountant at Abitibi. This is a tri-p~t course. Each part is simply an introduction to one of the specialized areas of Business Administration, in essence, a survey of concepts and techniques. Up until the month of December, the students have lectures in Data Processing. An outline of this introduction is as follows: Def in.it ions Basic Operations Manual & Mechanical methods punched cards p~per tape computer methods systems development decision tables progra.nnne flow charts computer demonstrations typical library 1applications This topic is dealt with according to the stages of mechanization since each level entails progressively greater proportions of machine work to puman effort. So a study of the type of equipment now available for processing dat~an be grouped into a look at Manual data processing, mechanical, punch card or paper tape and computer data processing equipment o You see, the different kinds of equipment related to human effort involved often must be considered in choosing a system which best suits a particular institution or operation. A natural reaction of yours may be to question the necessity of such a course as this in our Library Technology program, however we are all aware that the computer is indeed the most powerful and flexible tool available to mankind. No doubt, the computer will touch man everywhere and in every way~ Technol9gists should be AWARE of progressive steps being made in library service. Automation in libraries is a well discussed topic in the "Professi~:mal literature." Let's face it------Technologists should be more knowledgeable about this subject. For all libraries themselves as information and intermedia centers are feeling the effects of the informational '. explosion and technological changes which may be termed as the second Industrial Rovolutiono The ultimate, we conceive today, in automatic data processing systems is to have all files in ma.chine readable form available for direct access and updating on a real time basis o The students will consider the "How" "Why" and "importance of" computers in library operations. Consider the following: a central processing unit can contain master files as a computer can be programmed for a certain operation. ieo Upd~ting files budget re-ordering materials serials - in Periodicals, possible library operations for a computer are purchase, payments, scheduling for the bindery, shipments, printed lists, subscription renewals, inventory. �BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Tle In Reference work, a regional network is possible in future, co-operation between many libraries and resource , centers. Interest profiles of people r doing research may be };: .~pt, instructions for search among special materials (held in logic area) Memory-tr~nsferred to ma.chine readable form on cards, print out can contain citations of current materials valuable to those engaged.in research. There are many other areas where a computer system could assist. As a follow-up, students will-be given additional lectures about the computer in a library in the Communications course. Reference is made to MARC, MEDLARS, CBIP, and CHEM ABSTRAC'rS ( the latter two are computer produced). In essence, this introduction in Data Processing is part of each Lib. Technology student's Orientation as a technologist must be familiar with the whole aspect of library service. The second part of the course deals with an introduction to Accounting principles. Lectures deal with the discussion of the necessity for accounts, history of the development of business transactions, credit and debit, and of course, time is devoted to studying specialized accountso Short practice sessions in drawing up journal entries and trial balances completed the last few weeks of the study. Human Relations study completes the three topic course. Mr. A. Seuret of the department of Business Administration is the Sessional lecturer. The emphasis is placed on "groups" and upon the "individual" making up these groups. The questions: "What does each individual bring to his job and working environment?" and "What does the job give in turn to the individual concerned?" a.re discussed and studied thoroughly. Factors affecting the individual at work---impersonal influences, social and cultural, interaction and activity from others, and the interaction and activities to others, a.re looked at via case studies of certain Human Relations situations. All in all, this course is very valuable for a Library Technologist!! NEWS NEWS NEWS News about PROFESSORS X )E )( )()OE X X Maynard and Nancy Bjorgo will be going abroad for six weeks from July 2 to August 14. They are planning to spend one week in swinging London and also on in Paris o Ireland will capture their fantasy for four weeks as Nancy and Maynard plan to tour the Western area via bicycles!!! Our "speculated" Sept. Newsletter should carry a stimulating "Reflections of our trip" by who(who-M & N) I am sure that Mr. B. will bring back a great deal of information • which he will no doubt impart to students in his History of Libraries class next year o o �NEWS NEWS NEWS NEWS STUDENTS Bookmobile Trips : Reports by Susan Willia.ms and Mary Nation Jim Pounder and I ler.t Monday morning January 27 in the Bookmobile for a week lOng exchange trip. Our first stop was the community of Seine River where we exchanged books with an Indian Schoo 1.. The first two nights were spent in Fort Frnaces. Wednesday morning we left for Rainy River stopping at schools on the way exchanging 50 - 300 books at each stop. Nestor Falls was our stop for Thursday night and Friday we returned to Fort Frances. All the way along our trip we were enthusiastically received by the children and made welcome in their homes. -- s. w. )< X )( X )( )( >EX X )( )( X )( )( XX The bookmobile trip in January was an experience I will never forget. My feet were cold much of the time but whereever we visited we were enthusiastically welcomed by the adults and. children. The libraries were located in one room JYH.an Reserve schools and new Centennial buildings (Atikokan ~ Emo) in Comminity· Centers (Rainy River) and in a High School (Rainy River). The bookmobile, a converted. school bus was stocked with 2,000 books, 100 records, half a dozen sculptures and a dozen pictures. At each stop we exchanged 50 to 300 books and a few of the other materials. The largest library, at Fort Frances, took the longest time as it needed. 700 books. We occupied the evening hours by reading or watching television or sleeping. The W8rk involved moving piles of books in fairly cold weather made us quite tired at times! However by the end of the week, we were accustomed to it ane only the -22 temperature in Fort Frances on our last morning really "frosted" us. A worthwhile trip that I only wish I co:uld repeat! -- m. n. )( )( )( )( )( )( )( )( )( )( )( )( )( )( )()( YEARBOOK PROGRESS REPORT 1969 will see the second class of Library Technologists graduate and as well the production of the second Yearbook of the Library Technology graduating class. 'This year's Committee consists of Lynda Barker, Nancy Marks and Lois Pentney. Students have had their pictures taken by Pouncy's Stud.i9. By the end of this month, the cuts will be received and once all the text has been compiled, groups of students will descend upon the Graphic Arts Department at the Northwestern Regional Library tu burn the plates and to embark upon a learning experience under the supervision of a very good instructor, Mr. George Sproule (who is also a very patient man, as I was one of the graduates that worked with him last year). �NEWS ,JDYO"WS NEWS STUJ.IDENTS Sleigfa Ricle @n Janl:llaxy 11, 1969, first a~id seco:m-d year stua.entg had a sleiglil rii~ and party. T'he sleigh ride was helm at Centennial Park wb.Gr~: we ren:te!ft tw0 sleighs.. Th-e rites were eventful to say the lea8t " Stu<lients aN<ii theil? 4!ates' ~ Mr. Sharp and Mr. Su<dar were pushe-fi off' the sleighs an€!. made to run to catch up. Rarely did a sleigh r:;top for slowpokes: Mr. Sudar lost his pipe but regained it_ when one of Mu.e ki0.s f0~nd it buriesii in the snow. We had one unfortunate accident when a second year stu0.ent had her foot run over, but this however did not stop her from attending the party which followed at Bjorgo' s house o There, the barn had been cleaned out for our use. There was hay on the. floor and logs on which we could rest our bones. The wooca stove that we lit for heating purposes caught fire and so did Mr. Sharp's pants: All but six stalwart students am1 their dates retired to the house where Nancy Bjorgo had hot cinnamon buns as well as our hot dogs, Qonuts anG hot chocolate reaQyo T'he 12 from the barn soon joined the group as it was rather cool out there. A while later some courageous aQ'Venti1rers trie\jl out the tobogganing across the roaa. What a hill!!! Anyone \.rho wer,it el.own looketil as if may not retur-n. Tryi,nr: to climb IDack up the hill was really a challenge! ·rf a step was taken -w-11.ere the possessor tf t 'b e leg tdhl. not sink to the waist, I per.s olilally wi!.l carry t.,hat person. up the hi.'.H. So was oar P.aRi'"~ Y! ~ Wery nice amd ~ wet!! ...,_ j " }3;., "Cnristma.s G€t..-!T0gether" A me-e ting was planE.ea f0r ghe evening of January ~, Mrs. ]Debby Krupa for the grads.. Shirley had the furthest to come home for Christmas - all the way from Vancouver. She arrived in the La.kehea.~ on December 2oth and we were all very happy to learn that she would be here with us for the meeting. Helen, Debby, Deirdre, Shirley a.nd Charlotte met. for an ev-ening of friendly chatter, discussion about our jobs, and of course the Newsletter, but this so.called. "Scheduled Meeting 11 provided us with an opportunity to see each other again - believe it or not, there are those of us although remaining in the La.kehead have not aeen each other again since graduation!!! lJnfortunately the "15" were not there as Denis·e and Ruth were in Toronto, others were ill and still others had previous engagements or comm.itmentso Later in the evening we devoted a short time to selecting a title for the Newsletter, (those not present were asked to vote on their preference for a title by letter) an€!. discussion considered Circulation, publication policies as well as long range goals. At this time we would like to thank Debby for the use of her house for a meeting place and to say a simple "thanks" to you for everything Debby and what a hostess you are! 1969, at the home 0f I,.. �This rock within the sea; a heritage lost by Farley Mowat. Photography by John De Visser. Boston: Little, Brown & Co., $12.50. The large island of Newfoundland, with an area of 42, 735 square miles and population of 500,000 provided the Jublect of study for the perceptive, talented Canadian author, Farley Mowat. His text deals with the history of the island; in essence, a perceptive account of trie way of life of its inhabitants and the rare qualities that these people possess. Their way of life i.P controlled and profoundly affected by the sea. A penetrating p 01 t rayal of this concept is relat e · a j_; Mowat writes about the inhabitants of the outposts on the Sou~.l'n,ri?st Coast. For them, their world and existance is the sea. 11 For those who lived by it and upon it, the sea is the ultimate reality in their existance. They accept it as their master, for they know that they will never master it. ThP. cea is there. It is their way of life: it gives them life and somethimes, in its moments of fury, it gives them death. They do not struggle against its imponderaple stre ngth, nor do they stand in braggart's opposition to its powers." Mowat I s nostalgic record of a way of life is complimented by the truly magnificant photography of John De Visser. Each photog~aph captures the scenes of this way of life which Mowat has descrfoed so intensely in words. The message and feeling in E~act·._ of their arts and forms of expression is readily apparent and 1J.nderstood. This way of life i s passing--but why--Mowat attributes this threat to the arrival of King Joey. "The day that Smallwood ca.me to i;:ower, the continuity and evq1.-·1tion of the Newfoundlan d way of life was disrupted, probably forE:ve.r ... Progress dictated t hat the men of the sea forswear their ancient ways of life and move, as rootless migrants, to the alien mileau of industrial and mining towns. ' 1 Now centralization is the goal of the government. This planned process accompanied by financial assistance to people in small villages has as its goal, the movement of these people to larger canters which in turn form new economic and social unit.: . But, the unity and secu.rity experienced in the outports can never be foun1 in these large industrial towns~ The poignancy of the plight of these people is well expressed by a young Newfoundlander herself: "The wor;:;test thing I know is that we have got t·o go away. I watches the gulls following the boats out there and I wishes I was a gull sometime s , because nobody makes them go away from where they belongs. T.1ose fulls are some lucky~ They ca.n stay and live in Bergeo until they dies. It won't be very long before they's nobody here exce~t the gulls at all~ " �*SPECIAL * ANNOUNCEMENT *xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx~ ANNOUNCINGXXXXXXXXXXXTechnicians in Reference Servic~---another view by MAYNARD BJORGO--in Canadian Library, v. 26 No. 1 January-February 1969. May a suggestion be made--- Grads--Read this article about Mr. Bjorgo's speculations about the value of a Library Technician in Reference Service, as a member of the team and as an "ally of the experienced librarian." COMMENTS'l??'l'l??'l How about an answer or a comment from any of you involved in Reference work----Joan?'l???? TO ALL X >< X >EX X X >< XX X WE WOULD APPRECIATE YOUR COMMENTS ABOUT THIS FIRST ISSUE OF OUR NEWSLETTER. *----* Charlotte Elwert OVERALL CO-ORDINATOR CONTRIBlJrORS TO THIS FEBRUARY I s s u E GRADS Agnes Harris & Zori Podbrscek (Ideas and suggestions for set-up) Charlotte Elwert(Book Review Report on Business Admin. Cover Design) POTENTIAL GRADS Lynda Barker Mary-Lou Di Giacomo Janet Hebditch & Yearbook Report Design and Typing Sleigh Ride Report Lorna Hill Mary Nation ' & Susan Williams / Bookmobile'- Reports � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Lakehead University Collection Description An account of the resource Photographs from Lakehead University's history: people, events, and campus. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Technology Tidings 1969 Subject The topic of the resource Universities Description An account of the resource Technology Tidings, publication of Library Technology at Lakehead University. Newsletter for graduates of the programme. Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Lakehead University Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1969 Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource PDF Language A language of the resource English Type The nature or genre of the resource Text Coverage The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant Canada - Ontario - Port Arthur Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context U7b https://digitalcollections.lakeheadu.ca/files/original/71ac477e706daf8e3bdb6e521992a6e2.pdf 6987e19718e04e5ea64182d9fa29684c PDF Text Text C 1ffi HR. ][IE 1P' 'I[' (0) 'Il' 1HI.IE $ JE: Im"A 'lr .IE «» 1P' IL.AJK.EIIII.IE A.1ID UIJ:Im" IIWlE liL$ II 1r W cc:@:im- <em: moo nooG 'Il' 1HIE IL. AJK..IE 1HI.IE.A\. ID> lIDOOIIWlE ffi.$ II'Il' W m.m; W 1I1E Wl �The Lakehead University Review was conceived some five months ago by the authors of this brief. We reflected on the apparent lack of success of previous attempts to produce a journal 9 the then Chairman of the Publications Committee having deemed the task "impossible". We further reflected on the somewhat embarrassing situation created by the fact that the students had taken the initiative in this field by publishing the widely-circulated Essays from Lakehead. By mid-August we had decided that the publication ( of a scholarly journal at Lakehead University would not be impossible. We agreed that in the short~run, the Review would contribute to the academic life of the University and the intellectual development of t he area; in the long-run, it could take its place among the major Canadian interdisciplinary reviews o Having decided that the idea was academically feasible 9 we then had informal discussions with a commercial printer to determine the approximate cost of printing and binding a journal of some one hundred pages. With this data 9 we prepared a preliminary budget which we then presented to the President who encouraged us to pursue the idea even further. �-2- We decided not to involve the University officially until we were certain that the content of the first number would warrant Senate endorsement. Therefore, we decided to undertake the preparation of the Review independent! y with the intention that when the first number was ready to go to press, we would seek the support of the University by requesting that the Senate select an editorial board. We also decided that the Review should be a biannual publication. With a target date of March, 1968 (the second number to appear in October, 1968) in mind, it seemed pointless ( to invite manuscripts from the entire faculty of the University. Firstly, many were not available in the late summer and were not expected back on campus until mid-September. Secondly, we felt that many potential contributers would be unwilling to devote time and energy to preparing a scholarly paper for a journal which at this stage existed only in our minds. Thirdly, if we were to adhere to the somewhat strict timetable imposed by the printer, we needed to know who was willing to contribute for the first number and provide them with rather exacting deadlines. With this in mind, we approached several members of the faculty whom we knew had recently completed some research ( �-3- and discussed with them the idea of publishing their results in the Review. We were further encouraged by the enthusiasm with which the idea was received, and we greatly appreciate the efforts put forth by these persons on such short notice. As a result, we now feel that we have assembled an excellent initial number, one which will undoubtedly set the standard for future issues. The contents of this number would include the following articles: Elizabeth Arthur - The Landing and the Plot John G. Rideout - Shelley's Image of Methe r and Child ( Lewis Smith - The Indian and Negro in Mark Twain: Stereotype or Reality') Douglas R. Lindsay - Migration and Persistence of Certain Arctic-Alpine Plants in the Lake Superior Region of Ontario George J. Merrill - The Pre-Armada Years: Sentiment Literature of Patriotic We also contacted numerous publishing companies and invited them to contribute books for review. The book review section will include: T. B. Miller - Canada -- Unity in Diversity, by P. G. Cornell et al P. G. Panikar - Economic History of Europe, by M. Postan �-4- A. Alexander - 1867: Disraeli, Gladstone and Revolution, by Maurice Cowling E. Eager - Mitch Hepburn, by Neil McKentey I. G. Davies - Pullman - an Experiment in Industrial Order and Community Planning, by Stanley Buder A. 0. Menhart - Cry Ararat, by P. K. Page G. J. Merrill - Fools of Time, by Northrop Frye Initially we had intended to have this first number published at Lakehead University, but now that the contents have been assembled and negotiations with the printer completed, we sincerely feel that it is worthy of publication~ Lakehead University. We now solicit the support of the Senate of Lakehead University for this undertaking. In addition, as we should like to send out requests for manuscripts for the second number to all faculty in the very near future, we ask that the Senate appoint an Editorial Board to review the quality of future submissions to ensure t hat standards remain high. Respectfully submitted, A. ALEXANDER. J. D. LEACH. ****************************************************************** � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Lakehead University Collection Description An account of the resource Photographs from Lakehead University's history: people, events, and campus. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource A Brief to the Senate of Lakehead University Concerning the Lakehead University Review Subject The topic of the resource Universities Description An account of the resource Brief by Alan Alexander and James D. Leach regarding the Lakehead University Review, an academic journal that they hope to establish with the formal support of Lakehead University. Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Lakehead University Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1967 Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource PDF Language A language of the resource English Type The nature or genre of the resource Text Coverage The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant Canada - Ontario - Port Arthur https://digitalcollections.lakeheadu.ca/files/original/62782459666b5c4ae20754c77e37a4db.pdf 2c9f7229de35abbfa8e8c89a05ed2951 PDF Text Text REPORT TO THE LAKEHEAD COLLEGE OF ARTS, SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY TAYLOR, LIEBERFELD AND HELDMAN (CANADA) NEW YORK LIMITED TORONTO JULY 1963 �} REPORT TO THE LAKEHEAD COLLEGE OF ARTS, SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY 1 1:AYLOR, LIEBERFELD AND HELDMAN ( CANADA) LIMITED NEW YORK TORONTO JULY 1963 �TABLE OF CONTENTS Page CHAPTER 1 A. INTRODUCTION AND SUMMARY 3 Summary of Findings and Recommendations 3 1. Enrollment 3 2. Staff 4 3. Net Area Requirements 4 L. 5 Building Program Requirements and Priorities 5. The Master Plan 6 6. 7 College Finances B. Organization of the Report 8 C. A Note on the Enrollment Targets 9 CHAPTER 2 ENROLLMENT: 17 DEVEIDPMENT PATTERN A. Higher Education in Ontario 17 B. Enrollment in Post-Secondary Education 20 C. Enrollment at Lakehead College 29 CHAPTER 3 INSTRUCTIONAL ACTIVITY AT ENROLLMENTS OF Loo, 700 1200 STUDENTS AND 42 A. Distribution of Enrollment by Study Program L2 B. Distribution of Enrollment by Class Year Level 43 C. Instructional Workloads 47 1. University Division, Arts Program 49 2. University Division, Applied Science Program 58 3. Technology Division 61 iii �Page L. Nursing Program and Univarsity Division Part-Time Programs 63 D. Instructural Workloads: E. Students in Residence CHAPrER L Summary 65 69 TEACHING STATION REQUIREMENTS: CLASSROOMS AND TEACHING LABJRATORIES Instructional Load: B. Teaching Station Requirements 77 C. Summary Bo 5 82 STAFF REQUIREMENTS A. Faculty Requirements 82 B. Total Staff Requirements 88 CHAPTER 6 A. B. iv 73 A. CHAPTER Clock Hours 73 ACADEMIC SPACE REQUIREMENTS 90 Classroom-Type Space 90 1. Classroom Capacity Distribution 90 2. Space Standards for Classrooms and Seminars 91 Departmental Space 93 1. Department of Biology 95 2. Department of Chemistry 95 3. Department of Physics 98 L. Department of Psychology 98 5. 98 Interdepartmental Science Facilities �Page 6. Miscellaneous Laboratories and Special Purpose Areas 102 7. Summary lOL 8. Space Standards for laboratories, Research Space and Offices CHAPTER 7 A. SPACE REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-ACADEMIC ACTIVITIES lOL 108 Administrative Office Space 108 1. Office of the Principal 112 2. Office of the Dean of Arts 112 3. Office of the Dean of Science and Te chno logy 112 L. Office of the Dean of Students 112 5. Office of the Registrar 113 6. Office of the Director of Admissions 113 7. Office of the Comptroller 113 8. Office of the Director of Development and Public Relations 11L 9. Administrative Service Unit llL Miscellaneous Facilities llL 10. B. Food Service Facilities 115 C. Library 117 D. Physical Education and General Assembly 123 E. Physical Plant Administration and Maintenance 127 F. Residential Facilities 130 G. University Centre Facilities 130 H. Summary 13L 1. 13L 700- and 1200-Student Enrollment Levels V �Page 2. CHAPTER 8 13L a. Administrative Office Space 13L b. Food Service 136 c. Library 136 d. Physical Education and Public Assembly 136 e. Physical Plant Administration and Maintenance 136 f. Residential Facilities 137 g. University Centre Facilities 137 h. Summary 137 BUILDING PROGRAMS AND OCCUPANCY PATTERNS 138 A. General 138 B. Building Program -- 1200-Student Enrollment Level 1Lo 1. Academic and Administrative Office Space 1Lo 2. Library 1L5 3. University Centre 1L7 L. Gymnasium 1L9 C. D. vi LOO-Student Enrollment Level 5. Maintenance Building 150 Building Program -- 700-Student Enrollment Level 151 1. Academic and Administrative Office Space 151 2. Library 151 3. Other Buildings 153 Building Program -- LOO-Student Enrollment Level 153 1. Academic and Administrative Office Space 153 2. Other Buildings 161 �Page E. Enrollment Beyond 1200 Students 161 F. Alterations 163 CHAPTER 9 THE MASTER PLAN 187 A. Existing Conditions 187 B. Land Use Requirements 190 1. Parking Areas 190 2. Playing Fields 192 c. 3. Miscellaneous Land Use 192 L. Summary 193 The Master Plan 193 1. Circulation Patterns 195 2. The Master Plan 197 3. Future Expansion 200 L. Master Plan Delineation 201 CHAPTER 10 INSTITUTIONAL FINANCES 202 A. Expenditures and Revenues 202 B. Capital Costs and Phasing of Construction 217 1. Procedure 217 2. Phasing and Priorities 223 3. Site Development 225 L. Utilities 225 APPENDIX A ENROLLMENT 230 vii �Page APPENDIX B INSTRUCTIONAL ACTIVITY STRUCTURE 248 APPENDIX C STAFF REQUIREMENTS 260 APPENDIX D EXISTING SPACE AND ROOM UTILIZATION 264 APPENDIX E INSTITUTIONAL FINANCE 267 BIBLIOGRAPHY 275 MASTER PLAN Envelope at· back of volume viii �LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS Page Abbreviations and Symbols Used in the Drawings 169 Science and Technology, Ground Floor 171 Science and Technology, Basement and Second Floors 173 University Centre, Basement 17L University Centre, Ground Floor 175 University Centre, Second Floor 176 Academic Building, Basement 178 Academic Building, Ground Floor 179 Academic Building, Second Floor 180 Academic Building, Third Floor 181 Administrative Wing (700 Enrollment Level), Ground, Second and Third Floors 182 Gymnasium, Basement and Ground Floors 183 Library, Ground and Second Floors 18L Library (700 and 1200 Enrollment Levels), Lower Level 185 ix �Page Maintenance Building Master Plan X 186 Envelope at back of volume �LIST OF PLATES Page 1. Lakehead College: Projected Enrollment and Gross Area of Construction; 1961-62 to 1973-?L. 2. 12 Planning Standards and Unit Area Allocations, Classrooms and Seminar-Conference Rooms 94 xi �LIST OF TABIES 1-1. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Selected Indicators of Growth, 1961-62 to Alternate Target Enrollments 2-1. Canada and Ontario: Selected Statistical Indicators of Populations and Undergraduate Enrollment in Colleges and Universities, Canada and Ontario, Selected Years, 1951 to 1971 2-2. Ontario: 19 Secondary School Enrollment, Total and Grade 13, Selected Years, 1951 to 1970 2-3. Ontario: 22 Secondary School Retirements to Further Education, 23 1951-61 2-~. Ontario and Lakehead Region: Secondary School Retirements to Further Education, 1961 2-5. Ontario: 2~ Indexes of Secondary School Grade 13 Enrollment and Retirements to Selected Categories of Post-Secondary 26 Education, Selected years, 1951-52 to 1970-71 2-6. Canada: Civilian Labor Force, Total and Professional 28 Workers; Selected Years, 1931 to 1971 2-7. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Full- Time Enrollment, by Division, 1952-53 to 1962-63 2-8. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: 30 Full- Time and Part-Time Enrollment, by Division, 1952-53 to 1962-63 2-9. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Planning Parameters for Converting First-Year Enrollment to Total Full-Time Enrollment Estimates, by Study Program xii 31 �2-10. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Projection of Enrollment, by Division and Program, Selected Years, 1961-62 to 1975-76 2-11. 3-1. 3-2. 3-3. 3-L. 3-5. 3-6. 35 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Projection of Enrollment, by Program, 1961-62 to 1975-76 39 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Distribution of Enrollment at Alternate Target Enrollments, by Program LL Ontario: Typical Distributions of Enrollment in Ontario Post-Secondary Education Programs by Study Program and Year Level L6 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Projected Distribution of Full-Time Enrollment in University and Technology Divisions at Alternate Target Enrollments, by Study Program and Year Level L8 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Standardized Enrollment Distribution for University Division Baccalaureate Degree Programs in Arts and Sciences, by Program and Year Level 51 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Hypothetical Distribution of Enrollment in University Division Arts Program at Alternate Target Enrollments, by Degree Program and Year Level 52 Ontario: Weekly Clock Hours of Meeting Required in University Baccalaureate Degree Programs in Arts and Science, by Program and Year Level 55 xiii �3-7. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Hypothetical Student Period Structure in University Division Arts Program at Alternate Target Enrollments, by Degree Program, Year Level and Type of Meeting 56 3-8. Ontario: Weekly Clock Hours of Meeting Required in University Baccalaureate Degree Programs in Applied Science at Selected Institutions, by Year Level and Type of Meeting 3-9. Lakehead College of Arts, Science . and Technology: Hypothetical Distribution of Enrollment and Student Period Structure in University Division Applied Science Program at Target Enrollments of Loo, 700 and 1200 Students, by Year Level 3-10. 3-12. 3-13. 700 and 1200 Students, by Program and Year Level 62 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Hypothetical Student Period Structure in Nurses' Program and University Division Part-Time Students' Program at Alternate Target Enrollments, by Type of Meeting 6L Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Hypothetical Student Period Structure at Target Enrollment of Loo Students, by Year Level and Type of Meeting 66 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Hypothetical Student Period Structure at Target Enrollment of 700 Students, by Year Level and Type of Meeting xiv 60 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Hypothetical Distribution of Enrollment and Student Period Structure in Technology Division at Target Enrollments of Loo, 3-11. 59 �Page 3-1.L. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Hypothetical Student Period Structure at Target Enrollment of 1200 Students, by Year Level and Type of Meeting 3-15. Ontario Universities: 3-16. L-1. Home Addresses of Freshmen Enrolled in October, 1961 71 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Requirements for Residential Accommodation at Alternate Target 72 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Planning Parameters for Typical Sizes of Instructional Meeting Groups in Lecture-Classroom and Laboratory Meetings, by Year Level L-2. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: 5-1. 5-2. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: 78 Classroom and Laboratory Teaching Station Requirements at Alternate Target Enrollments 81 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Alternate Estimates of Faculty Requirements at Alternate Target Enrollments 86 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Faculty Requirements at Alternate Target Enrollments, by Rank 5-3. 76 Estimated Clock-Hour Instructional Workload per Week at Alternate Target Enrollments, by Type of Meeting and Year Level L-3. 68 87 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Hypothetical Structure of Total Staff Requirements at Alternate Target Enrollments xv �Page 6-1. 6-2. 6-3. 6-L. 6-5. 6-6. 6-7. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Requirements for Classroom-Type Rooms Space Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Requirements for the Department of Biology Space Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Requirements for the Department of Chemistry Space Lake head College of Arts, Science and Technology: Requirements for the Department of Physics Space Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Requirements for the Department of Psychology Space 92 96 97 99 100 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Space Requirements for Interdepartmental Science Facilities Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Space Requirements for Miscellaneous Laboratories and Special 103 Purpose Areas 6-8. 6-9. 7-1. 7-2. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: of Academic Space Requirements Summary 105 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Academic Space Required at the LOO-Student Enrollment Level 106 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Space Requirements for Administrative Offices and Related Space 109 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Requirements for Food Service Facilities xvi 101 Space 116 �Page 7-3. United States: Data on Selected College and University 118 Libraries, 1960-61; Enrollment under 1000 Students 7-L. United States and Canada: Data on Selected College and University Libraries, 1960-61 Enrollment over 1000 Students 7-5. 7-6. 7-7. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Growth of the Library Collection Estimated La.kehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Requirements for the Library Space 7-10. 7-11. 8-1. 8-2. 121 12L Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Space Requirements for Physical Education and General Assembly 7-8. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: 7-9. 120 126 Space Requirements for Physical Plant Administration and Maintenance 128 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Space Requirements for Student Residence, per 100 Students 131 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Requirements for University Centre Facilities Space 133 La.kehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Space Requirements for Non-Academic Facilities 135 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Summary of Net Area Requirements 139 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Distribution of Classroom Space by Building at 1200Student Enrollment xvii �8-3. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Distribution of Classroom Space by Building at 700-· Student Enrollment 8-L. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Distribution of Classroom Space by Building; LOOStudent Enrollment 8-5. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Distribution of Faculty Office Space by Building at LOO-, 700-, and 1200-Student Enrollment Levels 8-6. 8-7. 8-8. 8-9. 9-1. Space Requirements for a New Academic Building 157 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Space Requirements for an Addition to the Science and Technology Building 158 . Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Occupancy Characteristics of Existing and Proposed Buildings, LOO-, 700- and 1200-Student Enrollment Levels 159 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Gross Area of Construction, Existing and Proposed 160 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: 191 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Approximate Requirements for Land Use, 1200-Student Enrollment Level, Excluding Residences xviii 156 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Requirements for Parking Area 9-2. 152 19L �10-1. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Summary of Expenditures, Fiscal Years 1958 to 1963 10-2. 203 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Summary of Revenues, Fiscal Years 1958 to 1963 20L 10-3. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Percentage Distribution of Expenditures Fiscal Years 1958 to 1963 10-L. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Percentage Distribution of Revenues, Fiscal Years 1958 to 1963 10-5. 206 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Expenditures per Full-Time Day Student Fiscal Years 1958 to 1963 10-6. 205 207 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Revenues per Full-Time Day Student, Fiscal Years 1958 to 1963 208 10-7. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Expenditures per Full-Time Student, by Major Expenditure, Category, Selected Years, 1957-58 to 1973-7L 10-8. 209 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Revenues per Full-Time Student, by Major Revenue Category, Selected Years, 1957-58 to 1973-7L 21L 10-9. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Estimated Faculty Salary Outlays at Alternate Target Enrollments, by Rank (in 1962 dollars) 215 xix �Page 10-10. 10-11. 10-12. xx Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Preliminary Budget Estimates for Site Development Work 218 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Preliminary Budget Estimate for Utilities Systems 219 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Schedule of Capital Development, Priority Phasing and Budget Outlays 220 �APPENDIX TABLES A-1. Canada and Ontario: Population, Total and 18-21 Years Age . 230 Group, Selected Years, 1941 to 1971 A-2. Canada and Ontario: Undergraduate University-Grade Enrollments, Fall Semester, Selected Years, 1944-45 to A-3. A-4. A-5. A-6. 1970-71 231 Canada: Undergraduate Enrollment, Total and Enrollment in Arts and Pure Science Programs, Selected Years, 1931 to 1962 232 Ontario: Undergraduate Enrollment, Total and Enrollment in Arts and Pure Science Programs, Selected Years,. 1931 · to 1962 233 Canada: Professional Workers, by Occupational Groups and Classes: Selected Years, 1931 to 1961 234 Canada: Indexes of Growth for Professional Workers, by Occupational Groups and Classes; Selected Years, 1931 to 1961 A-7. Ontario: Professional Workers, by Occupational Groups and Classes; Selected Years, 1931 to 1961 A-8. A-9. A-10. Ontario: 235 236 Indexes of Growth for Professional Workers, by Occupational Groups and Classes; Selected Years, 1931 to 1961 237 Canada and Ontario: Labor Force Post-Secondary School Educational Attainment, Grade 13 and Beyond, by Occupational Category, 1941 and 1951' 238 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Analysis of Enrollment Progression Pattern in University Division, 1952-53 to 1962-63 239 xxi �Page A-11. Canada: Total, Freshman and Non-Freshman Undergraduate EnrolJ.JTlent and Degrees Granted in Arts and Pure Science 240 Programs, 1952-53 to 1961-62 A-12. Ontario: Analysis of Enro11ment Distribution among First Three Year Levels in Faculties of Arts and Sciences at Selected Ontario Colleges and Universities, Selected Years A-13. 241 Ontario: Analysis of Enrollment Distribution between First and Second Year Levels in Faculties of Applied Science and Engineering at Selected antario Colleges and Universities, 242 Selected Years A-14. A-15. B-1. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Teclmology: Analysis of EnrolJ.JTlent Progression Pattern in Teclmology Division, 1952-53 to 1962-63 243 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Projection of Enrollment, by Division and Program, 1961-62 to 1975-76 244 Ontario and Lakehead Region: Attendance by Atkinson Students at First and Preliminary Years of Ontario Colleges and 248 Universities in 1956-57 B-2. Ontario and Lakehead Region: Attendance by Atkinson Students at Institutions of Further Education in 1956-57 B-3. University of Toronto: 249 Analysis of Relative Distribution of Course Registrations by students Enrolled in Arts and Sciences Programs in 1956-57 and 1960-61, by Division, by Year Level and by Type of Program B-4. Ontario: Distribution of Enrollment by Year Level at Selected Ontario Colleges and Universities, Selected Years and Study Programs xxii 250 252 �Page B-5. Ontario: Weekly Clock Hours of Meeting Required in University Baccalaureate Degree Programs in Arts and Sciences, by Program and Year Level B-6. C-1. C-2. 253 Ontario: Weekly Clock Hours of Meeting Required under Various Technology Programs at Selected Ontario Technological Institutes, by Year Level and Type of Meeting 254 Canada and Central Canada: Full-Time Students, Teaching Staff and Student/Staff Ratios, Based upon 17 Universities, Selected Years, 1951-52 to 1961-62 2(:[J Canada: Enrollment, Staff and Students per Staff Member in Technical Institutes, by Province, 1960-62 C-3. Canada: 261 Distribution of Full-Time Teaching Staff at Selected Institutions, by Rank, Selected Years, 1937-38 to 1961-62 D-1. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: 262 Summary of Net Space in Existing Buildings 264 D-2. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Scheduled Utilization of Classrooms and Laboratories, 9 A.M. to 4:30 P.M., Excluding Saturday, Fall, 1963 265 E-1. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Summary of Expenditures, Fiscal Years 1958 to 1963 E-2. E-3. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: of Revenues, Fiscal Years 1958 to 1963 Canada: 267 Summary 268 Gross National Product, Current and Constant Dollar Series; 1951 to 1962 269 xxiii �Page E-4. Canada: Growth Rates in Median Salaries of Full-Time Teaching Staffs, Based upon 12 Universities, All Ranks, 1951-52 to 1961-62 E-5. Canada and Central Canada: Median .Salaries of Full-Time Teaching Staffs Based upon 17 Universities, Selected Years, 1961-62 to 1973-74 xxiv 270 271 �REPORT TO THE LAKEHEAD COLLEGE OF ARTS,SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY �I •I I I I CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION AND SUMMARY In November 1962 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology retained Taylor, Lieberfeld and Heldman (Canada) Limited as Consultants to undertake a comprehensive study of institutional development. The Con- sultants' assignment included the presentation of analyses and recommendations concerning 1) physical plant requirements, 2) the disposition of facilities on the campus, 3) financial requirements for College operations and capital programs and 4) a development time-table and schedule of priorities. The recommendations were to be based on three projected enrollment targets stipulated by the College: 400, 700 and 1200 students. The initial phase of the study consisted of a field survey of existing facilities, interviews with officials of the College and the Lakehead community and the collection of data from local and other sources. Sub- sequently, corresponding to the progressive stages of the project, meetings were held at the College with members of the Board of Governors, the Principal and others. In April 1963 a preliminary report was submitted and in July the study was completed. A. Summary of Findings and Recommendations 1. Enrollment In order to fulfill the objectives of the assignment it was essential to determine the dates at which the selected enrollment targets would be attained. The study indicates that the full-time enrollment could reach the 400-student level in 1963-64, the 700-student level in 1966-67 and the (1 ,h •.l.!~4 I ~/lt\ 3 �1200-student level in 1973-74. Part-time student enrollment is also pro- jected. It is estimated that the Bachelor of Arts degree will be first awarded I '1G>S in June, 1966. At the 1200-student enrollment level 668 students will be in the Arts program of the University Division, 104 students will be in the first two years of an Applied Science degree program and 428 students will be in the Technology Division. The proportion of students in the Technology program is expected to decline from about 50 percent in 1961-62 to about 36 percent in 1973-74. 2. Staff The projection of the number of faculty at the College is an important element of the study. Expressed as full-time equivalents, at the 400-stu- dent enrolllTlent level 38 instructors will be required, at the 700-student level the total is 74 instructors and at the 1200-student enrollment level the total is 105 instructors. J. Net Area Requirementsa The net area requirements for all non-residential activities of the College for the three target enrollments are as follows: 400-student level, aNet area, sometimes termed useable area, may be defined as the gross area of a building less the sum of the space occupied by stairs, corridors, elevators, exterior and interior wall thiclmesses, toilets, mechanical equipment and janitorial space. 4 �77,725 square feet; 700-student level, 110,485 square feet; 1200-student level, 161,715. -square feet. The net square feet of non-residential space per student declines from over 300 square feet anticipated for Fall 1963 - to 194~ 156, and 135 square feet for the three projected enrollment levels. Thus, as the College grows, the physical plant will .be utilized with increasing efficiency. The existing academic building and University Centre will provide 94,540 net square feet in the fali of 1963. 4. Building Program Requirements and Priorities The College should anticipate the construction of 152,205 gross square feet of non-residential buildinga over the next decade. The principal items of this building program (expressed as gross area) are as follows: 1) a library of 36,300 square feet; 2) academic and administrative space of 67,030 square feet; 3) a gymnasium of 33,900 square feet; 4) a maintenance building of 12,800 square feet. A wing should be added to the existing academic building in 1964, and the library should be completed by September, 1965. A unit of the balance aResidential space has been considered separately from non-residential space throughout the report. A potential demand for residential space on the part of up to 25 percent of the students has been projected, For JOO students this would require 58,000 gross square feet, but construction of student residences is considered to be an option rather than a requirement. 5 �of the academic-administrative space, primarily for administrative offices , should be ready for the academic year 1965-66. The balance of the academic space may be constructed in one or two stages over the following few years. The gymnasium should be constructed at approximately the time the enrollment reaches 700 students, unless sufficient funds are available earlier. The maintenance building may be constructed in two stages, the first to be ready by 1966. Parallel to the construction of these buildings, other types of facilities will also be required. These will include roads, parking fields, playing fields, landscaping and utilities. A detailed listing of all proj- ect's is included in tabJes 10-10, 10-11, and 10-12. The projected building program envisages the existing academic building as a science and technology center and the projected academic building as the location of non-science facilities. 5. The Master Plan An important feature of the study is the master plana of the campus. This plan indicates the location and staging of building construction, the pattern of vehicular circulation, the disposition of parking fields and miscellaneous features of the site. Although the study quantifies develop- ment .only up to the 1200-student enrollment level, some indication is offered of the subsequent growth and location of facilities. aThe plan is located in a pocket at the end of this volume. 6 �The core of the campus is viewed as a group of interconnected academic facilities dominated by two proposed three-story buildings. 6. College Finances Operating costs of the College will expand during the interval under study. By 1973-74, when the 1200-student enrollment should be realized, costs per student will rise by 137 percent above the 1961-62 level. All components of cost will rise, but the largest increases can be expected _\ in instruction and administration, reflecting the ever~increasing compe: i- -~ 1 tion for talented human resources across the Canadian economy, Revenues must rise sufficiently to offset increased costs. Mv~I..J Student fees, which are now less than 30 percent of total revenues, are projected to increase by 142 percent over the 1961-62 per student receipts by the time the 1200-student enrollment is reached. This implies that revenues from grants must rise rapidly--by 120 percent on a per student basis. Grants will continue to represent the principal means for offsetting rising operating costs. No alternative is possible without increased revenues from private sources or student fees. The capital costs of the physical plant development aggregate $4,407,500 for a ten-year program, excluding student residences. costs a for the principal elements are: \-? The total project library, $1,043,cDO; academic and ~11 figures are in 1962 dollars. 7 �administrative office space $1,590,800a (to be built in three or four stages); gymnasium, $691,600; site development, $294,670 and utilities, $150,500. The last two figures each represent a group of projects, which are detailed in Chapter 10. B. Organization of the Report The first section of the report comprises Chapters 2, 3, 4 and 5. In these chapters a model is constructed of College activities that bear on the subsequent estimates of physical plant and financial requirements. Chapter 2 describes the projection of the enrollment at the College over the next 15 years, indicating the approximate points in time at which the three enrollment targets could be realized. The College is viewed as increasing its share of over-all participation in higher education in Ontario. The basic distribution of enrollment into the University and Tech- nology Divisions is indicated, as is the subdivision of the University component into an Arts program and an Applied Science program. The number of students in the nursing program and part-time students in the University Division are estimated separately. In Chapter 3 the instructional load characteristics of enrollment at the three target levels are elaborated. Class year distribution patterns are analyzed and the student period workload by class year and division is computed. In Chapter 4 these data are used to compute the clock-hour workload and the number of teaching stations required for lecture and laboratory course offerings. Chapter 5 utilizes the enroll- aThis figure excludes alterations, but includes an addition to the present academic building. 8 �ment data and the analysis of curricular patterns to estimate staff requirements at the three target enrollment levels. The second part of the report comprises Chapters 6, 7, 8 and~ which deal with physical plant. In Chapter 6 the teaching stations and staff require- ments are converted to a space program for academic activities. A space program for the College library is .: included in Chapter 7, which 'presents space programs for all non-academic requirements, including student residence. Chapter 8 allocates the space programs to existing and additionally required buildings. The need for alterations and additions is also con- sidered and schematic drawings are presented for all principal buildings. In Chapter 9 the analysis which forms the basis of the master plan is presented. The concluding section of the report, concerning College finances, is Chapter 10. The first part of the chapter describes the operating costs and revenues of the College during the planning interval. The second part presents cost estimates of the physical plant program, including priority schedules. A series of appendixes follows Chapter 10. These are organized to parallel the chapter organization and contain supporting statistical material. C. A Note on the Enrollment Targets Further reference must be made to the concept of three enrollment tar- gets and their use in this study. The selection of these targets as a 9 �framework for the preparation of forecasts, space programs and other data is useful in that it is possible to describe and compare different stages in the growth of the College in consistent terms. Nevertheless, in coor- dinating the building program with the selected targets, certain anomalies arise. Essentially, this is due to the fact that enrolllTlent growth may be thought of as a continuum while construction is a series of steps which are largely discontinuous in character. For example, at the 400-student enrollment level the analysis of enrolllTlent, curriculum and staff is selfcontained and complete. But a building program for this level as an in- terim target is quite different from what it might be if a student body of 400 represented a goal in itself or even a plateau in the pattern of expansion. The position of the library in the over-all building program may be taken as a case in point. A library building is needed at present. The existing library space is unsatisfactory and the collection is growing rapidly. For reasons relating to construction economy and based on an assumption of continuing growth, it is recommended that a library be constructed in the immediate future, adequate for 10-15 years' growth. However, this structur~, combined with the existing buildings, results in greater total physical plant capacity than would be programmed for a similar institution with a stable enrollment goal of 400 students. In Chapter 8 it is recommended that a substantial part of the library and University Centre space be given over to temporary use until the enrollment passes the 700-student mark. Thus, it may be said that the 400- and 700-student enrollments, particularly the former, have little independent identity in reference to the 10 �building program. They are really stages in planning for an institution of 1200 students. The same qualifications apply, of course, to the 1200 level, which is also part of the continuum leading to still higher enrollments. Nevertheless, 1200 students is a sufficiently large and distant total to justify as a terminal point for a study of this kind. This view is borne out by the action of the College in planning the University Centre. Although the enrollment of the College will be less than 400 students when the building is completed, the Centre is adequate as a students' union for an enrollment of 1200 and more. Its size is justified by the temporary use of some of the space for academic purposes and also by the long-term waste and extra expense involved in building a structure of this type in segments. The Consultants' work attempts in similar fashion to attain a balance between short and long range goals. In practical terms the building program would not be very different if other interim target figures had been used, assuming the retention of the 1200-student enrollment level as the ultimate goal of the study. Con- struction of all the buildings except the final stages of the academic complex would proceed in the same time framework as is recommended here. The possible variations in distributing the quantities of academic space after 1967 are explored in Chapter 10. The terminology used in the report is affected by these relationships between enrollment targets and the building program. In the first section of the report (Chapters 2 through 5), the three target enrollments are equated with specific dates; for example, the 700-student enrollment level 11 �PLATE LAKEHEAO COLLEGE: PROJECTED ENROLLMENT ANO GROSS AREA OF CONSTRUCTION; 1961-62 TO 1973-74 l961·U 62 ·6! 6!·84 64 ·65 69·70 70·71 71-•:72 7'2173 197!•74 · %50 1200 1100 22'5 cooo zoo-' ... IL. CJ 900 u, IL 175 o en t- z Q 100 z ◄ "'2 fl) ,:50 .J .J ~ ...z: 700 0 « z "' Ill z :1250 ...u ...•.,, 600 s ::, ... .J 500 100 z 0 u .J ... ::, II. 0 400 n 300 Cl) Cl) 0 50 200 lOO 0 L.-..L.-.....JL-_J..._...1._ _L...._.J.__....J._ _J.-_...L.._ _ _ _ _.___.... ..- - - - 11i~Hi1r--;::-:1 12 E N R O LL M ENT (LE FT SCA LE) Exe Es s ARE A GROSS ARE A OF CON· STRUCTION (RT. SCALE) Ii 0 ALTERNATE CONSTROc-· TION PROGRAM CONSTRUCT! ON OEFI CIT a: C!) �could be attained in 1966-67. In the balance of the report, in reference to space programs and construction requirements, the phrase "400-student enrollment" is taken to mean the physical plant requirements between the present and the time when enrollment reaches approximately 400 students. The phrase 11 700-student enrollment" refers to the requirements between the time the 400-student level is attained and the time the student body approximates 700 in size. The phrase 11 1200-student enrollment" refers to the requirements from the time the 700-student level is attained and the time the student body reaches the final target of 1200. These intervals are to be understood in approximate terms, within one year, in assigning dates to the elements of the building program. 13 �I--' .i::- 1-1. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Selected Indicators of Growth, 1961-62 to Alternate Target Enrollments ~ Enrollment Full-time Total University Division Technology Division Other Nursing students University Division, part-time All categories Student periods Full-time Total University Division Technology Division Other Nursing students University Division, part-time All categories Target Enrollment Actual Projection Index of Growth: 1961-62 = 1.000 1200 1200 400 700 700 400 Students; Students; Students; Students; Students; Students; 1961-62 196J-64a 1966-67a 1973-Z4a 196J-64a 1966-67a 1273-Z4a 220 107 113 400 188 212 700 402 298 1200 772 428 1.818 1°757 1.876 3.182 3.757 2.637 5.455 7.215 3.788 85 113 149 209 1.329 1.753 2.459 140 445 157 670 153 1002 191 1600 1.121 1.506 1.093 2.252 1.364 3.596 b b b 10243 4084 6159 17257 8678 8579 28680 16366 12314 b 2260 2980 4180 b b 550 536 13053 20773 669 33529 b 473 796 1303 b b 318 155 537 259 887 416 Clock hours of meeting per week Total Lecture, classroom meetings Laboratory me~tings (Continued) �1-1. (Continued) ~ Teaching station requirements Classrooms Laboratories Staff reqtJirements Facultyd Physical plant Total useable space (square feet)e Increment of useable space -, ( square feet) e Institutional finances (1962 dollars) Expenditures per fulltime student Total Instruction Administration All other Revenues per full-time student Total Student fees Grants Other I-' \.n. Tar~et Enrollment Actual . Projection ....., Index of Growth: 1961-62 = 1.000 1200 1200 400 700 700 400 Students; Students; Students; Students; Students; Students; 1961-62 1963-64a 1966-6t 1973-74a 1963-64a 1966-6t 1973-74a f f 16 l3 22 16 32 21 2.286 1.857 3.143 2.286 4.571 3.000 18 38 64 105 2.111 3.556 5.833 32930 77725 110485 161715 2.360 3.355 4.911 -- + 44795 + 32760 + 51230 1261 830 79 352 1714 1188 100 425 1949 1403 112 433 2982 2250 167 562 1.359 1.431 1.266 1.207 1.546 1.690 1.418 1.230 2.711 2.114 1.597 1306 372 922 13 1714 469 1215 30 1949 2982 900 2025 57 1.312 1.261 1.318 2.308 1.492 1.497 1.472 2.692 2.283 2.419 2.196 4.385 557 1357 35 2.365 (Continued) ~ �1---l 1-1. (Continued) °' Item 1961-62 Institutional finances (1962 dollars) (continued) Salary outlays per faculty member Faculty salary outlays per £ull-time student Incremental capital outlays for campus development (thousands of 1962 dollars)c TarE:etEnrQllment Actual Projection Index of Growth: 1961-62 = 1.000 400 700 1200 400 700 1200 Students; Students; Students; Students; Students; Students; 196J-64a 1966-67a 1973-74a 1963-64a 1966-67a 1973-74a 7121 10215 11460 15030 1.434 1.609 2.111 550 970 1048 1315 1. 764 1.905 2.391 2070. 7 2336.8 f aApproximate dates at which target enrollments could be reached. ~ot available. c1g62-63; actual rooms in scheduled use. °Expressed as -full-time ·equivalents. eExcludes residential space. fcapital outlays begin in 1964-65. �CHAPTER 2 ENROLLMENT: DEVELOPMENT PATTERN The terms of reference of this study called for the elaboration of a physical plant and campus development program for alternate target enrollments of 400, 700 and 1200 studentso Such a program could be evolved with- out specifying the particular dates at which the target enrollments would be realized; however, the soundness of the program and the pace at which it should be implemented would remain beclouded without some indication of the general timing of the expansion. Therefore, the Consultants undertook to determine the pattern of ·enrollment development at the College in order to ascertain a) the likelihood of reaching the specified target enrollments, b) the approximate dates at which these enrollments could be realized, and c) the structure of enrollment. The last, of course, is significant since it implies a de- lineation of the enrollment data in terms meaningful for planning; that is, the distribution of students by class year level, the distribution of students among various study programs, and so on. The remainder of this chapter considers the enrollment development patterno The various building blocks that are important for making the required estimates are explored and their role in affecting the College's enrollment expansion is clarified. A. Higher Education in Ontario Both Canada and Ontario are expected to grow rapidly during the com- 17 �ing decade. The population of the nation has· been increasing and the up- ward trend of population growth is likely to continue during the 1961-71 decade. It is also expected that the relatively faster population develop- ment characterizing the Province of Ontario will continue unabated. The 19 percent increase projected for Canada during the 1961-71 decade will be accompanied by a 27 percent increase in the population of Ontario and the Province will continue to account for an increasing proportion of total Canadian population. A significant indicator of potential growth in college and university enrollment is the size of the 18-21 years population age group. This is commonly considered to be the age group from which most college and university students are drawn. In numbers alone, the growth of this age group will cause conside·rable expansion in the levels of enrollment at higher educational institutions in Cananda and Ontario during the 1961-71 decade. The size of the age group will increase by 46 percent for the country as a whole and 54 percent for Ontario. The rapid growth is directly a func- tion of the post-World War II baby boom. An But, in addition, college participation rates are also increasing. increasing proportion of the students eligible for college and urtiversity attendance are in fact continuing with such post-secondary education. In addition, there is a burgeoning expansion in enrollment at the nation's centers of graduate study. The combination of expanding population and higher rates of college participation is expected to produce a 167 percent increase in undergraduate enrollment in Canada during the '60 's; the com- 18 �I I I I I I I I I I 2-1. Canada and Ontario: Selected Statistical Indicators of Population and Undergraduate Enrollment in Colleges and Universities, Canada and Ontario, Selected Years, 1951 to 1971 l2Sl J.25,Q l2Ql ~ l21l. 14009 4598 16081 5405 18238 6236 19518 6990 21643 7898 .768 .737 .328 .882 .867 .336 1.000 1.000 .342 1.070 1.121 .358 1.187 1.267 .365 Population, 18-21 years age group Number (000) Canada Ontario Index (1961 = 1.000) Canada Ontario Ratio: Ontario/Canada 851.8 264.3 895-1 282.5 1016.4 316.7 1222.6 418.6 1484-9 487.6 .838 .310 .881 .892 .316 1.000 1.000 .312 1.203 1.322 .342 1.461 1.540 .328 Undergraduate college and university enrollmenta Number ( 000) Canada Ontario Index (1961 = 1.000) Canada Ontario Ratio: Ontario/Canada 57.9 l8o2 66.1 20.0 107.5 29.5 169.9 57.9 286.6 107.1 539 .617 .314 .615 .678 .303 1 .. 000 1.000 .275 1.580 1.963 .341 2.666 3.631 .374 Population, total Number (000) Canada Ontario Index (1961 = 1.000) Canada Ontario Ratio: Ontario/Canada . 835 0 aNon-veterano I 19 �parable figure for Ontario is 263 percent. a Clearly, these influences will produce increased pressures for the expansion of existing institutions in Ontario, as well as the establishment of new institutions. But how will these influences express themselves? How many students can be expected to start post-secondary educational studies during the decade and when? More particularly, what enrollment development pattern can Lakehead College, with its combination of programs in university and technical studies, expect? The Consultants believe that the answer to these questions will depend upon several factors: the number of students likely to initiate post- secondary programs of study; the length of such programs offered by the Colleges; and the probable progression patterns of students as they proceed from beginning to completion of each prescribed course of study. As a first step, therefore, the Consultants undertook the quantification of the expansion pattern in first-year enrollment at the relevant branches of post-secondary education. B. Enrollment in Post-Secondary Education The requirements for entry into post-secondary education study pro- grams vary with the character of the program and the institution offering the course of study. For purposes of this study, the completion of grade aThe estimate of undergraduate college and university enrollment for Ontario is taken from Dr. R. W. B. Jackson's estimates of the expansion of postsecondary education in Ontario during the 10-year interval beginning in 1962. Dr. Jackson presented six estimates in his report; the Consultants selected Estimate 6, his highest, for use in this study. 20 �13 was taken to be a normal pattern for students proceeding to university level programs of study, teclmical studies and nursing. The Consultants recognize that completion of grade 13 is not mandatory for entry to all post -secondary education programs; however, there is an increasing trend for students to complete grade 13 before going on to more advanced studies. Dr. Jackson's statistical report,prepared for the Cormnittee of Presidents of Provincially Assisted Universities,provided a number of estimates of the trends in enrollment in secondary schools. Paralleling general population developments, secondary school enrollment has been increasing during the past decade. the sixties. by 55 Furthermore, it will continue to expand during Total enrollment in grades 9 to 13 is expected to increase percent between 1961 and 1970; during the same interval, grade 13 enrollment will increase by 127 percent. What are the implications for post-secondary education enrollment? A clue is provided by data available from the Provincial Department of Education concerning the pattern of retirements from secondary schools to further education at post-secondary school institutions. the experience of the past decade. Table 2-3 summarizes Thus, the number of students initiating post-secondary programs of study has been increasing in all branches of the educational structure. Moreover, as shown in table 2-4, the patterns of retirements to further education for the Lakehead, particularly Thunder Bay, and the Province as a whole are quite similar. Universities account for 37.9 percent of all retirements to further education in the Province and 37.8 percent at the 21 �2-2. Ontario: ~ 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1965 1970 N.B. 22 Secondary School Enrollment, Total and Grade 13, Selected Years,1951 to 1970 N:u,mbei: Total, Grades 2-13 E;c1:'2llw~D1' Ind.~x~~: l2cl Grade Total, Grad,es 2-13 13 = l,QQQ Grade 13 222075 237576 262775 299177 8827 8975 9472 9981 10799 11487 12547 14278 16267 18447 21482 .620 .680 .742 .794 .878 1.000 1.000 419624 462970 41514 48720 1.403 1.547 1.932 2.268 133556 141091 148744 160166 174562 185605 203525 Projections are from Dr. R. W. B. Jackson 0446 .472 .497 .535 .583 .411 -418 .441 .465 .503 .535 -584 .665 .757 .859 �2-3. Ontario: ~ All Secondary School Retirements to Further Education, 1951-61 Retirements from Secondary School to Further Educatfon Provincial Schools PostSecondary Business Technical of Nursing Universities Schools Group Institutes Teachers' Colleges Othera 1087 1309 1403 1392 1483 212 189 656 509 502 766 809 718 886 1336 1707 2170 2799 2929 3006 477 833 1644 1883 993 (number) 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 9384 8824 9609 9828 10375 6100 7894 8434 9673 9146 2955 3034 3007 3477 3486 1509 1384 2085 1595 1375 1360 1426 1567 1471 12546 13482 14744 16592 18431 11069 12169 14056 15993 16856 4648 4711 4869 5931 6983 1793 1922 2051 2306 2164 1678 1724 1975 2058 2374 n/a (indexes: 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1961 = 471 493 , 558 643 609 1.000) .509 .479 .521 .533 .563 .,362 .468 .,500 .574 .543 .423 .434 .431 -498 .499 .697 .640 .963 .737 .579 .573 .601 .660 .620 .353 .369 .4l8 .481 -456 .362 .435 .467 .463 .493 .213 .190 .661 .513 .506 .681 .731 .800 .900 1.000 .657 .722 .834 .949 1.000 .666 .675 .697 .849 1.000 .829 .888 -948 1.066 1.000 .707 .726 .832 .867 1.000 .573 .606 .537 .663 1.000 .568 .722 .931 .974 1.000 .480 .839 1.656 1.896 1.000 N \..,J aincluding agricultural schools. n/a �2-4. Ontario and Lakehead Region: Secondary School Retirements to Further Education, 1961 Category of Further Education Lakehead Total, Province Kenora Rainy Thunder ~ Bay TotaJ 8 3 9 162 12 5 44 (number) Private Schools Universities Business Schools Schools of Nursing Provincial Technical Institutes 1006 6983 2164 2374 10 19 18 62 1336 6 3 13 Private Trade Schools Teachers' Colleges Agricultural Schools Other All further education 569 3006 237 756 18431 1 1 15 2 14 89 118 3 88 52 402 35 205 59 99 22 25 22 542 (percent of total for Province) .30 .46 .80 .11 .23 .76 .89 2.32 2.03 2.61 1.19 2.94 2.73 4.17 .45 .22 .97 1.65 .50 .18 .47 .18 2.96 3.93 .40 .48 .28 2.91 2.18 3.31 2.94 Private Schools Universities Business Schools Schools of Nursing Provincial Technical Institutes 5.46 37-89 11.74 12.88 .50 7.25 Private Trade Schools Teachers' Colleges Agricultural Schools Other All further education 3.09 16.31 1.29 4.10 100.00 .35 (percent of total within each area) 15.42 2.21 37.82 10.89 18.27 5.77 3.23 4.06 L92 26.92 22.14 .25 .37 21.77 100000 5.47 100000 4.61 100.00 Private Schools Universities Business Schools Schools of Nursing Provincial Technical Institutes 5.46 37.89 11.74 12088 39.77 11.36 21.59 5.77 15.38 9.62 34.62 7.25 6.82 Private Trade Schools Teachers' Colleges Agricultural Schools Other All further education 3.09 16.31 1.29 4.10 100.00 17.05 24 3.41 100.00 ~ �Lakehead. Schools of Nursing account for 12.9 percent of retirements to further education at the provincial level and 18.3 percent at the Lakehead. And Provincial Technical Institutes draw 7.3 percent of all secondary school retirements to further education in the Province and 4.1 percent at the Lakehead. There do no appear to be any reasons, either logical or statis- tical, to assume that influences substantially different from those operating across the Province will be in effect at the Lakehead. Therefore, projections of the probable ratio of expansion in retirements to postsecondary educational programs for the Province as a whole can be applied with reasonable confidence to the Lakehead, and Lakehead College in particular. Table 2-5 shows the results of these efforts. Retirements to post- secondary education were expressed in index form and projected as a function of grade 13 enrollment. The estimating procedures produced different results for the several post-secondary education categories of interest in connection with Lakehead College; that is, universities, provincial technical institutes, and schools of nursing. All three categories are expected to grow less rapidly than grade 13 enrollment; in terms of relative magnitude, the ranking is as follows: grade 13 enrollment, univer- sities, provincial technical institutes and schools of nursing. Between 1961-62 and 1975-76, grade 13 enrollment will increase 176 percent; during the same interval, retirements to post-secondary education will increase by 169 percent for universities, 154 percent for provincial technical institutes, and 121 percent for schools of nursingo 25 �2-5. Ontario: Indexes of Secondary School Grade 13 Enrollment and Retirements to Selected Categories of Post-Secondary Education, Selected years, 1951-52 to 1970-71 R~tirements 1Q PQst-SecQnd.aa Edycatlon Provincial Schools Technical of Institutes Nursing Year Grade 13 Enrollment Universities 1951-1952 1952-1953 1953-1954 1954-1955 1955-1956 1956-1957 1957-1958 1958-1959 1959-1960 1960-1961 1961-1962 .411 .418 .441 .465 .503 .535 .584 .665 .757 .859 1.000 .423 .434 .431 -498 .499 a .666 .675 .697 .849 1.000 .353 .369 -418 -481 456 a .573 .606 .537 .663 1.000 .579 .573 .601 .660 .620 a .707 . 726 .832 .867 1.000 1965-1966 1970-1971 1975-1976 1.932 2.268b 2.762 1.,892 2.213 2.687 1.814 2.107 2.539 1.642 1.873 2.213 aNot available. bEstimated. 2p 0 �These growth factors could be applied to freshman enrollment in postsecondary institutions in 1961-62 to provide preliminary estimates of potential first-year enrollment at various years in the future. However, an additional stimulant to post-secondary education is being provided by the nation's economic development. The demands for skilled and trained personnel to meet the challenges of a modern society have been providing an added stimulus to the development of post-secondary educational programs for a number of years. Nor can these influences be expected to diminish in intensity in the next several decades. The proportion of the civilian labor force accounted for by technical and professional manpower has been increasing steadily. The magnitude of the change is such that it must be felt at the post-secondary educational level in the form of increased rates of participation in advanced programs of study. Table 2-6 presents estimates of the growth in the professional component of the labor force relative to all civilian workers. Between 1961 and 1976, it is expected that the total civilian labor force will increase by 44 percent; during the same interval, however, the professional component of the labor force will increase by 72 percent. In short, professional workers will expand 19 percent more rapidly than the total labor force. A composite index of growth for first-year enrollment in post-secondary educational institutions can be obtained by combining the indexes of growth for secondary school retirements to further education with the index of trend variance in the growth of professional workers in the labor force. Under this approach, first-year enrollment in university level programs of study should increase 219 percent between 1961-62 and 1975-76. For the 27 �2-6 . . Canada: Civilian Labor Force, Total and Professional Workers; Selected Years, 1931 to 1971 NmDl:ler Professional Total Workers Ci~iljan Labor For~e Inde~esi l26l == l.QQQ I;ud.ei o! Tt~ndi VarlanQ~ Professional Professional Total Workers Total Workers (ooo) .383 1931 1941 1951 1961 4151 4466 5217 6518 200.7 240.4 302.6 524.0 .637 .685 .800 1.000 .459 .577 1.000 1966 1971 1976 7312 8334 9414 616.7 754.6 898.7 1.122 1.279 l.444 1.177 1.440 1. 715 28 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 .601 .670 .721 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.049 1.126 1.188 1.000 �provincial technical institutes, the comparable figure should be 202 percent. terval. N.ursing programs should increase by 163 percent during the same inThe composite indexes thus obtained can be used as a basis for projecting first-year enrollrn.ent in the various divisions at Lakehead College during the interval under study. C. Enrollrn.ent at Lakehead College The College, of course, presently offers programs in the three areas discussed above. There is the University Division, which offers both Arts and Applied Science programso There is the Technology Division, which offers several programs of study that are recognized throughout the Province among the various provincial technical institutes. And the College also currently offers instruction to nursing students, although on an experimental basis and without commitment to a permanent program. In addi- tion, the College has a program of course offerings in the Univers.ity Division for part-time students. The number of students enrolled in these various programs at the College and their pattern of development over the past decade are revealed in tables 2-7 and 2-8. Of the total of 220 full-time students enrolled in the College in 1961-62, 107 students were in the University Division and 113 students were in the Technology Division. In the University Divi- sion, the Arts program accounted for 86 students, 62 of whom were freshmen. The Applied Science program accounted for 21 students, all of whom were first-year students. In the Technology Division, 91 of the 113 students enrolled were in the first year of the programso In addition, the College 29 �2-7. Year Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Enrollment, by Division, 1952-53 to 1962-63 Univer~jU Dj~i~iQD Applied Science AI:i& ~ Technology Division Full-Time Total Full-Time Enrollment (number) 1952-1953 1953-1954 19.54-1955 19.5.5-1956 1956-1957 1957-1958 1958-1959 1959-1960 1960-1961 1961-1962 1962-1963 10 12 7 19 13 32 48 39 75 86 84 37 28 28 25 34 44 36 30 24 21 16 47 40 35 44 47 76 84 69 99 107 100 21 29 28 30 31 48 65 52 75 113 124 68 69 63 74 78 124 149 121 174 220 224 (indexes~ 1961-62 = 1.000) 1952-1953 1953-1954 1954-1955 195.5-1956 1956-1957 1957-1958 1958-19.59 1959-1960 1960-1961 1961-1962 1962-1963 30 .116 .140 .081 .221 .151 .372 .558 .453 .872 1.000 .977 1.762 1.333 1.333 1.190 1.619 2.095 1. 714 1.429 1.143 1.000 .762 .439 .374 .327 .411 .439 .no .785 .645 .925 1.000 .935 .186 .257 .248 .265 .274 .425 .575 .,460 .664 1.000 1.097 .309 314 .286 .336 .355 .564 .677 .550 .791 1.000 1.018 0 �2-8. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Full-Time and Part-Time Enrollment, by Division, 1952-53 to 1962-63 Uni~ersit~ Di~isign Full Part Total Time Time I.e.al: Technology Division (Full Time) Nurses TOTAL Enrollment (number) 1952-1953 1953-1954 1954-1955 1955-1956 1956-1957 1957-1958 1958-1959 1959-1960 1960-1961 1961-1962 1962-1963 47 40 35 44 47 76 84 69 99 107 100 41 30 29 26 52 67 101 94 125 140 162 85 70 64 70 99 143 185 163 224 247 262 (indexes: 1952-1953 1953-1954 1954-1955 1955-1956 1956-1957 1957-1958 1958-1959 1959-1960 1960-1961 1961-1962 1962-1963 .439 .374 -327 .411 .439 .no .785 .645 .925 1.000 .935 .293 .214 .207 .186 .371 .479 . 721 .671 .893 1.000 1.157 .344 .2~3 .259 .283 .401 .579 • 749 .680 .907 1.000 1.061 21 29 28 30 31 48 65 52 75 113 124 1961-62 .186 .257 .248 .265 .274 .425 .575 .460 .664 1.000 1.097 JO 85 128 106 99 92 100 130 191 250 215 329 445 514 = 1.000) .353 1.000 1.506 .238 .222 .207 .225 .292 .429 .562 .483 .739 1.000 1.155 • 31 �offered instruction to 85 nursing students and 140 part-time students in the University Divisiono Thus, a total of 445 students were served by the College in 1961-620 One further building block is required before the enrollment estimates can be completed. Although a basis has been established for estimating first-year enrollment in the various programs of the University and Technology Divisions, planning parameters are required for converting the estimates of first-year enrollment to total enrollment. Such parameters should reflect the expected progression patterns of students through the various study programs offered by the College, and will be a function of the length of the period of study in the various program areas as well as student competence and institutional standards. It is expected that the College will begin to grant degrees in the University Division in 1965-66, implying that the present two-year A.rts program will have expanded to a three-year program by that timeo For pur- poses of this study, it is assumed that the Arts programs will continue to develop even after 1965-66 and that honors programs requiring four years of study will ultimately be introducedo By the same token, it is expected that the Applied Science program, which is presently one year in duration, also will be e.xpandedo The College's indicated policy is to initiate such expansion in 1964-65 with the introduction of a second year of studyo full two-year program should be in full swing by 1965-660 The However, it is not expected that the College will expand its offerings in App lied Science beyond the two-year program during the planning interval encompassed by this study. 32 For the Technology Division, no significant changes in the �length or depth of the programs presently offered at the College are expected throughout the planning interval. The coefficients for converting first-year enrol11Tlent to total enrollment were developed after an examination of patterns prevailing at other institutions in the Province and in Canada. are presented in table 2-9. The results of these studies For the Arts component of the University Divi- sion, the planning parameter for converting first-year enrol11Tlent to total enrol]Jnent under the three-year program is 2.50; when this program has been deepened and extends in scope to include honors courses, the conversion coefficient should rise to 3064. In this study, it is assumed that the development of the Arts program and its elongation to four years should be achieved by 1971 and continued thereafter. In the Applied Science program, the planning parameter for converting first-year enrol11Tlent to total enrollment in a two-year program is lo67. These planning parameters for the Uni- versity Division programs are based upon an analysis of data presented in Appendix A for Canadian and Ontario institutions. For the Technology Divi- sion, the planning parameter for converting freshman enrol11Tlent under a two-year program is 1.68. This is based upon an analysis of the experience at the College itself during the past decade, and reflects the actual historical conditions characterizing the College's expansion in its Technology Division. With these building blocks in hand, the enrollment projections for the various programs of the College over the next 15 years could be completed. A summary of the computational program for these estimates is presented in table 2-10. A year-by-year breakdown by enrollment category is presented 33 �2-9• La.kehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Planning Parameters for Converting First-Year Enrollment to Total Full-Time Enrollment Estimates, by Study Program Program University Division Arts Applied Science Technology Division Conversion Coefficient: First-Year Enrollment to Total Full-Time One-Year Two-Year Three-Year Four-Year Total Total Total Total 1.00 1.00 1.00 2.50 a a 3.64 a a aNot calculated for use in programming Lakehead College development pattern. 34 �--- --- - 2-10. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Projection of Enrollment, by Division and Program, Selected Years, 1961-62 to 1975-76 B&m \.,..) 1212 Secondary school retirements to further education Indexes of growth: 1961-62 = 1.000 Universities Provincial Technical Institutes Schools of Nursing 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.892 1.814 1.642 2.213 2.107 1.873 2.687 2.539 2.213 Professional workers in labor force Index of growth: 1961-62 = 1.000 Index of trend variancea 1.000 1.000 1.177 1.049 1.440 1.126 1.715 1.188 First-year enrollment in post-secondary education Indexes of growth: 1961-62 = 1.000 Universities Provincial Technical Institutes Schools of Nursing 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.985 1.903 1.722 2.492 2.372 2.109 3.192 3.016 2.629 Lakehead College University Division, part-time enrollment Index of growth: 1961-62 = 1.000 1.000 1.096 1.237 1.405 62 21 91 123 42 173 155 52 216 198 67 274 Lakehead College enrollment First-year, full-time University Division Arts program Applied Science program Technology Division \Jl. 1962 Acad~mic Year Ending in 1966 1.911 (Continued) -~ �w 2-10. (Continued) ~ Academic Year Endin~ in Item Lakehead College enrollment (continued) Conversion coefficients: total/first-year enrollment University Division Arts program Applied Science program Technology Division Total, full-time University Division Arts program Applied Science program Technology Division Other Nurses University Division, part-time enrollment Summary Total full-time enrollment Total full-time enrollment plus nurses Total full-time enrollment plus nurses and part-time enrollment 1962 1966 12.ll 1m ---- 2.34 1.67 1.68 3.64 1.67 1.68 3.64 1.67 1.68 86 21 113 288 70 291 564 87 363 721 112 460 8.5 146 179 223 140 1.53 173 197 220 305 649 79.5 1014 1193 1293 1_516 44.5 948 1366 1713 aRelative to index of growth in total civilian labor force. (Continued) �- .. . ---- dlllJ rlllF rlll 2-10. N.B. (Continued) 1. Assumes first degrees are conferred in 1965-66. 2. Assumes second year of Applied Science program is introduced in 1964-65 and is in full swing by 1965-66. J. Assumes no change in length or depth of Technology Division programs throughout planning period. w -'1 �in table 2-llo Table 2-10 shows that first-year enrollment in the Univer- sity and Technology Divisions was made a function of the growth of secondary school retirements to further education and the growth of the professional labor force. The first-year enrollment estimates were then con- verted to total enrollment by applying the planning parameters for the progression of students through the various study programs to be offered by these divisions. Enrollment in the program of study offered to student nurses was made a function of the projected growth in secondary school retirements to further education in schools of nursing, as modified by the professional labor force trend varianto Finally, the development of part- time University Division enrollment was made a function of the population growth expected for the Lakehead regiono By way of summary, total full-time enrollment at the College is projected to increase from 220 students in 1961-62 to 1293 students in 1975- 760 Thus, the alternate target enrollments to be used for programming the development of the College, according to the terms of reference of this study, are clearly feasible. According to the projections, the Loo- student enrollment should be approximated sometime during the 1963-6L or 196L-65 academic year. 1966-67. The 700-student enrollment can be expected about The 1200-student enrollment should be reached around 1973-7L. If nursing students are combined with full-time students, over-all enrollment should increase from 305 students in 1961-62 to 1516 students in 1975-76. If University Division part-time enrollment is added as well, the over-all number of students serviced by the College should increase from LL5 persons in 1961-62 to 1713 persons in 1975-76. 38 �-• 2-11. Year Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Projection of Enrollment, by Program, 1961-62 to 1975-76 University Division, Full-Time Applied Arts Science Program Program Technology Division, Full-Time Nurses University Division, Part-Time Total Enrollment ' All Full-Time Categories plus Nurses Full-Time (number) 1961-62 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 1966-67 1967-68 1968-69 1969-70 1970-71 1971-72 1972-73 1973-74 1974-75 1975-76 86 109 148 213 288 339 395 454 513 564 593 622 655 688 721 . / 21 24 28 47 70 73 77 82 85 87 92 97 102 107 112 ., ' 113 173 198 245 291 306 321 339 351 363 381 402 420 440 460 \ I 85 94 106 126 146 153 160 168 174 179 188 196 205 214 223 (indexes: vJ \0 1961-62 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 1966-67 1967-68 1968-69 1969-70 1970-71 1971-72 1972-73 1973-74 1974-75 1975-76 1.000 1.267 1. 721 2.477 3.349 3.942 4.593 5.279 5.965 6.558 6.895 7.233 7.616 8.000 8.J84 1.000 1.143 1.333 2.238 3°333 3.476 3.667 3.905 4.048 4.143 4.381 4.619 4-857 5.095 5°333 1.000 1.531 1.752 2.168 2.575 2.708 2.841 3.000 3.106 3.212 3.372 3.558 3. 717 3.894 4.071 1.000 1.106 1.247 1.482 1.718 1.800 1.882 1.976 2.047 2.106 2.212 2.306 2.412 2.518 2.624 140 143 147 150 153 157 161 165 169 173 177 183 187 192 197 1961-62 1.000 1.021 1.050 1.071 1.093 1.121 1.150 1.179 1.207 1.236 1.264 1.307 1.336 1.371 1.407 220 306 374 505 649 718" 793 875 949 1014 1066 1121 1177 1235 1293 305 400 480 631 795 871 953 1043 1123 1193 1254 1317 1382 1449 1516 445 543 627 781 948 1028 1114 1208 1292 1366 1431 1500 1569 1641 1713 1.000 1.311 1.574 2.069 2.607 2.856 3.125 3.420 3.682 3.911 4.111 4.318 4.531 4o 751 4.970 1.000 1.220 1.409 1.755 2.130 2.310 2.503 2.715 2.903 3.070 3.216 3.371 3.526 3.688 Jo849 = 1.000) 1.000 1.391 1.700 2.295 2.950 3.264 3.605 3.977 4.314 4.609 4-845 5.095 5.350 5.614 5.877 �Clearly, there are many reservations and qualifications that can be attached to the estimates. In the main, these derive largely from the difficulty of evaluating the impact of broad forces affecting all areas of the Province and the nation upon a relatively small institution in a relatively isolated area of the country. The College is still sufficiently young so that it might through its own efforts significantly alter the validity of these estimates by developing status in some particular program of study or by modifying its policies with respect to the length, depth or timing of the various programs considered abovee The Consultants be- lieve that the projections represent reasonable estimates of the potential expansion of the College over the next 15 years. It is possible that the estimates for the next few years will prove to be high relative to what is actually experienced; on the other hand, the fact that the College will begin to confer degrees in 1965-66 will have a considerable :iJnpact upon the public and attract greater numbers of student applications. are The middle and later years of the projection period likely to be characterized by a continuing acceleration and quicken- ing of the pace of development, not unlike the experience of many other institutions during their early years. In addition, as the College expands and becomes more noted for its offerings, substantial enrollment by students outside the Lakehead region is likely to develop. There will be more students from other areas of Ontario, outside the Province and even outside the country. Thus, the timing and composition of enrollment may differ from the development pattern outlined above; however, the estimates provide a reasonable basis for planning and justify the consideration of the College's 40 �physical plant and campus development requirements for the alternate target enrollments used in this study. I 41 �. CHAPTER 3 INSTRUCTIONAL ACTIVITY AT ENROLLMENTS OF Loo, 700 AND 1200 STUDENTS The feasibility of reaching the target enrollments has been established. The analysis can now proceed to the elaboration of the instructional activity characteristics relevant to the determination of the physical plant requirements of the College at the alternate target enrollments. In this chapter, attention is directed to various aspects of this question, particularly, the student period workloads generated by each of the programs offered by the College at the target enrollments. An analysis is also included con- cerning the potential distribution of enrollment by geographic origin and the implied demand for residential facilities at the College. A. Distribution of Enrollment by Study Program The material presented in Chapter 2 suggested that the College would reach the target enrollments of Loo, 700 and 1200 full-time students in the University and the Technology Division programs about 1963-64, 196667 and 1973-74, respectively. The LOO-student enrollment is seven percent above the enrollment projected for 1963-64; the 700-student enrollment is percent below the 1966-67 projection; and the 1200-student enrollment is two percent above the 1973-74 projection. The distributions of enrollment by study program, as projected for the several years mentioned, were therefore adjusted in order to be consistent with the total full-time enrollment targets used for the study. These adjustments were applied uniformly to the projected enrollments in 42 2.5 �the component programs of study identified in the estimating procedure. The remainder of the workload estimates and the delineation of the hypothetical activity structures associated with the alternate target enrollments were worked out on the basis of the adjusted enrollment figures. Thus, full-time enrollment in the University and Technology Divisions together with enrollments in the nursing and University Division part-time programs imply total student popu~atiorts of 670 students, 1002 s~udents and 1600 students at the three full-time enrollment targets of pectively. B. Loo, 700 and 1200 students, res- These data are summarized in table 3-1. Distribution of Enrollment by Class Year Level The study programs of students in post-secondary institutions vary by year level. The programs vary not only in content, but also in the number of weekly hours of formal instruction in classroom and laboratory meetings. Furthermore, there is attrition in the progress of students through the full courses of study; all students who enroll in a program of study as freshmen do not necessarily complete the full course. Therefore, the distribution of enrollment by year level within each program is usually uneven. For these reasons, the Consultants investigated the typical distributions of enrollment in post-secondary educational programs in the colleges and universities and technical institutes of Ontario. concerning a number of institutions in the Province. Data were developed These data revealed the historical enrollment structure by year level at a number of institutions offering the same programs that the College will be offering at the target enrollments, As might be expected, the data revealed great diversity among the several institutions. The class year distribution of enrollment may LJ �3-1. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Distribution of Enrollment at Alternate Target Enrollments, by Program 400 E;croJJmen:t. 700 1200 Proi'ram S±.nden:t.s Students Students Approximate date of realization Distribution at specified date (number of students) University Division Arts program Applied science program Technology Division Nurses University Division, part-time 1963-64 1966-67 1973-74 148 28 198 106 147 339 73 306 153 157 102 420 205 187 627 1028 1569 158 30 212 113 157 331 71 298 149 153 668 104 428 209 191 670 1002 1600 Total, all categories Distribution adjusted to target enrollment levels for full-time students (number of students) University Division Arts program Applied science program Technology Division Nurses University Division, part-time Total, all categories N.B. 655 1. Adjustment factor, 400-student enrollment: 400/374 projected figures. = 1.070 2. Adjustment factor, 700-student enrollment: 700/718 projected figures. = .975 3. Adjustment factor, 1200-student enrollment: 1200/1177 projected figures. 44 of of = 1.020 of �even vary widely within the same institution from year to year. variations may be attributed to a number of reasons: These variations in the rate of entry into the freshman class; external forces such as economic or political conditions that cause early dropouts; shifts in the rate of transfer of students from one institution to another at different year levels; and a miscellany of other reasons. Nevertheless, the data reveal suffi- ciently strong central tendencies to permit the adoption of a typical distribution pattern for use in this planning study. Table 3-2 summarizes the planning parameters used in this study for the distribution of enrollment in the full-time programs of the College. As mentioned earlier, the figures are based upon analyses of the experience of other Ontario institutions offering similar programs. Thus, by the time the College is offering a complete four-year Arts program, including honors courses, the freshman class will account for 39 percent of the enrollment, the second-year class will account for approximately 30 percent, the thirdyear class will consist of 24 percent of the total, and the honors students in the fourth year of study will account for 7.5 percent of all Arts program students. Similar analyses produced typical enrollment distributions for the Applied Science program of the University Division and the Technology Division. Since the College will offer a maximum of two years of study in each of these programs during the planning interval under consideration, the year level distribution was confined to the first two years of study, although other institutions in the Province do offer programs in Applied Science and technical studies that extend beyond two years in duration. In- sofar as the Applied Science program is concerned, the freshman class will 45 �3-2. .i:::- °' Ontario: Typical Distributions of Enrollment in Ontario PostSecondary Education Programs by Study Program and Year Level Year Level Program ~ .2Dci. ..1I:d. l.lli ill (percent) Colleges and universities Arts Applied Sciencea Technical Institutesa 39.0 59.9 59.5 29.5 40.1 40.5 23.9 7.5 100.0 100.0 100.0 ~he programs in .Applied Science and technical studies in Ontario institutions are not usually limited to two years. However, the time dimensions of the Lakehead College expansion are such that programs extending beyond two years in duration are not likely to come into existence during the interval under consideration. For this reason, the distributional pattern for these two programs is expressed on a two-year organizational basis for use in calculations elsewhere in the report. �account for 59.5 percent of enrollment, with the remainder of the students at the second-year level. Similar figures were derived from the Technology Division; the freshman class will account for 59.5 percent of enrollment, while the secohd-year group will consist of 40.5 percent of the students. These planning parameters were then applied to the total enrollment estimated for each study program at the alternate target enrollments. resulting enrollment distributions are summarized in table 3-3. The At the 400-student enrollment, there will be 244 full-time first-year students and 156 full-time second-year students. No enrollment is expected at the third- and fourth-year levels or at the second-year level of the Applied Science program since the 400-student target will be reached before these advanced levels of study are offered. By the time the 1200-student enroll- ment is realized, the year level distribution of enrollment will be as follows: 578 first-year students; 412 second-year students; 160 third-year students; and 50 fourth-year students. These full-time students will be distributed by study program in the following fashion: University Division, Arts program, 668 students; University Division, Applied Science program, 104 students; Technology Division, 428 students. C. Instructional Workloads One aspect of the composition of the instructional workload at the College is clarified by the estimated year level distribution of enrollment at the several targets. However, for various space plannipg purposes, the analyses must be carried further. The instructional workload characteristics must be expressed in terms of clock hours of meeting in each division by type of meeting, since physical plant requirements must take account of the 47 �.s:=- 3-3 • OJ Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Projected Distribution of Full-Time Enrollment in University and Technology Divisions at Alternate Target Enrollments, by Study Program and Year Level Yea;i: Le:i:el Prouam ~ 2Il!l .3nl 4Qo Total University Division Arts Applied Science Technology Division .2il 88 30 126 ---- 70 -- 86 zoo Total University Division Arts Applied Science Technology Division All - lJ.QQ Students --- ~ li.th -- --- 1,58 30 212 Students .11.2 2l.:z. Xl 2S 1QQ 129 43 177 98 28 121 79 2,5 --- 331 71 298 --- 1200 Students Total University Division Arts Applied Science Technology Division 51a luZ ~ 5.Q. l2QQ 261 62 2.5.5 197 42 173 160 ,50 668 104 428 --- --- �kind of space involved and the number of hours of formal instruction to be accommodated therein. As a step in this direction, the Consultants investigated the patterns prevailing in other institutions in Ontario with regard to the number of hours of formal instruction required in various programs of study at each year level. There is some uniformity in the general requirements of the Province for the award of degrees and diplomas in various programs of study1 and there is a general consensus among educators concerning the requirements for completing various courses of study. Therefore, it is reasonable to ex- pect that Lakehead College will follow a pattern of instructional meeting requirements that is consistent with the general patterns prevailing in other institutions in the Province, even though these programs may not be in full swing at the College for several years. Moreover, in the absence of indica- tions to the contrary, it was necessary to assume that the College would adhere to the general patterns prevailing in the institutions across the Province with regard to course offerings not presently possible or available within the College curriculum. Following is a brief description of the development of the instructional workload characteristics in the several programs of study under consideration. 1. University Division, Arts Program The Arts program to be offered by the University Division will be the most comprehensive and manifest the greatest depth of all the programs of study that the College will offer during the planning interval. The bacca- laureate degree programs in arts and sciences also are usually quite broad in range and scope of offering. To reflect these considerations, a standar- L9 �dized enrollment distribution for University Division baccalaureate degree programs in arts and sciences was developed. The enrollment distribution reflects the conditions presently prevailing in the higher educational structure of the Province: first, that the pass program is three years in length, and that the honors program typically extends over a four-year period; second, that there is a broad division between science and general or nonscience studies in the structure of the pass and honors programs. Once again relying upon the experience of other Ontario universities and colleges, a typical pattern was evolved and expressed in terms of a 1000-student enrollment. The figures are presented in table 3-L. An examination of the table will reveal several characteristics of the typical distribution pattern. First, 92.5 percent of the students are in the first three years of study; 7.5 percent are accounted for by the fourth year of study. Second, 58.2 percent of the students are pursuing a three-year pro- gram of study; Ll.8 percent are enrolled in honors programs that usually extend over four years. Third,students enrolled in science programs account for about 35 percent of all enrollment. Estimates presented earlier in this study have shown the anticipated number of Arts program students at the several target enrollments. At the LOO-student level, 158 persons are expected in the Arts program; at the 700student level, Arts program enrollment is expected to be 331 students; at the 1200-student level, 668 students will be enrolled in the Arts program. By applying the typical distribution pattern presented in table 3-L, a hypothetical distribution of enrollment among the various offerings within the Arts program may be obtained. 50 These estimates are presented in table 3-5. �I I I I I 3-4- Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Standardized Enrollment Distribution for University Division Baccalaureate Degree Programs in Arts and Sciences, by Program and Year Level Yea;i:;: LeJZ:~l Years Prni:I:aro 3m l-3 All (number) 3-Year programs General Science Subtotal 159 86 245 121 65 186 98 53 151 378 204 582 Honors programs Non-science Science Subtotal 94 51 145 71 38 109 58 31 89 223 120 343 49 26 75 272 146 418 All p:t'ograms 390 295 240 925 75 1000 378 204 582 (percent) 3-Year programs General Science Subtotal a a a a a a a a a 40.8 22.1 62.,9 Honors programs Non-science Science Subtotal a a a a a a a a a 24.1 13.0 37.1 65.3 34.7 100.0 27.2 14.6 4L8 All programs a a a 100.0 100.0 100.0 37.8 20.4 58.2 8Figure in column headed "Years 1-3" applies to first three columns as well. I 51 �\.rt I'\.) 3-5. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Hypothetical Distribution of Enrollment in University Division Arts Program at Alternate Target Enrollments, by Degree Program and Year Level Y~a;r;: Pro€;;r;:am l§i 2nd L,Oo General Science Honors Humanities and Languages Social and Philosophical Studies Commerce and Finance Natural Sciences Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry Biological and Earth Total L~]:el .3m W;,h ill -- 64 --- Students -- 36 19 (33) 7 7 7 29 15 (26) 6 6 .5 -- -- -- (.59) 13 13 12 6 6 5 -- -- -- 4 -- 11 10 88 70 -- -- 158 --- -- --- --- 35 700 Students General Science Honors Humanities and Languages Social and Philo·s ophical Studies Commerce and Finance Natural Sciences Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry Biological and Earth Total (Continued) 53 28 (48) 11 10 10 40 22 (36) 8 8 7 32 18 (29) 7 6 6 ( 2.5) 6 .5 5 12.5 68 (138) 32 29 28 9 8 7 6 5 .5 .5 4 26 23 129 98 79 2.5 331 �(Continued) Proe;ram l.s.1 2nd. Year Le1:~l .3.ui 1:th ill -- (50) 11 11 11 253 136 (279) 61 61 60 1200 Students General Science Honors Humanities and Languages Social and Philosophical Studies Commerce and Finance Natural Sciences Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry Biological and Earth Total N.B. \J1. vJ 106 58 (97) 21 21 21 80 16 16 15 65 35 (59) 13 13 13 18 17 13 13 10 9 8 51 48 261 197 160 50 668 Items may not add to totals due to rounding. 44 (73) 11 -- �By way of example, the 668 Arts program students at the 1200-student enrollment will be distributed as follows: three-year program, general course, 253 students; three-year program, science course, 136 students; four-year program, honors course, 279 students; and so on. These figures are significant because the total number of meeting hours per week and the distribution of these meetings between classroom and laboratory sessions varies among programs and year levels. variations is revealed very clearly in table J-6. The extent of these The table shows the number of clock hours of formal instruction required per week in university baccalaureate degree programs in arts and sciences in Ontario higher educational institutions, by program and year level. In general, the science programs emphasize laboratory meetings to a greater extent, in both absolute and relative terms; the honors programs tend to involve heavier workloads in formal classroom and laboratory meetings than do the three-year programs. It is now possible to calculate the weekly instructional workloads generated by enrollment in the Arts program and the probable number of meeting hours per week in laboratory and classroom-type facilities. Com- bining the Arts program enrollment estimates presented in table 3-5 with the planning parameters for weekly clock hours of meeting shown in table 3-6, a hypothetical student period structure for the University Division Arts program can be developed. in table 3-7, The results of these efforts are presented where the numbers of student periods per week generated by the estimated enrollments in the Arts program are presented. The student period structure -- that is, the distribution by year level, type of meeting, and degree program -- is clearly indicated for each target enrollment. 54 Thus, �J-60 Ontario: Weekly Clock Hours of Meeting Required in University Baccalaureate Degree Programs in Arts and Science, by Program and Year Level Pr~gram General Science Honors Humanities and Languages Social and Philosophical Studies Commerce and Finance Natural Sciences Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry Biological and Earth N.B. \Jl. \Jl. 1st Lecture/Lab ,nd Lecture/Lab Year Level Jrd Lecture/Lab 16/4 15/8 13/4 13/9 13/4 13/9 --!---!-- 41/12 42/20 18½/-15/2 17/-- 17/-18/2 16/-- 16½/-18/-17/-- 15/-17/-16/-- 67/-68/4 66/-- 17/6 14/15 14/6 18/12½ 15/8 15/11 13/9 12/12 59/29 59/50½ 11 ~th Lecture/Lab Lecture Lab "Lecture" indicates lecture-classroom-type meetings; "Lab" indicates laboratory-type meetings. �\J7. °' 3-7. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Hypothetical Student Period Structure in University Division Arts Program at Alternate Target Enrollments, by Degree Program, Year Level and Type of Meeting La DQ ta to ;cl: Lectu:t:~ - Class:t:QOW Y~a:t: PrQgram General Science Honors Humanities and Languages Social and Philosophical Studies Commerce and Finance Natural Sciences Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry Biological and Earth Total General Science Honors Humanities and Languages Social and Philosophical Studies Commerce and Finance Natural Sciences Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry Biological and Earth Total (Continued) 1st Znd. L~:5rel .3.m Iea;c L~JZ:el hth 2nd 3rd hth All 144 152 116 135 -- -- --- 260 287 All 1st hoo Students 953 285 377 195 --- -- -- 480 130 102 -- -- 232 105 119 108 80 -- -- 213 199 14 12 -- -- 26 -- -- 102 84 70 72 -- -- -- -- 172 156 36 90 30 50 -- -- -- 66 140 1401 1004 -- -- 2405 436 343 -- -- 779 wo Smdents 212 224 160 198 128 162 --- 500 584 576 -- 848 420 520 286 416 234 --- 1784 940 198 136 116 90 540 150 170 144 112 108 102 85 487 464 20 16 -- -- 36 80 153 112 98 108 75 75 65 54 120 42 40 48 391 343 75 55 45 48 181 298 2051 1404 1126 368 4949 630 491 385 93 1599 �• 3-7. • ( Continued) Pw i:I:aro ~ L~ctuJ:~·- - Cla~~I:QQW Xear LeJZ:el 2nd ~ .3m All ~ ~ La:botatc;cz: Iea;c LeJZ:el .Lib. .3m All 1200 Students Vt --.J 424 464 320 396 260 315 --- 1004 1175 1024 994 42 32 -- -- 74 770 718 108 255 78 163 88 110 81 96 355 624 741 10014 1293 989 773 177 3232 General Science Honors Humanities and Languages Social and Philosophical Studies Commerce and Finance Natural Sciences Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry Biological and Earth 1696 870 1040 572 845 455 --- 3581 1897 378 272 215 165 1030 315 357 288 240 234 221 187 176 306 238 182 234 165 150 117 96 Total 4160 2828 2285 �Arts program enrollment at the LOO-student level will produce 2,Lo5 student periods in lecture-classroom meetings and 779 student periods in laboratory meetings. At the 700-student level, L,9L9 student periods of lecture-classroom meetings and 1,599 student periods of laboratory meetings are generated. Finally, at the 1200-student enrollment, the Arts program will involve 10,0lL student periods per week in classroom meetings and 3,232 student periods per week in laboratory meetings. Further detail regarding the dis- tribution by degree program and year level can be observed in table 3-7. 2. University Division, Applied Science Program A similar pattern of analysis was followed in developing the student period structure associated with the Applied Science program. An examination of the data for Ontario higher educational institutions offering applied science programs provided a basis for establishing the typical pattern of weekly clock hours of meeting for the first two years of study. While there is some diversity, the typical requirement is approximately 30 hours per week of formal instruction. In the first year of the program, lecture-class- room meetings account for 16 hours, while laboratory meetings account for 1L hours. In the second year of study, lecture-classroom meetings account for 18 hours while laboratory meetings account for 12 hours. As a general rule, the first year of study is the same at most institutions and students do not begin to specialize in the several applied science disciplines until the second or third year of study. These data are summarized in table 3-8. In table 3-9, hypothetical distributions of enrollment and student period structure in the Applied Science program are presented for the alternate target enrollments. 58 The year-level distributions of enrollment (table �3-8. Ontario: Weekly Clock Hours of Meeting R~quired in University Baccalaureate Degree Programs in Applied Science at Selected Institutions, by Year Level and Type of Meeting Institution Carleton Assumption Toronto Use 1st Year LectureLaboratory Classroom 2nd Year LectureClassroom Laboratory 16 18 15-16 13 14 13-18 18 18-19 14-20 16 14 18 91=. 8}-11½ 102-18 12 59 �3-9. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Hypothetical Distribution of Enrollment and Student Period Structure in University Division Applied Science Program at Target Enrollments of Loo, 700 and 1200 Students by Year Level Enrollment Target L00 Students 700 Students 1200 Students 60 Hypothetical Student Period Structure Enrollment Lecture Laboratory 1st year 2nd year 1st year 2nd year 1st year 2nd year 30 L3 62 28 L8o 688 L2 992 5oL 756 L20 602 868 336 5oL �3-3) were combined with the planning parameters for the weekly clock hours of instruction in the Applied Science program (table 3-8) to obtain the hypothetical student period structures at the several target enrollments. As shown in table 3-9, a total of L80 student periods in lecture-classroom meetings can be expected at the LOO-student enrollment; at the same time, L20 student periods may be expected in laboratory meetings. At the 1200- student enrollment, student periods in lecture-classroom meetings will increase to l,7L8 in number, while laboratory meetings will account for 1,372 student periods. 3. Technology Division Table 3-10 summarizes the hypothetical distribution of enrollment and student period structure in the Technology Division at the several targets. In this instance, an estimating procedure slightly different from that described above was utilized. It was assumed that the five programs of study presently offered in the Technology Division would continue to be offered in the future. However, it also was assumed that these programs would each be deepened and extended to two years in duration. It is possible that the College may introduce new programs, such as electronics or business studies; however, this will not have any marked effect upon the results of this-analysis since the change would probably involve no more than a redistribution of the total enrollments projected for the Technology Division rather than a net addition to them. The College already offers all of the programs of study included in the Technology Division. Therefore, the actual clock-hour requirements for class- room and laboratory meetings presently prevailing at the College were used 61 �°' 3-10. l'0 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Hypothetical Distribution of Enrollment and Student Period Structure in Technology Division at Target Enrollments of 400, 700 and 1200 Students, by Program and Year Level Student Period Structure Lecture-Classroom Laboratori Enrollment 1st Ye~ 2nd Year 1st Year 2nd Year lst__Y_e_ar _2nd _1_ear a 400 Stu_dents Program Forest Technology Mining Technology Engineering Technology Engineering Technology (Ryerson) Architectural Technology (Ryerson) Total Forest Technology Mining Technology Engineering Technology Engineering Technology (Ryerson) Architectural Technology (Ryerson) Total Forest Technology Mining Technology Engineering Technology Engineering Technology (Ryerson) Architectural Technology (Ryerson) Total 42 3 31 34 17 126 59 4 43 48 23 177 85 5 29 2 21 23 12 86 40 3 29 33 16 121 58 630 60 522 34 399 437 360 714 36 279 204 319 28 210 230 1752 b Students 1318 787 720 51 551 627 480 3207 2429 1200 Studentsc 1003 48 387 288 115 1841 440 42 290 330 558 714 340 2302 zoo 885 80 774 1008 460 62 70 33 3 42 48 22 1275 100 1116 1470 660 1044 51 798 912 660 255 173 4621 3465 aindex of growth, 1st year: 1.273; .681 progress to year 2. b Index of growth, 1st year: 1.788; .681 progress to year 2. cindex of growth, 1st year: 2.576; .681 progress to year 2. 85 1445 60 558 420 165 2648 1102 638 42 420 480 1580 �in estimating the student period structure likely to be generated at the several target Technology Division enrollments. At the LOO-student level, lecture-classroom meetings will account for L,o5L student periods per week, while laboratory meetings will account for 2,105 student periods. At the 12OO-student level, student periods in classroom meetings will increase to 8,086; student periods in laboratory meetings will total L,2L8. L. Nursing Program and University Division Part-Time Programs Table 3-11 presents tre estimates of the student periods generated by the nursing and the University Division part-time programs at the alternate target enrollments. For the nursing program, all students were treated as first-year students since only one year of study is presently offered. Nor is this likely to be changed during the interval considered in this report. However, the Con- sultants have assumed a slight deepening in the offerings within the program and have adopted planning parameters of 1L hours per week of lecture-class- room meetings and 6 hours per week of laboratory meetings for use in calculating the student period workloads generated at the target enrollments. At the Loo-student enrollment, 1,582 student periods per week may be expected in classroom meetings and 678 student periods per week may be expected in laboratory meetings. At the 12OO-student level, the classroom-laboratory meeting workload is expected to increase to 2,926 student periods and l,25L student periods per week, respectively. The University Division part-time enrollment estimates were presented earlier. Clearly, the total weekly student periods generated by part-time 63 �3-11. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Hypothetical Student Period Structure in Nurses' Program and University Division Part-Time Students' Program at Alternate Target Enrollmentsa, by Type of Meeting EntQllment Nurses Number of students Lecture - classroom meetings Hours per student per weekb Total student periods per week Laboratory meetings Hours per student per weekb Total student periods per week University Division: ~&ti~ Number of students Lecture - classroom meetings Hours per student per weekc Total student periods per week Laboratory meetings Hours per student per weekc Total student periods per week a 400 700 1200 Students Students Students 113 149 209 14 1582 14 2086 14 2926 6 678 6 894 6 1254 157 153 191 3 471 3 459 3 573 0.5 79 0.5 77 0.5 96 aFull-time target enrollments used for planning. bThis is not the present program, but a target arrangement. 0 In 1962-63, there were 160 course registrations by part-time students. They produced an estimated 459 weekly student periods in classroom meetings and 63 weekly student periods in laboratory meetings, or 2.87 periods per student and .39 periods per student, respectively. These averages have been rounded upward for purposes of calculation, as indicated in the table. 64 �enrollment can vary widely. There is also no basis for estimating the dis- tribution between lecture and laboratory meetings other than the actual experience of the College. For these reasons, the 1962-63 data were analyzed and averages of three hours of classroom meetings per student per week and one-half hour of laboratory meeting per student per week were adopted for use in estimating the number of student periods generated by the part-time student group. For the LOO-student level, this procedure produced an estim- ate of L71 student periods in classroom meetings and 79 student periods in laboratory meetings. At the 12OO-student level, the figures increase to 573 student periods in classroom meetings and 96 student periods in laboratory meetings. D. Instructural Workloads: Summary The student period structures estimated for the several study programs to be offered by the College provide a basis for evaluating the over-all instructional workloads that can be expected at the target enrollments. These over-all summaries are presented in tables 3-12 to 3-lL. At the Loo-student level, 8,992 student periods in classroom meetings and L,O61 student periods in laboratory meetings may be expecteda The comparable figures for the 7OO-student enrollment are lL,322 student periods in classroom meetings and 6,L51 student periods in laboratory meetings. By the time the 12OO-student enrollment is reached, classroom meetings will account for 23,3L7 student periods and laboratory meetings will reach 10,182 student periods. The full-time students will account for 85 percent of all student classroom periods and 87 percent of all student laboratory periods at the 12OO-student enrollment. 65 �3-12. °' °' Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Hypothetical Student Period Structure at Target Enrollment of 400 Students, by Year Level and Type of Meeting 1st ~ Lecture, classroom meetings University Division Arts Applied Science Technology Division Subtotal: student periods 1401 480 2302 4183 1004 Nurses University Division, part time 1582 471 1752 2756 2756 Laboratory meetings University Division Arts Applied Science Technology Division Subtotal: student periods 436 420 1318 2174 343 Nurses University Division, part time 678 79 Total: student periods student periods 2931 4th All 2405 480 4054 6939 1582 471 6236 Total: Year Level 3rd 787 1130 8992 779 420 2105 3304 678 79 1130 4061 �3-13- Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Hypothetical Student Period Structure at Target Enrollment of 700 Students, by Year Level and Type of Meeting .kt: 2nd Lecture, classroom meetings University Division Arts Applied Science Technology Division Subtotal: student periods 2051 688 3207 5946 1404 504 2429 4337 Nurses University Division, part time 2086 459 hth All 1126 368 1126 368 4949 1192 5636 11777 -- -- --- --- 2086 459 8491 4337 1126 368 14322 Laboratory meetings University Division Arts Applied Science Technology Division Subtotal: student periods 630 602 1841 3073 491 336 1102 1929 385 93 1599 938 2943 5480 Nurses University Division, part time 894 77 -- --- -- -- 894 77 4044 1929 385 93 6451 Total: Total: °' --J Year Level 3rd student periods student periods -- --- -- -- -- -- 385 93 -- -- �~ co 3-14- Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Hypothetical Student Period Structure at Target Enrollment of 1200 Students, by Year Level and Type of Meeting Year Level 3rd hth All 2285 741 2285 ---· 741 10014 1748 8086 19848 il1 1ng Lecture, classroom meetings University Division Arts Applied Science Technology Division Subtotal: student periods 4160 992 4621 9773 2828 756 3465 7049 Nurses University Division, part time 2926 573 --- -- -- --- 2926 573 13272 7049 2285 741 23347 Laboratory meetings University Division Arts Applied Science Technology Division Subtotal: student periods 1293 868 2648 4809 989 504 1580 3073 773 177 773 177 -- 3232 1372 4228 8832 Nurses University Division, part time 1254 96 -- -- --- --- 1254 96 6159 3073 773 177 10182 Total: Total: student periods student periods --- --- • -- �E8 Students in Residence Enrollment at the College will not consist entirely of students who commute on a daily basis. Some students will be interested in and require dormitory facilities on campus. The College has already recognized this and built the first student residential unit on campus. It is likely that the number of students that would require accommodation will increase from the present dormitory capacity of 50 students. But the extent to which such dormitory capacity is required or must be provided is a matter of policy and can be controlled by the College. In 1961, L3 percent of all freshman students in Ontario universities were residents of other countries, other provinces, or sections of Ontari~ other than the cities or suburban areas in which the universities were located. At Lakehead College, 21 percent of the freshmen in 1961 had home addresses other than th~ university city or suburban area. The predomin- ately local nature of the College and the lack of student accommodations on campus probably account for the disparity between the College and all universities in the Province in regard to the proportion from out of town. As mentioned above, the Consultants believe that the number of students provided with residential accommodation on campus is a matter of policy. However, the terms of reference of this study include the development of a master plan for campus development; therefore, a conservative estimate of the distribution of students between commuter and non-commuter status was adopted for planning purposes. The pattern as adopted is roughly consistent with the distribution of freshmen by home address in the College in 1961. 69 �Thus, for planning purposes, it was assumed that 25 percent of the students would not be commuter students and would require some kind of residential accommodation on campus. Of these, it was assumed that 75 percent w:,uld be male students and 25 percent would be female students. The latter distribution is roughly consistent with the projections of full-time male and female enrollment at higher educational institutions over the next decade. Thus, the planning parameters imply a total of 100 students in residence at the ~00-student target, 175 students in residence at the 700student target and 300 students in residence at the 1200-student enrollment. Tables 3-15 and 3-16 present these data in greater detail. 70 �3-15. Ontario Universities: Home Addresses of Freshmen Enrolled in October, 1961 All UDl~ers1tle~ Number PerceDt I I University city Suburban area Elsewhere in Ontario: Total Remainder of county or district Other cities in Ontario Other counties or districts in Ontario L~kehead CoJ_lege Number Percent 3230 1035 36.6 11.7 69 54 40.8 32.0 ( 3802) ( 43 .1) (36) (21.3) 287 2386 3.2 27.0 14 19 8.) llo2 1129 12.8 3 1.8 Other provinces Outside Canada 419 345 4. 7 3o9 9 1 5.J Total 8831 100.0 169 .6 100.0 71 �3-16 ... Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: for Residential Accommodation at Alternate Target Enrollment category· Total University city and suburban area Non-commuter enrollment Residence requirements Total (non-commuter enrollment) Male Female 72 Requirements Enrollment 700 12ocr Students Students Typical Distribution: Percent 400 Students 100.0 400 700 1200 75.0 25.0 300 100 525 175 900 JOO 100.0 75.0 25.0 100 75 25 175 132 43 300 225 75 �CHAPTER L TEACHING STATION REQUIREMENTS: CLASSROOMS AND TEACHING LAPDRATORIES The requirements for the classroom and teaching laboratory components of the College's physical plant are dependent upon several factors. Among them are the aggregate contact or clock hours of classroom and laboratory meetings projected, the typical section sizes of these meetings, the number of hours available in the teaching week, and the effectiveness with which classroom and teaching laboratory capacity is used. The remainder of this chapter explains the procedure used in estimating the number of classrooms and laboratories required and the number of student stations to be included therein at the alternate target enrollments. A. Instructional Load: Clock Hours In order to determine how much teaching space capacity is needed, it is necessary to convert the instructional load data presented in the form of total student registrations into corollary estimates reflecting the number of clock hours of classroom and teaching laboratory meeting time required. To this end, planning parameters regarding the typical sizes of instructional meeting groups in lecture-classroom and laboratory meetings must be developed; this will permit the conversion of the weekly student period workloads into weekly meeting group workloads. The last is the more appropriate workload figure for evaluating the number of hours of faculty time required in formal instructional meetings. As a general rule, student groups in classroom and laboratory meetings decline in size as the students progress through the various programs of 73 �study. This occurs for a number of reasons. For one, faculty generally prefer smaller meeting groups as the teaching material becomes more advanced and difficult to deal with. For another, the number of specialized course offerings tends to increase as the students progress to the more advanced levels of instruction and there are fewer students taking the same courses. As a result, the average number of students per course tends to decline as the number of students decreases and the number of courses increases. This is corroborated by evidence concerning practice at other institutions, and is consistent with the declared preferences of the College faculty as revealed in interviews with departmental chairmen held at the outset of this study. For lecture-classroom meetings, the maximum sizes of meeting groups adopted as planning parameters for use in this study were as follows: first year, Lo students; second year, JO students; third year, 25 students; fourth year, 20 students. However, while these figures represent the maximum sizes of the student meeting groups, the typical size meeting group will vary downward from the acceptable maximum. vary from institution to institution. The extent of variation will However, the Consultants believe that there are reasonable standards with respect to the effectiveness with which student station capacity can be utilized and that a standard of 75 percent should be adopted by the College when evaluating the needs for classroom station capacity.a aStudent station utilization represents the proportion of available student station capacity that is utilized during periods when teaching stations are scheduled and in use. Thus, a 100-station classroom used ten hours per week with an average of 50 stations in use during these ten hours wruld have a student station utilization rate of 50 percent. �Therefore, the typical size of student meeting groups in classroom meetings is 25 percent lower than the maximum size mentioned above. A similar analysis may be conducted for laboratory teaching stations. In general, the maximum size of laboratory meeting groups is lower than that of classroom meeting groups at the same year level. However, a slightly higher planning parameter for student station utilization is appropriate in laboratory meetings. Table L-1 summarizes the data and derivation of the planning pg.rameters for the typical sizes of instructional meeting groups in lecture-classroom and laboratory meetings by year level. With these planning criteria in hand, the number of clock hours of meetings per week in lecture-classroom and laboratory meetings at each target enrollment may be estimated. The procedure involves the division of the estimated instructional workloads per week, expressed in terms of student periods, by the planning parameter for the typical size of meeting group for the year level and type of meeting in question. Thus, at the LOO-student enrollment 6,236 student periods per week in classroom meetings are projected for the first-year level of enrollment. The typical size of classroom meeting groups at this year level is 30 students. Dividing the number of student periods by the typical size of the classroom meeting group yields an estimate of 208 clock hours of classroom-type meetings per week generated by first-year students. The same procedure was applied at each target enrollment for each year level of enrollment and type of meeting. By way of sumrrary, the 8,992 classroom student periods projected for the LOO-student enrollment yield a total of 318 clock hours of classroom meetings per week, while the L,061 laboratory student periods yield a total I 75 �4-1. Lakehe·ad College. P.la.p.ning Parameters for Typical Sizes of · Instructional Meeting Groups in Lect.u re-Classroom and Laboratory Meetings, by Year Level Item Lecture, classroom meetings Maximum size of meeting group Student station utilization planning parameter Typical size of meeting group Calculated Use Laboratory meetings Maximum size of meeting group Student station utilization planning parameter Typical size of meeting group Calculated Use 76 1st . Year Level 2nd Jrd 40 30 25 20 30 30 23 25 19 20 15 15 36 24 24 12 .80 29 30 .80 .80 19 19 20 20 .Bo 10 10 �of 155 clock hours of laboratory meetings per week. By the time the 1200- student enrollment is reached, the weekly clock-hour workload in lectureclassroom meetings increases to 887 hours, while the comparable clock-hour workload in laboratory meetings totals L16 hours. B. Teaching Station Requirements The next step in the analysis was the conversion of the clock-hour workload estimates into the number of classrooms and laboratories required at the alternate target enrollments. Two further types of information were needed in order to work out the underlying functional relationship. First, a planning parameter was required with respect to the number of hours of teaching time available per week in classroom and teaching laboratory facilities. Second, planning assumptions were needed with regard to the intensity with which teaching station capacity would be used at the alternate target enrollments. The length of the teaching week may be expressed as the number of hours during which classes might normally be scheduled during the course of the week. Classes at the College presently begin at 9:00 .AM and extend to 6: 00 PM . in the evening. It is assumed that this basic daily schedule will continue to be used in the future, that no classes will be scheduled during the Saturday morning hours and that one hour of effective utilization will be lost each day as a result of luncheon requirements. On this basis, the gross teaching week totals Lo hours of available time per teaching station. Another important variable in determining how many teaching stations are required is the intensity with which classroom and laboratory facilities 77 �--..J co 4-2. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Estimated Clock-Hour Instructional Workload per Week at Alternate Target Enrollments, by Type of Meeting and Year Level Yea;c L§JZ:§l ~ ~ 2nd. ..3m ~ All --- 8992 --- 4061 400 Students Lecture, classroom meetings Student periods per week Typical size of meeting group Clock hours of meeting per week Laboratory meetings Student periods per week Typical size of meeting group Clock hours of meeting per week 6236 30 208 2756 25 110 2931 30 98 1130 20 57 -- ---- 318 155 700 Students Lecture, classroom meetings Student periods per week Typical size of meeting group Clock hours of meeting per week Laboratory meetings Student periods per week Typical size of meeting group Clock hours of meeting per week 8491 30 283 4337 25 173 1126 20 56 368 15 25 14322 4044 30 135 1929 20 96 385 20 19 93 10 9 6451 537 259 i200 Students Lecture, classroom meetings Student periods per week Typical size of meeting group Clock hours of meeting per week Laboratory meetings Student periods per week Typical size of meeting group Clock hours of meeting per week 13272 30 442 7049 25 282 2285 20 114 741 15 49 23347 6159 3073 20 154 773 20 39 177 10 18 10182 JO 205 887 416 �can be scheduled. Several possibilities were considered. facilities, room utilization criteriaa ranging from So For classroom to 70 percent were used in calculating the number of teaching stations required. laboratories, room utilization rates ranging from 30 to So For teaching percent were used. The Consultants believe that room utilization rates of 70 percent in classroom facilities and So percent in laboratory facilities represent reasonable standards of operation and should be adopted as targets that the College will aim to achieve in the operation of its physical plant. the Consultants However, recognize the difficulty of attaining these levels of operating effectiveness when over-all enrollment is lower than 1200 students and when there may be a requirement for specialized facilities that cannot be justified solely in terms of the workloads they satisfy. Therefore, a sliding scale has been adopted for estimating the room utilization standards applicable at the various target enrollments. ization rate of So For classrooms, a room util- percent is assumed for the LOO-student enrollment, rising to 70 percent by the time the 1200-student enrollment is reached. For teaching laboratories, the room utilization rate posited for the LOO-student enrollment is 30 percent, and it rises to the target level of So percent by the time the 1200-student enrollment is realized. By dividing the clock-hour workload per week by the adjusted total of available teaching hours per week (the gross teaching week modified by the projected room utilization rate), the number of teaching stations required aRoom utilization criteria refer to the proportion of available teaching hours that teaching stations are actually in use. For example, use of a 70 percent utilization criterion and a LO-hour teaching week would imply an average room use of 28 hours. 79 �to service the specified workload may be obtained. For example, consider the number of classrooms required at the LOO-student enrollment. clock-hour workload for classroom-type meetings is 318 hours. The total The teaching week totals Lo hours, but when adjusted for a 50 percent room utilization rate is effectively only 20 hours per week per station. Dividing the total clock-hour workload by the effective teaching week per station (318/20) yields a total requirement for 16 classroom-type teaching stations. The same procedure applied at the several target enrollments ;yields the following estimates: 22 classrooms for 700 -students; 32 classrooms for 1200 students; 13 teaching laboratory stations for LOO students; 16 teaching laboratory stations for 700 students; and 21 teaching laboratory stations for 1200 students. C. These data are presented in detail in table L-3." Summary In this chapter, estimates have been presented of the teaching stations required by the College to service the target enrollments. The total capa- city required in classroom and teaching laboratory facilities has been indicated. The calculations, however, have been confined to the number and size distribution of rooms required for group meetings. needs of the teaching space complex haye been noted. The general capacity The actual program specifying the number of square feet of space required is presented in a later chapter, as are the actual classroom size distribution and space planned. 80 �4-3· Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Classroom and Laboratory Teaching Station Requirements at Alternate Target Enrollments E;a;r:cllm~nt ~ Classrooms Clock-hour workload per week Teaching week: number of hours available per teaching station Gross total Room utilization rate (percent) Adjusted total Number of teaching stations required Laboratories Clock-hour workload per week Teaching week: number of hours available per teaching station Gross total Room utilization rate (percent) Adjusted total Number of teaching stations required 400 Students 700 Students 1200 Students 318 537 887 40 50 20 40 60 24 40 70 28 16 22 32 155 259 416 40 30 12 40 40 16 40 50 20 13 16 21 81 �CHAPTER 5 STAFF REQUIREMENTS Having considered the instructional workloads and teaching station requirements implied by the alternate target enrollments, it is appropriate to turn to questions associated with the staff population of the College. The estimates of staff requirements will represent a useful link in determining the space requirements of the College at the target enrollments. A. Faculty Requirements Two broad approaches were used in estimating the faculty requirements of the College at the target enrollments. In the first approach, faculty requirements were taken to be a function of the clock-hour workloads generated at the target enrollments in the form of classroom and laboratory meetings. In the second approach, faculty requirements were estimated as a function of the student/staff ratio appropriate to the several categories of enrollment at the College. Consider the first approach. In order to make faculty requirements a function of the total clock-hour workload per week, it is necessary to adopt a planning parameter with respect to the average weekly teaching load per faculty member. within institutions. It is well known that this varies widely among and A figure commonly used as an upper limit for college and university faculty is 12 clock hours of teaching per faculty member per week. per week. 82 However, in practice the average tends to be closer to 9 hours �The problem is further complicated by the difficulty of defining a clock hour of instruction. Everyone agrees that an hour of laboratory in- struction requires a different kind of preparation than an hour of classroom instruction. It also is generally agreed that a laboratory hour of instruction is not the equivalent of a lecture hour of instruction in terms of actual workload. into account varies. But the way in which this difference is taken In order to arrive at an equivalent clock-hour work- load total at the alternate target enrollments, a planning parameter was adopted under which one laboratory hour was treated as the equivalent of half a lecture hour. Thus, the projected total equivalent clock-hour workloads at the 400-, 700- and 1200-student enrollments are 396 hours, 667 hours and 1,095 hours, respectively. Two estimates were then prepared of the faculty requirements at the alternate target enrollments. Under Estimate 1, the equivalent clock- hour workload was divided by an average weekly teaching load per faculty member of 12 hours per week. The estimated faculty requirements under this procedure range from 33 persons at the 400-student enrollment to 91 persons at the 1200-student enrollment. Under Estimate 2, the 9-hour teaching load per faculty member was used. The resulting projections of faculty requirements range from 44 persons at the 400-student enrollment to 122 persons at the 1200-student level. Because of the difficulties associated with these procedures, the Consultants investigated another approach to the problem of estimating faculty requirements. In this second approach, emphasis is placed upon the stu- dent/staff ratio, a figure often used in budgeting. The procedure involves 83 �the division of the number of students in a particular enrollment category by a planning parameter for the number of students per staff member appropriate to that enrollment category to obtain the number of faculty members required. By way of example, an enrollment of 100 students divided by a planning parameter of 10 students per staff member would yield a requirement for 10 faculty members. The projected number of students in each enrollment category has already been estimated. Only the planning parameters for the student/staff ratio appropriate to each enrollment category are needed to complete the faculty requirement estimates. ing the appropriate ratios. A variety of sources were used for develop- For the University Division, data reflecting conditions at Canadian institutions ·of higher education .were examined. For institutions in Central Canada, the student/staff ratio has declined from 16.0:1 in 1951-52 to 13.5:1 in 1961-62. trend is in evidence. A very pronounced downward The Consultants believe the trend will continue, but in somewhat retarded fashion, and have adopted as a planning parameter a student/staff ratio of lJ.0:1.a In a similar manner, an appropriate planning parameter was developed for the student/staff ratio in the Teclmology Division. Data for Ontario technical institutes for the past several years indicated an average student/staff ratio of 16.6:1. No definite trend could be established on the basis of the available data. Therefore, the Consultants adopted aThis 'is approximately consistent with tlie material presented in the study prepared by the Committee of Presidents of Provincially -A ssisted Universities on post-seconoary education in Ontario. �a student/staff planning parameter of 16:1 for use in estimating the faculty requirements of the Technology Division. Using the student/staff ratio approach for calculating faculty requirements, the following estimates of faculty were obtained for the alternate target enrollments: at 400 students, 38 faculty; at 700 students, 64 faculty; at 1200 students, 105 faculty. The data involved in the development of the alternate faculty requirement estimates are presented in table 5-1. For purposes of the remainder of this study, Estimate 3, the faculty estimate based upon the student/ staff ratio approach, was adopted. This approach yields results that are more consistent with general experience and the probable course of development than are the other estimates outlined above. One further aspect of the faculty picture should be discussed. For use elsewhere in this report in connection with financial considerations, an estimate of the faculty structure by rank is useful. Therefore, an investigation was conducted into the prevailing conditions in Canadian I I I I higher educational institutions with respect to distribution of full-time faculty by rank. Analysis of the data yielded the following weighted average distribution: professors, 28.3 percent; associate professors, 21.7; ~ssistant professors, 26.3 percent; lecturers and instructors, 23.6 percent. The results of applying this distributional pattern to the total faculty estimate at the alternate target enrollments are presented in table 5-2. I I I 85 �5-1. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology~ Alternate Estimates of Faculty Requirements at Alternate Target Enrollments 400 llem Clock-hour workload per week Lecture, classroom meetings Laboratory meetings Number Equalized Total equivalent clock hours Estimate 1 Average weekly teaching load per faculty member Faculty requirements Implied ratio: students per staff member Estimate 2 Average weekly teaching load per faculty member Faculty requirements Implied ratio: students per staff member Estimate 3 Enrollment University Division Technology Division Othera Ratio: students per staff member University Division Technology Division Other Faculty requirements University Division Technology Division Other Total Recapitulation: Estimate 1 Estimate 2 Estimate 3 N.B. Enrollment 700 1200 Stpdents Students Students 318 537 887 155 78 259 130 416 208 396 667 1095 12 12 33 56 12 91 12.1 12.5 13.2 9 44 9 74 9 122 9.5 188 212 144 13 16 13 402 298 180 13 16 13 14 31 13 19 772 428 247 13 16 13 59 27 11 14 19 38 64 105 33 44 38 56 74 91 122 105 faculty requirements 64 Estimate 3 adopted for use in planning. aAll nurses plus one-fifth of part-time students in University Division. 86 �5-2. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Faculty Requirements · at Alternate Target Enrollments, by Rank Rank ~~~ All ranks Professor Associate professor Assistant professor Other Percentage Di ~:tribJ.J.:ticD 100.0 ~ 21.7 26.3 23.6 S:tmien:t~ Enrollment 700 S;tiid~D:t~ 1200 ~:t1.ui ~n:t ~ 38 11 8 10 9 64 18 14 17 15 105 29 23 28 25 400 87 �B. Total Staff Requirements Budgetary considerations and institutional structure will largely determine the extent to which the College faculty is supplemented by various classes of supporting personnel, as well as the distribution of nonfaculty personnel among broad departmental groups. Table 5-3 presents an estimate of the potential structure of the over-all staff of the College at the alternate target enrollments. These estimates are approximations only; they do not reflect the results of a detailed evaluation of the course of personnel development in each component of the College. More reliable estimates of the characteristics of future personnel expansion for each administrative unit can be developed only after a type of study that goes beyond the scope of the Consultants• responsibilities in this project. However, the data were developed on the basis of the Consultants' experiences at other institutions and provide a useful reference benchmark in dealing with various aspects of the campus development program. As may be seen in the table, total staff requirements at the several target enrollments are as follows: at the 400-student level, 100 persons; at the 700-student level, 168 persons; at the 1200-student level, 276 persons. , . These figures may be considered as upper limits. Somewhat lower totals were used as the basis for the estimate of parking requirements in Chapter 9. 88 �I I S-3. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Hypothetical Structure of Total Staff Requirements at Alternate Target Enrollments Percentage Distribution 400 Students Enrolllllent 700 Students 1200 Students All departments Faculty and other professional Supporting staff 1000 100 168 276 47.0 SJ.0 47 SJ 79 89 130 146 Academic departments Faculty and other professional Supporting staff 4S.S 46 76 126 JB.o 38 7.S 8 64 13 10s 21 Non-academic departments Faculty and other professional Supporting staff 54.S 54 92 lS0 9.0 4S.S 9 45 lS 76 25 126 N.B. Items may not add to totals due to rounding. �CHAPTER 6 ACADEMIC SPACE RE~UIREMENTS In this chapter the requirements for academic space will be presented. Academic space is defined to include classrooms, laboratories, other space used by academic departments and faculty office space. office space is considered in the next chapter. space is considered only in terms of net area. Administrative In both Chapters 6 and 7 Gross area building re- quirements are first considered in Chapter 8. A. Classroom-Type Space This category comprises lecture theaters, classrooms and seminar rooms. The Consultants believe that these facilities should be considered as available :on a· College-wide basis, rather than allocated to specific departments. Higher utilization rates may be achieved if classrooms are assigned interchangeably among divisions and other elements of the academic organization. 1. Classroom Capacity Distribution The number of classrooms required at each enrollment level has been calculated in Chapter 4. For 400 students 16 rooms (or teaching stations) will be required; for 700 students the total is 22 rooms; and for 1200 students the total is 32 rooms. The next step is the determination of the distribution of classroom sizes within these totals or, expressed in other terms, the number of student stations by capacity size group. 90 �During the field survey phase of the project the Consultants solicited information from the administration and faculty of the College concerning the desired maximum and typical section sizes preferred for each course~ This information was used in Chapter 3 as a basis for determining the number of clock hours of instruction required for the target enrollments in classroom work. The preponderant choice of course section size was in the 25-40 group, except for nurses' courses. However, it would be inad- visable to restrict the classroom sizes to such a narrow range. Over time the range of section sizes may prove in fact to be considerably wider than was expressed by the faculty currently. For example, heavily attended lecture courses may consist of one or two hours of meeting as a single, large section. A third hour might break down this large group into several small recitation sections or seminars. In any case the Consultants feel it wise to build in a margin of safety by increasing the range of classroom sizes and the number of student stations as well. The recommended distribution of classrooms and seminar rooms is presented in table 6-1. Over 1,800 stations are available for 1200 full-time students plus nurses. This is probably in excess of any likely load on the facilities. On the other hand the JOO-station lecture theatre can be justified by its use for extra-curricular activities as well. A classroom to hold all first-year Arts students in a single section will require about 200 seats. 2. Space Standards for Classrooms and Seminars The area of the projected classrooms may be determined by multiplying the number of student stations in each by the number of square feet per station, as indicated in table 6-1. The square feet per station will vary 91 I �6-1. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Space Requirements for Classroom-Type Rooms Number of u~~;ts Enrollment Categor:y 1.0.Q l2.QQ. Area per Unit Total A;r:~a.- ·ia En.:ollm~nt 1QQ. 12.QQ ( square feet) Lecture rooms Capacity: 300 Capacity: 225 Capacity: 140 Capacity: 100 1(225) 1(140) 1(300) 1(225) 1(140) 1(100) 11.5 12 12 12 Subtotal Classrooms Capacity: Capacity: 60 40 5(60) 9(40) 7(60) 13(40) 12.5 14 Subtotal Seminar rooµis Capacity: 16 Total 6(16) 22 8(16) 32 20 2700 1600 3450 2700 1680 1200 4380 9030 3750 5040 5250 7280 8790 12530 1920 2560 15090 24120 aFor a student enrollment level of Loo, assume one classroom@ !LO stations, three@ 60 stations, eight@ Lo stations and four@ 16 stations. This will imply a total area of 9,690 square feet. 92 �I I inversely with the capacity of the room, as the percentage of aisle space diminishes in larger rooms. The student station in all classrooms is as- sumed to be a tablet arm chair. The chairs are arranged in rows three feet two inches back-to-back and two feet on centers. A space of seven feet six inches multiplied by the width of the room is recommended to accommodate circulation and the instructor's desk at the front. Aisles extending from the front to the rear are at least two in number and are a minimum of three feet in width. A typical room is illustrated in plate 2. The unit area for seminar rooms is 20 square feet per person, providing 24 linear inches of table per student and permitting the arrangement of tables to form a circle or a polygon. Plate 2 also shows this arrange- ment. B. Departmental Space The balance of the academic space may be designated as departmental space in that each room may be assigned to a particular department. How- ever, only a few departments, all in the field of science, merit separate consideration as such for purposes of programming space. For example, the humanities and social sciences, with only a few exceptionsa, require nothing but classroom and faculty office space. As the former have already been programmed, subsuming the requirements of these disciplines, no special aThe exceptions are the Department of Psychology, which may develop as a middle ground between the social and the natural sciences, the language laboratory and a map room for work in History. 93 �PLATE 2 PLANNING STANDARDS AND UNIT AREA ALLOCATIONS CLASSROOMS • AND SEMINAR-CONFERENCE ROOMS -- --CHALKBOARD ....I n D ~:~T CHAIR r-.,.I - I r I • I T I : - 12•-"' T ,- - I I I I I I I I I I I I I +:--=,+ - T - T - T --. I I I I I I I I I I I • I _, I .,, ,--r-..&.--,.-~-T-+-~ I I I l L-t-T-+I I I I : I 1 l t I I I I I I I I 1 I T - " T - ?_J. I I I I I I I I I : I I I I I I I t I I CO . ....I _-4 I I a j I N I I I r-J.--t--.J.-• -T--1-+-, I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I 1 I I I I I I ... -1- -t- - .L. - .J. - 4 - J. _.J ' I I I I I I I I : I +- I I I I I I I I I I I I I L--L- _J_ - J.._ -L _J __ 1-..J- _J --- - TYPICAL CLASSROOM: 40 SEATS, AREA =580 so.n. -- H0/40 • 1"4 SQ. f"t PEIi STATION CHALKBOlAD C C uu 11'-o" TYPICAL SEMINAR-CONFERENCE ROOM; AREA=320 SQ. FT.; 320/16 16SEATS 0 I 2 3 4 5 94 10 = 20 SQ. FT. PER STATION 20 FT. �consideration of English, Political Science and so forth as departments is required. The space programs presented in this chapter are organized as follows. The four departments with the widest variety of facilities requirements are presented first. These are the three basic sciences, Biology, Chemistry and Physics, and the Department of Psychology. science facilities follows. A table of interdepartmental Then the balance of the laboratory and special purposes areas for both science and non-science departments is listed. Finally, academic space requirements, including faculty office space, are summarized for all enrollment levels. 1. Department of Biology This department, including botany and zoology, will offer a major and also provide service courses for students in other departments. Table 6-2 indicates a potential development of this Department's facilities. The main groupings are office space, teaching laboratories, research space and miscellaneous facilities. The number of stations in elementary labora- tories is based on the section size preferences of the faculty. The area per unit or per station reflects the amount of bench space required by the individual student. 2. Department of Chemistry This Department's space program (table 6-3) follows the outline of the Department of Biology~ Separate laboratories are listed for elementary work and for analytical, organic and physical chemistry. Organic chemistry 95 �6-2..-.., Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: for the Department of Biology Category Number of Units Enrollment 1200 700 Space Requirements Area per Unit '' Total ·Area Enrollment 700 1200 (square feet) Office space Faculty Assistant Subtotal Teaching laboratories Elementary Advanced Advanced Preparation and storage Sub.total Research space Faculty Undergraduate Subtotal Miscellaneous space Animal quarters Darkroom Glassware storage Chemical storage Media preparation and autoclave Transfer room Herbarium Subtotal Subtotal Storage Total 96 4 1 2(24) 20 16 2 6 5 2 2(24) 20 20 3 8 100 50 400 50 450 500 100 600 40 50 50 1920 1000 800 500 4220 1920 1000 1000 4720 220 360 580 480 810 110 60 Boo 330 325 80 450 50 50 60 60 75 50 60 700 Bo 75 50 100 865 5950 6995 300 355 6250 7350 �b- 3 . ., Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: for the Department of Chemistry Nwnl.2ei: Q;t: Unit~ Eni:Qllm~D:t Catee;m:y 1.QQ l2.QQ Space Requirements Area per U;c.i:t Tc:tial A;c:~a E;c.i:cllm~nt 1QQ 12.Q.Q. ( square feet) Office space Faculty Assistant Subtotal Teaching laboratories Elementary Analytical Organic Physical Preparation and storage Balance rooms Subtotal Research space Faculty Undergraduate Subtotal Miscellaneous space Stockroom Special chemicals Subtotal Subtotal Storage Total • I 4 2 2(24) 20 20 8 2 3 5 100 3 50 2(24) 20 20 10 40 45 3 5 400 100 500 500 150 650 65 1920 900 1000 520 800 370 5510 1920 900 1000 650 1100 370 5940 110 60 220 180 400 330 300 630 450 100 500 50 550 100 600 6960 7820 355 395 7315 8215 97 �will probably be taken by Biology and pre-medical majors as well as by those specializing in Chemistry. 48 stations, are listed. Two elementary laboratories, totalling These might function to accommodate three groups of 16 students, each group led by a teaching assistant. Overflow from these laboratories could be accommodated in the room for analytical chemistry, which will probably have a low utilization rate. J. Department of Physics Whether or not a major is offered in Physics, it will probably be essential to provide one elementary and two advanced laboratories. Stu- dents in Applied Science will probably take two years of Physics before the 1200-student enrollment is reached. 4. Department of Psychology It is assumed that this Department will, in the not too distant future, follow the prevailing pattern of offering experimental work. may imply working with small animals. In time this The inclusion of an audition labora- tory for experiments in hearing and speech is, of course, conjectural; however, some specialized space of comparable size will probably be needed before 1974. 5. Interdepartmental Science Facilities A number of auxiliary science facilities can be shared by two or more departments. Table 6-6 lists two groups of these facilities. The first consists of a series of small areas which are attached to the principal science lecture-demonstration room. 98 The second consists principally of �6-4. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: for the Department of Physics Numher of Units Enrollment 1QQ l2.QO. Space Requirements Area per Unit Total Area Enrollment 1.QQ. l2.QO. ( square feet) Office space Faculty Assistant Subtotal Teaching laboratories Elementary Advanced Advanced Preparation and storage Darkrooms Subtotal Research space Faculty Undergraduate Subtotal Miscellaneous space Battery room Subtotal Storage Total 2 3 100 200 300 1 1 50 50 250 50 350 24 6 24 12 12 40 60 80 960 480 480 2 2 50 100 2270 960 720 960 345 100 110 60 110 180 290 520 100 100 2910 4055 145 205 3055 4260 8 250 1 3 2 5 3085 220 300 99 �6-5.~ Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: for the Department of Psychology Category Number of Units Enrollment 700 1200 Space Requirements Area per Unit Total Area Ehrollment 700 1200 (square feet) Office space Faculty offices Subtotal Teaching laboratories Experimental Assembly area Audition laboratory Subtotal Research space Faculty Storage Subtotal Miscellaneous space Animal quarters Animal experiment area Shop Subtotal Subtotal Storage Total 100 2 3 100 200 200 300 300 16 16 16 16 55 880 880 320 150 1350 20 320 1200 2 3 110 220 330 295 125 455 120 200 100 420 150 200 100 450 2115 2555 110 130 2225 2685 75 �I I I I I I I 6-6. , Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Space Requirements for Interdepartmental Science Facilities Number of Units Categocy; Enrollment 1QQ ~ Area per Unit Total Area Enrollment 700 llQQ. ( square feet) Lecture demonstration areas Biology Chemistry Physics General Subtotal Miscellaneous areas Shop Darkroom (photographic) Tracer laboratory Instrument room General office Subtotal Total 75 75 160 100 410 75 75 160 100 410 400 150 600 300 150 1600 500 150 600 400 150 1800 2010 2210 101 �rooms containing scientific apparatus. The largest of these, a laboratory for isotope work, will probably not be needed until the enrollment has passed 700. It can serve Biology and Chemistry and possibly Physics as well. 6. Miscellaneous Laboratories and Special Purpose Areas The listing in table 6-7 indicates some space for courses not presently offered. These are an electronics laboratory for work in Electronics Technology and an accounting laboratory for courses in Business Administration, probably at the technology level. is viewed as a future likelihood. at other institutions. The inclusion of these facilities Both attract large numbers of students However, even if these particular subject areas are not offered, some expansion of facilities based on broadened courses of study in technology is likely. Thus, at the 1200-student enrollment level the total number of laboratories has been raised from 21, as projected in Chapter 3, to 24, including those in tables 6-2 through 6-5 and table 6-7. These include a calculator room suitable as a laboratory in such course areas as statistics, biometrics, psychology and business accounting. Space for Forestry, Geology and Mining follows current practice. A testing laboratory and drafting rooms will relate to Engineering Technology and Applied Science programs. The number of drafting boards required is more significant than the number of drafting rooms. At the 1200-stu- dent enrollment level 1,320 student period hours of drafting per week will be scheduled for courses in Technology and Applied Science. scheduled hours per week, 55 boards will be needed. Assuming 24 However, non-scheduled use of these boards for assignment is also needed, so that 100 boards have 102 �6-7. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Space Requirements for Miscellaneous Laboratories and Special Purpose Areas lil.lw:ber o! Unit~ Em::cllwent Cate~o;r:y 100 l2QQ. Area per Un;i,t Tctal A;c~a E;w:ollm~nt ~ l2QQ. ( square feet) Science and Technology areas Drafting (three rooms) Electronics Forestry Geology Materials testing Mining Preparation and storage spacea Subtotal I I I I I Non-science areas Accounting Calculator room Language laboratory Auxiliary space Map room Storage Subtotal Total 65 35 100 35 25 35 30 35 25 12 18 30 40 20 16 35 35 35 35 40 45 3500 2275 1225 1050 1225 1000 540 1225 1050 1225 1000 810 1095 8410 1320 10130 40 18 720 25 25 500 24 30 480 150 200 12.5 217.5 720 625 720 200 250 200 271.5 10,58.5 12845 aThis item is computed at 1,5 percent of the listed Science and Technology laboratory space. I I 103 11 �been programmed. Similar calculations formed the basis of the estimates at the other target enrollment levels. 7. Summary The summary of academic space requirements is presented in tables 6-8 and 6-9. The totals of 70,585, 51,730 and 29,125 net square feet of academic space for the 1200-, 700- and 400-student enrollment levels may be calculated also as net area per full-time student. ing figures are then 59, 74 and 73 square feet per student. The correspondThus, the 1200-student level, although providing the greatest variety of facilities, proves the most efficient and economical of the three target enrollments in respect to required academic space per student. A parallel situation is found to obtain with regard to non-academic space, as described in the next chapter. 8. Space Standards for Laboratories, Research Space and Offices The unit area per station in teaching laboratories varies with the complexity and type of apparatus used. Rooms with fewer stations generally require more square feet per student, as the proportion of circulation space is necessarily greater. Preparation rooms associated with the lab- oratories are estimated at 15 percent of the area of the laboratory proper. In science departments the item in the tables labelled storage calculated at five percent of all other space. has been This is additional to storage which may be included in the allowance for preparation space. In the basic science departments research space is programmed for the 104 �6-8. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Summary of Academic Space Requirements Cateio;r:y Number of Units Enrollment 1QQ l2QQ Total A;r~a Area per Unit E;w:ollm~nt 1QQ l2.00. ( square feet) Classroom-type space Faculty office spacea Departmental space: Biology Chemistry Physics Psychology Interdepartmental science facilities Miscellaneous laboratories Total 52 89 100 15090 5200 6250 7315 24120 8900 7350 3055 2225 8215 4260 2685 2010 10585 2210 12845 51730 70585 aThe number of units in this category is derived by subtracting from the total required full-time equivalent faculty the number of faculty listed separately under the Departments of Biology, Chemistry, Physics and Psychology. 105 �6-9. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: AcAdemmc.i .Spa.ce ·Requ.!i..red ·at· the · 400-Stuaent Enrollment Level Category Total Area ( square feet) Classroom-type space Faculty office space Laboratories: Biology (2) Chemistry ( 2) D:r-afting (2) Forestry _( 1) Geology (1) Materials (1) Mining (1) Physics (2) Language (1) Subtotal Preparation rooms and miscellaneous departmental facilities Total 106 9690 3800 1920 2920 1750 1050 1225 1000 540 1440 630 12475 3160 29125 �faculty and for advanced student work. For faculty an allocation at 110 square feet is made on an individual basis. 15 This area will provide 12 to linear feet of laboratory bench or suitable open space for free-stand- ing apparatus. For students in honors or other independent work an alloca- tion of 60 square feet is provided implying eight ·to ten linear feet of bench. In Chapter 5 the number of faculty at each enrollment level was pro- jected on a full-time equivalent basis; it is proposed that faculty office space be allocated in the same manner. Thus, two half-time instructors would receive the same allocation of space as one full-time instructor. The basic premise in regard to the faculty office is that it should afford privacy, both for the instructor's own pursuits and for conferences with individual students. A private office should logically result in greater faculty productivity than will shared space. It is suggested that a private office of 100 square feet represent the basic allocation for the faculty. 107 �CHAPTER 7 SPACE REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-ACADEMIC ACTIVITIES This chapter describes the space requirements for all facilities required by the College other than those which have been considered in the preceding chapter. A. The various elements are described in alphabetical order. Administrative Office Space Under this heading are included the offices for academic, business and general administration, as well as those offices concerned with external affairs and certain auxiliary functions, (See table 7-1.) The set of. unit space standards used in programming these administrative offices differs from those in the preceding chapter relative to faculty offices.a The deans and directors of the principal units are allocated 200 and 150 square feet, respectively, because of the frequent conferences and number of visitors associated with administration. Professional level assistants are assigned to private offices of 120 square feet. Other cat- egories of personnel are assigned to non-private office areas, where the space per person includes a desk, a chair, sometimes a side chair and circulation space. aWhere the number of personnel in a particular unit is estimated, no distinction is made between part-time and full-time staff. For administrative components as small as in liberal arts colleges, it is likely that the space requirements of part-time employees are almost the same as would be employed by an equivalent number of full-time personnel. 108 �7-1. ..Lake head College of Arts, Science and Technology: Space Requirements for Administrative Offices and Related Space Category Number of Units Ettrollment 1200 700 Area per Unit Total Area Enrollment 1200 700 (square feet) I I Principal Administrative assistant Secretary Files, etc. Reception Subtotal 1 1 1 1 1 2 300 300 300 100 75 100 75 60 125 660 100 150 75 150 775 Dean of Arts Secretary Reception Subtotal 1 1 1 1 200 75 200 75 60 335 200 75 100 375 Dean of Science and Technology Secretary Reception Subtotal 1 1 1 1 200 75 200 75 200 75 100 375 Dean of Students Assistant Secretary Reference (placement) Subtotal 1 335 1 1 2 150 120 75 150 1 1 1 150 120 75 150 1 1 1 2 150 120 75 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 180 120 100 75 1 Registrar Assistant Secretary Files Subtotal 1 Director of Admissions Assistant Secretary Files Reception Subtotal 1 Comptrollera Bursar Cashier Secretary :w 1 75 150 375 -- 75 50 275 150 150 120 150 200 540 150 120 75 75 420 75 75 175 475 150 120 150 100 200 720 120 100 75 180 120 100 75 ( Continued) 11 I 109 �7-1. . ( Continued) Category Number of Units Enro 11.men t 1200 700 Area per Unit Total Area Enrollment 700 1200 (square feet) Comptroller ( continued) Vault Files Counter Reception Punched cards equipment: 026 082 402 Miscellaneous Subtotal Director of Development and Public Relations Alumni Se9retary SecretaryFiles· Reception Work space Subtotal Administrative service u·n it: Mimeograph Multilith Duplicator Graphotype Addressograph Work tables Files and plates Miscellaneous Postage meter Desks (typing) Storage Subtotal Miscellaneous space Conference room Inactive records Staff common room Faculty common room Subtotal ( Continued) 110 cf) 75 100 cf) 1 1 1 50 .. 50 80 50 50 80 75 590 1105 150 120 75 90 70 120 625 150 120 75 150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 80 125 65 50 75 80 125 65 50 75 100 40 50 50 1 2 60 1 75 60 50 75 410 cf) 75 770 16 16 20 75 100 125 75 320 200 150 JOO 970 80 125 65 50 75 120 75 75 50 120 100 935 320 JOO 200 450 1270 �7-1. ( Continued) Total Area Enrollment Category 700 1200 (square ·feet) Summary Principal Dean of Arts Dean of Science Dean of Students Registrar Admissions a Comptroller Development and Public Relations Service Unit Miscellaneous Total t:00 335 335 375 275 475 590 410 770 970 775 375 375 540 420 720 1105 625 935 1270 5195 7140 aThe head of this office may be designated as Vice Principal-Administration. 111 1, �1. Office of the Principal For the Principal a suite of rooms is envisaged. These offices should have their own reception area, space for one or two secretaries (depending on the enrollment level) and a private office for an administrative assistant. 2. Office of the Dean of Arts For the Dean of Arts, in addition to his private office! spaces are listed for a secretary and for reception; however, in practice it is likely that this reception area will be combined with those listed under related offices, such as the Dean of Students and the Registrar. 3. Office of the Dean of Science and Technology As the College develops it is expected that the academic program will be administered by two deans, one in charge of the work in the arts and one responsible for science and technology. Their space and supporting staff will be similar. L. Office of the Dean of Students As the College approaches the 7OO-student enrollment level it will be desirable to separate the responsibility for academic affairs from the responsibility for student life and activities. egory will be a Dean of Students. In charge of the second cat- This office will be responsible for the vocational guidance and placement functions of the College. A reference room where material on careers can be housed is a desirable adjunct·. 112 �5. Office of the Registrar For this office, in addition to the Registrar, space is listed for an assistant (at the 1200-student enrollment level), a secretary and files. No reception area is listed as it 1s assumed that the Registrar will share reception space with the Dean of Arts and the Dean of Students. 6. Office of the Director of Admissions In addition to staff space, this office must provide a reception area large enough to provide comfortable seating for two or three groups of applicants and their families. ?. Office of the Comptroller (or Vice Principal-Administration) I The Comptroller is one of the principal officers of the College. It is assumed that he will be assisted eventually by a Bursar and a Cashier. I I I I '• I Together they will be responsible for the business management and accounting functions of the institution, as well as for such tasks as maintaining a student bank. Recent experience at liberal arts colleges indicates that even small institutions may benefit by the acquisition of punched card equipment and that such equipment may serve to depress the number of personnel required. In this report it is not necessary or possible to jus- tify in specific terms the acquisition of such equipment. As only approx- imately 250 square feet will be necessary, it is thought wise to program space for punched card machines. If the equipment is not acquired, it is quite likely that an additional staff member will then be necessary sometime after the 700-student enrollment level is attained. This additional 113 l 1 I �person, with files and miscellaneous equipment, will then need a considerable part of the space listed in the table for the equipment. 8. Office of the Director of Development and Public Relations Under this heading will be the personnel concerned with what may be termed the external affairs of the College. At the 1200 enrollment level the functions of the principal fund raiser and of the Alumni Secretary are separated. 9. Administrative Service Unit It is recommended that the complex of clerical services which are auxiliary to the administrative activities of the College be consolidated into one office. This office will then include mimeograph, multilithing and other types of duplicating, all addressing and mailing and the central typing pool. In all likelihood the personnel used in typing and the other functions can be interchangeable. The space program provides for sufficient equipment for these purposes, if modern high speed models are acquired. Under the heading "files and plates" will be the addressograph plates for all College functions. One duplicator, such as the Xerox 91.L, can serve all College offices, including the Registrar's requirements for copying student transcripts and other records. It is considered better practice to provide this type of equipment centrally rather than to disperse duplicating services on a departmental basis. 10. Miscellaneous Facilities This last group of administrative facilities includes four elements. 114 �The first is a conference room for administration use, such as will be required for faculty or administrative committees or committees of the Board of Governors. The second is a room for files or inactive records. The source of these records might be the Registrar 1 s office, the Deans' offices or any of the administrative units described up to this point in the chapter. Finally, two common rooms are indicated, one for faculty and a sec- ond for non-professional staff attached to the administrative offices. The two common rooms might share a small kitchenette for use in preparation of lunches or tea. B. Food Service Facilities Food service facilities comprise areas for dining, for food prepara- tion and storage, and for administration. The peak load on these facilities will be at the lunch hour, when it is expected that almost the entire student body plus a proportion of the faculty and staff will require space. The comparative isolation of the College suggests that few students will leave the campus at this time. Table 7-2 programs seating for one-third of the student body plus 25 percent of the faculty and staff. Thus, three separate seatings are necessary for the campus population to be fed at lunch. A considerable number of students may bring at least part of their own lunches, but this will not affect the amount of seating required. The program listed in table 7-2 is a purely functional one, assuming a single kitchen and only one dining room; however, a snack bar, separate from the dining room, is indicated. The relation of this program to the existing dual food service facilities is explored in the next chapter. 115 �7-2. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Space Requirements for Food Service Facilities Catee;o;r:y Number of Units Enrollment .7.00 l2QQ Area per Unit Total Area Enrollment 1.QQ l2QQ ( square feet) Office and staff space Director Assistant Secretary and files Men's lockers and toilet. Women's lockers and toilet Subtotal Dining space Food preparation and service Kitchen Bakery Serving Subtotal 1 1 1 1 1 270 450 270 450 120 100 12 Summary Office and staff space Dining space Food preparation and service Storage and miscellaneous space Snack bar Total 116 75 120 150 465 120 100 100 150 200 670 3240 5400 675 250 1425 1125 250 700 2075 400 250 150 200 100 75 1175 700 400 200 JOO 125 100 1825 125 150 600 100 975 150 200 1000 150 1500 465 3240 1425 1175 975 670 5400 2075 1825 1500 7280 11470 500 Storage and miscellaneous space Dry stores Refrigerated stores Receiving Dish and ware washing Utensils, etc. Waste disposal Subtotal Snack bar Preparation Serving Seating Storage Subtotal 120 60 100 10 �C. Library The development of a space program for the library involves questions which are distinct from the pattern of presenting requirements for other types of buildings. Whereas almost all construction at the College is a function, directly or indirectly, of the size and composition of enrollment, the growth of the library's collection is much more a function of time. That is, the collection would continue to grow even if enrollment were constant. Reading space, however, is a function of curriculum and enrollment, while staff space is influenced by both the size of the collection and the intensity of student use. These factors condition the discussion which follows. The library of Lakehead College presently contains about 30,000 volumes. In order to award degrees in June, 1966, the College should have a library of at least 60,000 volumes. At present the library is undertaking what amounts to a crash program to meet this target. In order to gain per- spective on the desirable growth of the library collection beyond the 60,000 volume figure, an examination was made of the libraries at a number of the other colleges and µniversities. There are very few comparable situations in Canada as most Canadian institutions are considerably larger than the target enrollment of 1200 students which forms the limit point of this study. Therefore, the principal source of relevant information is contained in the listing of United States college libraries published annually by the U.S. Office of Education. Table 7-3 lists data on enrollment varies from 588 students to 961 students. 1L institutions whose These institutions approximate in over-all size the intermediate target enrollment level of lD �I-' I-' co 7-3- United State~r: ~ Kenyon Reed Goucher Earlham Whitman Enrollmenta Collection Number Percent Qi2erating E2il?enditures in Dollars Books and Number Added Added Total Materials of Books and during during per Volumes Year Year ~ Student Materials .12er St 1.1den_t 63612 69310 64439 72671 46525 152949 134160 109204 102843 102803 3871 7810 3611 6615 3067 3714 2907 3417 2285 7390 3.7 2.9 2.5 8.6 53003 57145 50088 45369 62000 3500 4.3 4.3 5.1 3.0 52311 35178 49016 29399 University of the South Sweet Briar Knox Randolph Macon Kalamazoo 698 100745 100120 961 688 675 96_3~9 Agnes Scott Hiram Hollins Ripon 646 667 692 671 80956 .73553 68520 64958 Average 2.5 5.8 588 817 759 909 880 559 Enrollment Data on ~elected Colleg~ and University Librar~es, 1960~61; under 1009 Stude~ts 92127 86400 3189 3463 1947 3.3 6.4 3.0 3.5 4.2 108 85 85 80 . 53 76 102 52 66 92 81 53 71 44 75 Expenditure _Ratiob 5.5 5.5 40 34 23531 27880 19218 31205 12073 34 14 14363 16544 15230 11274 24000 20 30 16 16 36 4.7 21251 10024 22376 9843 33 15 32 15 4.1 3.7 3.8 3 •5 26 4.5 25 4.8 4.9 5.9 3.4 3.7 5.0 4' Source: U.S. Office of Education, Library Statistics of Colleges and Universities, 1960-1961. aEnrollment = all degree students (full-time and part~time). ~xpenditure ratio is expressed as percent of all educational and general expenditures. �700 students at Lakehead. They also correspond roughly to the component of the 1200-studer.t, total which is accounted for by the Arts, as distinguished from the Technology program. It may be noted that the average increment to the collection in~·the year 1960-61 amounted to 4.2 percent of the total collection for the 14 institutions. Table 7-4 lists seven in- stitutions whose enrollment ranges from 1014 students to 1377 students. These colleges correspond in over-all size, approximately, to the 1200student level at Lakehead. Here the average increment to the collection in the year 1960-61 was 3.6 percent. It should be noted that only insti- tutions with strong academic reputations have been included in these tables. The typical pattern for the libraries associated with new colleges is for the growth rate of the collection to decline over time to an increment of about four percent per year. Table 7-5 indicates the probable growth of the collection annually if this pattern is followed. Thus, in 1973-74, when the enrollment will first reach 1200, the collection will comprise about 97,000 bound volumes. This may be compared to the total of 90,000 volumes which Carleton University possessed in 1962 after 15 years of awarding degrees. Table 7-5 also shows a continuation of the pro- jection of the growth of the collection until 1980, at which time a total of over 150,000 volumes is indicated. If, instead of looking at the typical growth pattern of college libraries, one considers the particular character of Lakehead in relation to library use, then it seems clear that the projected growth shown on table 7-5 provides some margin in meeting the needs of the College. Of the 1200 students projected for Lakehead, over 400 will be in the Technology Division, I 119 I �I--' Unit~d -Stat~s -. andc, Canada; 7-4- I"\) 0 . Enrollmenta Name - - Data on Select·e d College. and University .Libraries, 1960-61 ·_EhroJlment _over, 1000 Students Collection Number Percent O~erating E292enditures in Dollars Books and Number Added Added Total Books and Materials of during during per Volumes Year Total Student Materials ,12er Stu.dent Year Expenditure Ratiob Amherst 1014 348201 9594 2.8 164236 162 58012 57 4.9 Williams 1127 264876 5909 2.2 131585 177 39832 35 4.5 Colby 1177 224485 5101 2.3 77308 66 23000 20 5.1 Carleton C. 1176 178205 6242 3.5 26859 64 27764 24 3.4 Grinnell 1148 144943 6938 4-8 80926 .. 70 26592 23 4.5 Albion 1377 104544 4232 4.0 64924 47 21226 15 5.0 (1553) (90000) (8500) (9.4) 1064 890,85 4948 5.5 66290 62 23956 23 4.0 ( 1400) ( 80000) (4884) 6.1 28 4.5 (Carleton U.)c Lawrence (Assumption U.)c Average Source: 3.6 93 U.S. Office of Education, Library Statistics of Colleges and Universities, 1960-1961. ~rollment ~ all degree students (full-time and part-t~me); ~xpenditure ratio is expressed as percent of all educational and general expenditures. cCanadian data is approximate only and excluded from averages. Carleton University source is President's report for 1961-62. Assumption University source is President's report for 1960-61. �7-5. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Estimated Growth of the Library Collection Increment ~ a 1961-1962a 1962-1963a 1963-1964a 1964-1965a 1965-1966 1966-1967 1967-1968 1968-1969 1969-1970 1970-1971 1971-1972 1972-1973 1973-1974b 1974-1975 1975-1976 1976-1977 1977-1978 1978-1979 1979-1980 Percent 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 .5 4 4 Ttttial Volumes 6000 6600 6534 7122 7100 7468 7057 7551 6926 6341 6435 67.56 5675 5902 Collection 23500 32000 41000 50000 60000 66000 72600 79134 86256 93350 100818 107875 115426c 122352 128693 13.5128 141884 147559 153461 aFor these years the growth of the collection has been estimated by interpolating between the 1961-1962 total and the 196.5-1966 goal of 60j)OO volumes, which it is assumed will be attained. It is expected that bachelor's degrees will first be awarded in 1965-1966. bit is estimated that in this year the enrollment of the College will rise to 1200 students. cThe Consultants also estimated the growth of the collection on the basis of dollars expended per student. On this basis, averaging the experience of other institutions, the collection would comprise 116,000 volumes in 1973-1974. 121 �where library requirements on a per capita basis will be lower than for degree candidates. Furthermore, a number of major fields which are common to most of the colleges listed in tables 7-3 and 7-L will in all likelihood continue to be omitted at Lakehead. For example, no academic work in art or music history or religious literature is envisioned. Each of these fields, if offered, must be represented by a considerable number of library books. In comparing Lakehead to Carleton University it should be recalled that Carleton is a multi-faculty institution offering doctoral degrees, whereas at Lakehead it is anticipated that only the first degree and honors work in Arts will be offered. Next to shelving for books, the largest category of space in a library is seating for readers. The most accurate gauge of reader requirements is the study of existing patterns of reading space utilization. Thus, it may be observed whether library seating is fully utilized, under-utilized or inadequate. At Lakehead no such data is available1 although it appears that the library is rarely, if ever, completely full. At present the library has 70 places for readers, representing about 30 percent of the student body, exclusive of nursing students. However, even if statistics were available for the current year, the figures would not be very meaningful as the library at times serves also as a study hall and common room. This is due to the lack of other facilities which more properly can serve such non-academic needs of the stu:ients, for example those with ·a free hour· between classes. When the University Centre is occupied in the fall of 1963, there may well be a shift in the pattern of library occupancy, including less use by students of nursing at free periods. 122 �It is recommended that, based on the nature of the institution and on experience elsewhere, the library be constructed initially with a seating capacity representing 20 percent of the enrollment of the 1200 students. For the first few years of its use the total of 240 seats will accommodate a considerably higher proportion of readers. j During these years the number of readers should be recorded carefully, daily and hourly. If necessary, as the Co+lege approaches the 1200 students, additional reading space can be added, but in the opinion of the Consultants this development is unlikely. D. Physical Education and General Assembly Where no formal academic program for physical education is contemplated, as is the case at Lakehead, it is difficult to determine what comprises suitable athletic facilities in terms of either the extent of student use or the amount of money that should be committed to these functions. Table 7-7 shows facilities for a minimum and for a full program for indoor athletics. These programs correspond to some extent to the target enrollment levels of 700 and 1200 students, respectively. However, it is possible that the smaller program could satisfy the higher enrollment target if the College felt that athletics need play only a minimal role in College life. This minimum program, with a main gymnasium of 7,000 square feet, would permit the use of only one full-size basketball court at a time. If divided into two smaller gymnasiums by a folding partition separate activities might take place in either half simultaneously; however, neither half could then accommodate a regulation basketball court. Under the full program, 12,500 square feet is available for the main gymnasium. This area could accommodate two separate basketball games simultaneously or, alternately, could be subdivided for men's and women's activities. 123 �7-6. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Space Requirements for the Library Category Number of Uni ts: · Enrollment 700 1200 Area per Unit Total Area Enr.ollment 700 1200 ·i · , (square feet) Office and staff space Librarian Assistant Secretary Bookkeeping and acquisition Processing Catalog and classification Office supplies Files Shipping and receiving Temporary storage Duplicating Staff common room Subtotal Reading and ref er·ence space Main reading room Browsing -room Periodicals Reference and bibliography Night study Carrells Faculty study Display Subtotal Book shelving Stack space Files Subtotal Miscellaneous space Coatroom Control desk Typing room Staff common room Seminar room Subtotal (Continued) 124 1 1 1 1 1 1 120 120 75 120 120 • 75 150 250 200 75 120 120 75 200 300 250 75 60 300 125 100 150 1710 Lbo L5 55 16 16 15 16 25 L 90 30 30 25 30 Lo 6 22 25 25 25 25 30 50 1210 Loo Loo 375 Loo 750 200 150 3885 150 100 200 2050 1980 750 750 625 750 1200 300 200 6555 12000 30 .08 5600 11 220 5820 6 10 35 16 16 20 200 150 210 150 320 1030 300 200 350 200 320 1370 70000 20 150000 330 12330 �7-6. ,. (Continued) Category Total Area Enrollment 1200 700 ( square feet) Summary Office space Reading and reference space Book shelving Miscellaneous space Total 1710 3885 5820 1030 12LL5 2050 6555 12330 1370 22305 125 �7-7. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Space Requirements for Physical Education and General Assembly Ca.t egory Number of Units Minimum Full Area per Program Program Unit Total Area Minimum Full Program Program (square feet) Athletic facilities Main gymnasium Bleachers Auxiliary gymnasium Squash courts Subtotal 7000 1000 1200 1650 10850 12500 400 210 300 275 200 300 400 2085 600 350 400 350 300 400 6CYJ 3000 1000 400 100 200 1700 1500 600 200 500 28oO Summary Athletic Miscellaneous Assembly Office 10850 2085 1700 100 18200 3000 2800 200 Total 14735 24200 Miscellaneous facilities Locker rooms: men Locker rooms: women Showers and dressing: men Showers and dressing: women Staff facilities (visitors) Storage Issue and tote baskets Subtotal Assembly facilities Stage Lobby Dressing rooms Storage Subtotal 126 1 3 2 6 1200 550 100 30 150 50 4 7 2400 3300 18200 �The amount of money implied by the construction of a gymnas.ium can more easily be justified when the gymnasium is also used by the community and as a place of general assembly for the College. The larger gymnasium could serve as an assembly area for the entire student body at the 1200 enrollment level, whereas the 7,000 square foot room could only accommodate about 900 students at any one time. With the exception of the gymnasium floor, no space for groups of over 300 persons is programmed at the College. In order to make this space even more productive, stage and dressing room facilities are indicated in the table, although these are also listed under section G of this chapter, describing University Centre facilities, E. Physical Plant Administration and Maintenance Under this heading is programmed the office space associated with the College maintenance shops, garages and general storage facilities, listed in table 7-8. All are Excluded are such dispersed facilities as the elec~ trical substation and other utility installations, At this time it is not certain at what future date the College will install a central heating plant. Nevertheless, the probable space require- ments of such a plant are listed in this table as a guide to construction requirements that may actually be implemented after the 1200-student enrollment target is attained. It is anticipated that the Director of Buildings and Grounds will function as the College purchasing agent. 127 �7-8 . . Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Space Requirements for Physical Plant Administration and Maintenance Number of Units Enrollment Cate~ory 1.QQ l2QQ Area per Unit Total Area Enrollment 1QQ l2QQ ( square feet) Office space Director Assistant Secretary Plan file Drafting board Miscellaneous equipment Subtotal 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 120 100 75 120 100 75 35 50 35 50 Maintenance shops (including stock) Carpentry Electrical Painting and spraying Plumbing Shop office Subtotal Heating planta Boiler area Auxiliary equipment Office Subtotal Garage Vehicles Maintenance Subtotal Storage and miscell~neous space Maintenance stores Building materials Furniture and equipment Shipping and receiving Housekeeping Linen storage Key shop Locker room Subtotal (Continued) 128 120 100 75 70 50 75 455 100 515 600 200 100 1600 800 300 500 500 100 2200 350 350 2 3 650 1300 600 100 2000 1950 600 100 2650 4 6 250 1000 1500 350 350 1350 1850 350 500 600 450 300 450 75 150 75 200 2050 500 450 75 200 100 250 2675 �7-8. (Continued) Total Area Enrollment Cate€:OU .7.QQ l2.Q.Q ( square feet) Summary Office space Maintenance shops Heating plant Garage Storage and miscellaneous space Total 455 1600 2000 1350 515 2200 2650 2050 1850 2675 7455 9890 aAssumes central heating system for the campus , at some future date. 129 �F. Residential Facilities It has been shown previously that there will be a demand for residen- tial facilities on the part of 25 percent of the student population, representing the component of enrollment whose place of origin is outside the Lakehead area. This, of course, does not imply responsibility on the part of the College to provide residential space for these students on the campus in College-owned housing. It may well be that such students will find ac- commodations in the community. However, this material is included to ap- prise the College of the extent of residential facilities that would be required if such students were to be housed on the campus. ments are shown in table 7-9. These require- The College might in fact build a part or none of the space listed in this table. Likewise, the demand for College- owned faculty housing is difficult to determine at this juncture. If such housing is desired and, if it can be financed on a self-sustaining or selfliquidating basis, it may be erected at some time in the future. Residential space is noted in the summary tables but is not included in the totals of either physical plant or financial requirements. G. University Centre Facilities Under this heading are the various facilities which are associated with the extra-curricular activities of the students, exclusive of food service and athletics. In an institution where the great majority of students are non-resident, it is advantageous to combine these functions and facilities into a single building. 130 The principal types of space are described below: �7-9. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Space Requirements for Student Residence, per 100 Students Item Percent cl>.f Total SEace Area per Unit Total Area (square feet) 80 rooms, single occupancy 10 rooms, double occupancy Subtotal Space distributiona Living quarters Toilets and showers Recreational and service 115 190 9200 1900 u1'oo 71 10 19 Net area requirements Living quarters Toilets and showers Recreational and service Total 11100 1565 2965 15630 . t sb Gross area requ1remen 23445 Gross area per student aSource: 234 United States Office of Education bNet area is converted to gross area for this type of space by using an index of 1.5. 131 �1) Student organization space consists of meeting rooms and space for student publications. 2) Recreation space comprises two types of rooms, a large common room which may be used for informal talk, television and other passive recreation and a games room for table games such as ping-pong. 3) A bookstore is an important adjunct to the student's academic as well as his recreational interests. The function of the bookstore is to provide in one easily accessible location the books that the student requires for his formal assignments and for his general reading. Such a store may, as a matter of convenience, also stock such items as gifts, clothing, prints, records, drugs and sundries. The extent to which the store may become in- volved in items other than books depends partly on the philosophy of the institution in organizing such a retail establishment and also on the extent to which the lines of merchandise may be profitable in relation to the space they occupyG The space program in table 7-10 is oriented primarily to a bookstore per se. L) Although the projected academic program of the College does not include any work in art, music or drama, nevertheless, it is considered desirable to provide for and stimulate interest in these fields, on behalf of both the College student and the community. One art studio is programmed, primarily for painting; however, it might also serve for small-scale sculpture or other media. In the field of music space is programmed for a re- cord collection, for individual listening rooms and for small private practice rooms. In theatre presentation, it is assumed that provision should be made for the production of plays on an extra-curricular basis. This requires, in addition to auditorium space, a stage, a shop adjacent to the 132 �7-10. . Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Requirements for University Centre Facilities Ca:te~ory Iiu.w~ez: Q! Uo.1:tiiiii E;o;i:ollw~D:t 1.QQ. J.2.QQ. Area per' U;o;i;t Space TQtal A;i:~a Eo;i:Qllm!irn.:t 1QQ_ J.2.QQ. (square feet) Student organization space Meeting room Publications office Files Subtotal 400 1.50 7.5 62.5 800 300 100 1200 Recreation space Commom room Games room Subtotal 2000 2000 4000 3000 3000 6000 Bookstore Office Sales area Stockroom Receiving Subtotal 120 800 400 120 1440 1.50 1000 600 17.5 192.5 600 1.50 800 200 100 1.50 180 1.50 2.50 270 1000 1.500 400 400 400 4880 1000 1.500 600 400 800 .5970 400 300 700 600 4.50 10.50 62.5 4000 1440 4880 700 1200 6000 192.5 .5970 10.50 1164.5 1614.5 Performance and lobby space Art studio Storage Music areas Record collection Listening rooms Practice rooms Drama areas Stage Shop Storage, properties, etc. Dressing rooms Hobby rooms Subtotal Miscellaneous areas General storage Coat room Subtotal Summary Student organization space Recreation space Bookstore Performance and hobby space Miscellaneous Total 1 1 3 2 2 1 2 2 .5 3 2 2 400 1.50 .50 90 200 400 133 �stage where sets may be constructed, storage for properties and at least two dressing rooms. The auditorium itself can be a lecture room of three hundred seat capacity described in the preceding chapter. For amateur dramatics there are advantages to repeating performances in a small theatre, as opposed to offering a single performance in a larger hall. 5) Finally, hobby rooms are also listed in table 7-10. These can- not be programmed in any detail, but very likely one may be a shop for "ham" radio work and one might be a photographic darkroom. The stage shop might also be used for general hobby purposes when it is not occupied with production work. H. Summary 1. 700- and 1200-Student Enrollment Levels A summary of non-academic space at these two enrollment levels is included in table 7-11. 2. LOO-Student Enrollment Level The following comments apply to non-academic space requirements at the LOO-student enrollment level. a. Administrative Office Space At this level the offices of the Registrar and the Director of Admissions might be consolidated and the Dean of Students omitted. file and service space would be somewhat smaller. 134 Storage, A total of L,000 square �7-11. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Space Requirements for Non-Academic Facilities Total Area Enrollment 700 Category 1200 ( square feet) Administrative offices Food service Library Physical education Physical plant adminis1ration Residential facilities University Centre facilities Total 4000 7800 10000 14000 5000 (11200) 7800 5195 7280 12445 14735 7455 (28750) 11645 7140 11450 22305 24200 9890 (58000) 16145 48600 58755 91130 ~esidential facilities are not included in totalo 135 �feet would still be desirable. b. Food Service Planning kitchen and storage space for Loo students as an interim enrollment target would, of course, be uneconomical. 75 It is estimated that percent of the space required for 700 students would be required for an enrollment of Loo students, except for dining space, which would be prorated. Thus, 7,800 square feet would represent the needs for this enroll- ment level. c. Library The question of library planning for an enrollment of L00 and a target year such as 196L or 1965 is unrealistic. However, for completion of the statistical picture, we may assume 100 seats for readers, space for shelving 60,000 books and proportionate staff and service space. On this basis, about 10,000 square feet will be required. d. Physical Education and Public Assembly The minimum program listed in table 7-7 would be applicable to Loo students, except for slightly smaller locker and shower space. A total of lL,000 square feet is estimated. e. Physical Plant Administration and Maintenance The workload implied by the LOO-student program would not be substantially lower than that called for by a student body of 700. Eliminating the central heating plant and reducing storage requirements would yield a 136 �space requirement of 5,000 square feet. f. Residential Facilities Residential facilities for 25 percent of LOO students would require 25,000 gross square feet. g. University Centre Facilities In this category two-thirds of the space required at the 700student enrollment level, or 7,800 square feet, would be applicable to a College of Loo students. h. Summary Based on the foregoing, the total non-academic space required for the enrollment target of Loo students is L8,600 square feet, exclusive of residences, representing 83 percent of the comparable total for a student body of 700. The non-academic space requirements. for · this enrollment level are also shown in table 7-11, subject to the general comments on enrollment targets presented in Chapter 1. 137 �CHAPTER 8 BUILDING PROGRAMS .AND OCCUPANCY PATTERNS A. General Up to this point in the study physical plant requirements have been expressed only in terms of the net area needed for a particular function, without reference to the organization of these areas into buildings, either existing or to be constructed., Table 8-1 summarizes these requirements. The next stage of the study is the development of building programs and occupancy patterns based on these space requirements. This step calls for the allocation of space in existing buildings and in new structures. The requirements for the College at the 1200-student enrollment level will be described first, as this represents the ultimate target of the study. The procedural framework is viewed as the formulation of a program for this enrollment level, organized so that the interim steps of development can be fitted into the long-range target as self-contained stages in a continuing process. Some suggestion of development beyond the 1200 level is indicated, though not described in detail or expressed in any of the tables. One of the principal criteria in the formulation of these building programs is the question of construction economy. An attempt has been made to minimize the extent of required alterations both in the existing buildings and in new buildings. Although the enrollment has been presented as a series of annual increments to the student body, it is not economically feasible to organize construction in the same terms. 138 Inevitably, where a steady growth �8-1. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Teclmology: Summary of Net Area Requirements Total Area Enrollment 700 Building 1200 (square feet) Academic space Non-academic space Residential spacea Totalb 29125 48600 (15cD0) 58755 (27300) 70585 91130 (46$00) 77725 110485 161715 51730 aResidential space is not included in total. b Net area per student for the three enrollment levels is: 400 level, 194 square feet; 700 level, 158 square feet; 1200 level, 135 square feet, (exclusive of residential space). 139 �in activities and physical plant is anticipated, the construction program must proceed in a series of steps or plateaus (see plate 1). At the same time enrollment may be controlled so that a smooth transition from year to year is achieved. Thus, for brief cyclic intervals, the capacity of the physical plant may exceed the requirements of the institution. Obviously, this is preferable to an alternative where the requirements of the institution exceed the available space. In the programs developed for Lakehead the point of balance is reached at the target enrollment level of 1200 students. To eliminate the excess capacity that will appear at interim stages over the next decade would imply building in smaller units and undertaking more frequent alterations. In economic terms, this is much less satisfactory than the program described in the balance of this chapter. B. Building Program -- 1200-Student Enrollment Level At this enrollment level the College will require space for academic activities, a library, a gymnasium, a University Centre (students' union) and a maintenance plant. Residential facilities are excluded from this discussion until the end of the chapter, for reasons given previously. 1. Academic and Administrative Office Space Academic and administrative office space are considered as a unit, partly because in terms of work flow they are closely connected, and partly because, for purposes of planning, the administrative offices form a rather small element for consideration as a separate structure. 140 Previously, it �had been shown that 77,725 net administrative office space. square feet are required for academic and The existing academic building (including the wing under construction in the summer of 1963) contains 36,230 net square feet. It is assumed that this building will continue as an aca- demic building, as any basic change of use would be extremely wasterful. The deficit of 41,495 net square feet can be met by a combination of means. About 4,000 square feet can be absorbed by the large class- room (auditorium) already available in the University Centre and a seminar room which should be located in the library. Of the balance, 32,275 net square feet will be housed in a new building for academic and administration use. Finally, an addition of J,810 net square feet to the existing building will be required. This addition will permit the use of the exist- ing building as a largely self-contained center for science and technology, whereas the new building will then become the center for administration plus academic work in arts, humanities and social science. The reasons for utilizing the existing building for science and technology are mherent in the character of the structure and its equipment. The building already contains a number of special purpose science facilities which would be expensive to duplicate anew. These mclude the Chemistry laboratories, the elementary Biology laboratory and its auxiliary spaces, the science lecture-demonstration room and a number of small areas representing investment m cabinet work or other built-in equipment relating to science teaching materials. Another factor, equally important is the basic 141 �arrangement of space in the present building. The distance from the corri- dor to the window ranges from 2L to 28 feet throughout most of this structure. This dimension is quite suitable for science laboratories. It is much less suitable for the type of department which would comprise small classrooms and a large proportion of office space~ Indeed, there are pre- sently some offices which are disproportionate in depth, resulting in loss of effective space or else loss of privacy. The principal items of cost required for conversion of the present building to a science and technology center for the 1200-student enrollment level are the addition of Chemistry laboratories on the second floor, the conversion of the squash court space through the construction of a mezzanine and the addition of a wing running north and south. This last will serve to complete the building in the form of a quadrangle and connect the Biology portion of the first floor to the wing presently under construction. The conversion of the squash courts and the addition of an intermediate level in those areas would be in order in any case during the development of the College over the next decade. The addition of the Chemistry labor- atories will not be difficult technically in view of the flexibility in construction built in by the architect. With the exception of Chemistry the laboratories' principal utilities requirements are for additional electrical power. terations. This may be introduced into the building without major al- A number of changes in partitioning would be required,whether the building is to be used for science or non-science departments. The classroom space that will become available after these changes are made will approximate the requirement for lectures in science and tech- 142 �II nology courseso However, there is no reason why some such lectures, at least those which do not require demonstration apparatus, cannot be given in the other, proposed academic building. As will be seen in the next chapter, it is intended that the two academic buildings be connected underground so that students and faculty may proceed from one to the other without going outdoors. If this general pattern of occupancy were not followed and, instead, the non-science departments were to be located in the present building, the results would be much less satisfactory. The non-science requirements in- cluding their share of classroom space amount to only about 20,000 feeto square Therefore, to utilize the existing building completely would imply that some science and technology activities continue to be housed there. Thus, the end result would encompass a split in the science and technology work between the existing building and the proposed building. Furthermore, the proposed building would become more expensive to construct as it would have to be designed to provide utilities and mechanical services for science laboratories on a flexible basis. Under the recommended scheme, with the exception of some space for Psychology, very few specialized services are required for the new academic building. The gross area of the new academic building is 59,030 square feet. This estimate is based on the schematic plan illustrated in this chapter. A note on the purpose and character of the schematic plans is presented in Section G of this chapter. The new academic building is envisioned as a three-story building built around a courtyard. This plan must be consider- ed only as a suggestion and by no means as an attempt to fix a particular �8-2. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Distribution of Classroom Space by Building at 1200-Student Enrollment Total Required Number Cate~o;cy Lecture rooms Capacity: 300 Capacity: 200 Capacity: 140 Capacity: 100 Number Qf ci~~srQQW~ ~er Byildini Science and New Academic University Centre TechnolQe:Y Building Library 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 60 40 7 13 2 6 5 Seminar rooms Capacity: 16 8 3 5 1 32 12 18 1 Classrooms Capacity: Capacity: Total 1 6 1 �architectural form. However, the reasoning behind the courtyard scheme nay be worth notingo Because of the requirement for many small rooms (the faculty offices),this building requires a great deal of outside wall and window area. A compact plan would not provide such area, unless the build- ing were constructed as a tower with comparatively small floor area at each level. Such a building would be quite awkward from the standpoint of work flow and operational convenience. By constructing the building around a court each office or classroom may receive natural light and ventilation. It seems likely that alternate schemes, if they could not provide such natural ventilation, would require air conditioning. For a building of this type the expense of air conditioning is considered unnecessary. 2. Library The library for the 1200-student enrollment follows the program presented in the preceding chapter. It is a self-contained building including no other elements than those listed in this program. Its gross area as shown on the schematic plans is 36,300 square feet. Although the seating and many of the other areas correspond to the target enrollment level of 1200 students which will be attained in the academic year 1973-?L, space for the book collection has been planned for almost L0,000bound volumes in excess of the total anticipated for that year. This excess represents the accessions for the years 197L-8o and requires an additional 3,000 square feet of net area. The rationale of this additional bookstack capacity is based on two points. a) The collection may exceed the projected growth calculated in the preceding chapter, if available funds so permit. The Consultants 145 �do not believe such a development is necessary, but feel that it is wise to provide some margin in case it occurs. b) Provision for 150,000 volumes gives some promise that the library building as planned will serve the College for at least ten and possibly fifteen years after its projected completion in the fall of 1965, before any addition is required. This is partially de- pendent, of course, on the adequacy of the space provided for readers. Eventually, probably between 1975 and 1980, a wing must be added to the library. demic building. However, this is equally true of the aca- In neither case need the additional construction imply any special architectural difficulties. The Consultants believe that architects for the library should be engaged at once and that a target date of September, 1965 be established for occupancy of the building. The existing library space will be hard pressed to function for even two more years and will even in that interval overflow to other areas of the science and technology buildingo When first completed the proposed library will have considerable excess capacity, much of which can be turned to good account as temporary academic space. This topic is enlarged on in later sections of this chapter. The schematic plans for the library indicate a three-story building of square shape, 110 feet long on each side. The main floor (middle level) contains the bulk of the reading rooms and staff activities space. The lower and upper floors are devoted primarily to stack space but include carrells and some miscellaneous areas. 146 If the building were two stories in �height instead of three, there might be some advantage in a larger main floor which would permit open stacks adjacent to the reading areas. How- ever, this is less significant than the advantages of the three-story scheme. A three-story scheme would permit assigning one whole floor ini- tially for classroom and faculty office space without interfering seriously with the library operation per se. Most important, as the library ex- pands past the time framework of this report, the three-story scheme will permit a more compact, closely controlled scheme than a two-story scheme. The later conversion of a two-story scheme to a three-story scheme is considered to be difficult and undesirable. The library should be air conditioned to permit use of interior space, to assure proper humidity for the collections and, perhaps, to encourage summer use by the community. If not air conditioned, the plan might have to take quite a different form, either construction around a court or a more attenuated shape. In either case the additional outside wall and greater complexity would tend to offset any savings deriving from the omission of air conditioning. J. University Centre The University Centre requirements for a student body of 1200 can easily be conta:ined within the existing University Centre build:ing. This building provides about 20,000 net square feet - exclusive of food service space and the auditorium proper. Table 6-10 calls for only 16,145 square feet at the 1200-student enrollment level. Therefore the University Centre build- :ing is adequate for an even larger enrollment than is under consideration 147 �in this study. When the enrollment reaches 1200 students, it is assumed that all academic activities will have been vacated from this building and that, except for occasional academic use of the auditorium, the building will be given over entirely to students' recreation and extra-curricular activities. The only exception will be the inclusion of dining space in the building for students and other members of the College community. The present building will not, however, be able to provide complete food service facilities for the 1200 enrollment level or even for 700 students. As or~ginally planned, the building contains a dining room of about 3,600 square feet plus a small (JOO square feet) room serving as a snack bar service area. No provision is made in the building for a kitchen or food service, preparation, storage or administration consistent with an enrollment of 1200 studentso It is assumed that, like most institutions, Lake- head will be interested in providing a balanced diet for its students, both resident and non-residento Thus, it will be desirable to provide at least hot lunches a-nd, ,perhaps, suitable breakfasts and dinners as well. To do this will almost certainly require the facilities described in table 7-2, Food Service Facilities. on a completel At this point it would be inadvisable to count automated self-service vending machine operation to achieve these objectiveso In order to provide the food service space listed in the preceding chapter it will be necessary to build a one-story addition to the University Centre, adjoining the room designated for dining. will contain 3,175 gross square feet. This addition The dining room as shown in the sche- matic plan will accommodate about 260 persons at one time. If three sit- tings are programmed, the total capacity at lunch time will be 780, far short of the enrollment of the College. Therefore, it is likely that four �sittings will be required and that, in addition, the College will continue to use the small dining room (capacity: dent residence. 65) attached to the existing stu- The four sittings which will be required at lunch do not imply any serious problems. It is certainly possible, when food is served cafeteria style, to eat in 30 minutes. If the lunch schedule is coordin- ated with the academic schedule, two hours can be used for the turnover of four groups of students, faculty and staff. The dining room in the resi- dence may then be converted to a snack bar and vending machine operation, while the more conventional cafeteria-type service will be limited to the larger facilities in the University Centre. L. Gymnasium The gymnasium is in some ways less essential to the successful operation of the College than any of the buildings described up to this point. It is assumed that, because of the higher priority attached to the l:ibrary and to academic space, the gymnasium will not be built until the enrollment of the College has reached approximately 700 students. At that time, if funds are available, it is recommended that a building corresponding to the full program (see table 6-8) be constructed. Because of the nature of gymnasium space it would be extremely difficult to construct a building oorresponding to the minimum program and then, at some later date, build an addition. The building for the full program has the added advantage of satisfying the College's requirements for an enrollment level in excess of 1200 students, probably up to something over 1500 students. This would also apply to the use of the building as a place of general assembly for the College. For enrollment in excess of 1200 it may be necessary to add to the 149 �locker room space, but this could be done at comparatively little expense without disturbing the basic structure of the building. Schematic plans show the gymnasium as a two-story structure. The up- per floor, presumably trussed or vaulted, is essentially one large room with a stage at one endo Moveable bleachers are recommended, so that the space they occupy when extended can be used for recreation and athletics during peak load periods. Extended, these can seat at least 1200 persons and still permit exhibition basketball to take place in the central area of the gymnasium floor. The lower level of the building contains locker and shower rooms, two auxiliary gymnasiums and six squash courts. 5. Maintenance Building The maintenance building is the last of the construction elements required for the College at the 1200-student enrollment level. This build- ing can easily be built in stages, the first stage corresponding to the requirements of the College at the Loo - 700 enrollment level. Additional maintenance shop, storage and service space can be added as required, over time. It will be possible to add a central heating plant, if at any point it is determined that suchaplant will be advantageous in terms of operating efficiencyo The schematic plans of this building omit the central heating plant area for the plans corresponding to the 700-student enrollment level and include this facility for the higher target enrollment. How- ever, the Consultants are unable to state definitely that the central plant will not be desirable at an earlier stage or, on the other hand, that its implementation should not ,be delayed even beyond the 1200 enrollment target. 150 �I I c. Building Program - 700-Student Enrollment Level 1. Academic and Administrative Office Space At the 700-student enrollment level the science and technology building will be fully utilized as an academic building, although it will serve both the Arts program as well as the work in science and technology. In order to provide for all the classrooms and laboratories required it will be essential to move the central College administration out of this building and to erect for administration a new structure which, in turn, can become part of the new academic building. This first section of the new aca- demic building will contain 19,075 gross square feet. In addition to ad- ministrative offices it will contain one classroom of 60 seats and one seminar room. (See schematic plans.) The balance of the academic space re- quired at this enrollment level must then be found in the library and the University Centre. Table 8-3 shows the distribution of classroom and fac- ulty office space among the various buildings on the campus which will exist from the time the enrollment passes LOO to the time the enrollment reaches 700 students. During this interval the lower level of the library will have two classrooms, a seminar room and 3L faculty offices. The creation of classroom space at this level does not involve any great excess expenditure. The cost of faculty offices should be held to a minimum even at some expense of privacy, as the space they occupy will, before 1973, be restored to library use. 2. Library The two upper floors of the library will contain excess capacity for 151 �8-Jo Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Distribution of Classroom Space by Building at 700-Student Enrollment Total Required Number Catego;r:y Lecture rooms Capacity: 300 Capacity: 200 Capacity: 140 Capacity: 100 Classrooms Capacity: Capacity: 60 40 Seminar rooms Capacity: 16 Total a Number of Classrooms per Buildin~ Science and New Academic University Technology Buildinga Library Centre 1 1 1 1 1 5 2 1 1 9 6 6 3 1 2 22 12 2 4 3 Only the administration wing of the proposed academic building will be available at this enrollment level. 152 4 �books, readers and staff for several years. As suggested earlier, such a condition is viewed as inevitable, the only alternative being excessive investment in alterations. 3. Other Buildings At this enrollment level the University Centre will be utilized as shown on the schematic plans, which indicate the retention of four rooms in this building for classroom use. The construction of the gymnasium can- not yet be justified; the first stage of the maintenance building is essential. D. Building Program - LOO-Student Enrollment Level 1. Academic and Administrative Office Space The LOO-student enrollment level is likely to be passed in the academic year 196L-65. It is virtually impossible for the proposed library building to be ready by September, 196L, and yet additional space will be necessary at that date for many kinds of facilities, such as faculty offices, library shelving and administrative offices. A second laboratory for ele- mentary biological science and other academic facilities may be required. The only solution appears to be the construction of the proposed west wing of the existing academic building, transforming that structure from a plan to a quadrangle. 11 C11 This addition may be built between the end of classes in the spring of 196L and the beginning of classes in September, 196L. It will contain 3,8$0 net square feet, sufficient to meet the deficit in space obtaining until the projected completion of the library in September, 1965. 153 �8-4 . . Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Distribution of Classroom Space by Building; 400-Student Enrollment Total Required Number Category Number of Classrooms per Building Science and University Technology Centre Lecture rooms Capacity: JOO Capacity: 140 1 1 Classrooms Capacity: Capacity: 60 40 3 8 2 6 Seminar rooms Capacity: 16 4 3 16 12 Total 1.54 1 3 4 �The new space can, in 196L-65, contain 1) the Geology laboratory, thus permitting the conversion of the present Geology laboratory to Biology; 2) additional faculty office space; 3) additional classroom space, permitting the temporary use of existing classrooms adjacent to the library as bookstack and library service areas. In order to conserve funds a few faculty may be located for 196L-65 in this wing at desks in open areas, obviating the need for temporary construction. Or, alternately, movable partitions may be acquired and relocated to the lower level of the library building in September, 1965. The gross area of the proposed addition is 7,000 square feet. It must be stated that this addition is clearly justifiable in longrange terms as well. At the 1200-student enrollment level the addition will be utilized as shown in the schematic plans. However, in addition to pro- viding required net area, this wing, by forming a closed quadrangle, will greatly improve the interior circulation in the building. For example, the distance from the present Biology laboratory to the main lecture-demonstration theatre will be reduced from L20 feet to 250 feet. At this enrollment level temporary provision must be made for administrative offices. It is recommended that the common room at the south end of the existing academic building be partitioned as shown on the schematic plans and that its use be restricted to administration. For example, the Bursar might occupy the existing corner room of the area (presently a student hobby room). The Principal would retain his present quarters until the administrative wing of the proposed academic building is completed in 1966. 155 �8-5• Enrollment Level 400 700 1200 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Distribution of Faculty Office Space by Building at 400-, 700- 1 and 1200-Student Enrollment Levels Number of Offices Rec.ujred Number of Offjce Units per Bnildjni'a Science and New Academic University TechnoJ Pi:Y Bui ldini' Libracy: Centre 38 64 105 75 34 aA few offices in the science and technology building will be semi-private. All others will be privateo °Eight of these offices will represent temporary faculty office stations in 1964-65 until transfer to the libraryo 156 �II • 8-6. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Space Requirements for a New Academic Building Category Number of Units Enrollment 1.QQa l.2QQ Area 12er Unit Total Area Enrollment 1.QQ JgQQ ( square feet) Classroom-type space Lecture rooms Capacity: 200 Capacity: 100 60 Capacity: Capacity: 40 Seminar rooms 16 Capacity: 1(200) 3 (60) .4 (40) 1(200) 1(100) 5 (60) 6 (40) 12 12 12.5 14 2 (16) 5 (16) 20 Subtotal Departmental space Language laboratory Auxiliary space Accounting laboratory Calculatorbroom Psychology Map room 16 24 30 40 20 40 25 18 25 ;.;_ Subtotal Faculty office space Administration space Storage Total 35 75 100 2250 2240 2400 1200 3750 3360 640 1600 7530 12310 480 150 720 2225 200 720 200 720 625 2685 250 4275 5200 3500 7500 4860 6765 400 500 20565 32275 2400 500 aAt the 700-student enrollment level temporary space in the library and University Centre is substituted for new construction as a means of partially satisfying the space requirements. (See tables 8-3 and 8-5). The balance of 11390 square feet forms the program for the administration wing of the proposed aca~emic building. b See table 6-50 cSee table 7-L 157 �8-7. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Space Requirements for an Addition to the Science and Technology Building Number of Units Enrollment 1QQ l2QQ. Area per Unit Total Area Enrollment 1QQ l2QQ. ( square feet) Classroom-type space Lecture rooms Capacity: 60 Capacity: 40 1(60) 1(40) 12.5 14 750 560 Seminar rooms Capacity: 16 2(16) 20 640 Subtotal Departmental space Geology laboratory Auxiliary space 1950 35 35 35 Subtotal Faculty offices Total 5 5 100 1225 175 1225 175 1400 1400 500 500 1900 3850 aConstruction is recommended to correspond to the net area total for the 1200-student enrollment. 158 .a �8-8. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Occupancy Characteristics of Existing and Proposed Buildings, 400-, 700-, and 1200-Student Enrollment Levels lJ..00 __ Students Existing Buildings and Additions Science and Technology Building Academic, administration, Existing building library West wing addition Academic and miscellaneous Student Residence University Centre Existing building Kitchen wing Proposed Bµildings Library Academic and administrative office building Administration (west) wing Enrollment Level 1QQStudents 1200 Stud_ents Academic (Science and Technology only) Academic (Science and Technology only) Academic (Science and Technology) Academic (Science and Technology) Residence, dining Residence, snack bar Residence, snack bar Auditorium, bookstore, classrooms, dramatics, snack bar, students' union Auditorium, bookstore, classrooms, dining, dramatics, fine arts, students' union Food service Auditorium, bookstore, dining, dramatics, fine arts, students' union Library, academic space (lower level only) Library (includes one seminar room) Food service Administration, academic West wing integrated with remainder of building: space, non-science laboratories first floor, administration; second and third floors, academic space Gymnasium Athletics, public assembly 1--' \Jl. '-0 Maintenance Maintenance administration, shops, storage Maintenance administration, shops, storage, heating plant �• 8-9. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Gross Area of Construction, Existing and Proposed Building Loo Total Area Enrollment Level 700 1200 (square feet) Existing buildings Science and Technology University Centre Residence Subtotal 52315 L2225 176L5 112185 52315 L2225 176L5 112185 52315 L2225 176L5 112185 7000 7000 36300 20075 18200 7800 28750 3175 103100 7000 36300 19075 39955 33900 12800 58000 3175 210205 130385 215285 322390 Total, all buildings excluding student residences 101535 168890 2L67L5 7L35o 152205 Proposed Science and Technology wing Library Administration wing Academic building Gymnasium Maintenance building Residence University Centre wing Subtotal a Total Total, proposed buildings excluding student residences 11200 7000 aGross area per student (including residences) at the LOO-student enrollment level is 335 square feet; at the 700-student level, 307 square feet; at the 1200-student level, 269 square feet. Excluding student residence, the comparable figures are 25L, 2L2 and 206 square feet, respectively. 160 �2. Other Buildings At this enrollment level the only new construction which is recommended is the first phase of the maintenance building. However, it is unlikely that this structure could be completed until September, 1965, at the earliest, so that this building is identified with the intermediate enrollment target of 700 students. E. Enrollment beyond 1200 Students The study does not provide detailed information on activity levels at the College or on space requirements after the 1200-student enrollment target is reachedo Nevertheless, some consideration must be given to the im- plications of continuing growth. The same factors which are operative through the academic year 1973-74, when the enrollment will reach 1200, will continue to influence the development of the institution. It is expected that the enrollment will continue to rise, although no attempt will be made here to estimate the rate of growth. Therefore, elements of physical plant which have been directly re- lated to enrollment will require additional space. These are the academic facilities (classrooms, laboratories and faculty offices) and much of the library spaceo Indirectly, this growth will require expansion of utilities and maintenance facilities and also of the central College administrationo Student service facilities, except for food service, may be somewhat less sensitive to enrollment pressures, depending on the patterns of use which have been developed in such areas as athletics, student organizations, etc. 161 �Lakehead College will require additions to the science and technology building and to the new academic and administrative office building shortly after the enrollment passes the 1200 mark. The additions might initially be constructed on the Oliver Road (or northeast) side of these buildings. Additions to the academic building might take the form of a forming a second and even a third court. C11 , thus Additions to the library might initially be built to the southeast and to the southwest. should also be three stories in height. 11 The additions On this basis, for example, staff space could first extend to include the areas designated on the schematic plans as "reference" and 11 microreading 11 .. Additional space for readers could then be incorporated in the southeast addition. As indicated earlier in this report, the University Centre provides greater space for extra-curricular activities than will be required by an enrollment of 1200 students. for lS00-1800 students. Perhaps the building would remain adequate However, the problem of food service, not very satisfactorily solved for the enrollment of 1200, would become critical for higher enrollments. More space will be required for seating and for kitchen and service areas. The building is not designed to permit exp~n- sion of food service by incorporating adjacent areas on the same level. Possibly a one-story addition could be added directly east of the present building. In long-range terms it may prove true that the College would have been best served by the construction of a separate food service building at some point in the developmento However, the commitment of over 3,Soo square feet for dining in the existing University Centre appears to justify adding 162 �kitchen facilities when warranted by increased enrollment, as programmed for the 700-student levelo Then this added investment tends to fix food service facilities in the University Centre. Dual and separate food ser- vice facilities are wasteful and inefficient~ particularly in relation to kitchen personnel. The gymnasium, as programmed for 1200 students, will probably be adequate for a larger number. It is difficult to anticipate the character of the athletic program at the College. these activities indoors. The severe climate tends to focus On the other hand the isolation of the College tends to limit athletic competition to intramural sports. If the use of the gymnasium were carefully scheduled, it might well serve a student body of 1800-2000, subject to the provision of additional locker room space. The maintenance building and heating plant space shown in the schematic plans will be adequate for up to 2000 students, depending on the number of dormitories to be erected. F. Alterations To clarify the question of alterations, a resume is presented here of the alterations called for by the three building programs associated with the particular enrollment targets. For the existing academic building a continuing program of alterations will be required until the enrollment reaches the 120(}:student total. This is an inevitable consequence of the expansion of laboratory facilities and the withdrawal of non-laboratory departments in this building. In the im- 163 �I mediate future the existing student common room must be converted to administrative office space. This can be done by erecting partitions as shown on the schematic plans. Although the room use designations on the plan re- flect activities at the 1200-student level, the rooms themselves can serve for the Bursar, Registrar and other administrative personnel for a few years. The present bookstore space will also become available for other use in September, 196j. Subsequent changes can take place in anticipation of added courses or increased enrollment, within the general framework shown on the schematic plans. The provision of a second Biology laboratory in the room presently housing Geology has already been mentioned. Advanced work in Chemistry can be housed in the existing second-floor drafting rooms, after addition of mechanical and electrical services. The existing library may be converted to new drafting room space as soon as the proposed library building is occupied. Some of the changes anticipated are very simple in character and will probably be accomplished by maintenance personnel. In the University Centre most of the changes involved over the next decade concern room designation rather than alteration of partitions or other elements of the building. The rooms which will temporarily serve as classrooms are the same rooms which will eventually revert to student extracurricular space, as originally planned. The Consultants believe the book- store space was understated in the original plans, but no great expense is needed to remedy this situation within the total available space in the building. The kind of continuing architectural change which has been and, to some extent, will remain the pattern in the existing academic building can be �avoided in large measure with the proposed buildings. The two areas where alterations will be necessary are the lower level of the library, discussed previously,_ and the administration wing of the new academic building. If this wing is erected prior to the balance of the building, the offices it contains should be redistributed, principally to the ground floor of the larger, completed structure. It should be noted that the basic core facil- ities, such as stairs, toilets and corridors will not change as the second stage of the building is erected. This building, and indeed all subsequent construction, should be designed on a modular basis so that the principal changes which will occur will be demolition and relocation of the walls which run at right angles to the corridors. It is recommended that these walls be constructed of masonry units, such as concrete blocks, and be left unfinished or painted but not plastered. The use of demountable metal partitions results in excessive costs which are unwarranted. If funds are available initially for the con- struction of the entire academic-administrative complex rather than only the administration wing, then alterations can be eliminated. However, this implies far more available capacity in 1967 than the College could absorb at that time. No changes are anticipated for the gymnasium during the period under study. For the maintenance facilities a few minor changes, resulting from the two stages of construction, will be required. G. Schematic Plans Following the text of this chapter are schematic plans of the principal 165 �existing and proposed buildings required by the College over the next decade. The intent in presenting these drawings should be clearly understood, for these plans serve very limited objectives. First, they define the gross area required, whereas in Chapters 6 and 7 the study has been directed to determining net area. Estimating gross area without drawings, basing the estimate on rules of thumb, is too crude a procedure to provide a basis for realistic evaluation or action. It is gross area, of course, which is the key factor in the preparation of cost estimates. Secondly, the plans, by defining both area and the number of floors, indicate the amount of land required for new construction, essential information for the development of the master plan. Plans of existing buildings, showing changes both in use and physical arrangements, serve to indicate the extent to which these buildings can absorb the program requirements. Therefore, these plans by implication support the recommendations for new construction by showing the limita- tions of the present facilities. Despite the inclusion of considerable detail, these plans are not intended to be as definitive or as comprehensive as an architect 1 s preliminary drawings. 'the emphasis is 0n just{fying the 'quantitative aspect on the space programs rather than in establishing exact spatial relationships or specific room assignments. Though it is believed that the basic arrange- ments shown are valid, it is expected that changes in partitioning and room location will occur when architectural drawings are actually developed for both new construction and alterations. 166 �The plans show construction requirements for each enrollment, where significant changes occur between the target levelso In the science and technology building, where alterations will be required on a continuing basis, the presentation emphasizes the ultimate arrangement for 1200 studentso Some indication is given of room use at interim levels as well. The Consultants wish to emphasize again their recognition of the desirability of leaving the determination of the form of the proposed buildings to the College's architects. The schematic drawings are illustrative of a possible scheme but do not exhaust the design possibilitieso As a case in point, gymnasiums have been built recently as round, domed structures lower in cost than the conventional rectangular, trussed type shown hereo The domed structure presents some minor difficulties in terms of sub-dividing the main area, but in any case should be seriously considered as an alternativeo In referring to the plans the following points should be notedo 1) New construction, existing construction and demolition are dis- tinguished from one another by indications shown on the legend preceding the drawings. 2) Lettering indicates, to the extent graphically feasible, the use or occupancy of each room. Some of the indications are abbreviated and, where necessary, are explained in the list following the text of this chaptero 3) In existing buildings there are a number of variations between the 167 �programmed area for a particular space and the area shown on the plans. This reflects the fact that the cost of alterations required to tailor the existing space exactly to the program may be out of scale to the value of the area recovered. In the case of the proposed buildings the area as programmed conforms very closely to the area as drawn. 4) The plans are schematic in that they attempt to present only a general scheme to highly stylized indications. For example, in the pro- posed buildings windows and doors are omitted, as are many other architectural elements which do not affect the total quantity of space. I I 168 �ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS USED IN THE DRAWINGS ABBREVIATIONS ADM ADMINISTRATIVE ADV AOVAIIICEO ASST BLDG SERVO ASSISTANT BUILDING SERVICE CL·40 b CLASSROOM CONF CONFERENCE CR DK RM DR RM ELEM JC KIT LAB M MAINT O·F COMMON ROOM DARK ROOM DRESSING ROOM ELEMENTARY JANITORS CLOSET KIT CHE NETTE LABORATORY MEN MAINTENANCE FACULTY OFFICE PREP PREPARATION PROJ PROJECTION BOOTH RECVG RM SECY RECEIVING ROOM SECRETARY SEM SEMINAR STOA STORAGE o·INCLUDES AREA FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WOMEN b·DENOTES w CAPACITY SYMBOLS c=:::::::::::J II EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO REMAIN TOILET FACILITIES c====l EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO BE DEMOLISHED - NEW CONSTRUCTION REQUIRED El TELEPHONE BOOTH l ,6,9 �SCHEMATIC PLA.NS EXISTING BUILDINGS AND REQUIRED ADDITIONS �SCIENCE 8 TECHNOLOGY GROUND FLOOR ENROLLMENT LEVELS: 400, 70081200, EXCEPT AS NOTED SERVICE ENTRANCE CL-54 SEM-16 I SEM-16 o-F 1 BIOLOGY _I ADV LAB 1 -PREP CL-142 I ' CL-32 C GREEN· u 0 T R y A R D STOA 0-F 0-F >z ~le:> BLDG S~RV 1 I 'NOUS :, [ PREP I 1 DEMONSTRATION APPARATUS ......-e--_-.....1r.il ,[ ___} ~ lo-F lo.F ; _J_JJ Ii GEOLOGYELEM LAB O•F CL-32 0-F BIOLOGYRESEARCH Ill ..J z gi ... CL-32 BIOLOGYELEM LAB PREP a 400 LEVEL CL 8 OFFICES I FORESTRYELEM LAB BLDG SERV II CL-70 1111111 ELECTRONIC TECHNOLOGY II 0-F LAB STOCK 81 PREP .JI► Illa: DRAFTING RM-50 >,c COMMON RM ""a: Ja, o0..J STOA ;,, ::,::.,1 11 11 ,, ==:-:!a c::::::1= ...~ ltpT:J 17F ~ ,: PHYSICS ADV LAB I ID ..JC l&I ..J 0-2F 0-2F DRAFTING RM-32 >.., I.II Cl ..JC ::, -- -- - --- • 1 ---·· 1 -· PHYSICSADV LAB PREP 0 PHYSICSELEM LAB Cl Oz ... "' PREP ..J CL-42 400 LEVEL CL 8 OFFICES 400 LEVEL ADMINISTRATION PHYSICSRESEARCH ~ 0 !5 10 20 30 40 50 FT 171 �BASEMENT SCIENCE a TECHNOLOGY ENROLLMENT LEVELS: 400,700 a 1200, EXCEPT AS NOTED 400 LEVELi R 1 400 LEVEL LIBRARY BIOLOGY· ADV LAB II) ..JI/) "'~ "'~ >II: ..Jo o" o:z: ,-.II) di 4 ~ 00 .,. QI/) DRAFTING RM·26 ENGINEERING· MATERIALS TESTING LAB SECOND FLOOR 400 LEVEL PHYSICS CHEMISTRY• ANALYTICAL LAB H CHEMISTRY· BALANCE RM II 0•2F ELEM LAB II II II II II PREP D ill It II It II II 1,-----.,? JG •2F INSTRU· PHYSICAL PREP MENT RM CHEMISTRY .LAB 400 LEVEL DRAFTING 400 LEVEL FORESTRY CHEMISTRY. ORGANIC LAB·20 0 5 10 20 30 40 50 FT 173 �UNIVERSITY CENTRE BASEMENT ENROLLMENT LEVELS:400.700,1200 WORK RM MUSIC RM DRESSING RM·W D 0 Cl 0 D Q Cl GAMES RM "' IIC Ill) II i.J J: TUNNEL TO :1sc1ENCE a TECHNOLOGY u IIC 0 BLDG SE RV UNEXCAVATED II 1• ,,11 J NOT USABLE a a a a a a UN EXCAVATED 0 174 S 10 20 30 40 SO FT �GROUND FLOOR UNIVERSITY CENTRE ENROLLMENT LEVELS :400, 700, 1200 400 a 100 LEVELS STUDENT ACTIVITIES WORKROOM 700 a STOCKROOM I BOOKSTORE l :l BOOKSTORE 0 1200 LEVELS SERVICE COURT AND ENTRANCE RECEIVING OFFICES II[ 1STAGE ll .,-, ~==;=====o=:::ii::::ioL., ...J'::':;'"=-='~=:;===t=::f~:::!!!:!::===~:!!!:==:! a a C C t;:==""i.J,===a KITCHEN DRY a REFRIGERATED STOR DINING - ---- 0 5 10 20 30 40 50 FT 17.5 �SECOND UNIVERSITY CENTRE ENROLLMENT LEVELS: 400,700, 1200 400 6 700 LEVELS 3 CL· 42 UPPER PART· WORKROOM ART STUDIO STUDENT STUDENT ORGANIZA· ORGANIZA· TION TION HOBBY RM HOBBY RM LOUNGE 700 8 1200 LEVELS UPPER PARTSTAGE NEW ROOF COMMON RM IS0 176 S 10 20 30 40 e0 FT FLOOR �SCHEMATIC PLANS PROPOSED BUILDINGS �ACADEMIC BUILDING BASEMENT ENROLLMENT LEVEL: 1200 unexc.avated ui 1:::1' 32 ..a L. Q) ~ Cl $ lobby bldq. serv. student \ocl(ers, ~ ~ C: ::s +-> -- -20- - 0 5 10 178 30 - 40 50 FT �ACADEMIC BUILDING GROUND FLOOR ENROLLMENT LEVEL: 1200 dean of stud'ts :I r req1 strAC- recep. Tl m d.ofatts pnnci'I 9;E ~--.a.--'-.&l:., L.. asst. deanofa,ts ~ ~ + 1 1 courtyardS:Ct=:ta Comp, adma, t,oller SiOt\S recep. COnf devel, compt opm't alumni files public. compt. rel. JI] rec'v'44 sefv. [I[ ~ ~,fl ~ ► I). A, cl.-60 g ,/1 Janquaqe cl.-zoo ------ 0 5 10 adm. servic.es lab. 20 30 40 50 FT 179 �SECOND FLOOR ACADEMIC BUILDING ENROLLMENT LEVEL: 1200 sem-16 ~! i cl.-40 cl:-.110 II~ cl:40 sem.~d I 11 1 I .. ... ... ~ sem-16 faculty cour1yar<1 in/irm· ary c.r. O·f o-f IJ(;t O·f o-f o,f o-f O·f O·f O·f O·f O·f O·f o-f O·f o-f O·f o-f O·f o-~ O•f O•f O·f o-t o-f o-f 0-f o- ♦ O·f O·f O·f O·f O·f staff c.r. O·f [ILJ LI[ ~ 0 ~ -a ~ L, Q cl.-60 account1n4 calculators t; cl.-100 ------- 0 5 10 180 20 30 40 50 FT d-60 �ACADEMIC BUILDING THIRD FLOOR ENROLLMENT LEVEL: 1200 se.m-16 ~I !. cl.-- ◄ O d.--40 sem.-,, cl. -4'1 I 11 . . ""' ~ O·f : o,f O•f: O·f o-f O·f o-f O,f o-f O·f o-f o-f O·f o-f o-~ o-\ o-t o-f o-f o~f O·t o-f o-f o-i o-f o·• o-f o,f o-J O·f o-f o-~ o-f O·t o+ O·f O·f O·f o-f o-f o-~ coudya(d. st. [IJ o-f st. LC aud.-t.oo ~ spu,h 181:i p~ch. c.1,-60 psychology maps labo(a.tory (eJearch ~ shop anmals ------20 30 40 50 0 5 10 I cl.-60 FT 181 �GROUND ADMINISTRATION WING ENROLLMENT FLOOR LEVEL: 700 adm, seru,es principal dean of stu.dents dean oJ arts adm1ss1on& SECOND FLOOR ,onf. fi le.s Stl11·16 staff c.r. faculty c.(. comptrolle.r devdop't pu.b. rel. THIRD FLOOR maps accountH1~ t ~ t o•f o•f o·f o·f o-f o·f o•f o-f ------- 0 5 10 182 20 30 40 50 FT -~ �GYMNASIUM BASEMENT ENROLLMENT LEV EL: 1200 squuh 11uash squash squtrf, squash 5iUSh lillI - issue and contfoJ ------- __.rl- J/r- ~ : I I I - -- ;J~ JI.A~ 6 \ 11.. t1'11' ~ ~m.M ".l c.::, - I · I .,\oy ,tor •' t, :H w, showers ~ w. loc.~e(s ◄~ ~ m. showers "'> /> ~- ...... I I I I I I visitors I I DE: ~ /' m. locKers -·· 'I'lf'('I ..,.~,u.w, I .. t~9 l ~..-v. GROUND FLOOR '----------~---- _________ l;ot of bleac.ners ....,_. _____...,. I exhibit;on court c:ir:rm. dr:r-m. stor.. ~-------_, __ -- - ---- ~-- ---------.- .... ------ 0 5 10 20 30 40 50 ---.., .. FT 183 �LIBRARY ENROLLMENT -LEVEL: 700 a GROUND FLOOR 1200 lol:Jiy coat.1 penod .. icats stacKs SECOND FLOOR lstacKs -.,1 L I I 7 ,--- 1 stac.Ks I l I : I I t I I I iI I I I I I I I I l I I I I I I I I 1J I I I : I I I : L __ 1 I I .Ls+ac.Ks_ _J_ L __ ------- 0 5 10 I I I I I I 184 Stu.dies --:--1 - 20 30 40 50 I stac.K&_, FT �LIBRARY LOWER LEVEL LOWER LEVEL ENROLLMENT LEVEL: 700 I O·t O•f o-f O-f O-i O·f O·f O·f O•( O·f O·f O·f O·f O·f O·I O·f O·f O·f o-f O·f O·f O·f O·l O·f 0·f O·f O·t - cl-a1 I c.}- ◄O sem-16 staH .-. o-f 111 I t,ld9 se.n, ENROLLMENT LEVEL: 1200 - ,_ :!1 -I Q) - - - :I,. ~ I f - . cl-12O !- study hie]ht stu.dies ~r-------1 --- -- I -- I I I I I ..... I - I - --- - typin(( I I I I I 1 I I I staU I I I eta-, K~ _ _ _ _ I ·blJq. Sl!r'l sem.--16 I r------, I --l • I I I I :-7 I ------ 0 5 10 20 : L - - _5b~~ 30 40 50 FT 18.5 �MAINTENANCE BUILDING GROUND FLOOR ENROLLMENT LEVEL: 700 ...... loc.k'us OHW! ar-ea shops "''"" .... 1- .. ~--1- ...... ...... _...... -- rec.'v•q ,tora~e,e.fc. I vehide 'I I maint. I I I I I I I qroun1s 1a~a1e I I I GROUND FLOOR ENROLLMENT LEVEL: 1200 heatinq plant t;,ld~- e.qup . materra s oHice area -_.._ :: ....... shops \oeKets ........ ......... 1-,- ...------..,.. ........ 1- ..... ijtorag~,<.tc -+--1 re,e.'V''\ Cl.. ~ .. te.h,c.le . I I I I I I I I I I I I 'II I I I II ----------- 0 5 10 186 20 30 40 50 FT ~a;raqe. l I I I ~ C ~ e ~ II) ] I,. ~RI E "' 3! ..a. �CRAFTER 9 THE MASTER PLAN A master plan for a campus may be described as the spatial organization of the physical environment, including buildings, roads, walks, parking areas, playing fields and landscape. The pattern of this organization is dis- cussed in this chapter and is shown graphically in the drawing at the back of this volumeo consideredo Both functional and aesthetic questions are necessarily Although this report is not directly oriented towards matters of design, concepts such as harmony, balance and proportion become essential criteria when discussing the most suitable disposition of physical elements in spaceo The development of the master plan emphasizes the target enrollment of 1200 students. Roads, buildings and other facilities designed to pro- vide for the activities of interim enrollments should be so located as to fit into the pattern established for the College at the 1200 enrollment level. Reference to development after 1974 is also included in this chap- ter. A. Existing Conditions The site of Lakehead College comprises about 190 acres bounded on the north by Oliver Road, on the east by the Lakehead Teachers' College, on the west by the Port Arthur Golf and Country Club and on the south by property held by other institutions. The frontage on Oliver Road is interrupted by a trapezoid-shaped area of 14 acres, which is held privately. This proper- ty presently houses a gasoline service station. 187 �The significant natural features of the campus are as follows: 1) The McIntyre River winds through the property from Oliver Road to the southern boundary, doubl:ing back on itself over part of its route. It forms a natural asset of considerable potential beauty if integrated with landscaping and site development. 2) The property is largely flat. However, running in a generally northeast-southwest direction is a ridge, which drops sharply about 20 feet from a plateau with a prevailing elevation of about 675 square feet. South of the ridge in the eastern part of the property is a marshy area which is not suitable for development unless considerable money is expended :in drainage and reclamation. The river is also about 20 feet lower than the prevail:ing level, with embankments on both sides. 3) The views to the southeast, south and southwest are impressive :in that they enable those at the College to see Mt. McKay, the Sleeping Giant, Lake Superior and other pr:incipal features of the area. Along the southern portion of the College property is a wooded area which provides an attractive landscape background. Access to the College is from Oliver Road, approached either from the northwest or the southeast. No entrance I I from any other point seems necessary. At some time in the future it is likely that an expressway will be built, extending north and south along the western boundary of the property. to the College of 16 acres of property. This will entail an effective loss Another 15 acres adjo:ining and east of the highway will be limited in its future usefulness because of 188 �the noise and distraction associated with such a transportation artery. Nevertheless, it is quite possible for the College to construct on the present property sufficient buildings, playing fields, parking areas and other necessary facilities to accommodate an even larger institution · than is the concern of this study. At present there are three major structures on the campus, plus a temporary storage building and a gate house, which serves as a residence for a member of the maintenance staff. One of the three, the student residence, is located JOO feet from the University Centre and 500 feet from the science and technology buildingo It is well situated as a nucleus for a more extensive residential complexo However, it does not restrict or influence to any important degree the disposition of future non-residential buildings. The existing academic(science and teclm.ology)building and University Centre will remain at the center of College activity throughout the course of development. It is worth nothing that,despite its size, covering a plot approximately 350 by 225 in extent, the academic building does not present a dominating or visually commanding appearance. This is due in part to its diffuseness of form, reflecting construction in four stages over seven yearso The University Centre does suggest, because of its for- mal symmetry, a more monumental aspect. However, this building is at least partially obscured from view by the academic building over a considerable portion of the campus area. The impression received by the Consultants, after careful examination �of the site and the existing buildings, is that the character of the manmade physical environment at Lakehead College has still to be established. It would seem likely that this character will derive more from buildings and site development anticipated over the next seven years than from those of the recent pasto B. Land Use Requirements Before attempting to suggest specific locations for the proposed buildings, it is necessary to extend the programming of physical plant requirements to include elements other than structures. These elements are 1) parking areas, 2) playing fields, 3) other land use ancillary to building occupancy. 1.. Parking Areas Parking is required in some measure by all categories of personnel connected with Lakehead College activities. These categories may be con- sidered as 1) students, 2) faculty, 3) staff and 4) visitors. Based on discussions with the Principal and others at the College, it was established that certain percentages of each of these categories of personnel would require parking stalls. These percentages include consideration of the fact that some members of each category may travel by bus, others may travel together in the same car and still others may be brought to the campus by friends or relatives who will require only unloading space. Table 9-1 indicates the number of personnel involved and also the total parking area required at each enrollment level. 190 �- • 9-1. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Percent Requiring AQQQwmoda:tion Number Requiring Required A"~Qwwoda:tj QD Ew:QllweD:t Parkilli: A;c~ad Total Nurnb~;c E;o;t:Qllwe;o:t 100 1Q.Q l2QQ. Requirements for Parking Area lJ.Q.Q 100 l2QQ. ~nrQllm~;ot lJ.QQ 1QQ. l2QQ. (square feet) Students Facul y Staff Visitorsc 5 Total 20 100a 80 100 400 40 10 20 -- 485 839 35 700 64 55 1200 105 75 35 35 32 10 140 64 44 20 240 105 60 30 25600 11200 10240 3200 44800 20480 14080 6400 76800 33600 19200 9600 1413 157 268 433 50240 85760 139200 80 a Probably only 80-90 percent of faculty will require parking spaces. However, the higher percentage is used to compensate for the use of full-time equivalents in estimating the total number of faculty. bApproximate only; includes staff associated with administration, library, maintenance and food service. cEstimate of probable number of visitors' cars on campus at any one time. dBased on average unit area of 320 square feet per parking stall. f....l '-0 f....l �2. Playing Fields ( The College's requirements for outdoor athletic facilities are influenced by a number of factors, such as the long w:inter and severe cold; the lack, at present, of any indoor facilities, except for two squash courts; the isolation of the College, inhibiting intercollegiate activities; and the problem of organizing intramural activities in a small institution. Nevertheless, outdoor recreation is important to the students at the present time, limited though it be to games such as "broom ball", which require little except flat, open space. Typical outdoor activities (football, soccer, etc.) one acre per field. ~,o require about At the 400-student enrollment level it is recommended that four such fields be available. six fields will be desirable. At the 700-student enrollment level At the 1200-student enrollment level, after the construction of the gymnasium, the relative intensity of use of the playing fields is likely to decline. Seven one-acre fields are programmed for this enrollment target. J. Miscellaneous Land Use In attempting to estimate land use requirements a fifth item must be added to the four elements -- buildings, parking areas, playing fields and roads. This last factor is the space between the build:ings. It would be possible, but undesirable, to consider the buildings illustrated in the preceding chapter as a series of contiguous masses. A more likely assump- tion for preliminary planning is that the buildings will form a reasonably compact group with sufficient space between any two to provide light, air 192 �and a sense of individuality to each. Thus the key concept here in esti- mating the land required for a group of buildings is density. ratio to use in estimating is JO percent. A reasonable That is, 30,000 square feet of buildings at ground level will occupy 100,000 square feet of land. The areas of the building site.s proposed for Lakehead, based on the schematic plans, are shown in table 9-2. 4. Summary Land use requirements are summari~ed in ta~le 9-2. In addition to the three categories described above, there is a listing for roads, estimated at 100,000 square feet (5,000 linear feet x 20 feet in width) for the 1200student level. These calculations are meant to provide only an approximation of the amount and distribution of acreage required for the development of a master plan. Additional space will of course be required for student and faculty residence, for expansion beyond 1200 students and for amenities such as informal recreation areas. The pertinent figure is the approximately 26 acres required at the 1200-student enrollment level. This provides a program element important as a basis for the next stage of the planning process, the organization of the elements of the College as a master plan. C. The Master Plan A number of postulates are suggested by the Consultants relative to planning for growth at Lakehead. These are listed below. 193 �9-2. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Approximate Requirements for Land Use, 1200-Student Enrollment Level, Excluding Residences Category Ground Floor Area Required Site (square feet) Existing buildings Academic building University Centre Proposed buildings Library Academic building Gymnasium Maintenance building Subtotal 79000a 25500 12100 25000a 16950 12800 171350 571165a Parking fields 138560 Playing fields JoL920 Roads 100000 Total lll46L5° aincludes courtyards entirely enclosed by building. bGround area is converted to required site by assuming a density factor of 30 percent in built-up area of campus. See text. cThis area is equivalent to approximately 26 acres. �1) The new buildings should be located south and east of the princi- pal existing building, rather than between the existing building and Oliver Road. It is felt that, to take advantage of the potential of the site and the views to the south and east, the College should grow in the direction of the principal undeveloped areao This will permit the area between the road and the existing academic building to be used for playing fields and thus serve as a buffer zone between academic activities and the outside comrnunityo 2) The buildings should be clearly detached from one another, so that separate structures can express the complexity and variety of campus life. The quality of the experience of proceeding from building to build- ing in a park-like setting is viewed as a desirable contrast to the character of urban street patterns. 3) Given the desirability of attaining the campus character described above, the climate limits the distances which may practically be interposed between buildings. Further, the cold and snow, extending through most of the academic year, become a time factor in that students and faculty must don boots, hats, and overcoats to proceed outdoorso Therefore, for those buildings which are to be part of the scheduled academic day, interior or weather-protected connections are desirable. 1. Circulation Patterns In planning, the determination of circulation patterns precedes the specific determination of building locations. The classic device for organizing vehicular circulation is the perimeter road. Such a road would 195 �---- enclose all the principal existing and proposed buildings, so that most of the pedestrian inter-building traffic will not intersect the road. Parking fields should adjoin the perimeter road and short service roads will be necessary for a few of the buildings. Otherwise, this one con- tinuous loop can serve the entire area under discussiono It is recommended that the road be 20 feet in width, adequate for two-way traffic, and that a parking lane be omitted. A parking lane would increase the cost of the road and, more important, would contribute to defeating one of the reasons for having such a road; namely, to permit the separation of inter-building traffic from parking and service traffic. For the developed areas of the campus to maintain the serenity and beauty of the surrounding area it will be necessary to enforce regulations permitting parking only in designated areas distinct from the roadway itself. An exception may have to be made for peak visiting days such as the opening of the College, commencement and the like, because no College can afford to design facilities for use on only a few occasions. However, this should occur only rarely and will not alter the basic recommendations. The perimeter road should intersect the present road leading from Oliver Roado For pedestrian traffic among the buildings used most continuously by the greatest number of students the Consultants recommend the construction of tunnels. The tunnels will connect the science and technology building with the proposed library and the proposed academic building. new buildings will be connected in the same manner. 196 The two A tunnel may also be ------=-~ �constructed from the existing academic building to the University Centre. A tunnel connection to the proposed gymnasium is not considered essential. It is possible that, when a central heating system is installed for the College, these tunnels may also serve to contain the steam piping. It is also proposed that, following the path of the tunnels, covered passages connect the buildings at grade. These covered walkways, which would not be otherwise enclosed are in part functional but in part designed as an adjunct to the appearance of the campus. They would form a court- yard enclosed by the science and technology building, the proposed academic building and the library. 2. The Master Plan The required minimum of 26 acres can conveniently be found in the area east of the McIntyre River, south of Oliver Road, west of the present main entrance to the campus and north of the marsh-like terrain described earlier. This area is in fact about Lo acres, so that ample provision for expansion beyond 1974 exists. Included within these boundaries are the existing science and technology and University Centre buildings. The existing student residence is west of this area. The specific recommendations for location of facilities are best understood by reference to the plan itself, but a few of the principal features will be described helo1v. It is proposed that immediately south of Oliver Road, between the present entrance road and the College property line, an area be reserved 197 �for playing fields. This area (excluding the property immediately adjacent to the gate house) will measure about 350 feet by 1,000 feet. This space will provide the seven acres of playing field proposed for the 1200-student enrollment level. The perimeter road can be located between the playing fields and the area designated for all of the principal buildings except the gymnasium and the maintenance building. It is considered better practice to separate the gymnasium from the other buildings by the perimeter road than to divide the gymnasium from the playing fields. The perimeter road describes an area about 900 x 900 feet. Within this area are all buildings except for the gymnasium, maintenance building and student residences. There is room for considerable expansion within the road's circumference, as indicated on the plan. The northeast strip of the road will border the existing parking field, so that the road may be constructed while this field remains operative. As soon as sufficient capacity is provided by the fields indicated on the plan, the existing field should be converted to turf in order to improve the appearance of the campus. The library is located about 100 feet from the science and technology building, and the new academic building is indicated at a distance of 120 feet from the library and 130 feet from the existing structure. The three buildings, with the connecting passages, form a court about 200 x 1.L0 feet in area. Despite the expense of the tunnels, it is felt that these dis- tances between buildings should be maintained and not reduced. The in- tended effect of the scheme is to de-emphasize the science and technology building and shift the visual focus to the open quadrangle and to the two �new buildings at its southeast border. Both these new buildings will be three stories in height, taller than science and technology and, it is anticipated, similar to each other in architectural design. tion to the campus. These new buildings will dominate and give definiIt is felt that their impact should not be compromised by reducing the distances between them, or between them and the science and technology building. The maintenance building is located outside the perimeter road area, on a spur road of its own. The building will not be dependent on pedestrian traffic, so that the distance from the other buildings on the campus does not pose any difficulties in communication. advantages: The site has two principal 1) Although the building need not be unattractive, its use as a center for various types of trucks, tractors and miscellaneous vehicular traffic generally results in a kind of aspect which goes counter to the serenity and order which one associates with a campus. best isolated. Therefore, it is 2) The location indicated is about ten feet lower in eleva- tion than the prevailing level within the perimeter road. Should this maintenance building serve as the site of a central heating plant, which the Consultants consider a desirable eventuality, then the steam condensate can be returned by gravity. The location is also favorable in terms of pre- vailing winds and at least partial concealment of the smoke stack. The building will have its own parking area, for employees and for visitors. Space is allowed for deliveries and truck maneuvering. 199 �3. Future Expansion The development of academic facilities beyond the 1200-student enrollment level has already been described in general terms. A few comments may be added on residential facilities, circulation and athletic facilities. Student residence should develop in the immediate vicinity of the existing dormitory. Such a development is shown on the master plan. An addition to the existing buildinp and a new, larger structure would provide for up to 300 students. Additional residences (not shown) could be added on the high ground south of those indicated on the plan. At some time in the future a faculty residential community might be established on the campus. This could be located across the McIntyre River in the northwest sector of the campus. The road which, on the master plan, is indicated as terminating near the student residence and maintenance building might then bridge the river, turn north and exit on Oliver Road between the proposed expressway and the existing service station. Additional playing fields might be located immediately west of those shown on the plan, if the College acquires the property, and also between the entrance road and the Lakehead Teachers' College site. The latter might serve women students at such time as their numbers warranted separate facilities. The development of the southwest sector of the property will probably not take place until the College has reached an enrollment of many times 1200 students and become a multi-faculty university. �• 4. Master Plan Delineation The plan indicates roads, buildings, parking fields, playing field area and direction of future development. also indicated. Contour and property lines are Only a few footpaths are shown, as pedestrian traffic patterns are difficult to predict at this stage. Such paths can be set after student movement between buildings is defined . 201 �CHAPTER 10 INSTITUTIONAL FINANCES This chapter focuses upon the impact of the various aspects of campus development discussed earlier in the report upon the College's finances. It is divided into two broad sections. In the first, consideration is given to the operating statements of the College; that is, the non-capital expenditure and revenue elements of the College 1 s financial life. The second half of the chapter then deals with the capital outlays implied by the campus development program and outlines a financial schedule consistent with the proposed expansion. Unless otherwise noted, all value data used in describing the College's financial life are expressed in 1962 dollar values. As Expenditures and Revenues Tables 10-1 to 10-6 present the historical data concerning expenditures and revenues at the College since 1957-58. Total expenditures have increased from $98,000 in 1957-58 to an estimated $339,000 in 1962-63. Expressed in terms of expenditures per full-time student, there has been an increase from $793 per student to $1,515 per student during the specified time period. During the same interval, the proportion of total outlays devoted to instruction has increased from 5L percent of the total to 63 percent of the total. The proportion of outlays devoted to administration has also been increasing over the 1958-1963 fiscal span. On the other hand, the propor- tion of total expenditures devoted to plant operation and maintenance and other purposes has declinedo 202 �10-1. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Fiscal Years 1958 to 1963 Budget Cat~gorr 125] Summary of Expenditures, Fiscal Year Ending Mai 31 1960 1961 1962 ~ 126l (1962 dollars) Expenditures: summary Instruction Administration Plant operation and maintenance Other b Expenditure: detail Instruction Salaries Instructional supplies Library Travel Administration Office salaries and expense Other Plant operation and maintenance Building Grounds Heat, light and water Insurance Other Extraneous Capital expenditures charged to operations Depreciation 98393 53313 6824 120938 74656 17943 20314 18314 20434 18511 34254 z4626 592 968Z2 78174 1638 16388 680 6824 1.511 8031 12856 lZJO·Z 26550 4942 1881 6350 6245 1786 9654 3202 14009 3297 22800 1183 11943 1831l_t 8600 3980 4896 837 18511 9088 3108 5403 911 24161 12204 6361 4640 32421 18035 7504 5773 1110 21300 10000 10000 6100 1200 2041u JlJ154 ~ 1192 42122 3767 14600 19600 11945 21112 7740 23719 7918 33515 15000 40000 23313 47141 2634 3308 230 5333 5831 5446 1332 20314 1490 3966 14858 7533 67505 2389 4171 2592 17842 l2Z6Z2 208404 2ZZ20l 96879 138737 182574 8031 12856 17307 1198 24161 32651 32421 45199 332420 212000 26550 27300 74600 138z31 1822zu 212000 91074 121056 140000 2921 1879 3000 45446 57105 67000 2000 1492 337 956 3750 aProjected. b Items may not add to totals due to rounding. 203 �10-2. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Fiscal Years 1958 to 1963 Budget Category ~ Summary of Revenues, Fiscal Year Ending May 31 1960 1961 1962 ~ 196t (1962 dollars) Revenues: summary Grants Student fees Other Revenues: detail Grants Municipal Federal Provincial 114947 190)90 186269 238262 89873 156663 152784 187483 22600 31216 48166 31734 2613 2569 2473 1994 2755 828n 126663 l22:Z8u l~:Z483 202:z43 16026 20101 20921 20243 20471 20428 30600 31888 31140 24841 53419 104603 107472 136640 150754 Student fees Registration Supplementary exams Tuition 22600 1421. 310 20870 Jll3ll Other Miscellaneous Rentals: janitor's cottage Rentals: rooms 343120 246000 94850 2300 246000 20000 41000 185000 1579 476 29679 31216 1310 379 29527 48166 1832 304 46030 81864 2508 337 79020 92000 11..U 1.22lJ. ~ ll.25 ) ) 1605 ) 2613 812 2300 869 902 500 523 745 614 1086 607 1194 603 1250 600 1200 869 726 aProjected. bitems may not add to totals due to roundingo 204 287361 202743 81864 94820 2500 350 �10-3- Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Percentage Distribution of Expenditures, Fiscal Years 1958 to 1963 Budget Categgri Expenditures: summary Instruction Administration Plant operation and maintenance Other ~ b Expenditures: detail Instruction Salaries Instructional supplies Library Travel Administration Office salaries and expense Other Plant operation and maintenance Building Grounds Heat, light and water Insurance Other Extraneous Capital expenditures charged to operations Depreciation Fiscal Year Ending Mai ~l 1962 1960 1961 ~ 126l 100.0 54.2 6.9 10000 61.7 6.2 100.0 6lo4 5.1 100.0 66.6 6.2 10000 6508 6.2 lOOoO 6205 7.8 18.2 20.6 15.1 l6o9 11.7 21.7 11.6 15.7 11.7 1603 8.o 22.0 ~ 61.7 66.6 43.7 .9 21.8 .2 ~ ~ .5 41.2 .9 19.7 .6 47.9 2.7 3.4 .2 55.8 .5 61.4 49.6 1.0 10.4 .4 Qd 6.2 ~ 6.2 6.2 ~ 5.3 4.0 1.1 4.6 1.5 1.2 5.0 6.7 1.1 11°7 5.8 2.0 3.4 .6 11.6 3.1 2.2 11°7 6.5 2.7 2.1 .4 8.o 2.9 2.9 1.8 .4 5.0 2.0 3.4 1.9 1.0 18.2 5.4 5°9 l$ol 7.1 5.5 3.3 5.9 43.6 1.1 20.6 1°4 4°0 o7 20 .. 6 la5 16.9 2~1 ll.:1 15.:1 06 16.3 1.4 ~ 4.0 l5ol 14.8 706 l3o4 3.7 llo4 2.9 12.1 4.4 11.8 .8 .5 5.8 aProjected. b Items may not add to totals due to rounding. 205 �10-4. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Percentage Distribution of Revenues, Fiscal Years 1958 to 1963 Budget Categ:Qri Fiscal Year Ending: Ma~ Jl 125.§ 1.25.2 1960 1961 1962 100.0 78.2 19.7 100.0 81.9 16.7 1.4 100 . 0 78 .. 7 20.2 1.1 lOOeO 7006 2.2 100.0 82.3 16.7 1.0 ~ ~ .fil.:.2 lk1 ~ 7.0 11.1 52.5 1L.1 5.8 11.9 53.9 Student fees Registration Supplementary exams Tuition .l2.!.1 1..2 o3 18.2 16.7 .8 .3 15 . 6 16.7 20.2 ~ .1 19.3 .9 .1 27.5 1U2. .2 15.8 --:s Other Miscellaneous Rentals: janitor's cottage Rentals: rooms Z.:1 .8 l.:.Q .LJJ. .5 .l.:J. .3 1..& .3 ~ .3 .6 .5 .2 .2 .3 Revenues: summaryb Grants Student fees Other Revenue: detail Grants Municipal Federal Provincial 13.9 17.8 46°5 ) ) L4 ) 11.0 1604 54.9 .4 .3 .,4 aProjected. b Items may not add to totals due to rounding .. 206 11.0 13.3 57.6 .7 8.5 12.8 57.3 .3 28.5 LO .4 196-:/ 100.0 71.7 27.6 .7 .7 ..1 2608 .1 �10-5- Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Expenditures per Full-Time Day Student, Fiscal Years 1958 to 1963 Fiscal Year EndinB: Mai 31 Expenditure CateB;ori ~ 1252 1960 1961 1962 196t (1962 dollars) b Expenditures: summary Instruction Administration Plant operation and maintenance Other Expenditure: detail Instruction Salaries Instructional supplies Library Travel Administration Office salaries and expense Other Plant operation and maintenance Building Grounds Heat, light and water Insurance Other Extraneous Capital expenditures charged to operations Depreciation 801 66 1198 797 74 1261 830 79 ~ 55 812 501 51 1.JQ1 430 145 164 123 137 153 283 139 188 147 205 122 11Q 801 646 14 135 6 1:ll 523 830 380 21 27 2 501 453 16 28 4 550 ~ 29 260 7 625 13 299 9 55 51 66 lb! 12. 119 40 15 43 52 15 18 55 64 15 102 17 .ll15 43 47 44 11 123 58 27 33 6 1.51 1J.2 70 37 27 1L1 82 34 26 45 5 5 164 12 1J1 17 1..§J 10 188 7 19.S 17 lJJ 87 32 120 120 99 174 44 136 36 152 67 179 12J 8 75 26 45 8 11 261 2 946 119 333 122 45 27 5 II -.. aProjected. b Items may not add to totals due to roundingo 207 �10-6, Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Revenues per Full-Time Day Student, Fiscal Years 1958 to 1963 Revenue Category Fiscal Year Ending May )1 ~ ~ 1960 1961 1962 196t (1962 dollars) Revenues: summary b Grants Student fees Other Revenues: detail Grants Municipal Federal Provincial 211 725 182 20 .ill 129 165 431 1278 1051 213 13 1SL1 lJ.Q.2 1263 258 21 1077 277 15 1306 922 372 13 1531 1051 140 209 702 1263 169 1Q11 ~ 888 116 176 785 91 145 685 1098 89 183 826 213 11 ~ 2:1.1 J1g ~ 3 3 11 2 359 Student fees Registration Supplementary exams Tuition 182 11 2 168 199 244 11 2 265 Other Miscellaneous Rentals: janitor's cottage Rentals: rooms 20 7 1J 5 gJ_ 15 1J 1Q 4 2 4 5 3 7 3 6 5 ) ) 13 ) 5 aProjected, b 205 1098 423 10 Items may not add to totals due to roundingc 208 11 7 9 5 11 2 411 3 �10-7. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Expenditures per Full-Time Student, By Major Expenditure, Category, Selected Years, 1957-58 to 1973-7L Expenditures per Student Year Total Instruction Administration Plant Operation Other ( 1962 dollars) 1957-58 1958-59 1959-60 1960-61 1961-62 793 812 1303 1198 1261 L30 501 801 797 830 1963-6L~ 1966-67 1973-7Lc 171L 19L9 2982 1188 lLOJ 2250 55 51 66 7L 79 1L5 123 153 139 1L7 16L 137 283 188 205 100 112 167 159 151 172 266 282 390 Indexes of growth: 1961-62 1963-6L~ 1966-67 1973-7L c 1.000 1.359 l.5L6 2.365 1.000 1.L31 1.690 2. 711 1.000 1.266 LL18 2.11L 1.000 1.082 1.027 1.170 1.000 1.298 1.376 1.902 aAdjusted to LOO-student enrollmento bAdjusted to 700-student enrollmenta cAdjusted to 1200-student enrollmento 209 �During the same interval, the College's revenues have risen from $115,000 to $3L3,000. Expressed on a per student basis, total revenues have increased from $927 per student in 1958 to $1,532 per student in 1963. By far the largest proportion of the College's revenues are accounted for by grants from various governmental bodies. revenues were derived from grants. In 1958, 78 percent of the After rising slightly in 1959, the pro- portion of total revenue derived from grants declined to approximately 72 percent in 1963. Provincial grants. More than half of the College revenues are derived from The proportion of total revenues accounted for by stu- dent fees has risen from 20 percent in 1958 to 28 percent in 1963. Revenues from other sources account for a negligible proportion of the total College income. What developments can be expected during the course of the College's expansion to the 1200-student enrollment? Considered on a per student basis, expenditures for instruction have increased from $L30 per student in 1958 to $830 in 1962. During the same interval, expenditures per student for administration increased from $55 to $79, for plant operation and maintenance from $1L5 to $1L7, and for other purposes from $16L to $205. In short, the two most pronounced areas of increase in the expenditures of the College in servicing the expanding enrollment were in the areas of instruction and administration. These trends, when projected, yield estimates of expenditures per student which show substantial increases over the current levels of outlay. Thus, total expenditures per student increase to $1,71L in 1963-6L, $1,9L9 in 1966-67, and $2,982 in 1973-'(L. 210 These represent increases of 36 percent, �55 percent and 137 percent above the 196l-b2 level. All of the components of outlay also reveal substantial increases. Thus, expenditures per student for instructional purposes rise from $830 per student in 1961-62 to $1,188 in 1963-6L, $1,LOJ in 1966-67, and $2,250 in 1973-7L increases of L3 percent, 69 percent and 171 percent, respectively. The expenditures per student for administration, plant operation and maintenance, and other categories of expenditure also show marked increases over the 1961-62 levels, although the expansions are all of a lower order of magnitude than the increases in total expenditures per student or instructional expenditures per studento The Consultants believe that these figures are reasonable. There is tremendous pressure in higher educational circles for substantial increases in faculty salaries. Apart from the problem of catching up with past short- comings in the levels of faculty salaries vis-a-vis the earnings offered to persons of comparable competence in non-university activities, the general increases in productivity throughout the Canadian economy will force a sustained upward rise in the level of real faculty salaries over the course of the planning interval under consideration. Moreover, the College in 1961-62 was .26th . among Canadian institutions in average faculty outlays The Consutlants believe that by the time the LOO-student enrollment is reached, outlays for faculty salaries should reach $1,037 per student; and by the time the 1200-student enrollment is reached, outlays per student for faculty salaries should reach $1,3L1. In 1961-62, the comparable figure was approximately $550, reflecting the relatively low salary scale of the College and its relative isolationo 211 �Nor are the other components of the increase in expenditures per student unusual. Increased enrollment and an increasingly varied program of curriculum offerings will require constant expansion in the scope of library acquisitions and in the amount of service offered by the library to the enlarged student bodya The larger enrollment will necessitate a substantial increase in the size and scope of the administrative supporting units, both in central administration and, more importantly, in the supporting administrative units such as business services, record keeping services, typing services, student and staff service facilities and so on. Nor will plant operation and maintenance be left behind in the increased cost pattern. While there may be some economies in plant operation and maintenance costs per square foot of building space over the course of the College's expansion, there is such variety in the additional space and buildings that must be added to meet the College's expansion that the cost per student will rise even though the unit cost of maintenance per square foot of space may fall. By way of example, gymnasium facilities and student center facilities are not even included in the financial data for the 1958-63 fiscal period. In short, increased plant operation costs per student can be rationalized in terms of the increased scope and variety of services and activities being undertaken by the College as it expands from its present enrollment of 220 students to the 1200-student enrollmenta While it may be possible for unit costs per student to decline for brief periods of time, it is characteristic of higher educational institutions that the long-term upward trend in costs per student is usually irreversible because of the constantly expanding horizons in the scope, character and quality of the services provided to the faculty and student body of the institutiona 212 �What revenues can the College expect to offset the expansion in total current operating outlays to approximately 3.6 million dollars that will accompany the expansion to the 1200-student enrollment? It is clear from the financial data that the principal sources of revenue for the College have been grants from governmental bodies and student fees. Together, these have accounted for well over 95 percent of the College's current operating revenues. It seemed to the Consultants that an appropriate assessment of the future composition of the College's revenues should involve an evaluation of how high ·student fees are likely to go, a comparison of the estimated student fee level with projected total expenditures per student, and the treatment of grants from governmental bodies as a residual which reflects the amount of support needed from external sources to offset operating needs. The underlying data on revenues from student fees suggest that the $372 per student received in 1961-62 could rise to $L69 in 1963-6L, $557 in 1966-67, and $900 in 1973-7L. As compared with the 1961-62 level, these represent increases of 26 percent by 1963-6L, 50 percent by 1966-67, and 1L2 percent by 1973-7L. In short, these are very rapid rises in the student fees charged at the College. In fact, they are more rapid than the increases in personal income projected for the country as a whole during the planning interval under consideration. If other revenues per student are treated as a function of student fee revenues per student, a not unreasonable assumption since the components of this revenue category seem to be closely related to the level of enrollment and the over-all size of the category is relatively negligible, then the bulk of the College's revenues must still be derived from grants provided by governmental bodies. Taking revenues from student fees and other sources 213 �10-8. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Revenues per Full-Time Student, by Major Revenue Category, Selected Years, 1957-58 to 1973-74 Revenues ~er Student Year Total: Received or Requireda Student Fees Slli1fil: Total: Non-Grants Grants: Received or Requireda (1962 dollars) 1957-58 1958-59 1959-60 1960-61 1961-62 927 1278 1542 1369 1306 182 213 258 277 372 20 13 21 15 13 202 226 279 292 385 725 1051 1263 1077 922 1963-64b 1966-67~ 1973-74 1714 1949 2982 469 30 900 57 499 592 957 1215 1357 2025 1.000 1.312 1.492 2.283 1.000 L261 1.497 2.419 1.000 2.308 2.692 4.385 1.000 lo296 lo538 2.486 1.000 1.318 1.472 2.196 Indexes of growth 1961-62b 1963-64 1966-67~ 1973-74 35 557 aAs indicated by projections of expenditures. bAdjusted to 400-student enrollment. cAdjusted to 700-student enrollment. dAdjusted to 1200-student enrollmento 214 �10-9- Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Estimated Faculty Salary Outlays at Alternate Target Enrollments, by Rank (in 1962 dollars) Item Rank Instructor Associate Assistant and Lecturer Professor Professor Professor Total Faculty 400 Students Average salary: 1963-64 Number of faculty Faculty salary outlays Total (000) Per student 14024 11 10600 8 8427 10 7202 9 38 154 386 85 212 84 211 65 162 388 970 700 Students Average salary: 1966-67 Number of faculty Faculty salary outlays Total (000) Per student 14 9478 17 8100 15 64 167 238 161 230 122 174 734 1048 15774 18 11923 284 406 1200 Students Average salary: 1973-74 Number of faculty Faculty salary outlays Total (000) Per student N.B. 20751 29, 15685 23 12469 28 10656 25 105 602 501 361 301 349 291 266 222 1578 1315 Faculty salary estimates for Central Canada based upon growth of per annum were used in projecting Lakehead College outlays. 4 percent 215 �and subtracting them from the total revenues required to offset the total expenditures per student already estimated, the College must increase its revenues from grants from $922 per stuqent in 1961-62 to $1,215 in 1963-6L, $1,357 per student in 1966-67, and $2,025 per student in 1973-?L. Relative to the 1961-62 grants, these represent increases of 32 percent by 1963-6L, L7 percent by 1966-67, and 120 percent by 1973-7L. How reasonable are these estimates? It would certainly seem from a review of past experience that the revenue side of college and university financial life tends to be passive; that is, revenues rise only because the colleges go out and seek the means to support and sustain th~ higher levels of expenditure that are associated with the increasingly costly commodity known as education. Thus, if there are any weaknesses in the analysis, they would seem to be on the cost side rather than on the revenue side. Moreover, distasteful though it may be to contemplate; student fees rave been rising, and rising significantly, during the post-World War II period. The increases have been a response to the rapidly rising cost of providing a higher education in the context of an increasing departure from the relatively inexpensive classical education curriculum and the keen competition facing higher educational institutions from non-academic employment sources. Moreover, the increases have been much more rapid than the increases in the levels of total expenditures per student. Indeed, at the College, revenues from student fees have increased relatively more rapidly than revenues from grants; the latter have experienced much more modest increases during the historical interval under examination~ Moreover, there appears to be no reason to assume that governmental bodies will absorb an increasing share of the educational burden, given the vigorous competition for the tax 216 �dollar provided by a whole spectrum of governmental services outside the sphere of education. However, there is the possibility that student fees may not be able to keep pace with the increased costs of education. If this were the case, and student fees could increase no more rapidly than the cost of providing educational services, then it seems likely that the most obvious source to be tapped for making up the difference between what is required and what is available from student fees and governmental grants will be private sources -- benefactions, grants and the income from endowments yet to be made to the College. If student fees cannot keep pace with the cost rise projected above and increased revenues from new sources such as private benefactions are not forthcoming, there is no alternative to increased revenues from government sources, unless a lower scale of services than has been anticipated in the analyses underlying this study is offered to the students at the College during the coming decade. B. Capital Costs and Phasing of Construction 1. Procedure This study includes estimates of the cost and phasing of the building program and master plan. The schedule of outlays and priorities associated with them is presented in table 10-12. These estimates do not include routine maintenance and minor repair projects, which are considered to be incorporated in the operating budget. Sources for determining unit costs for construction work included commercial surveys and indexes and also representative Canadian architects. 217 �10-10. I\) 1--l CD Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Budget Estimates for Site Development Work Q:u.au:ti~ 1QQ. l:t.em bJDC:U.D:t E;arcllmen:t 1ilil Preliminary Qnil l2QQ Unit P;ricea 1m Eni:s;2llm~nt 1QQ. l2QQ (1962 dollars) Parking Parking Parking Parking Parking field (175) field (90) field (90) field (40) field (30) Perimeter road Other roads and service yards -- -- -- 25600 -- 16000 S.F. S.F. S.F. S.F. S.F. 3850 300 -- L.F. 4000 15000 7500 S.F. 57000 -- 25600 ---- 15000 Landscaped areab Playing fields 3.5 4 8 2 --- 4.5 1 Total aAbbreviations: L.F. = linear feet; S.F. = square Acre Acre .60 .60 .60 .60 .60 15 .60 7000 3000 34200 --- 15360 -- 15360 -- -- 9600 -- 9000 57750 4500 2400 9000 4500 24500 12000 56000 6000 31500 3000 130850 99860 63960 feet. bThis item includes planting, footpaths, benches and miscellaneous decorative features. �10-11. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Budget Estimate for Utilities Systems AJDQnnt QuaDtlu E;o..:Qllm~Dl:l .L.QQ ~ 1QQ Preliminary ll.Q.Q Un;it Unit . a Price E;c;t:Qllm~nt .1J.QQ 1QQ J.200. (1962 dollars) Electrical distribution systemb Underground distribution 500 Outside lighting 20 Miscellaneous -- L.F. Ea. 1750 10 1250 10 -- L.S. -- 10 350 -- 5000 7000 5000 17500 3500 10000 12500 3500 10000 -- 13500 13500 Water supply system Underground water mains and fire hydrants -- 1500 1500 L.F. 9 Storm drainage system Storm sewers Miscellaneous -- -- 2000 2000 L.F .. L.S. 8 -- =- 5000 16000 7500 16000 5000 22000 68000 60500 -~ == Sanitary systemC Totald aAbbreviations: L.F. = linear feet; Ea.= each; L.S. = lump sum. bThis table excludes the contract for a sub-station and distribution to existing buildings. crt is assumed that a sewer line will be installed by the City; connections to this line are included under project cost in table 10-12. I'\) ~ dUtilities implied by additional student residence are not included. �f\) f\) 10-12. 0 Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Schedule of Capital Development, Priority Phasing and Budget Outlays Target Year of Co.l[QletLona Item ~ Unit Cost (gross (1962 sq. ft.) dollars/ sq. ft.) (1) 1964 ( 2) Alterations and additions to existing academic building alterations: additions: Cost: Basic Pro~ct (thousands of 1962 dollars) Additional Costs (percent of basic project) Cost: Total Project (thousands of 1962 dollars) (3) (4) (5) (6) ( 7) 18 10.0 126.0 20 7000 20 12.0 151.2 140 . 5 15 161.6 5.0 15 5.8 1964 Site developmentb 1964 Bus station 1965 Library 36300 23 834.9 25 1043 . 6 1965 Tunnels C 1980 11 21.8 15 25.1 1965 Ut i·1·t· 1 1es d 22.0 15 25.3 1965 Admlnistration wing, new academic building 1965 Tunnels e 1966 Maintenance building 1967 Site developmentb (Continued) 19075 21 400.6 20 480.7 3150 11 34. 7 15 39.8 7800 14 109.2 15 125.6 99.9 15 114.9 �10-12. (Continued) Target Year of a Completion Item Area Unit Cost (gross (1962 sq. ft.) dollars/ sq. ft.) ( 2) (1) d 1967 Utilities 1967 Alterations to existing academic building 1967 Alterations and additions to University Centre alterations: additions: I\.) I\.) (thousands of 1962 dollars) Additional Costs (percent of basic project) Cost: Total Project (thousands of 1962 dollars) (3) (4) (5) (6) ( 7) -- -- 68.o 15 78.2 -- -- 95.0 35 128.3 -- -- 25 15.0 79.4 20 40 18.0 111.2 3175 1967 Gymnasium 33900 17 576.3 20 691.6 1967 Academic building 39955 20 799.1 20 958.9 1967 Site developmentb -- -- 64.0 15 73.6 1967 Utilities -- -- 60.5 15 69.6 1968 Addition to maintenance building 5000 14 70.0 15 80.5 1968 Alterations to library -- -- 10.0 20 12.0 -- -- -- -- 4407 .5 d Total t-J Cost: Basic Project ( Continued) f �10-12. I\.) I\.) I\.) (Continued) alt is assumed that each project is to be completed by September of the listed target year. 1964 refers to the beginning of the academic year 1964-65. Thus, b See table 10-10. cincludes tunnels from science and technology building to library and University Centre. d See table 10-11. eincludes tunnels from proposed academic building (administrative wing) to library and science and technology buildingc fTotal excludes student residenc~s, as their construction will depend on College policy, as noted in Chapter 7. For 250 additional residents 58,500 gross square feet would be required over the years 1964-748 At nineteen dollars per square foot the basic cost would be $1,111,500 and the total project cost would be 20 percent higher or $1,334,250. �The Consultants are indebted to the firm of Mickelson, Fraser and Haywood for their assistance in this aspect of the study. Commercial construction surveys proved to be of only limited usefulness, as their data on Canadian cities include Toronto but not the Lakehead area. Nor is their information organized in sufficient detail to permit the various types of projects represented at the College to be identified and differentiated. tects' and Therefore, greater emphasis was placed on local archi- engineers' experience, including the work recently completed at the College. Table 10-12 distinguishes between the cost of the basic project and the cost of the total projecto The basic project cost can be equated with the amount of the general construction contract, which, it is assumed, includes built-in and fixed equipmento The cost of the total project in- cludes the other sums which must be expended by the client before the building can be occupied. These sums include professional fees, movable furniture and certain minor outlays for site and utilities work not covered elsewhere as separate items. The difference between basic cost and total cost is expressed as a percentage of basic cost and varies with the nature of the project. It is assumed that the new buildings will be simple in detail and finish but of materials that are non-combustible and easy to maintain. Equipment is assumed to be of first-class institutional quality. 2. Phasing and Priorities The items in table 10-12 are arranged in chronological order as to 223 �completion dates of construction. Some of the recommendations can be interpreted with flexibility, some are virtually mandatory. The construction of the perimeter road, the large parking field, the west wing of the science and technology building and the library should be undertaken immediately. The maintenance building could also well be built in the immediate future; the workload of the maintenance staff will increase greatly with the expansion of both developed campus area and gross building space. Nevertheless, some deferral of this building's priority would be possible, as indicated in the table. The gymnasium would be an important adjunct to the College at any time. Its lower priority listing reflects the greater emphasis placed on academic facilities and also the long-range desirability of building a gymnasium adequate for over 1000 students in one stage. Advancing the con- struction date of the gymnasium would add greatly to the excess space on the campus at the time of its completion. The area of greatest possible variation from the schedule in table 10-12 consists of the academic facilities to be built subsequent to the construction of the libraryo For an enrollment greater than about 700 ._ students,a building of at least 11,000 net square feet will be requiredo Much of this is for administration and the resulting structure would be about the same size as, or slightly smaller than the administration wing shown in the schematic plans. However, if a larger building were to be built at this time, then the balance of the academic space, listed for completion by September, 1967 in the table, could be deferred. Or, alter- nately, the building could be built in three stages, rather than two, In- stead of a wing of 19,075 gross square feet to be completed in 1965 and a 224 I �balance of 39,955 to be completed in 1967, the total of 59,030 gross square feet might be distributed equally among three target years, probably 1965, 1968 and 1971. student residences are not included in the table, although their potential cost in relation to an enrollment of 1200 students is listed in a footnote. This cost could be prorated over time to provide for housing a maximum of JOO students between 1964 and 1974. J. Site Development This heading refers to parking fields, roads, paths, landscaping and playing fields. A breakdown of costs by item and enrollment level is shown on table 10-10. These costs are then summarized on table 10-12, where the total cost for each target enrollment level is entered at the appropriate point in the priority listing. 4. Utilities Cost estimates for utilities can only be presented in rough terms at this time; preliminary engineering design work would be required to produce more detailed studies of cost for these elementso In general the College will proceed to develop utilities on an institutional, centralized basis over the next decade, rather than as a series of self-contained systems related to individual buildings. For example, instead of separate drainage fields to accommodate sewerage, it is expected that an extension of the city sewer system will reach the campus in the next few years as a continuation of the piping line from Katherine Street. 225 �In electrical power supply, a central sub-station is under contract. In heating, each building to date has been equipped with a package boiler unit. The Consultants believe that in time a central heating plant and steam distribution system will be used; however, quantifying this viewpoint would imply engineering feasibility studies outside the scope of this report.a Therefore, no specific costs on either the central heating plant or the steam distribution system are listed. The unit costs of buildings listed in table 10-12 are considered adequate to include self-contained heating systems. Table 10-11 lists utility system estimates, organized in a similar manner to site development costs. These figures are also incorporated in table 10-12. aThe Consultants prepared questionnaires and received replies from five Ontario universities on the subject of central vis-a-vis individual package heating systems. These replies have been forwarded to Lakehead College separately from this reporto 226 I �I I I I I I I I I I • •I I I I I • APPENDIXES �• • • • • 9 APPENDIX A ENROLLMENT �A-1. Canada and Ontario: Population, Total and 18-21 Years Age Group, Selected Years, 1941 to 1971 TQtal PQ1mla t;i QD Canada ~ a Ontariob Ratio: Ontario/ Canada Canada (000) 1941 1946 19.51 1956 1961 11.507 12292 14009 16081 18238 1966 1971 19518 21643 N.B. Grou~ Ratio: Ontario/ Canada Ontariod lB-21 Years C A~e (ooo) 266.,5 273o3 264.J 6236 5405 .328 .336 .342 n/a 86,5.2 8,51.8 895.1 1016.4 316.7 .316 .310 .316 .312 6990 7898 .358 .365 1222.6 1484-9 418.6 487.6 .342 .328 3788 4093 4.598 .329 .333 282.5 Projections for 1966 and 1971 were taken or adapted from the following sources: a w.c. Hood and Anthony Scott, Output Labor and Capital in the Canadian Economy. bontario Department of Economics, Ontario, Economic and Social Aspects Surve~ 1961. C Dr. E.F. Sheffield, Enrollment in Canadian Universities and Colle~es to 1970-71 {1961 Projection). dnr. R.W.B. Jackson, SecQndacy School and Uniyersicy Eprollment Study; Volume I: Basic Tables. 230 �Canada and Ontario: Undergraduate University-Grade Enrollments, Fall Semester, Selected Years, 1944-45 to 1970-71 A-2. Year a UDder~rag~ate EnrollmeDt Ratio: Ontario/ Canada Ontario Canada 1944-1945 1945-1946 1946-1947 1947-1948 1948-1949 1949-1950 1950-1951 1951-1952 1952-1953 1953-1954 1954-1955 1955-1956 1956-1957 1957-1958 1958-1959 1959-1960 1960-1961 1961-1962 38376 61861 76237 79346 75807 69111 64036 59849 60046 61198 62291 66277 72629 80443 88010 96766 107482 121547 12297 20278 25848 27648 26303 23679 21268 19495 19333 19037 19137 20037 21263 23174 24927 27189 29501 32968 1965-1966 1970-1971 169900 286600 57900 107100 N.B. a Non-Veteran Under~raduate Enrollment Ratio: Ontario/ Ontario Canada Canada -348 .347 .343 -332 .326 -322 .311 .307 .302 .293 .288 .283 .281 .274 .271 37859 41861 42237 49746 54007 56062 57910 57385 58921 60665 61886b 66086 72479 80371 87959 96722 0 107450 121524 11335 12078 11818 10446 15127 17082 18159 18677 18453 18239 19137 20037 21263 23174 • 24927 27189 29501 32968 .299 .289 .280 .210 .280 .305 .314 .325 .313 .301 -309 .303 .293 .288 .283 .281 .275 .271 .341 .374 169900 286600 57900 107100 .341 .374 .320 .328 .339 Projections of enrollment are adapted from estimates prepared by Dr. E. F. Sheffield and Dr. R. W. B. Jackson. Fall semester. bEstimate: 191 veterans. cEstimate: 32 veterans. Source data: DBS publications on Fall undergraduate enrollment. Projections from Sheffield publication, 1962 and Jackson estimate #6. See tables V-1 and V-3. N.B. Jackson estimate may be low. 231 �A-3. Canada: Undergraduate Enrollment, Total and Enrollment in Arts and Pure Science Programs, Selected Years 1931 to 1962 ' Academic Year Ending: in Ar.!"& Under-graduate Enrollment total: Pure Arts and Pure Science Science All Programs Arts and Pure Science as Percent of All Programs (number) 1931 1936 1941 1946 1951 19.53 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 19.59 1960 1961 1962 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 23504 24246 26341 29845 33296 37179 42670 49332 4214 4548 5151 6001 7521 8209 9237 1221.5 16828 17741 17634 31229 29771 27548 27499 27718 28794 31492 35846 40817 45388 51907 61547 (indexes: 1931 1936 1941 1946 1951 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 aNot available. 232 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a .476 .491 .534 .605 .675 .754 .865 1.000 .345 .372 .422 .491 .616 .672 .756 1.000 31.576 33522 34817 61861 64036 60046 61198 62291 66277 72629 80443 88010 96766 107482 121547 1962 = 1.,000) .288 e287 a507 -484 -448 .447 .,450 s468 . 512 0582 .,663 737 .843 .260 .276 ,286 .509 . .527 .494 .503 .512 545 .593 0662 .724 .796 G884 lo000 lo000 0273 0 53.29 52.92 50.65 .50.48 46.49 4.5.88 44.93 44.50 43.44 43.36 44-56 46.38 46.90 48.29 50.64 8 L052 1.045 1.000 .997 .918 .906 .887 .879 .858 .856 .880 .916 .926 .954 1.000 �A-4• Ontario: Undergraduate Enrollment, Total and Enrollment in Arts and Pure Science Programs, Selected Years 1931 to 1962 Academic Year ~ Epdini' in Undergraduate Enrollment Total: Pure Arts and Pure Science All Programs Science Arts and Pure Science as Percent of All Programs (number) 1931 1936 1941 1946 1951 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 "' 1961 1962 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 6512 6758 7514 8567 9909 10970 12284 13780 968 1017 1126 1488 1564 1765 2239 3571 5387 5801 5408 9320 9330 7990 7701 7480 7775 8640 10055 11473 12735 14523 17351 (indexes: 1931 1936 1941 1946 1951 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 a a a a a a a .473 .490 .545 .622 . 719 .796 .891 loOOO a a a a a a a .271 .285 .315 .417 .438 .494 .627 1.000 oJlO 0334 0312 .,537 .538 0460 444 0431 .,448 -498 ,.580 .661 0734 .837 1.,000 0 11414 12066 11693 20278 21268 19333 19037 19137 20037 21263 23174 24927 27189 29501 32968 1962 47.20 48.07 46.25 45.96 43.87 41.33 40.45 39°09 38.80 40.63 43.39 46.03 46.84 49.23 52.63 = loOOO) o346 0366 355 .,615 0 G645 a586 .577 .580 0608 0645 s703 0756 ,.825 .895 loOOO .897 .913 879 .873 .834 •785 .769 .743 .737 0772 .824 .875 .890 .935 1.000 0 aNot available. 233 �A-5• Canada: Professional Workers, by Occupational Groups and Classes; Selected Years, 1931 to 1961 Group and Class l2Jl l2ll l25l l2& 200662 82983 240402 88279 302557 105118 524000 178027 Professors, college principals 3200 4217 5422 11145 Social scientists Accountants, auditors b Actuaries and statisticians Judges, magistrates Lawyers, notaries Librarians Social workers Statisticians Others 29120 17623 217 544 8058 1009 892 ( 138) 777 39695 25887 491 481 8621 1578 1460 60787 30670 2901 834 12088 3439 10855 1177 54092 34151 1000 597 9038 2061 3995 ( 742) 3250 Artists, writers, clergymen Artists, art teachers Authors, editors, journalists Clergymen, priests Musicians, music teachers 27426 2618 3344 12678 8786 31007 3492 4580 14474 8461 36243 4896 7217 16097 8033 50676 7451 13030 18924 11271 Life scientists Agricultural professionals Veterinarians Dentists Dieticians Graduate nurses Osteopaths, chiropractors Physicians, surgeons 37499 899 1046 4039 491 20462 542 10020 47187 1375 1095 4210 935 27114 585 11873 59907 2698 1205 4608 1101 35138 832 14325 95759· 2746 1524 5469 1915 61699 1113 21290 Physical scientists Architects Chemists, metallurgists Engineers Civil Electrical Mechanical Mining, chemical 20434 1298 3318 30017 1313 8203 41775 1740 8574 43244 2940 6142 7524 3937 2859 1498 7470 5118 4870 3043 12168 6349 8328 4616 11917 8763 8137 5345 All professional groups Teachers, instructors aAdjusted total. a ( 327) (b) Items may not add to totals due to incomplete data. bActuaries and statisticians are combined because of the manner in which the data were reported for 1961. 234 ■ I I �A-6. Canada: Indexes of Growth for Professional Workers, by Occupational Groups and Classes; Selected Years, 1931 to 1961 l.2.3l l2il l25l l2.6l All professional groups Teachers, instructors .383 .466 .459 .496 .577 .590 1.000 1.000 Professors, college principals .287 .378 -486 1.000 Social scientists Accountants, auditors Actuaries and statisticians Judges, magistrates Lawyers, notaries Librarians Social workers Others .479 .575 .075 .652 .667 .293 .082 .653 .844 .169 .577 . 713 .459 .135 .890 1.113 .345 . 716 -748 .599 .368 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 a a a a Artists, writers, clergymen Artists, art teachers Authors, editors, journalists Clergymen, priests Musicians, music teachers .541 .351 .257 .670 -780 .592 .469 .351 . 765 .751 .715 .657 .554 .851 .713 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 Life scientists Agricultural professionals Veterinarians Dentists Dieticians Graduate nurses Osteopaths, chiropractors Physicians, surgeons .392 .327 .686 .739 .256 .332 487 .471 .493 .501 719 .488 .439 .526 -558 .626 .983 .791 .843 .575 .570 -748 .673 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 Physical scientists Architects Chemists, metallurgists Engineers Civil Electrical Mechanical Mining, chemical 473 .441 .540 .694 .447 1.336 .966 .592 1.396 1.000 1.000 1.000 .631 .449 .351 .280 .627 584 .599 .569 1.021 .725 1.023 .864 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 Group and, Class 0 0 0 .770 0 aData not available. 235 �A-7. Ontario: Professional Workers, by Occupational Groups and Classes; Selected Years, 1931 to 1961 Group and Class All professional groups Teachers, instructors a Professors, college principals Social scientistsb Accountants, auditors Actuaries and statisticians Judges, magistrates Lawyers, notaries Librarians Social workers Statisticians Others C 1..23l- l.2.hl 1251 l2Q1 74172 23659 80120 25110 116179 30022 164630 56525 687 1089 1424 3052 11598 7382 17398 12409 176 2792 622 626 165 3103 866 855 25503 12885 1598 282 4902 1663 4173 6130 20774 13813 542 196 3388 1037 1798 ( 376) 7089 Artists, writers, clergymen Artists, ,art teachers Authors, editors, journalists Clergymen, priests Musicians, music teachers 10758 1317 1465 4303 3673 11956 1710 1877 4827 3542 13928 2362 3189 5132 3245 20018 3603 5739 6195 4481 Life scientists Agricultural professionals Veterinarians Dentists Dieticians Graduate nurses Osteopaths, chiropractors Physicians, surgeons 15455 256 467 1852 18567 8689 257 3934 11178 299 4698 23328 773 591 1966 515 13693 427 5363 37579 704 633 2299 829 24579 495· ?040 8331 576 1572 15795 570 3998 19614 744 3982 21953 1138 2836 2669 1718 1063 733 2759 2410 2263 3795 4205 3551 4929 2203 7392 4205 4075 2307 Physical scientists Architects Chemists, metallurgists Engineers Civil (including surveyors) Electrical Mechanical Mining, chemical aAdjusted total. 501 1891 Items may not add to totals due to ·incomplete data. ~Excludes actaaries, statisticians, others for purposes of analysis~ cActuaries and statisticians are combined because of the manner in which tl1e data were reported for 196L 236 I I �A-8. Ontario: Indexes of Growth for Professional Workers, by Occupational Groups and Classes; Selected Years, 1931 to 1961 l23l l.21.u. l2.5l l2.6.l Teachers, instructors .4.51 .419 -487 .444 .706 . .531 1.000 1 .. 000 Professors, college principals .22.5 .3.57 .467 1.000 Social scientists Accountants, auditors Actuaries and statisticians Judges, magistrates Lawyers, notaries Librarians Social workers Others .4.56 •.573 .682 .963 .624 . .570 .374 .1.50 •.58 .5 .633 . .521 .20.5 .81.5 1.072 .339 .69.5 .691 .624 .431 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 a a a a Artists, writers, clergymen Artists, art teachers Authors, editors, journalists Clergymen, priests Musicians, music teachers •.537 .366 .2.55 .695 .820 •.597 .47.5 -327 .779 .790 .696 .6,56 . .5.56 .828 .724 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 Life s cientists Agricultural professionals Veterinarians Dentists Dieticians Graduate nurses Osteopaths, chiropractors Physicians, surgeons .411 .364 e738 .806 .494 .791 0823 3.54 • .519 -489 .4.55 .604 .,584 .621 1.041 .934 • 8.5.5 .621 •.557 .863 .667 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 .379 .,506 .554 .719 . .501 1.410 .893 .6,54 1.404 1.000 1.000 1 .. 000 .361 .409 .261 .318 .373 • .573 •.5.5.5 1.64.5 .844 .,569 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 Group anct Class All professional groups Physical scientists Architects Chemists, metallurgists Engineers Civil (including surveyors) Electrical Mechanical Mining, chemical 0 1.210 .9.55 aData not available. 237 �A-9. Canada and Ontario: Labor Force Post-Secondary School Educational Attainment, Grade 13 and Beyogd, by Occupational Category, 1941 and 1951 Occupational Catei'o;cy All occupations Proprietary and managerial Professional Clerical Agricultural Fishing, hunting and trapping Logging Mining and quarrying Manufacturing and mechanical Foremen Food products Liquor, beverages, tobacco Rubber products Fur and fur goods, furriers Leather and leather products Textiles Textile goods and wearing apparel Wood products Pulp,paper and paper products Printing, publishing, bookbinding Metal products Non-metallic mineral products Chemicals Miscellaneous Electric light and power production and stationary enginemen Construction Transportation Communication Commercial Financial Service Personal Protective Other Laborers Not stated Persons Attaining Grade 13 and Beyond as Percent of Total Labor Force Canada Ontario l2ll 1251 6e76 10 .. 26 a 18,,76 59.72 15"14 L88 48a6l a L24 .52 .,83 2e85 a 6 .. 08 2o73 2 . 56 2o4) 2 77 L45 0 L4l L82 2o37 3,.57 5o04 3°58 2074 4.,57 4°45 8013 3o80 064 L38 3.12 3.64 6"96 2"43 3.. 12 2o)3 3°33 L48 L72 2o39 2o)9 2o62 5°74 4ol3 2"25 4999 5"34 4sl2 l2L.l 13.39 a ,56.14 19.38 1.42 7.99 1..13 3.98 a 7.03 3. 40 4o8l 2,.97 4.,29 2 . 04 2.26 2 . 65 2 .. 65 3.54 a 4e26 3e22 4e89 5.,23 8.48 23.66 68.17 18.,94 2o80 L83 2.59 4.18 4.75 8.88 3,.59 6.81 3.. 20 4.31 2.12 2.72 3 .. 70 3.22 3.07 6.16 4.94 3.20 5.61 5°87 5.50 a 4.18 3e53 3o00 8e54 3.26 2o67 7e)4 lOall 19"32 3"91 2.94 lOo54 2L80 4.95 13.53 32.38 6.60 9a6l 7 964 12 .. 03 12.04 2.37 1.,75 3 . 02 7.46 L79 8.78 2c,91 a 11.13 L29 L27 27 e40 3°34 a 3.63 4 . a.5 3.83 a 4..J2 3.50 9.06 4.50 9.72 anata not available or incomplete .. bnata for 1961 not yet available at time of completion of stud.yo 238 l251 �A-10. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Analysis of Enrollment Progression Pattern in University Division, 1952-53 to 1962-63 Conversion Enrollment Coefficient: Total Years la.21 Year Year 2 Years 1 1-2 Year 1 Year 1952-53 1953-54 1954-55 1955-56 1956-57 1957-58 1958-59 1959-60 1960-61 1961-62 1962-63 47 40 35 44 47 76 84 69 81 83 72 18 24 28 47 40 35 44 47 76 84 69 99 107 100 1.32 1.20 aTotal enrollment divided by freshmen enrollment in preceding period. 239 �A-11. l'0 .r::0 Canada: Total, Freshman and Non-Freshman Undergraduate Enrollment and Degrees Granted in Arts and Pure Science Programs, 1952-53 to 1961-62 Total Full-Time ~ Enrollment 1952-1953 1953-1954 1954-1955 1955-1956 1956-1957 1957-1958 1958-1959 19.59-1960 1960-1961 1961-1962 aNot available. 27548 27499 27718 28794 31492 35846 40817 4.5388 .51907 61.547 Degrees Granted 6153 5857 5727 6128 6669 7044 7576 8482 9219 11000 Year 1953-1954 1954-1955 1955-1956 1956-1957 1957-1958 1958-1959 1959-1960 1960-1961 1961-1962 1962-1963 Non-Freshman Freshman Conversion Coefficient, Total/Freshman Enrollment Enrollment Enrollment 21395 21642 21991 22666 24823 28802 33241 36906 42688 .50.547 6104 6076 6803 8826 11023 12015 12147 1.5001 188.59 a 4.51 4.56 4.23 3.57 3.25 3.40 3.74 3.46 3.. 26 �A-12. Ontario: Analysis of Enrollment Distribution among First Three Year Levels in Faculties of Arts and Sciences at Selected Ontario Colleges and Universities, Selected Years Institution and Year McMaster 1957-58 Enrollment Year 1 Total, Years 1-3 405 348 381 457 572 920 903 972 1079 1318 Queens 1957-58 1958-59 1961-62 1962-63 347 427 473 617 a a a a Toronto 1956-57 1960-61 1198 1433 3292 1958-59 1959-60 1960-61 1961-62 Median 3582 Conversion Coefficient: Years 1-3/Year 1 2.27 2.59 2.55 2.36 2.30 a a a a 2.75 2.50 2.50 aNot available. II I I 241 �A-13. Ontario: Analysis of Enrollment Distribution between First and Second Year Levels in Faculties of Applied Science and Engineering at Selected Ontario Colleges and Universities, Selected Years Year 1 Year 2 Total, Years 1-2 Conversion Coefficient: Years 1-2/Year 1 52 40 92 1.77 50 64 78 81 42 44 52 61 92 108 130 142 1.84 1.69 1.67 1.75 1961-62 1962-63 314 309 232 236 231 254 208 192 545 563 440 428 1.74 1.82 1.90 1.81 Toronto 1956-57 1960-61 708 408 496 424 1204. 832 1.70 2.04 27 53 51 79 17 17 41 1.63 1.32 1.80 95 93 40 45 44 70 92 123 135 138 1.42 1.48 100 115 130 145 160 175 63 70 80 91 102 112 163 185 210 236 262 287 1.63 1.61 1.62 1.63 1.64 1.64 Enrollment Institution and Year Assumption 1960-6la McMaster 1958-59 1959-60 1960-61 1961-62 Queens 1957-58 1958-59 Western Ontario Actual 1955-56 1956-57 1957-58 1958-59 1959-60 1960-61 Projected 1961-62 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 1966-67 Median 8Majors only. 242 44 L.56 1.67 �A-14. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: .Analysis of Enrollment Progression Pattern in Technology Division, 1952-53 to 1962-63 Enrollment Year Year 1 Year 2 1952-53 1953-54 1954-55 1955-56 1956-57 1957-58 1958-59 1959-60 1960-61 1961-62 1962-63 16 19 18 19 26 5 10 10 11 5 9 19 21 12 22 27 Weighted average 39 46 31 63 91 97 Total, Years 1-2 21 29 28 30 31 48 65 52 75 113 124 Conversion Coefficient: Years 1-~l Years 1 1.81 1.47 1.67 1.63 1.85 1.67 1.13 2.42 1.79 1.36 1.68 aTotal enrollment divided by freshman enrollment in preceding period. 243 �A-1_5. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: 1962 12,QJ ~ Secondary school retirements to further education Indexes of growth: 1961-62 = 1.000 Universities Provincial Technical Institutes Schools of Nursing 1.000 loOOO 1.000 1.13.5 1.296 1.123 1.269 lo097 1.213 Professional workers in labor force Index of growth: 1961-62 = loOOO Index of trend variancea 1.000 1.000 1.044 1.088 1.012 1.024 First-year enrollment in post-secondary education Indexes of growth: 1961-62 = 1.000 Universities Provincial Technical Institutes Schools of Nur~ing 1.000 1.000 1.000 1°149 1.327 1.136 1.299 1.110 1.242 Lakehead College University Division, part-time enrollment Index of growth: 1961-62 = 1.000 1.000 1.024 1.048 Lakehead College enrollment First-year, full-time University Division Arts program Applied Science program Technology Division Conversion coefficients: total/first-year enrollment University Division Arts program Applied Science program Technology Division Total, full-time University Division Arts program Applied Science program Technology Division Other Nurses University Division, part-time enrollment Summary Total full-time enrollment Total full-time enrollment plus nurses Total full-time enrollment plus nurses and part-time enrollment 71 24 103 82 28 118 1.53 LOO 1.68 1.80 1.00 1.68 86 21 113 109 24 173 148 28 198 85 140 94 143 106 147 220 305 306 400 374 480 445 543 627 62 21 91 aRelative to index of growth in total civilian labor force. N.B. 244 1. Assumes first degrees are conferred in 1965-66. �Projection of Enrollment, by Division and Program, 1961-62 to 1975-76 1966 1225 Academic Year Ending in 12Q1 1968 12.Q2 121Q 1211 ~ 121J 1.597 1.892 1.965 2.042 2.126 2.178 2.213 2.308 2.403 1.545 1.814 1.882 1.950 2.027 2.074 2.107 2.193 2.279 1.430 1.642 1.695 1.749 1.810 1.847 1.873 1.941 2.009 12.ZL. 12.15 121§ 2.498 2.593 2.687 2.365 2.452 2.539 2.077 2.145 2.213 1.132 1.177 1.230 1.283 1.336 1.388 1.440 1.495 1.550 1.605 1.660 1.715 1.036 1.049 1.064 1.079 1.094 1.110 1.126 1.138 1.150 1.162 1.175 1.188 1.654 1.985 2.091 2.203 2.326 1.601 1.903 2.002 2.104 2.218 1.481 1.722 1.803 1.887 1.980 2.418 2.302 2.050 2.492 2.372 2.109 2.627 2.496 2.209 2.763 2.621 2.310 2.903 2.748 2.413 3.047 3.192 2.881 3.016 2.520 2.629 1.072 1.096 1.121 1.150 1.179 1.208 1.237 1.267 1.304 1.337 1.371 1.405 103 130 44 182 137 46 191 144 49 202 150 51 209 155 52 216 163 146 123 42 173 227 2.07 1.33 1.68 2.34 1.67 1.68 2.61 1.67 1.68 2.88 1.67 1.68 3.15 1.67 1.68 3.42 1.67 1.68 3.64 1.67 1.68 213 47 245 288 70 291 339 73 306 395 454 82 339 513 77 321 126 150 146 153 153 157 160 161 631 505 649 795 718 871 793 781 948 1028 35 N.B. 239 180 61 250 189 64 262 198 67 274 3.64 1.67 1.68 3.64 1.67 1.68 3.64 1.67 1.68 3.64 1.67 1.68 3.64 1.67 1.68 593 92 381 622 97 402 655 351 564 87 363 102 420 688 107 440 721 112 460 168 165 174 169 179 173 188 177 196 183 205 187 214 192 223 197 953 875 1043 949 1123 1014 1193 1066 1254 1121 1317 1177 1382 1235 1449 1293 1516 1114 1208 1292 1366 1431 1500 1569 1641 1713 85 55 171 58 2. Assumes second year of Applied Science program is introduced in 1964-65 and is in full swing by 1965-66. 3. Assumes no change in length or depth of Technology Division programs throughout planning period. 245 �II II II II II II II II • • • • • • • • • APPENDIX B INSTRUCTIONAL ACTIVITY STRUCTURE �B-1. Ontario and Lakehead Region: Attendance by Atkinson Students at First and Preliminary Years of Ontario Colleges and Universities in 1956-57 Institution and Institution GrouE Province, Tota,l Colleges and universities in Ontario Assumption (11) 70 Carleton . (8) 135 McMaster (8) 246 Ottawa (4) 29 Queens 456 Toronto 1345 Western (9) 581 RMC 34 OAC, OVC, MacDonald Institute 116 Lakehead 27 Total Lakebeac. Rainy River Kenora 1 13 21 6 Thunder Bay 1 1 2 1 24 3 9 4 2 15 4 2 1 22 Subtotal 3039 66 3 11 52 Colleges and universities outside Ontario Schools of Nursing 256 555 22 8 2 5 15 (23)1258 19 2 1 16 5108 115 7 17 91 Teachers' Colleges Total 248 8 �B-2. Ontario and Lakehead Region: Attendance by Atkinson Students at Institutions of Further Education in 1956-57 Lakehead Rainy Province, Kenora Total River Thunder Bay (number) Total students In colleges and universities In Ontario First year Preliminary year Outside Ontario Schools of Nursing Teachers' Colleges One-year course Two-year course SJ.00 2999 40 256 555 1235 23 l ll 2l 66 3 11 52 22 8 2 5 15 19 2 1 16 8 (percent) Total students In colleges and universities In Ontario First year Preliminary year Outside Ontario Schools of Nursing Teachers' Colleges One-year course Two-year course 1QQ..& 1QQ..& 100.0 58-7 42.9 64-7 57.1 5.0 28.6 29.4 16.5 24.2 28.6 100.0 .8 100.0 10.9 .5 8.8 249 �B-3. University of Toronto: Analysis of Relative Distribution of Course Registrations by Students Enrolled in Arts and Sciences Programs in 1956-57 and 1960-61, by Division, by Year Level and by Type of Program Year Division Languages ~ 1 2 3 4 Total Science - lecture 1 2 3 4 Total Science - • laboratory 1 2 3 Pass and General Honors Humanities 1 2 Pass and I,Q±al l26Q-cl General Honors Total .005 .042 .023 .014 .001 .041 .016 .011 .007 .083 .039 .024 .008 .051 .133 .079 .076 .155 .040 .023 .016 .031 .022 .012 .006 .071 .046 .027 .006 .062 .022 .016 .034 .022 .011 .007 .096 .044 .027 .007 .079 .070 .150 .101 .073 .174 .030 .009 .011 .020 .012 .007 .004 .050 .022 .018 .004 .045 .013 .013 .021 .013 .007 .004 .066 .026 .020 .004 .050 .043 .093 .072 .045 .116 .074 .054 .006 .072 .036 .029 .022 .145 .100 .084 .029 .072 .030 .010 .006 .037 .005 .082 .043 .026 .013 4 Total 125.6-SZ .019 .085 .059 .074 .067 .009 .034 .033 .018 .144 .108 .102 .027 .237 .144 .381 .199 .159 .358 Humanities - studio 1 2 .002 .001 .001 .001 .001 .001 3 .001 .002 .001 .001 .002 .002 .001 .003 .002 .005 .001 .003 .004 .056 .054 .045 .024 .018 .012 .080 .072 .048 .039 .055 .005 .009 .014 .036 .004 .020 .016 .013 .010 .049 .013 .160 .064 .224 .127 .058 .185 3 4 Total .065 4 Total Social sciences lecture Total (Continued) 250 1 2 3 4 .058 .068 �.. • B-3. (Continued) Division Social sciences laboratory Pass and General Honors 1 2 3 4 .006 .004 .002 .002 .001 .008 .006 .001 .003 .010 .00.5 .01.5 • 2.5.5 .193 .160 .014 .163 .100 .072 .042 .622 .378 Total All divisions Total 1256-S:Z Year Level 1 2 3 4 Pass and General ~ l26Q-6l Honors Total .005 .002 .001 .001 .001 .001 .003 .004 .007 .4l8 .294 .232 .0.56 .271 .16.5 .135 .011 .189 .106 .072 .0.52 .460 .271 .206 1.000 •.582 .418 1.000 .063 2.51 �B-4• Ontario: Distribution of Enrollment by Year Level at Selected Ontario Colleges and Universities, Selected Years and Study Programs Program, Institution and Academic Ye5!;r Arts and Sciences Carleton 1961-62~ 1961-62 McMaster 1957-58a 1958-59a 1959-60a 1960-6la 1961-62~ 1957-58b 1958-59b 1959-60b 1960-6lb 1961-62 Queens 1957-58 1958-59 Toronto 1956-57 1960-61~ 1960-61 Median (adjusted) Applied Science Carleton 1961-62 McMaster 1957-58 1958-59 1959-60 1960-61 1961-62 Queens 1957-58 1958-59 Torontb 1956-57 1960-61 Median (adjusted) a B.Arts only. 252 Total Enrollment (number of students) .1st Year Level 3rd ~ 668 1113 .528 .526 .274 .264 .177 .190 .021 .020 1.000 1.000 560 579 668 727 902 953 957 1028 1154 1369 .405 .377 .344 .422 .426 .405 .349 .362 .388 .403 .304 .294 .289 .289 .292 .291 .307 .270 .300 .292 .245 .269 . 292 .237 .235 .230 .246 .275 .222 .238 .046 .060 . . 075 .052 .048 .075 .098 .092 .090 .066 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 902 1078 .385 ~396 C C C C C C 1.000 1.000 .335 .320 .308 .301 .265 .246 .238 .080 .077 .089 .295 .239 .075 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 .222 .026 1.000 3578 3879 5098 .369 .372 .390 hth ill 311 .527 .225 47 92 139 190 208 1.000 .543 .460 .411 .389 .457 . 317 .274 . 293 .223 .184 .178 .132 .139 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 998 994 .315 .311 .231 .256 .222 .213 .231 .220 1.000 1.000 2078 1692 .341 .241 .239 .251 .237 .200 .267 .186 1.000 1.000 .371 .221 .241 .206 b B.Arts, B.Corn., B.Sc. cNot available. 1.000 I �B-5. Ontario: Weekly Clock Hours of Meeting Required in University Baccalaureate Degree Programs in Arts and Sciences, by Program and Year Level 1st Program General Science Honors Humanities and Languages Classics East Asiatic Studies English Languages and Literature Latin Modern History Modern History and Languages Modern Languages and Literatures Ancient Near Eastern Studies Slavic Studies Art and Archaeology Music Philosophy Social and Philosophical Studies Anthropology History Philosophy Political Science and Economics Psychology Sociology Natural Sciences Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry Mathematics Applied Mathematics Physics Astronomy Statistics and Actuarial Science Physics and Chemistry Physics and Geology Biological and Earth Sciences Biology Geography Geological Sciences Commerce and Finance N.B. ill Year Level 2nd J.!;9 A/B A[] m 16/4 15/8 13/4 13/9 13/4 13/9 --/---/-- 16/-19/-19/-19/-18½/-17/-18/-17/-18/-21/-19/-18/-- 18/-18/-15½/-15/-15½/-17/-16/-15/-20/-18/-19/-18/-- 14/-22/-15t/-16r/-16-2/-15/-15½/-15/-21/-19/-19½/-15/-- 16/-18/-14/-15/-13/-15/-14/-13/-20/-17/-19/-17/-- 15/2 15/2 15/2 15/2 15/2 15/2 18/-1412 18/-18/-16/3 19/-- 20/-18/-15/-18/-20/-18/-- 24/2 16/-16/-17/-20/-15/-- 17/6 17/6 17/6 17/6 17/6 17/6 17/6 15/3 15/3 13/6 13/6 15/3 12/12 14/12 19t/3 19r/3 152/8 15/8 14/3 12½/15 12½/12 18/-15/-12/9 13/8 14/3 12/10 11½/14 14/15 14/15 14/15 18/12½ 24/4 13/14 15/12 16/5 11/11 11/12 12/8 7½/20 17/-- 16/-- 17/-- 16/-- "A" indicates lecture-classroom-type meetings; "B" indicates laboratory-type meetings. 253 �I\) B-6. Vt .e:-- O~tario: Weekly Clock Hours of Meeting Required under Various Technology Programs at Selected , Tedlhological Institutes, by Year Level ·and Type of Meeting .!. .... , Institution l,, J I Yea;c Year 1st 1st 2nd 2nd 3rd 3rd Lecture/Lab Lecture/Lab Lecture /Lab Lecture/Lab Lecture/Lab Lectu;ce/Lab Aeronautical TechnoloBY 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Ryerson Eastern Ontario Northern Ontario Western Ontario Hamilton Lakehead 23/1 a 16/14 a a --/-- 19/11 a 20/10 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Ryerson Eastern Ontario Northern Ontario Western Ontario Hamilton Lakehead 23/7 18/12 16/14 18/12 18/12 --/-- --/---/---/---/---/-- --/-a --!-Chemical 1. 17/13 Architectu;cal Technology 30/-- --/---/---/---/-- --/---/-- 5. 6. Ryerson Eastern Ontario Northern Ontario Western Ontario Hamilton Lakehead (Continued) 23/7 18/12 16/14 a 18/12 --!-- --!-- 20/5 20/10 20/10 22/8 a 20/10 --/-- --!-- Civil Technology 18/12 19/11 19/11 19/11 --/---/-- 23/7 a 16/14 a a --/-- Elect;cical Technology 1. 2. 3. 4. --/---/---/---/-- --/---/---/-- Technology 20/10 20/10 20/10 20/10 30/-- 30/-- --/-- 18/12 19/11 18/12 19/11 --/-- --/---/---/-- --!-- --/---/---/-- Electronic Technology 18/12 --/-- 18/12 --/-- 20/10 --/-- 23/7 18/12 16/14 18/12 18/12 --/-- 20/10 20/10 22/8 20/10 20/10 --/-- 18/14 19/11 18/12 19/11 19/11 -_ - !-- �B-6. ( Continued) Institution Year Year 1st 1st 2nd 3rd 2nd 3rd Lecture/Lab Lecture/Lab Lecture/Lab Lecture/Lab Lecture/Lab Lecture/Lab Gas Technology 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Ryerson Eastern Ontario Northern Ontario Western Ontario Hamilton Lakehead Instrument Technology: 16/11 19/10 23/7 a 16/14 a a 20/10 --/-- --/-- --/---/-- --/-- --!---!-- --/-- --!-- --/-- Mechanical Technoloa:Y 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Ryersori Eastern Ontario Northern Ontario Western Ontario Hamilton Lakehead 23/7 18/12 16/14 18/12 18/12 --/-- 19/11 19/11 20/10 19/11 19/11 --/-- 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Ryerson Eastern Ontario Northern Ontario Western Ontario Hamilton Lakehead (Continued) f\) Vt Vt 23/7 a 16/14 a a --/-- 22/11 a 20/10 --/-a --/-- --!-- 20/1.0 a 20/10 ~-!-- --/---/-- 20/10 --/---/---/-- --!---!-- Medical Laborato:r:y Technology 15/17 16/14 16/14 16/14 16/14 --/-- Metallurgical Technology 1. 23/7 a 16/14 a a 14/16 --/---/---/---/---!-- 22/8 --/---/---/---/-- 20/14 --/---/---/---/---/---/-- --/---/---/---/---/---/-- Sanitary In§pectors Cour§e 25/-- --/---/---/---/---/-- --/---/---/---/---/---/-- --/---/-- --!---/---/---/-- �~ B-6. ( Continued) \J7. °' Institution Year Year 1st 2nd 2nd 3rd 1st 3rd Lecture/Lab Lecture/Lab Lecture/Lab Lecture/Lab Lecture/Lab Lecture/Lab Business Administration 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Ryerson Eastern Ontario Northern Ontario Western Ontario Hamilton Lakehead 28/-29/-- --/-29/-29/-- --/-- I 28/-29/-- --/-- 29/-29/-- --!-- 29/-27/-- --/-- 27/-27/-- --!-- Hotel," Resort and Restaurant Administration 28/-- --/---/---/---/---/-- Merchandising Administration 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Ryerson Eastern Ontario Northern Ontario Western Ontario Hamilton Lakehead 28/-- --!---!-- --!---!-- --!-- 28/-- --/-- --!---!---!-- --/-- 27/-- --!-- --/-- --!-- --!-- --/-- Secretarial Science 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Ryerson Eastern Ontario Northern Ontario Western Ontario Hamilton Lakehead (Continued) 28/-- --!-- --/---/---/-- --!-- 28/-- --/---/-- --!---!-- --/-- 29/-- --/---/-- --!---!-- --/-- 29/-- --!---!---!-- --/-- --!-- Printing Manaiement 30/-- --/---/-- --!---!-- --/-- 29/-- --!---!---/---!---/-- 30/-- --/---/---/---/---/-- Furniture and Interior Design 27/-- --!-- --/---/---!---/-- 30/-- --!---!---!---/-- --/-- 30/-- --!-- --/---/-- --!-- --/-- 30/-- --/---/-- --!---/---!-- �B-6. ( Continued) Institution Year Year ~~ 2nd 2nd 1st 1st 3rd 3rd Lecture/Lab Lecture/Lab Lecture/Lab Lecture/Lab Lecture/Lab LecturelLab Home Economics - Fashion 1. 2. J. 4. 5. 6. Ryerson Eastern Ontario Northern Ontario Western Ontario Hamilton Lakehead 28/-- --/---/---/---/---/-- ... Home Economics - Food Administration 28/-- 29/-- --/---/---/---/---/-- --/---/---/---/---/-- 28/-- --/---/---/---/---/-- Journalism 1. 2. J. 4. 5. 6. Ryerson Eastern Ontario Northern Ontario Western Ontario Hamilton Lakehead 27/-- --/---/---/---/---/-- 29/-- --/---/---/-- --/-- --/-- 4. 5. Ryerson Eastern Ontario Northern Ontario Western Ontario Hamilton 6. Lakehead 2. J. I\) \Jl. -'3 (Continued) --/---/-- 30/-- a 30/-- --/-- 27/-- --/---/---/---/---/-- Photog~aEhic Arts 29/-- --/---/---/---/---/-- 27/-- --/---/---/---/---/-- Ihdus.tnia1· and ·.Bus.iness Management Techpology~ 1. 28/-- --/---/---/---/---/-30/-- --/---/---/---!---/-- 27/-- --/---/---/---/---/-- Text1.le T~chn0J.0~ --/---/---/---/-- 30/-- 18/12 --/---/---/---/-- --/-- --/-- --/-- --/---/---/---/-- --/---/---/---/-- 30/-- --/-- 18/12 --/---/---/---/-- _2 0/10 or ~~f~: �l'v B-6. ( Continued) \J7. CX) Institution 1st Lecture/Lab Year 2nd Lecture/Lab 3rd Lecture/Lab 1st Lecture/Lab Forest Teclmology 1. 2. J. 4. 5. 6. Ryerson Eastern Ontario Northern Ontario Western Ontario Hamilton Lakehead --/---/---/---/---/-15/17 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. b Ryerson Eastern Ontario Northern Ontario Western Ontario Hamilton Lakehead 21/6 --/---/---/---/-- --/---/---/---/---/---/-- --/---/---/---/---/-- 18/11 18/9 aOffered; detail not specified. b See Lakehead catalogue. --/---/---/---/---!-- 19/10 3rd Lecture/Lab Mining Technology Engineering Technology 1. Year 2nd Lecture/Lab --/---/---/---/---!---/-- --/---/---/---/---/-20/12 --/---/---/---/---/-17/14 --/---/---/---/---/---/-- �II II II • • •II • •II • • • • • • • APPENDIX C STAFF REQUIREMENTS �C-1. Canada and Central Canada: Full-Time Students, Teaching Staff and Student/Staff Ratios, Based upon 17 Universities, Selected Years, 1951-52 to 1961-62 Academic Year 1951-52 1956-57 1957-58 1958-59 1959-60 1960-61 1961-62 260 Central Canada Students • Staff , Students Per · staff Member 20109 21955 22904 23886 24748 27063 29499 1258 1502 1548 1663 1862 1961 2186 16.0 14.6 14.8 14.4 13.3 13.8 13.5 Students J6882 44505 48142 51889 55253 61195 67863 Canada Staff Students Per Staff Member 2447 2941 3137 3421 3870 4138 4557 15.1 15.1 15.3 15.2 14.3 ]h.8 14.9 �C-2. Canada: Enrollment, Staff and Students per Staff Member in Technical Institutes, by Province, 1960-1962 Nova Scotia Enroll1'1ent Staff Students per staff New Brunswick Enrollment Staffa Students per staff Quebec Enrollment Staffa Students per staff Ontario Enrollment Staffa Students per staff Saskatchewan Enrollment Staffa Students per staff Alberts Enrollment Staffa Students per staff British Columbis Eilro llmen t Staffa Students per staff All Provinces Ehrollment Staffa Students per staff 1960 1961 30 32 1962 294 24 12.3 member 2 15.0 10.7 member 61 8 7.6 78 8 9.8 member 5063 1490 3.4 5712 1553 3.7 5976 1654 3.6 member 3086 198 15.6 3959 228 17.4 3990 237 16.8 member 105 8 13.1 168 17 9.9 218 21 10.4 member 911 137 6.7 952 149 6.4 197 member 146 28 5.2 6.0 202 27 7.5 member 9402 1872 5.o 11098 1988 5.6 11983 2147 5.6 3 33 149 16 9.3 1154 166 1.0 aFull-time plus one-half of part-time staff. 261 �C-3• Canada: Distribution of Full-Time Teaching Staff at Selected Institutions, by Rank, Selected Years, 1937-38 to 1961-62 nk All Ranks except Dean Academic Year Dean Professor Associate Professor Assistant Professor Instructor and Lecturer 1937-38 1938-39 1939-40 1940-41 1941-42 72 85 73 77 74 503 505 493 507 488 199 198 208 202 203 267 283 264 266 279 335 342 354 341 373 1304 1328 1319 1316 1343 1942-43 1943-44 1944-45 1945-46 . 1946-47 69 75 73 76 84 482 494 490 564 600 201 227 271 352 396 278 264 291 382 514 396 387 421 464 787 1357 1372 1473 1762 2297 1947-48 1948-49 1949-50 1950-51 1951-52 84 85 81 91 90 595 649 676 672 689 420 461 477 488 509 490 575 577 565 590 701 591 669 618 569 2206 2276 2399 2343 2357 1952-53 1953-54 1954-55 1955-56 1956-57 94 92 87 690 695 736 520 566 584 633 660 706 548 576 578 2391 2497 2604 89 796 714 786 556 2852 1957-58 1958-59 1959-60 1960-61 1961-62 93 97 97 98 102 831 868 920 940 987 759 824 930 994 1138 866 984 1166 1298 1449 588 646 735 785 870 3044 3324 3773 404D 4455 28.3 · 2l.7 26.3 23.6 100.0 Percentage distribution: weighted average a -- aNot included in calculations of weighted average distribution. 262 �APPENDIX D EXISTING SPACE AND ROOM UTILIZATION �D-1. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Summary of Net Space in Existing Buildingsa Building and Floor level Net Area ( square feet) Science and Technology Basement Ground Second Subtotal L750 21675b 6505 32930 University Centre Basement Ground Second Subtotal 5325 12525 6990 2L8Lo aThe existing student residence consists of 17,6L5 gross square feet, or 339 square feet per bed for 52 students. bExcludes wing under construction in the summer of 1963. 264 �D-2. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Scheduled Utilization of Classrooms and Laboratories, 9 A.M. to L:30 P.M., Excluding Saturday, Fall, 1963 Room Number 1 3 L 5 6 7 12 -- 2L 9 23 11 15 18 12 15 2L 1L 16 20 21-22 ' 23 2L 25 26 9 9 7 17 Total Source: Scheduled Hours per Week Lecture Laboratori 118a 101b Data supplied by Lakehead College administration aAverage utilization of seven lecture rooms is 16.9 hours per week. bAverage utilization of seven laboratories is . 14.6 hours per week. 265 �APPENDIX E INSTITUTIONAL FINANCE �E-1. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Fiscal Years 1958 to 1963 Budget Cait~g:gr;t ~ Summary of Expenditures, Fisc~l Years Ending: Mai Jl 1252 12QQ 1221 l,2gg 12,QJa (current dollars) Expenditures: summaryb Instruction Administration Plant operation and maintenance Other 16795 19014 Expenditures: detail Instruction Salaries Instructional supplies Library Travel 44124 2465 3096 215 64535 ~ 7202 ~ ~ J.7220 ,6~~ 4626 1761 6071 1131 6101 1745 9538 13939 3281 22800 3164 16z2s 4992 172Q8 8222 5458 5097 4681 2J~71 12058 6285 4584 945 J22~2 17945 7466 5744 1104 2ZJOQ 10000 10000 6100 1200 Administration Office salaries and expense Other Plant operation and maintenance Building Grounds Heat, light and water Insurance Other Extraneous Capital expenditures charged to operations Depreciation a b 22026 49901 6387 l.2201 ll26lZ lSuQ~8 2022QJ 2z611J 71371 94651 137072 181661 7202 7846 12702 17220 17508 19535 ZlJZl 2284 3987 566 18085 33466 23871 32259 JJ2!.~0 212000 26550 27300 74600 32259 44973 21J.6~1 1JZQZ2 1~1661 212000 76376 89981 120451 140000 1600 2906 1856 3000 16011 44901 56819 67000 2000 664 1485 333 3750 1247 Boo 1808S 8879 .3037 5279 890 l2Ql~ 1395 l22JS 2478 JJl.66 1170 ~ ~ 1178 3748 z~6QQ 19600 17057 11670 20626 7647 23434 7878 33347 15000 40000 3712 13907 3805 - Projected. Items may not add to totals -due to rounding. 267 �E-2. Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology: Fiscal Years 1958 to 1963 Budget Category ~ Summary of Revenues, Fiscal Year Ending Mai 31 l.29.Q 1962 1961 ~ 1963a (current dollars) Revenues: summaryb Grants Student fees Other Revenues: detail Grants Municipal Federal Provincial a b 1oz520 182013 1822z8 23~03 84121 149770 149270 185233 21154 30338 30498 47588 1906 2510 2315 2582 3~3150 246000 94850 2300 8~121 1~2ZZQ 1~92ZO 185233 • 201222 2~6QQQ 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 15000 19121 24270 30t33 29770 31729 41000 50000 100000 105000 135000 150000 185000 Student fees Registration Supplementary exams Tuition 2115~ 1330 290 19534 Other Miscellaneous Rentals: janitor's cottage Rentals: rooms nl2 813 ) ) 1502 ) 1.1Z588 1810 300 45478 811.155 2495 335 350 28373 30~98 1280 370 28848 78625 92000 12.Q.Q 694 2510 849 2582 802 nil 2300 897 500 500 600 1061 600 1180 600 1244 600 1200 30338. -i:;ro 455 712 Projected. Items may not add to totals due to rounding. 268 28592~ 201729 81455 2741 9~850 2500 �II II • E-3. Year 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 a Canada: Gross National Product, Current and Constant Dollar Series; 1951 to 1962 Gross National Product Current 1949 Dollars Dollars 21170 23995 25020 24871 27132 30585 31909 32894 34784 35928 36844 39424a 18547 20027 20794 20186 2,1920 23811 24117 24397 25157 25617 26097 27664b 1949 = ImElicit Price Index 19b2 = 1.000 C 1.000 Calendar Year Academic Year 1.141 1.198 1.203 1.232 1.238 1.284 1.323 1.348 1.383 l.403 l.412 l.425 .801 . 841 . 844 .865 .869 .901 .928 .946 .971 .985 .991 1.000 .818 . 842 .853 . 867 .882 .912 .936 .956 .977 .988 .995 Annual rate, 2nd quarter. bEquivalent in 1957 dollars is 36,000. Equivalent in 1949 dollars is derived by multiplying 36,cDO by ratio of 1949 index to 1957 index; or (36,6oO)(l.OOO;l.323). °weighted 7 months for earlier year, 5 months for later year; to take accoupt of May 31 fiscal year end at Lakehead College . �E-4. Canada: Growth Rates in Median Salaries of Full-Time Teaching Staffs, Based upon 12 Universities, All Ranks, 1951-52 to 1961-62 Academic Year 1951-52 1952-53 1953-54 1954-55 1955-56 1956-57 1957-58 1958-59 1959-60 1960-61 1961-62 Median Salary z All Ranks 1962-Current Dollars Dollars 4797 48to 5249 5423 5864 5772 6154 6255 5892 6713 7445 7979 8404 8646 6461 7172 7788 8167 8506 8689 Average per annum a Average per year, 1954-55. to 1956-67. 270 Percentage Increment over Preceding Year + + 1.6 6.6 1.6 1.6a 11.0 8.6 + + 4.9 + 4.2 2.2 + . + + 4.3 �E-5. Canada and Central Canada: Median Salaries of Full-Time Teaching Staffs Based upon 17 Universities, Selected Years, 1961-62 to 1973-74 Index of Growth Rank (1961-62 Year = l.OOOl Dean Associate Assistant Professor Professor ProfessQr Instructor and Lectu_r_er_ All Ranks Canada 1961-62 1.000 -- 15577 15655 12619 12682 9703 9752 7687 7726 6570 6603 8646 8689 1963-64 1966-67 1973-74 1.061 1.159 1.426 16610 18144 22324 13456 14698 18085 10347 11303 13906 8197 8954 11017 7006 7653 9416 9219 10071 12391 1963-64 1966-67 1973-74 1.082 1.217 1.601 16939 19052 25064 13722 15434 20304 10552 11868 15613 8390 9403 12369 7144 8036 10571 9401 10575 13911 Current dollars Constant 1962 dollars Estimate A: growth at 3 percent per annum Estimate B: growth at 4 percent per annum Central Cana9ii 1961-62 1.000 -- 17063 17149 12896 12961 9748 9797 7749 7788 6623 6656 8887 8932 1963-64 1966-67 1973-74 1.061 1.159 1.426 18195 19876 24454 13752 15022 18482 10395 11355 13971 8263 9026 11106 7062 7714 9491 9477 10352 12737 1963-64 1966-67 1973-74 1.082 1.217 1.601 18555 20870 27456 14024 15774 20751 10600 11923 15685 8427 9478 12469 7202 8100 10656 9664 10870 14300 Current dollars Constant 1962 dollars Estimate A: growth at 3 percent per annum Estimate B: growth at 4 percent per annum I'\) -.J I--' N.B. Unless specified otherwise, figures are expressed in 1962 dollar values. �I • • •I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I BIBLIOGRAPHY �BIBLIOGRAPHY Assumption University of Windsor. Ontario. General Announcement 1962-63. Assumption University of Windsor. of 1960-61. Windsor, Ontario. Report of the President, Academic Year Windsor, Carleton University. 1962-63 Calendar. Ottawa, Ontario. Carleton University. The President's Report 1961-62. Ottawa, Ontario. Carleton University. The President's Report 1960-61. Ottawa, Ontario. Committee of Presidents of Provincially Assisted Universities. Post-Secondary Education in Ontario 1962-70. Report of the Presidents of the Universities of Ontario to the Advisory Committee on University Affairs: May, 1962 (Revised January, 1963). Dominion Bureau of Statistics. Fall Enrolment in Universities and Colleges 1961. Ottawa: Roger Duhamel, 1962. Dominion Bureau of Statistics. Fall Enrolment in Universities and Colleges 1959. Ottawa: The Queen's Printer and Controller -of Stationery, 1960. Dominion Bureau of Statistics. Fall Enrolment in Universities and Colleges 1958. Ottawa: The Queen's Printer and Controller of Stationery, 1959. Dominion Bureau of Statistics. Fall Enrolment in Universities and Colleges 1957. Ottawa: Edmond Cloutier, 1958. Dominion Bureau of Statistics. Fall Enrolment in Universities and Colleges 1956. Ottawa: Edmond Cloutier, 1957. Dominion Bureau of Statistics. ulation". Ottawa, Canada. 1961 Census of Canada. 11 Series 1.2, Pop- Dominion Bureau of Statistics. Salaries and Qualifications of Teachers in Universities and Colleges. Ottawa: Roger Duhamel, 1962. Dominion Bureau of Statistics. Salaries and Qualifications of Teachers in Universities and Colleges 1960-61. Ottawa: Roger Duhamel, 1961. Dominion Bureau of Statistics. Survey of Elementary and Secondary Education 1959-60. Ottawa: Roger Duhamel, 1962. Dominion Bureau of Statistics. Survey of Higher Education 1952-5L. Ottawa: Edmond Cloutier, 1957. Dominion Bureau of Statistics. Survey of Vocational Education and Training 1959-60. Ottawa: Roger Duhamel, 1961. 275 �Dominion Bureau of Statistics. University Student Expenditure and Income in Canada 1956-57. Ottawa: The Queen's Printer and Controller of Stationery, 1959. Dominion Bureau of Statistics. Ottawa: Roger Duhamel, 1960. Engineering News Record. Selected Issues. University Teachers' Salaries 1937-60. New York: McGraw Hill Publishing Company. Jackson, R. W. B. Secondary-School and University Enrolment Study. "Volume I: Basic Tables". Laurentian University of Sudbury. President's Report for the year ending June 30th, 1962. Sudbury, Ontario. McMaster University. The President's Report 1961-1962. McMaster University. Ontario. McMaster University Calendar 1963-6L. Ontario Department of Economics. Survey 1961. Ontario, Canada. Hamilton, Ontario. Hamilton, Ontario Economic and Social Aspects Ontario Department of Education. Report of the Minister 1961. Printed by Order of the Legislative Assembly of Ontario Sessional Paper No. 7. Queen's University. Report of the Princi 1 of Queen's Univ€rsit Board of Trustees 19 - 9. Kingston, Ontario. to the -----------Royal Commission on Canada's Economic Prospects. Industry October, 1956. Quebec. The Canadian Construction Prepared by the Royal Bank of Canaqa. Montreal, Royal Commission on Canada's Economic Prospects. Output, Labour and Capital in the Canadian Economy. Prepared by Wm. c. Hood and Anthony Scott. Royal Commission on Canada's Economic Prospects. Skilled and Professional Manpower in Canada, 19L5-1965. Prepared by The Economics and Research Branch, Department of Labour of Canada. Ottawa, Ontario. Royal Commission on Canada's Economic Prospects. Some Regional Aspects of Canada's Economic Development. Prepared by R. D. Howland. ' Sheffield, Edward F. Enrolment in Canadian Universities and Colleges to 1970-71 (1961 Projection). Ottawa: Canadian Universities Foundation, 1962. Sheffield, Edward F. Financing Higher Education in Canada No. 1. -"Financial Needs of Canadian· Universities .and'Colleges, 1960. 119 Oi-Eawa:· Canadian Universities Foundation, 1960. 276 �Sheffield, Edward F. Financing Higher Education in Canada No. 2. "Sources of University Support". Ottawa: Canadian Universities Foundation, 1961. Sheffield, Edward F. and ApSimon, Claire M. Financing Higher Education in Canada No. L. 11 University Costs and Sources of Support". Ottawa: Canadian Universities Foundation, 1962. University of Toronto. University of Toronto Calendar Faculty of Arts 1958-1959. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 1958. University of Toronto. University of Toronto Faculty of Applied Science and Engineering Calendar 1957-58. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 1957. University of Toronto. President's Report for the Year Ended June 1961. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 1961. University of Toronto. President's Report for the Year Ended June 1957. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 1958. University of Western Ontario. 1961. London, Ontario. Report of the President Academic Year 1960- Vanderkamp, J. Rosemary. Financing Higher Education in Canada No. 3. : "Provincial Programmes of Aid ' to University Students, l957:-58 · to· l.960~61 1!. I I 277 �)u ~1~~.~4 ~ }_~ ~ 0 ~ 4f",, N,, u)~M,,VV\f-R1 I 1' � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Report to the Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology Description An account of the resource Lakehead Report summary, enrollment, instructional activity, staff requirements, teaching station requirements, non-academic activities, finance and building information Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Lakehead University Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1963 Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource PDF Language A language of the resource English Type The nature or genre of the resource Text Coverage The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant Canada - Ontario - Port Arthur Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Lakehead University Collection Description An account of the resource Photographs from Lakehead University's history: people, events, and campus. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Report to the Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology Subject The topic of the resource Universities Description An account of the resource Report by Taylor, Lieberfeld and Heldman (Canada) Ltd to Lakehead College. The consultants were asked to study the college as it was and make recommendations to encourage future growth. Subjects covered include enrollment, instructional activity, teaching and staff requirements, space requirements, building programs, and finances. Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Lakehead University Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1963 Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource PDF Language A language of the resource English Type The nature or genre of the resource Text Coverage The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant Canada - Ontario - Port Arthur Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context U9 https://digitalcollections.lakeheadu.ca/files/original/f7f3e7b4af0feff89a0e943c0e448548.pdf 44edbd1b487146ae56cab6b134da501d PDF Text Text A two - year Curriculum at the �Brand New Program One of the greatest challenges of our time is the harnessing of the growing body of recorded knowledge. In every field - arts, science and technology - this ever-increasing flood of literature is doubling every 22 years. Right in the thick of this 'information explosion' are the libraries which are having to put forth gigantic efforts in order to meet modern requirements in disseminating ideas and retrieving information. In our industrial society professional librarians cannot do this job alone. They need enthusiastic, intelligent and well-trained assistants to help them meet the challenge of this ever more pressing problem. Modern library service requires men and women who will help the librarian on the technical level. Whether they be called library assistants, technicians or technologists the demand for them is growing. Professional Librarians are trained on a post-baccalaureate level at graduate library schools. The preparation for Library Technologists consists of a post-High School, two-year curriculum program, comprising survey courses in general education as well as intensive training in the techniques and basic methods of library science. At pres.ent, there are 28 Universities and Colleges in Canada and the United States offering such progra~s. The _L akeheaa University program, first in Ontario, is ~escribed "-en the oppos!te page. This could be the cour~e for which you are especially suited. �Curriculum Lecture hours per week Introduction to Library Science Library Technology Basic Library Methods I Survey of English Literature Survey of World History Elective I Typing 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 16 Library Techniques Library Organization Basic Library Methods II Canadian Literature Elective II Elective III Practical work Laboratory per week 3 3 2 3 3 3 6 2 5 17 7 For many years Lakehead University has offere Universities in Canada. Students who took their first to ;mother University for their senior years have don and the close associations with their Professors. Students who have earned Technology Diplomas continues to fall far short of the demand. All indicat in our ~ocietv. �Admission Applicants must have completea successfully the requirements for the Ontario Secondary School Graduation Diploma granted upon the completion of the fourth year of any one of the five-year courses of the re-organized program. Applicants must have passed English and Mathematics in Grades 11 and 12 and any two of History, Geography or Economics in Grade 12 and one other appropriate subj cct, • with an overall average of at least 60%. Students who have obtained the Ontario Secondary School Graduation Diploma with high standing in the four-year program may be considered for admission on an individual basis. Scholarships At present three scholarships of $300 .00 each are being offered by the Northwestern Regional Library Cooperative Board to students in financial need. For details apply to the Regional Director at the address below . For Further Details APPLY TO: Dr. Harold S. Braun, Director of the University Schools, Lake head University, Port Arthur. D. D. Sudar, Director, Northwestern Regional Library Cooperative, Waterloo and Moodie Streets, Fort William. d partial degree programs in cooperation with other t and second years at Lakehead and then transferred ne well. They have benefited from the small classes s are well received in Industry. The supply of graduates tions point to an expanding role for the Technologist �- __________________________ ·- . . : : , _ _..,,,,. Exciting prospects for the future There is an exciting future in library work on the technical level. The salaries are increasing and vacations, sick leave and retirement plans are on a par with the best. Library work is varied and there is virtually no talent for which some use cannot be found in the libraries of today and tomorrow. The range of types of work is varied Be a technical assistant to the professional staff: in in in in in in a a a a a a College Library Special Library serving Industry Medical Library Children's Library Public Library Regional Library Headquarters Take charge of a Branch Library circulating up to 50,000 books per year, in a middle-sized community. Take charge, under Regional supervision, of a small Public Library serving up to 10,000 population. Be the supervisor of a clerical pool engaged in library functions such as book acquisition, book processing and reference. Printed by Northwestern Regional Library Cooperative, Fort William, Ontario. �University Centre Theatre University Centre � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Lakehead University Collection Description An account of the resource Photographs from Lakehead University's history: people, events, and campus. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Announcing A New Program in Library Technology Subject The topic of the resource Universities Description An account of the resource Brochure for the new two-year Library Technology program at Lakehead University. Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Lakehead University Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource PDF Language A language of the resource English Type The nature or genre of the resource Text Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context U14a Coverage The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant Canada - Ontario - Thunder Bay https://digitalcollections.lakeheadu.ca/files/original/03cddd0f57928e45e6899583a7a802b2.pdf 36ae47afbe77c57a45d4a37d6c582f6a PDF Text Text UJDIBIB£IBTI 1P~@ill~®~®IBTI ?(' ' / /,(_ -16 �IS A CAREER Brand New Program One of the greatest challenges of our time is the harnessing of the growing body of recorded knowledge. In every field - arts, science and technologythis ever-increasing flood of literature is doubling every 22 years. Right in the thick of this 'information explosion' are the libraries which are having to put forth gigantic efforts in order to meet modern requirements in disseminating ideas and retrieving information. In our industrial society professional librarians cannot do this job alone. They need enthusiastic, intelligent and well-trained assistants to help them meet the challenge of this ever more pressing problem. Modern library service requires men and women who will help the librarian on the technical level. Whether they be called library assistants, technicians or technologists the demand for them is growing-. Professional Librarians are trained on a postbaccalaureate level at graduate library schools. The preparation for Library Technologists consists of a post-High School, two-year curriculum I program, comprising survey courses in general education as well as intensive training in the techniques and basic methods of library science. At present, there are over 30 universities and Colleges in Canada and the United States offering such programs. The lakehead University program, first in Canada of two years duration, is described on the opposite page. This could be the course for which you are especially suited. For many years Lakehead University has offer Universities in Canada. Students who took their first ~ another University for their senior years have done we close associations with their Professors. Students who have earned Technology DiPi graduates continues to fall far short of the demand. Al, 9ist in our Society. �FOR YOU Curriculum Lecture hours per week History of Library Service Library Technology Basic Library Methods Reference Basic Library Methods II Cataloguing Survey of English Literature Survey of World History Elective I Typing 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 17 Library Techniques Library Organization Basic Library Methods 111 Canadian and American Literature Elective II Elective 111 Practical Work Laboratory per week 6 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 4 17 offered partial degree programs in cooperation with other rst and second years at lakehead and then transferred to Bo well. They have benefited from the small classes an·d the Diplomas are well received in Industry. The supply of d. All indications point to an expanding role for the Technolo- 6 �r Admission Applicants must have completed successfully the requirements for the Onta-rio Secondary School Graduation Diploma granted upon the completion of the fourth year of any one of the five - year courses of the re-organized program. Applicants must have passed English and Mathematics in Grades 11 and 12 and any two of History, Geography or Economics in Grade 12 and one other appropriate subject, with an overall average of at least 60%. Students who have obtained the Ontario Secondary School Graduation Diploma with high standing in the four-year program may be considered for admission on an individual basis. Scholarships At present three scholarships of $350.00 each are being offered by the Northwestern Regional Library Cooperative Board to students in financial need. For details apply to the Regional Director, Fort William, Ont. For Further Details APPLY TO: Dr. Harold S. Braun, Director of the University Schools, Lakehead University, Port Arthur. D. D. Sudar, Director, Program for Library Technology, University Schools Division, Lakehead University, Port Arthur. �The range of types of work is varied Be a technical assistant to the professional staff: in a College Library in a Special Library serving industry in a Medical Libra-ry in a Children's Library in a Public Library Take charge of a Branch Library circulating up to 50,000 books per year, in a middle-sized community. Take charge, under Regional supervision, of a small Public Library serving up to l 0,000 population. Be the supervisor of a clerical pool engaged in library functions such as. book processing and reference. acquisition, book �Exciting Prospects for the future Library work is varied and there is virtually no talent for which some use cannot be found in the librariesi of today and tomorrow. Library technologists are needed today to help integrate library services on a larger scale required by a fast moving technological society. There is an exciting future in library work on the technical level. The salaries are increasing and vacations, sick leave and retirement plans are on a par with the bes.t. � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Lakehead University Collection Description An account of the resource Photographs from Lakehead University's history: people, events, and campus. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Library Technology Subject The topic of the resource Universities Description An account of the resource Brochure for Lakehead University's Library Technology program. Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Lakehead University Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource PDF Language A language of the resource English Type The nature or genre of the resource Text Coverage The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant Canada - Ontario - Port Arthur Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context U14b https://digitalcollections.lakeheadu.ca/files/original/5ca37545706aa6522f3d75168d28ef56.pdf 684091dde04dcb72c6e1d23bfb552903 PDF Text Text \ LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ********************* PORT ARTHUR, ONTARIO, CANADA ******************************** EXCERPTS FROM THE FACULTY HANDBOOK *************************************** 1967 - 1968 *** * ****** * �PREFACE - Extracts from The Lakehead University Act, 1965 ( Ontario) Article l. In this Act, ... (g) "teaching staff" includes professors, assistant professors, lecturers, associates, instructors, demonstrators and a 11 others engaged in the work of teaching or giving instruction or in research. Article 3. The objects and purposes of the University are (a) the advancement of learning and dissemination.of knowledge; and (b) the intellectual, social, moral and physical development of its members and the betterment of society. Article 12. . •..• the Board (of Governors) has all powers necessary or convenient to perform its duties and achieve the objects and purposes of the University, including without limiting the generality of the foregoing, power ... (b) to appoint, promote and remove the heads of all faculties and schools, the senior administrative officers of the University, the teaching staff of the Un iversity, and all such other officers and employees as the Board deems necessary or expedient for the purposes of the University, but no person shall be appointed, promoted or removed as head of a faculty or school, as a senior administrative officer or as a member of the teaching staff of the University, except on the recommendation of the President •.. Article 14. The Senate is responsible for the educational policy of the University, and, with the approval of the Board in so far as the expenditure of funds and the establishment of facilities are concerned may create such faculties, departments, schools or institutes or establish such chairs as it may determine, may enact by-laws and regulations for the conduct of its affairs, and, without limiting the genera Ii ty of the foregoing, has power, ... (b) to determine the courses of study and standards of adn issions to the University and continued membersh ip therein, and the qualifications for degrees and diplomas; (c) to conduct examinations and appoint examiners; (d) to deal with al I matters arising in connection with the awarding of fellowships, scholarships, bursaries, medals, prizes and other awards; .•. (g) to create faculty councils or committees and committees generally to exercise its powers . �2 Article 15 . subject to the wi ll of the Boa rd, the President has superv ision ove r and d irection of the academic work and general admin ist ration of the Univers ity and the teaching staff, officers and employees and students the ireof . .. Article 17. . . . No rel igious test shall be required of any profess or , lectu re r , teacher, off cer , employee or student of the Un ive rsity, nor shall any rel igious observances according to the regulations of any particular denom ination or sect be imposed upon them . Interpretation (a) These regulations apply only to membe rs of the teaching staff who are appointed with the ra nk of professor, associate professor, assistant professor , or lectu rer; (b) "Contract year 11 means a twe lve-month period commencing on a date of appointment fall ing between June 30 and September 2 in any yea r; (c) Academ ic year" means the peri od beginning on the first day of September in a calenda r yea r next follow ing . 11 ************************************************************ 1. ACADEMIC FREEDOM The principle of academic freedom is recognized and accepted by the Board of Governors of Lakehead Univers ity. 2. APPOINTMENTS (a) Probationa!1.._ appointments a re normally of four years I duration and are made to fl II permanent pos it ions . Commencing July 1, 1967, they can be terminated at the end of any contract year up to the end of the fou rth contract year. The appointee shall be informed by January 31st if his appointment is to temi inate a t the end of his first or second contrac year. No t ice tha t a proba ti ona ry appointment which has extended beyond two yea rs wi 11 not be renewed s hou Id be given not later than one yea r prior to its term ination. The �2 19 3 probationary period may be extended by one fu rrthe r year , notice of which is to be given by the end of the th ird contract year. However, the four-year probat ionary period may be reduced in certain circumstances by the Boo rd of Governors. 1 ( b) Tem orary appointments to the faculty, whenever neces sory, shal be made for one year only but may be renewed from year to year. The University shall advise the appointee whether or not it proposes to renew the appointment at least three months before the contract is to expire. 3 . TERMS OF CONTRACT Salaries are on an annual bas is, but are normol ly paid in tw entyfour semi-monthly instalments during the contract year . Members of the teaching staff are expected to be on campus by September 1st, and s hou Id not leave for the summer unti I after the Spring Convocation and the completion of all their obligations arising from the work of the academic year. During the sum mer months they are expected to pursue academic interests as they s ee fit. A contract may become effective on any day between June 30th and September 2nd. When a contract is brought to an end , it is deemed to have terminated on the same day of the year as it began. In exceptional circumstances, an appointment may become effective after September 1st or before July 1st. In such coses , salary will be paid on a monthly basis until July 1st, upo n which dat·e an annual salary and a regular contract year wi ll begin. 4. SUBSIDIARY EMPLOYMENT 1- act Staff members may undertake subsidiary or consulting wo rk for which they ore paid, provided that the work is of on appropriate profess ionol nature and contributes to their professional development, and such work should manifest a university contribution to the community. The appropriate Deon or the Director of University Schools should be consulted when such work is �4 being considered and w ri tten permission must be obtained from the Pres ident . 5. SALARIES A salary scale has been adopted by the Board of Governors s etting a minimum sala ry for lecturers, and both minimum and ~aximum annual salaries for assistant professor, associate professor , and professors respectively. For each rank an annual inco-ement has been established. In exceptional circumstances the Board rese rves the ri ght to award more than the norma I inc rement . In cases where the inc ement has been withheld for lack of merit, the person concerned w i 11 be info rmed by the President in writing of the reason for the withholding of the inc rement. The Board of Governors reserves the right, in special circumstances, to exceed the maximum annual salary listed in the sala ry scale fo r membe rs of the teaching staff in any rank . Whereve r poss i ble 1 a member of the teaching staff will be notified by February 15th as to hi s sala ry for the following contract year . 6. SUMMER SC HOOL A faculty member may teach not more than one course during the six-week Summe r School at Lakehead University, with remunerat ion in additfon to his regula r salary . Round tri p economy a ir fare is provided for Summer School instruc· to rs from elsewhere . 7. MOVING EXPENSES When new appointments a lie made, Lakehead Unive rsity will pay the economy class ai r fa re to Fort William of the person appointed and also those of his dependents as recognized for the purposes of the Canad ian Income Tax . In addition, actual moving expenses up to $300 from with in a 700 mile radius of Port Arthu r , up to $5 00 from withi n a 1 ,400 mi le radius , up to $700 from �4 5 w i t h i n a 2 , 1 0 0 m i I e radius , and up to $800 for greater distances, wi II be paid by the university. n While thes-e figures may not cover all expenses in every case, they are meant to assist incoming personnel with their moving expenses . 8. Promotions are not automatic, but are based upon academic qualifications and the contributions made by the individual to the dissemination and expansion of knowledge. Requests for promotion or tenure within a department will normally be made by the Chairman to the Dean who, where possible, wi II act as Chairman of a Committee composed of the Department Chairman and of full professors in related disciplines. This Committee will then make its recommendations to a Committee consisting of the President, the Deans and Director of University Schools . The President will in turn make his recommendations to the Board of Governors as s toted in the Lakehead University Act. n- >r- irit, ing 9. RETIREMENT Permanent appointments will normally terminate at the end of the contract year in which the 65th birthday occurs. However, in special circumstances, arrangements may be made for a member of the teaching staff to continue his duties at the university past the normal retirement age. In such cases an annual salary will be agreed upon by the Board of Governors and the person involved commensurate with the duties undertaken. he ra- rue- PROMOTIONS AND TENURE 10. RESIGNATION Letters of resignation from members of the teaching staff must be addressed to the President and must be delivered to his office not later than February 28th to take effect on the contract date . Copies of the letter of resignation s hou Id be sent to the Dean of the appropriate Faculty or to the Director of University Schools, and to the Chairman of the Department effected . ur, �6 11 . DISMISSAL FOR CAUSE The appointment of a faculty member having tenure wil I be terminated only upon proof of adequate cause before a Review Committee constituted in accordance with a fixed procedure. A faculty member with a probationary appointment will have his appointment terminated at any time other than that specified only in accordance with the same procedure. Dismissal for cause may occur at any time. Examples of 11 cause" might be said to mean or include persistent neglect of duty, incompetence, or gross misconduct. 12 . COURSE WORK Because of its nature and professional traditions, academic work cannot be precisely measured by the hour. It is assumed that all members of the teaching staff will adjust the use of their time to the needs of their Departme nt. However, no member of the teaching staff will be required to teach more than one course after 5:00 p. m. No member of the teaching staff wi 11 be requ ired to accept off-campus teaching assignments, although he is free to do so if he wishes. In such cases, evening teaching and off-campus teaching will form part of a staff member's regular teaching assignment. 13. ADMINISTRATIVE RELATIONSHIPS Normally, if a staff member has a problem or concern with his salary, promotions, or working conditions, he should discuss it with the Chairman of his Department or School. If the Chai rman i s unable to deal with the problem, representations may then be made to the appropriate Dean of the Faculty or to the Di rector of the University Schools. It is understood that a staff member can always have recourse to the Dean or the President if he feels that the normal processes are not functioning prop,e rly. 14 . DEPA RTM ENT CHAIRMAN The administrative head of a Department is the Chairman, �7 appointed by the President in consultation with the Dean of the Faculty, and whenever possible, with the department concerned. As a general rule, the Chairman should act as the spokesman for his colleagues. He has certain areas of administrative discretion, but the Department 1 s basic policies should be approved collectively. It is the Department Chairman's responsibility to preside over meetings of his colleagues and, in co-operation with them to prepare and present departmental requests concerning the annual budget, the academic programme, and course offerings, recommend appointments and promotions, and advise on the recruihnent of staff. He should also before June 30th of each year report in writing to the head of his Faculty or School on the year's work in his Department. e" Although a Department Chairman exercises certain administrative functions, he remains primarily a scholar. To prevent administrative duties becoming excessive, the term of office is not intended to last for an indefinite period, but it is intended that the Chairmanship shall be rotated from time to time. In some instances, prolonged tenure, however undesirable, may be necessary. Whenever possible, the Chairman will be appointed by April ls t for the fol lowing academic year. 15 . DEAN OF FACULTY The Dean 'is the administrative head of a faculty, but remains a member of the teaching staff. The Dean of a Faculty (a group of cognate subjects within the university) presides over meetings of his colleagues, and acts as their spokesman in discussions wit-h the President or with the heads of other Faculties or Schools. He informs his colleagues of administrative decisions affecting their scholarly work. It is his duty to lead his Faculty in the development of academic policy, and to ensure among the Departments under his jurisdiction unity and equity in such matters as deg ree and grading standards, course proliferation, standards of appointment, promotion, and tenure, leave policies 1 etc. It is likewise his duty to co-operate with the Pres ident and the Dean of other Faculties in establishing unity �8 and equity in these matters throughout the university as a whole. The Dean co-ordinates the work of the Departments in matters pertaining to budgets, appointments, promotion, tenure, sabbatical leave, etc., and advises the President in matters affecting the interests of his Faculty. Hs is a channel of communication between his Faculty and the rest of the university. 16. SABBATICAL LEAVE A year's leave of absence may be granted to a member of the ful I-time staff. The University's regulations on sabbatical leave are as fol lows: (a) A staff member will normally be eligible to apply for sabbatical leave six years after his appointment, or six years after return from a previous period of assisted leave. Half credit for a period of service at other Universities will be allowed. (b) Sabbatical leave will not be granted automatically upon the expiration of the necessary period of service and the number of leaves granted each year is limited to 10% of the faculty. (c) Leave will be granted only where the work of the Department can be carried on satisfactorily without undue financial burden on the University. It is dependent upon the securing of a satisfactory replacement. (d) Application should be made to the Chairman of the Department or School who will immediately forward it to his respective Dean or Director with his comments. The application wit I then be considered by a committee appointed by the President. Complete plans for the proposed leave should be included, and the final date for submitting applications will be November ls t of the preceding a cad em i c year . (e) The following regulations will be applicable for those who are successful in their application for sabbatical leave: �9 (i) (ii) (iii) ( iv) (v) 17. Period of leave: one academic yea r . The faculty member on sabbatical leave will receive 75% of salary. Each year of service would represent 12 1/2% equity in the sabbatical leave allowance. Protection of academic and economic status, including pens ion and insurance benefits will be guaranteed to the faculty member while he is on sabbatical leave. A faculty member on sabbatical leave will, in the ordinary course of events, return to service at the University from which he is on leave, but he is not required to do so. It is unprofessional to seek sabbatical leave in order to facilitate a search for a new post. Report on leave: it is anticipated that a returning faculty member will in some way share the benefits of his activities while on leave. STUDY LEAVE Study leave is leave granted for the purpose of undertaking a specific program of study, research, or writing . Protection of sen iority and ·of pens ion, insurance, and annual increment is guaranteed to the faculty member wh i le he is on leave. Ass istance for study ·leove may be provided in the same manner as for sabbatical leave, i.e. 12 1/2% of salary to be bui It up as equity for each year of setvice. If a faculty member wishes to take a study leave before qualifying for a sabbatical, he may apply to use up his accumulated equity in this way. If so, he would return with no equ ity in a sabbatical leave. (All other cond itions referrnd to under "sabbatical leave" would apply.) 18 . ,e II PENSION AND INSURANCE PLANS Of the beneflts available to the full-time faculty of the Univers ity, the pens ion pion, the group life plan, salary continuation plan, and hospital ization insurance are conditions of employment. Em olment in Physicion 8s Services Incorporated is optional. (a) Pension Pion - Contri butions to the Lakeheod Un iversity plan includ ing the Canada Pens ion Plan, amount to 6% of the employee 0s salary. This is matched by the employer. �10 The benefits from the plan are l 1/2 per cent of career earnings plus a supplementary pens ion from the equity fund . It is expected that the total pens ion including the Canada Pens ion Plan shou Id equal close to 2 per cent of career earnings. For example, after 20 years of service, a retiring employee would receive approximately 40 per cent of average career salary at retirement, and after 25 years of service the employee would receive 50 per cent of average career salary at retirement. The retirement age is 65. There is no waiting period for this plan. Immediate vesting privileges ensure the complete portability of employerus and employees I contributions. (b) Group Life Plan - Benefits are two times the annual salary to the neare~l ,000, with a maximum of $25,000. Contributions to this plan are shared equally by the employer and the employee. The cost per month to the employee is approximately 30 cents per $1,000 of annual salary. (c) Sa:ary Continuation Plan - The salary continuation plan pay 62 per cent of salary until the age of 65 is reached . Twelve per cent of this is used to pay for the compulsory pens ion contributions . The maximum benefit available under this plan is $250 per week. Contributions are shared equa I ly by the employer and the employee. The cost per month to the employee is approximately 35 cents per $ 100 of monthly salary. The waiting period for this plan to take effect is 180 days from the time of illness. (d) Si ck Leave - In the event of an i I Ines s or accident which ~ssitates a faculty member discontinuing his academic duties, the University will continue salary to the extent of one month's salary for each year of service, to a maximum of six months . (e) Hospitalization Insurance - Academic staff are automatically enrolled in the Ontario Hospitalization Plan from the day pay commences . However, unless you have transferred from another Ontario or Manitoba Plan, benefits of the Ontario Plan wi 11 not take effect unti I the l st day of the third month from the date of hire, e. g. if you join on July �11 15th, coverage would not take effect until October 1st. If you join on August 1st coverage would take effect on Novem ber 1st. You do not need to sign any card to obtain this coverage. If you have been enrol led under the Ontario, Manitoba, or for that matter any other Plan, I would suggest that you see our Head Bookkeeper, to see whether or not benefits will start to accrue to you immediately. The 1967 cost of the Ontario Hospitalization Plan for the standard hos pi ta I ward room is $3 .25 per month for a sing le person and $6 .50 per month for the family. The semiprivate hos pita I bed rate cos ts an additiona I .75 for a single and $1.50 per month for the family. The University pays half the cost of the "standard" rate. l d (f) Physicians Services lncorpcrated (P .S .I.) - (A group plan covering medical, surgical and obstetrical services). It is not obligatory to join. However, the majority of our staff belong to it. This plan covers most doctor's bills for you and your family. :L There are only two "sign on" dates per year with coverage effective forty-five days later. If you sign on by September ls t you are covered starting October 15th . The next 11 sign on" date after September 1st is March 1st with coverage being effective from April 15th on. The 1967 cost of P.S.I. is: er SINGLE MAN & WIFE FAMILY (including all children) $3 .90 per month $9 .40 per month $13 .25 per month The University pays half the cost of P .S .I. of whichever type. lly 19 . FACULTY TRAVEL In 1967-68 up to $300 per academic staff member is available to assist faculty members to attend meetings of professional interest. Such funds are administered by the Departmental Chairmen. In the administration of funds, priority wi 11 be given �12 to a member of the academic staff giving a paper at a meeting or attending a meeting as one of the officers of the organization. Faculty using their own cars for university business are reimbursed at the rate of 11 cents a mile. 20 . MEMBERSHIP IN PROFESSIONAL AND LEARNED SOCIETIES The University will pay membership for full-time faculty members in professional or learned societies to a maximum of $50 .00. 21 . HOUSING In 1966-67 the University 11 reserved 11 18 houses for potential new members of the academic staff. All houses were subsequently purchased. The University "guarantees II to repurchase any of these houses should any individual wish to move out at the end of one, two or three years. The repurchase 11 guarantee 11 provides that the University will reimburse the individual concerned for his 11 basic 11 original downpayment and will take over the outstanding amount of the mortgage . Shou Id such a po Ii cy of 11 reserving 11 houses in the future be necessary, it will be continued. 22 . FAMILY EDUCATION The 1966-67 policy is that dependents and wives of full-time faculty members wishing to attend Lakehead University will have the basic tuition fee waived . However, as free tuition will no longer be supported by the Provincial Government starting with 1967-68, this policy wi 11 have to be reviewed. Free tuition is also provided for dependents of full-time faculty members of other Universities attending Lakehead University for the 1966-67 year. 23. FURT HER FACILITIES Furthe r foci Ii ties provided for the faculty include a parking space w ith electrical outlet at no charge; faculty lounge for the exclus ive use of faculty and senior administrative staff; stenographic and duplicating services; technical services for equipment and �13 classroom requirements; book store; and dining facilities. 24. LAKE HEAD UNIVERSITY FACULTY ASSOCIATION Members of the Academic Staff are eligible for membership in the Lakehead University Faculty Association. Membership in this Association also includes membership in the Canadian Association of University Teachers. The Faculty Association is the official voice of the University Faculty and works closely with the Administration of the University towards common goals and in dealing with problems of mutual concern. ·s 25. LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY WOMEN'S ASSOCIATION Membership in this association, wh ich is designed to "promote sociability", i s open to members and wives of full and parttime faculty, professional research staff, and administrative officers . 26. UNIVERSITY THEATRE A modern, well-equipped 380 seat theatre auditorium is located in the University Centre. This theatre is utilized by the University and the Lakehead communities for many cultural activities, including plays, concerts, lectures, etc. 27. RECREATIONAL FACILITIES The Lakehead area is a mecca for the outdoorsman. Four ski areas, providing the best skiing between the Laurentians and the Rockies are within a 20 minute drive of the University. A gymnasium, two squash courts and outdoor hockey rinks are provided at the University. Excellent golfing and tennis facilities are available in the Lakehead area. :e *********************************************************** �( � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Lakehead University Collection Description An account of the resource Photographs from Lakehead University's history: people, events, and campus. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Excerpts from the Faculty Handbook Subject The topic of the resource Universities Description An account of the resource Excerpts from the Faculty Handbook, Lakehead University, 1967-1968. Description of main articles for the university, terms of contract, job policies and provisions. Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Lakehead University Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1967 Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource PDF Language A language of the resource English Type The nature or genre of the resource Text Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context U14c Coverage The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant Canada - Ontario - Port Arthur https://digitalcollections.lakeheadu.ca/files/original/bb40a663bf6cdf8709c0eadd66f6e5cf.pdf d86098892243502e1d5ca84fcfb459cb PDF Text Text ' bulletin FACULlY OF ARTS LAKEHEAD UNIVERSnY □□ □□ □ □ □□□ □□ □□ - □■ □ □□ □□ □□ □□□□ ■ □■□■□ □ ,■ □ ■ □□□□ □ □□ □ □ �F AC UL T Y O F A RT S ME E T I N G A G E N DA **** ************* * DATE: FRIDAY, FEBRUARY 20, 1970 TIME: 4:00 P. M. PLACE: ROOM 1029, MAIN BUILDING PURPOSE: * * * * * * * * * * l. Minutes of last meetings 2. Consider matters arising 3. Correspondence 4. Receive reports from sub-corrmittees SPECIAL FEATURE: MRS. D. LABAN MANAGER BOOKSTORE LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY NON OMNIA POSSUMUS OMNES - Virgil * * * �L A KE H E A D UN I VE R S I T Y FACULTY OF ARTS MEETING A. I SUGGEST THE FOLLOWING ITEMS FOR THE AGENDA OF THE NEXT MEETING: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. I PROPOSE THE FOLLOWING MOTION TO BE DISCUSSED AT THE NEXT MEETING: SECONDED: ---------SIGNED: --------- DATE: - - - - - - - - - TO aE RETURNED TO THE DEAN OF ARTS BY THE FIRST DAY OF THE MONTH . �L A K E H E AD UN I VE R S I T Y FACULTY OF ARTS MINUTES OF MEETING 3rd DECEMBER 1969 Room 124 at 7:00 P.M. AMONG THOSE PRESENT: A. K. M. G~ J. 1. Alexander; L. Anderson; D. Astwood; I. Cameron; I. Davies; Dawson; R. Dilley; G. Engholm; D. Fredrickson; N. Ginsburg; Greenwood; I. Hannaford; D. Holah; S. MacGillivray; A. MacLeod; McLeod; W. Melnyk; G. Merrill; W. Morris; B. Phillips; V. Popov; Rideout; J. Talbot; P. Yurick; E. Zimmermann. ORDER The meeting was called to order at 7:05 p.m. by the Dean of Arts. 2. MINUTES OF LAST MEETING Under item 6 e) W. Morris asked that the first sentence be corrected to read: "W. Morris read the terms of reference in which the Corrnnittee, after slight revisions, had concurred". Approval of the minutes as corrected was moved by A. Alexander, seconded by G. Merrill. 3. MATTERS ARISING The Dean announced the results of the recent elections within the Faculty of Arts. The following were elected as representatives of the Faculty of Arts. to Faculty of Education E.R. Zimmermann N. Ginsburg and B. Phillips to Faculty of Science D. Crozier to Library Technology A. Asimi to Nursing G. Merrill to Physical Health and Education �Faculty of Arts 4. a) 3rd Dec~mber 1969 -2- CORRESPONDENCE In response to a query re the wall dictaphones in the Wing D Faculty offices, the Chainnan pointed out that the receiving terminal, formerly a steno pool, had been converted to a seminar room. The Chairman undertook to investigate the dictaphone situation. b) The Chairman reported that he had received a letter concerning the temperatures in the Centennial Building. He noted that efforts to stabilize temperature were being ma<le~ c) The Chairman called attention to the communication from the Department of Mathematics. Specifically it was noted that the proposed program was consonant with Faculty of Arts Regulations. It was moved by A. Alexander, seconded by D. Astwood, that the Faculty of Arts endorse Mathematics A6 (Mathematics for Social Scientists). CARRIED 5. COMMITTEES a) Academic Development ·1 The Chairman reported that the committee had considered the proposals of the Faculty of Education and the program in Family Life and Education. Problems of cross-appointments, student enrolment and potential conflicts of interest, between Faculty of Education and Faculty of Arts were discussed. A discussion of the Family Life and Education program centred on the questions of credit and academic content. It was moved by A. Alexander, seconded by A. Akram, that consideration of the program be tabled indefinitely. CARRIED �facultJ of Arts b) -3- 3rd December 1969 constitution Commiltc-e N. Ginsburg, Committee Chairman, assisted by committee member R. Dilley, presented the first draft of a proposed constitution for the Faculty of Arts. N. Ginsburg stated that the procedure he thought ~ost useful was to have a series of straw votes on difficult issues and that the committee's further deliberations would be guided by these straw votes. Despite some opposition to this procedure on grounds that opinions on questions of membership and committee composition could not be given until the terms of reference of committees wer~ spelled out, one straw vote was taken. On item Illa, election of chairman, 7 were in favour, 5 against and 17 abstentions were recorded. It was moved by W. Morris, seconded by D. Lewis, that the proposed constitution be referred back to the committee for further consideration. After discussion the mover and seconder agreed to defer their motion to allow the report to continue. The report continued, but difficulties arose over lack of definition of powers of various committees. It was moved by A. Alexander, seconded by D. Lewis, that the MorrisLewis motion be voted upon. The Morris-Lewis motion (see above) was c) CARRIED CARRIED Extension Committee The Committee Chairman, C. Ripley, reported that the Committee was �-4- Faculty of Arts 3rd December 1969 refining its original terms of reference, which were rather vague. At the last conrrnittee meeting, it was reported, considerable discussion had centred on the proposal to offer CLCd6 in Europe as part of the 1970 Sunrrner School program. The meeting considered this proposal at length. Questions regarding the course content, academic standards and the role of the Extension Committee were raised. One main concern was that the course content, as outlined in a memorandum issued by the office of the Director of Extension, was at variance with the calendar description of content. It was also pointed out that the content, as outlined, impinged upon, probably, the offerings of the Political Science Department and,perhaps,other departments. D. Lewis indicated that CLCd6 went through all proper channels and had been approved by Senate. The Language Department had been requested to find the resources, financial and academic to put the CLC courses on, although in many respects these courses were beyond the general brief of the Language Department. He emphasized thatconsiderable publicity had attended the initiation of these interdisciplinary courses and was of the opinion that the CLCd6 summer course in Europe was being attacked before content had been finalized. He continued by stating that the intention had been to solicit aid and advice from other departments and that the memorandum had been conceived as a- means of drawing attention to the course and attracting advice. There followed considerable discussion concerning the last two meetings of the Extension Department. E. Zimmermann noted that the course description in a 1970 Sunm1er School brochure did not accord with the 1969-70 calendar description. �Faculty of Arts -5- 3rd December 1969 A. Alexander thought that inter-departmental consultation should have preceded the issuing of any literature. It was moved by W. Morris, seconded by I. Davies, that an ad hoc committee be set up, composed of interested parties, to discuss the p~ssible overlap in content. CARRIED A. Alexander requested minuting of his dissent. EFFECTED D. Astwood nominated the chairmen of the Departments of Political Science, History, Economics and Language~ or their representatives to serve on this committee, seconded hy I. Camer1on. W. Morris, seconded by C. Ripley, nominated the Director of Extension. W. Melnyk, seconded by J. Evans, moved that everyone concerned or interested constitute the corrnnittee. CARRIED It was moved by I. Hannaford, seconded by W.- Morris, that the Faculty of Arts Constitution Committee seek the terms of reference from all committees of the Faculty and consider these. CARRIED d) Inter-University Seminars The Committee has met, agreed upon its terms of reference and these shortly will be circulated, it was reported by A. Alexander. e) Space Utilization I. Davies reported that no further meetings had been held, but that �Faculty of Arts -6- 3rd December 1969 the consultant's report on classroom sizes was expected soon. An early meeting is anticipated. f) Undergraduate Instruction The report of this committee is to hand, W. Morris noted, but due to the lateness of the hour and the complex nature of the recommendations W. Morris moved, seconded by K. Dodd, that consideration of the report be deferred to the next meeting, with t:1e understanding that it be placed at the head of the agenda for that meeting. CARRIED The meeting adjourned at 10:00 p.m. �L A KE H E A D UN I VE RS I T Y FACULTY OF ARTS MINUTES OF MEETING December 19th, 1969 Room 1029 at 10:00 a.m. AMONG THOSE PRESENT: A. E. P. G. M. F. A. K. P. J. M. AKRAM; A. ALEXANDER; A. ASIMI; D. AYRE; W. BASSIL; BODZIN; M. BRIAL; R. M. BROWN; P. CHIMBOS; A. CLOUTIER; CORNELL-d'ECHERT; D. DAHLGREN; K. DAWSON; B. EAMES; ENGHOLM; D. EVANS; C. FRENCH; V. GAUDINO; B. GREENHOUS; GREENWOOD; N. GINSBURG; J. GRIFFITH; I. HANNAFORD; D. HOLAH; M. ISHAK; C. KENT; D. LEWIS: S. R. MACGILLIVARY; A. M. MACLEOD; H. MAMOOJEE; W. T. MELNYK; G. T. MERRILL; T. MILLER; W. S. MORRIS: L. MORRISON; A. NABARRA; P. RAFFO; J. RIDEOUT; P. SARBADHIKARI SATINDER; M. SIDORSKI; J. TALBOT; P. WESLEY; J. WHITTLE; WIDDOP; L. WILCOX; M. YUSTE; E. ZIMMERMANN. *** 1. ORDER The meeting was called to order at 10.04 a.m. by the Dean of Arts. *** 2. MINUTES This being a Special meeting of the Faculty, minutes were dispensed with. *** 3. MATHEMATICS DEPARTMENT REPRESENTATION The Dean informed the Faculty that, contrary to rumours to the opposite effect, the Department of Mathematics was very interested in being a full member of the Faculty of Arts. *** �Faculty of Arts 4. December 19, 1969 -2- PROGRAM OF FACULTY OF EDUCATION The Dean announced that one of the main purposes for which this meeting had been called was to discuss the proposed Faculty of Education program which seemed to envisage the teaching of academic subjects which could be offered in the Faculty ~f Arts. The Faculty of Arts was bound to be interested in such a proposal because of the possibility of duplication of programs within the university. A.motion (copy attached) was moved by T. B. Miller, seconded by M. H. Greenwood. W. Melnyk pointed out that the proposed program seemed to contradict the discussion concerning the establishment of a Faculty of Education contained in the minutes of Senate meeting No. 33. I. Davies noted the apparent anomaly in the position of the Academic Planning Committee, which was reported, on the one hand, to be looking very closely at course offerings and even, on occasions, seeming to favor the cutting down of courses offered, and on the other hand apparently supporting a program which suggested further proliferation. A. Alexander expressed the fear that, were such proliferation to be allowed, the result would be a Sub-Faculty of Arts in the Faculty of Education. He thought the problem stemmed from the asinine decision to create a Faculty of Education. On being requested to rephrase his last statement, he did so; making sure that, in the rephrasing, not one iota of the sense of the original remark was lost. -- _J �Faculty of Arts December 19, 1969 -3- M. H. Greenwood also felt that it had been a mistake to create a Faculty of Education. D. Ayre pointed out that the Minister had insisted on the creation of a Faculty of Education. W. Melnyk wanted to see finn guarantees that the undertakings established at Senate meeting No. 33 would be adhered to. T. B. Miller described the thinking behind the wording of the resolution before the Faculty. press a soft-line motion; It had been decided, reluctantly, to this was to give it some hope of passing in Senate. C. French feared that the motion would mean endless consultations between all four Faculties on all aspects of their respective programs, but J. Rideout pointed out that the word 11 substantive 11 had been deliberately inserted to prevent such a danger. K. L. Morrison said that in his experience at O.C.E. the 2I!.!l. courses considered of any value by the students had been the academic courses offered outside the Education program. I. Davies considered it very doubtful that teachers themselves 1 favored such a proposal. W. Melnyk asked why, if the Senate had created the Education Advisory Committee, it had not been consulted: D. Ayre said that a meeting was �Faculty of Arts December 19, 1969 -4- scheduled for the following Monday. This news was not well received. I. Davies called for the question. The motion was carried wi.th 2 abstenttons, 1 no vote. C. French said it was vital far this moti.on to ' 2 put before the Senate irrmediately. D. Lewis asked who fixed the date of Senate meetings? D. Ayre stated that he could call a meeting if necessary. D. Lewis argued strongly that the motion must go i,efore Senai:e before it considered the Faculty of Education program. D. Ayre stated that thts would be arranged. :! 5. FACULTY OF ARTS PROGRAMS 1970-1971 i .I I a. A motion to approve the English program was moved by A. Alexander, Passed Nern Con. secondE!d by P. Raffo. l1 . A motion to approve the Geography program was moved by P. Raffo, seconded by I. c. Davi es . Passed Nern Con. A motion to approve the Psychology program was moved by W. Melnyk, seconded by P. Satinder. A. Alexander suggested that the wording on page 3, with regard to thesis topics be changed to department 11 • 11 to be determined in consultation with the W. Me 1nyk agreed to this. Passed Nern Con. I .l �Faculty of Arts d. December 19, 1969 -5- A motion to approve the Sociology/Anthropology program was moved by I. Davies, seconded by C. French. A. Alexander asked that the courses in Political Sociology and Political Anthropology be calendared in the department of Political Science also. Pasr J Nern Con. C. French agreed. e. A motion to approve the Languages program was moved by D. Lewis, seconded by A. Alexander. I. Davies questioned how, in the Gennan program, a 4th year course (4a6) could be offered when an honors program did not exist. J. Whittle agreed that it might be somewhat anomalous and accepted that is should be Passed Nern Con. calendared as 3d6. f. A motion to approve .the Political Science program was moved by A. Alexander, seconded by W. Melnyk. g. A motion to approve the History program was moved by T. Miller, seconded Passed Nern Con. by A. Alexander. h. Passed Nern Con. Although Economics appa~ently have changes to propose to their program, no notice of these chanqes, or of their program had yet been received. 6. ADJOURNMENT The Dean adjourned the meeting at 11.05 a.m., wishing all present a Merry Christmas. Respectfully submi t ted, PETERS. RAFFO, SECRETARY. �Notice of Motion Id. ~-,OL vrn TH/\T: The SP.nate requires thu t when course\() proposc•d lJy urH~ faculty h'1ve substantive content wholly, or in part, \-Jithin Uw do111din of d depctrtment of another faculty prior mulual a~1reement o the fdcul ties involved be obtained" with respect to content, 111ethod uf instruction. and the selection of instructional personnPl. ( MOVED 1' '- \ ---- - --·--· - SECONUl:.D '\ ' -- -- • 1\ '- �FACULTY OF ARTS COMMITTEE MEMBERS AS DESIGNATED FOR 1969 - 1970 �FACULTY OF ARTS COMMITTEE ON ACADEMIC DEVELOPMENT Anthropology: Economics: English: Geography: History: Languages: Mathematics: Philosophy: Political Science: Psychology: Sociology: Dean of Arts: Professor K. J. Charles Professor J. Rideout Dr. D . Phi 11 i ps Professor T. Miller Mr. D. Lewis Professor C. F. Kent Professor F. Doan Dr. G. Engholm Dr . W. Me 1ny k Professor C. French Dean T. Ryan Chairman: Secretary: The Committee discussed the Faculty of Education Courses and what action should be taken. The Senate, on Saturday, January 24, 1970, upheld the resolution of the Faculty of Arts . .......... �-w _... !! L ... _I -- - -- ~ . --- =.-- i -- ■ I'') Iii. - ■ ■ I I I ■-, ■ - . ... - DEVELOPMENT - -- --f - - COMMITTEE ON1969ACADEMIC . -- 1970 .. -. - ■ II-- ~ - 11111 ~ l ·-· _ _._ I - -'11111 .. ■ 'I r• ■ .-- I t • . • ... ■ FACULTY OF ARTS ■ ...... - - I ■ .- I ■ • I -- -- - _. TERMS OF REFERENCE: - - - I I - ~- .:II I I I The Academic Development Conmittee shall make recommendations and -- J consider alternatives concerning: . .- . .. al b) • -J-• 19111" - p c} • ..,. ■ - - 4 the academfc objectives of the Faculty of Arts . long term planning and the overall direction of growth of th.e academi:c program. ... _ _.l.1 the continuing improvement of academic standards. d) the feasibility of particular course~ and programs as proposed by the Depar'bnents. _ e} long term and annual budgets of the Faculty of Arts. .--■ • I I ....- -- - -■ I .- . •- ..... - _... ■ ■ - .. •" . ,J. • .. ~- ■ • - . - I • I ■ I -- . • "' f .. - .. .. ■ -. • =■.' l . ,=:-. I _ I - r I J - r ' J L -I - - • - F .- I_ - I ..- I _L I '"' �FACULTY OF ARTS COMMITTEE ON CURRICULUM 1969 - 1970 DEPARTMENT REPRESENTATIVES: Anthropology: Economics: English: Geography: History: Languages: Ma thematics: Philosophy: Political Science: Psychology: Sociology: Dean of Arts: Registrar: Chainnan: Secretary: Student Representatives: Doug Smart Don Sober Report: Mr. D. A. Archbold Pro , ~ s so r J . Ri deo ut Mr. I. G. Davies Mrs. S. Smith Dr. L. A. Diez Dr. W. Eames Professor W. S. Morris Dr. G. F. Engholm Dr . F. D. Co 1man Professor C. French Dean T. Ryan Mr. D. Ayre �FACULTY OF ARTS I COMMITTEE ON CURRICULUM :1 I 1969 - 1970 II TERMS OF REFERENCE: To consider pilot programs which would have as their origin on the one hand, a better understanding of the society in which we live, and on the other, a broadening of undergraduate studies. To create a conman core curriculum whi.ch would represent our collective be£t attempt to formulate a single curriculum to teach the most valuable and useful elements i.n the liberal arts. I ; \ I �FACULTY OF ARTS COMMITTEE ON EXTENSION 1969 - 70 I Department Re pres enta ti ves : .' Mr. M. <~reenwood Mr. I. Cameron Mr. s. MacGillivray Mr. o. Kemp Dr. E. Zimmermann Mr. A. Cloutier Anthropology: Economics: English: Geography: History: Languages: Mathematics: Philosophy: Political Science: Psychology: Sociology: Dean of Arts: Director of Extension: Dr. C. Ripley Dr. P. Sarbadhikari Mr. P. Wesley Dean T. f\yan Mr. K. Morrison Mr. D. Ayre Registrar: Chairman: I ' ' Secretary: Dr. C. Ripley Mr. I. Cameron Student Representatives: I I Report: Since the last meeting of the Faculty, this Committee has held four meetings. Proofs of the Summer Session Calendar have been read and approved. In this connection, the following motions were passed by the Committe~. (Perhaps it should be remarked that this is an advisory committee; hence all of its motions are recommendations, not decisions.) l. That the times of classes be consistent from the hour to fifty minutes past the hour. 2. That there be inserted in the Calendar ~ection on final examinations a �Page 2. Committee on Extension Report: qualifying sentence to the effect that since procedures of evaluation differ from discipline to discipline, the requirement of a final examination might be at the discretion of the instructor. 3. That Sunday opening of the library during Summer Session be considered. 4. A motion approving a memo from the Language Department proposing to replace CLCd6 with French lc6. 5. A motion of thanks to Professor Lewis and the Language Deparment for the information provided to the committee regarding summer school courses. The Colllllittee also discussed and endeavored to advise helpfully in the matter of an expense-account dispute between an extension teacher and the Director of Extension. The Committee has been working on its terms of reference and expects to submit a proposal to the next meeting of the Faculty of Arts. R. C. S. Ripley, Chairman. �FACULTY OF ARTS COMMITTEE ON EXTENSION AND SUMMER SESSION 1969 - 1970 PROPOSED TERMS OF REFERENCE The Extension and Sumner Session Committee undertakes to act in an advisory capacity in initiating and reviewing policies and arrangements relating to the university's Extension Program. The Committee's advice is directed to the Faculty of Arts. The Corrmittee will develop guidelines on the purpose, direction and future development of the entire Extension Program. The tenn "Extension Program", as used in the document, includes the Summer Session, courses held off-campus and non-credit courses. I \ ( 11) One representative from each Department in the Faculty of Arts constitutes the voting membership of the Committee. (2) The Director of Extension, the Dean of Arts, the Registrar, and one representative from each of the Faculties of Science, Education and University Schools are ex officio members of the Committee. (3) The Corrmittee elects a Chairman and Corresponding Secretary from its voting membership. A quorum of the Corrmittee is one-half of the voting members, including the Secretary or Chairman. In the absence of the Chainnan, a prs tern Chairman shall be elected by the votinq members present. - - (4) The Committee's reconmendations shall be passed in the form of resolutions. Such resolutions will be reported by the Chairman to the Dean and the Faculty of Arts. (5) The Committee shall examine all proposed Extension courses after their origination in the appropriate department and before such courses are submitted to the Faculty of Arts and to the Senate. (6) The Committee has the right, therefore, to request any information relevant to the academic and economic viability of new and established courses. (7) The Committee has the right to insist that any course may not be offered under the auspices of the Extension Department unless this arrangement has been approved by the Faculty of Arts. (8) The Committee acts as liaison body between the Departments and the Director of Extension and between the instructors and the Director of Extension on all matters concerning the Extension Program. I I I �FACULTY OF ARTS COMMITTEE ON FACULTY CONSTITUTION 1969 - 1970 DEPARTMENT REPRESENTATIVES: Anthropology: Economics: English: Geography: History: Languages: Mathematics: Philosophy: Political Science: Psychology: Sociology: Dean of Arts: Chairman: Secretary: Student Representatives: Report: F. J. Mr. R. Dr. P. Dr. A. Dr. 1'v1r. S. Chen Futhey Di 11 ey Raffo A. Scho 11 Professor W. S. Morris Mr. I. W. Hannaford Dr. N. Ginsburg Mr. S. Baldwin Dean T. Ryan Dr. N. Ginsburg Mr. J. Futhey �FACULTY OF ARTS COMMITTEE ON FACULTY HANDBOOK 1969 - 1970 Department Representatives: Anthropology Economics: English: Geography: History: Languages: Mathematics: Philosophy: Political Science: Psychology: Sociology: Dean of Arts: Chairman: Secretary: Student. Representatives: Report: Mr. Mr. Mr. Mr. Mr. D. S. R. B. J. A. Archbold MacGillivray S. Dilley Greenhous K. Atkinson Professor W. Morris Dr. G. F. Engholm Dr. A. Akram Professor C. French Dean T. Ryan �FACULTY OF ARTS COMMITTEE ON FACULTY HANDBOOK 1969 - 1970 TERMS OF REFERENCE: To gather together infonnation relevant to the efficient functioning of faculty members. To collect material previously scattered throughout booklets, minutes and memoranda, into one easily consulted compendium. ~ - - ·------·--- --- - - - - · - -----~---··------··- -···--·--·--- - ------- ····-·----·---···---- , �FACULTY OF ARTS COMMITTEE ON INTER-UNIVERSITY SEMINARS AND EXCHANGE 1969 - 1970 Department Representatives: fl I Anthropology: Economics: English: Geography: History: Languages: Mathematics: Philosophy: Political Science: Psychology: Sociology: Dean of Arts: Chairman: Secretary: Student Representatives: _ Report: 'ir. 0. Astwood nr. s. MacGillivray Mr. u. Kemp Dr. P. Raffo Dr. A. A. Scholl Professor W. S. Morris Mr. A. Alexander Dr. P. Satinder Mr. P. Chimbos Dean T. Ryan Mr. A. Alexander Mr. D. Kemp �FACULTY OF ARTS COMMITTEE ON INTER-UNIVERSITY SEMINARS AND EXCHANGE 1969 - 1970 PROPOSED TERMS OF REFERENCE: a) To examine the possibilities of establishing arrangements with other universities and colleges in Canada and the United States whereby reciprocal visits by scholars and researchers could be organized and jointly financed. examine the possibilities of arranging short and long term exchanges of faculty members between Lakehead University and other universities and colleges in Canada and the United States. �LAKEHFAD UNlVERSTTY D.D. Kemp TO: All Members of Committee on Inter-University Seminars anc Exchange Meet~ng - Frid~y, PRESENT: i. A. Alexander, (Chairman), P. Chimbos, D. Kemp, S. HacGillivray, Raffo, P. Satinder TERMS OF REFERENCE It was Au~gested by the Chairman that the Committee's title outlines its terms of reference. After some discussion, lt was agreed that the Committee should make it clear that it had no intention of poaching in the province of the Special Events Committee although there appeared to be no reason why one Corranittee sHould not at times take advantage of visits or exchanges arranged by the other. The Chairman and Secretary were empowered to prepare a brief on the terms of reference of the Committee. 2. GEOGRAPHICAL EXTENT OF AC'fIVITIES Three possibilities were open to the Committee as far as geographical location of contacts was concerned. (a) No restriction on location (b) Location within certain radial distance (c) Location within adjacent political unlts {a) In this cnse it waR felt that since initial seminars or exchanges would have to be of limitr>d duration -- du(' t0 problems of timetables and finances some restriction must be introduced. However, the Committee agreed that at a later date exchanges of faculty over a term or a year should he considered and i such a case, a much wider area could be considered. (b) While this may have ndvantages in terms of simplicity, it was pointed out by a number of members that distance and accessibility are not necessarily directly related and the example of Sudbury was cited. • �- --= - . ....... ■ -...-. - . -2■ It was consJder(.'<l tliaL the univers!U(• ::1 .:i nd colleges of 1\,1anitoba, Saskatchewan and A.lbcrta as well as those of Wisconsin and Minnesota would provide suitable areas for the establishment of initial contact. Discussion had brought forth several reasons for this choice. Firstly, in a number of cases the universities and colleges of Western Canada are more accessible to an~ frJm the Lakehea<l than similar institutions in Southern Ontario and the same can he sRid for those in the Northern U.S. Secondly, it was felt that many of the places in these states and provinces would experience problems of academic isolation similar to those ._ encountered at the Lakehead and would therefore be more willing I to participate in an £>xchc1nge s c heme than univPrsit-i e~ ancl ■ colleges Jn Eastern Canada. Thirdly, S. h~cGillJvray pointed out that some contact had already been made at the departmental 1111 level with the U.S. colleges and it was suggested that the ■ secretary get in touch with G. Merrill or M. Patterson with _regard to t__his. .. I J• II FINANCING AND ESTABLISHMENT OF CONTACT J .J In arranging seminars or exchanges the main costs would arise from travel and accommodation. No honorarium would be paid since a system of "faculty barter" could be used. It was pointed out that the Science Faculty carried out a programme similar to this. In their case, expenses for travel and acc01mno<lati.on were met hy the Dean and the Committee felt that it might recommend a similar arrangement to the Dean of Arts. In the future, it seems possible that the Canada Council or N.R.C. might provide financial aid although there was some doubt expressed as to the willingness of the Canada Council to pay for 1 visit<!_~& from south of the border. J - ,I ..._. I ■ - ■ MEETINGS 4, - I t was moved by P. Raffo and seconded by P. Chimbos that meetings be arranged at discretion of the Chairman and Secretary. motion wae carried unanimously. The I-■ -- • ■ . • -.■ ■ With regard to the establishment of contacts, it was the opinion of the Committee that this should be Dean to Dean, at least initially. It was moved bys. MacGillivr.ay and seconded by P. Raffo that the Committee ask the Dean of Arts to contact his counterparts in the universities and colleges of the area outlined in Section 2c above with reference to the Committee's activities. The motion was carried ... unanimously. _ r ~ - --, ■ - ■ .... - II . • , . ·- --■-.} --. : --- b- ■ .-- I -. •-,-... 41 I ..J �FACULTY OF ARTS COMMITTEE ON ORIENTATION 1969 - 1970 Department Representatives: Anthropology Economics: English: Geography: History: Languages: Mathematics: Phi.losophy: Politi.cal Science: Psychology: Sociology: Dean of Arts: Registrar: Dean of Students: Librarian: ,~ii ss R. Tracy Dr. K. C. Kim Miss R. Candido Dr. B. Phi 11 i ps Mr. E. Hughes Miss S. Abzinger Mr. L. D. Black Professor W. S. Morris Mr. A. M. Macleod Mr. P. G. Wesley Mr. V. Wightman Dean T. Ryan Mr. D. Ayre Dean J. Kerr Mr. E. Belton Chairman: Secretary: Stud~nt Representatives: Report: I I �FACULTY OF ARTS COMMITTEE ON REGISTRATION AND COUNSELLING 1969 - 1970 Department Representatives: Anthropology: Economics: English: Geography: History: Mathematics: Phi 1os.aphy: Political Science: P~ch.alogy: Sociology: Dean of Ar ts.: Chalrman: Secretary: Student Represent~tlves: Re.port: Mr. ~--. Dr. Mr. Dr. Dr. Mr. Dr. Mr. Mr. Mr. M. D. G. D. J. J. L. C. A. K. V. Greenwood Astwood Merrill Kemp Hilliker A. Whittle D. Black Ripley Alexander Allan Wightman Dean T. Ryan �FACULTY OF ARTS COMMITTEE ON REGISTRATION AND COUNSELLING 1969 - 1970 TERMS OF REFERENCE The purpose of the Commi.ttee on Registration and Counsell i.ng is to provide a continuing channel of communication for students who need help in the organization of their academic programs. It is not intended, however, that nonnal channels, via faculty members and department chairmen will be supplanted by the Committee. The Conmittee is composed of one member from each of the Departments of the Arts Faculty, selected by each department chairman, and of student representatives. These members serve the dual role of repres_enti ng their departments or consti.tuents. in the formati.on of pol i.cy, and of advisi.ng students. in relation ta their proposed degree programs. This year the Committee i~ expertmenting with a program of advance regi.stratfon and counselling for freshmen enrolling in th.e 1969 - 1970 year. This program is expected to lighten the counselling load during September, and to avert many of the frustrations which inevitably accompany a mass influx of ~tudents. �FACULTY OF ARTS COMMITTEE ON SPACE UTILIZATION 1969 - 1970· DEPARTMENT REPRESENTATIVES: K. Dawson Mr. D. Astwood Dr. G. Merri 11 Mr. I. Davies Mr. B. Greenhous Mr. D. Lewis Dr. J~ S. Griffith Professor F. Doan Mr. P. Johnson Dr. W. Melnyk Professor C. French , 1r. Anthropo1ogy: Economics: Eng1ish: Geography: History: Languages: Mathematics: Phi1osophy: Political Science: . Psychology: Sociology: Dean of Arts: Dean T. Ryan . Chairman: Secretary: Student Representatives: Report: No meeting of this committee has occurred since the last one I reported (bulletin 3). However, the consultant's projections of future space requirements have b~en .. , received. .,, The President has been requested to convene an early meeting for the purpose of deciding which departments will occupy the new building. Given this information the views of these departmer,ts on office size and fittings and physical arrangement of departmental facilities will be solicited. At the same time opinions from all departments will be sought on matters of teaching space design. Frequent and regular meetings of this committee are envisaged for the spring term. Ivor Davies, CHAIRMAN. �FACULTY OF ARTS COMMITTEE ON SPACE UTILIZATION 1969 - 1970 TERMS OF REFERENCF; The primary concern of the Committee on Space Utilization is the distribution of available space. The Committee attempts to ensure that those involved in academic programs have space in sufficient quantity and quality for efficient teaching, study and research. This entails constant reappraisal of the use of existing buildings and the planning of additional buildings and their use. The Committee attempts to involve those who use space in decisions regarding its allocation. Each department is represented on the Committee and the student body has been invited to seat representatives. Each department may communicate its suggestions to the Committee, while knowledge of the work of the Committee may be readily disseminated throughout the whole of the Arts Faculty. From the exchange of information a greater degree of understanding of individual and departmental needs may be achieved. It is hoped that the student representatives will be able to make important contributions in respect of study and teaching areas. I 'I �FACULTY OF ARTS COMMITTEE ON UNDERGRADUATE INSTRUCTION 1969 - 1970 Department Representatives: Anthropo 1ogy: Economics: English: Geography: Hi story: Languages: Ma thematics: Philosophy: Political Science: Psychology: Sociology: Dean of Arts: Registrar: Mr. R. Berndt ir. R. Slocum Professor J. Rideout Mr. I. G. Da Vies Mrs. S. Smith Dr. J. Whittle Dr. W. Eames Professor W. S. Morris Mr. A. Alexander Mr. L. Anderson Mr. C. Hathaway Dean T. Ryan Mr. D. Ayre Chairman: Secretary: Professor W. S. Morris Mr. R. Slocum Student Representatives: Paul Paularinne Ken Robertson Report: �MT :,JI J'l.' l·:S ON S (J ,~-·C:OH:1 l TT i·. ,·: , H~ t.i·. l)i~i~( ;JUd>UA'J' I•: l NST.nli :T 1ON Pn•i;r>nt: D~an T. Ryan D1. W. Morris Dr. J. Rideout Dr. J. Whittle Mr. L. Anderson nP.rndt i <•f; :'1 1 C: . l l: 1t lw way •,, , i ' . :; locum \\ r '" . S . :-;mJ th !). (,ihson R. f>E•t ryshyn :-1r. I{. ''11 r. f);1v Apolo~ies recorded for Mr. D. Ayre for his absencr. Minuter-; of November 20, 1,,e, wc:'re read .1nd ,'1pprL,VL'd. ~tr. n.1vil'•.L; moved to rnodity the motion regarding the DE'~m's list 1 which h' , l'-: p:1~~~..;t•d November 20, to read "A Dean's list be established, thP c:rjt1.:1·i1.111 l>I which wi J 1 he lhe achievement by student in ;:my ~ i vcn Y('.'."I r n r clll over-all standing of not less than 70 per cent". Dr. Rideout ~;Ct'l°l11<lt•d the motion. Motion carried with three abstentions) viz. Mr. Anderson, Mr. Berndt, and Mrs. Smith. a The agenda i tern on prerequisites was cl is cussed and it wa:..; Lill· consensus of the Committee that it take no acUon and make no r<'co01m0ndation Ln an area it considered to be the sole responsibilit, of tl1P department. Thf:• nc·xt agenda item dealing wi.th st wic>nts Mimi tt.c-d to thf> I 011 rt:l1-vc-ar honours program was deferredJ to he discussed ;iL a later d:1tl' wllt·n thP Committee considers the who]c lionours program. Mr.. AndE:~rson moved that on page 7 5 or Lhe Uni. vers i Ly C~1 l('nd;1 r. :~cc t I on 4c, Ii ne three and line nix and sf'vf'n, the• wnnl~, ''comp l c r i ,,n ,r the• cnurs,," he• ~:truck .ind that WP '•lllhf,till1tP "Jast cl:1:,!-; l\lt · t.l1t• vr•ar". Mr. Petryshyn seconded the ffi()tf.on. Cnrrll'd unm1imnuslv. J\dJour-ned. "'') I __, ( t..,.·z:_ R. S]\)('Ul11 Se<·n.•u1 rv -c.. _,___._...---- �FACULTY OF ARTS COMMITTEE ON UNDERGRADUATE INSTRUCTION 1969 - 1970 TERMS OF REFERENCE The Corrmittee on Undergraduate Instructi0i1 undertakes to study the problems of teaching and learning in the university, and to investigate the possibilities of improvement in degree programs. Topics which might come within the scope of its consideration are: a) Teaching and Learning i. the relative efficacy of lectures, seminars, tutorials and other methods in the teaching-learning process ii. the nature of examinations as they relate to the teaching-learning process iii. the quality of the teaching-learning process and the possibility of the improvement of it by appropriate means. b) StructuPe of Degree Programs i. the relation between B.A. and Honors B.A. programs and courses ii. questions concerning the problem of specialization, general education, and the elective system. \I �� Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Lakehead University Collection Description An account of the resource Photographs from Lakehead University's history: people, events, and campus. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Bulletin: Faculty of Arts Lakehead University Subject The topic of the resource Universities Description An account of the resource Meeting minutes, reports, and related documents of the Faculty of Arts, Lakehead University, 1969-1970. Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Lakehead University Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1970 Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource PDF Language A language of the resource English Type The nature or genre of the resource Text Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context U10b Coverage The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant Canada - Ontario - Thunder Bay https://digitalcollections.lakeheadu.ca/files/original/3e593b77a84fe96e095a27d0c7539f3e.pdf 710ff45fd201dfd62cd6456f1016d930 PDF Text Text r BACHELOR OF MUSIC (PERFORMANCE) DEGREE PROGRAMME LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY CONSERVATORY OF MUSIC Proposed by Manuel Suarez, Director and Conductor, Thunder Bay Symphony Orchestra �- 2 - SECTION I PART I ACADEMIC INFORMATION ACADEMIC CALENDAR The academic year will consist of three Quarters: Autumn, Winter and Spring. A fourth Quarter, or Summer Quarter, will be specially designed for those students or groups of students whose alternating professional practice study assignments require them to be in school at that time. The normal undergraduate programme is designed to be completed in four ( academic years, or twelve Quarters. The summer school will offer three terms of three weeks each, equivalent to a regular Quarter and, in addition, a ten-week Quarter term plus short credits. All academic credits are expressed in terms of Quarter credits. Equivalents are: one semester credit equals 3/2 Quarter credit; one term credit equals 2/3 Quarter credit. INSTRUCTIONAL PERIODS AND FINAL EXAMINATIONS Each Quarter will approximately be equal in length, consisting of 45-47 instructional days, plus the last week of each of the four Quarters devoted to the scheduled performances and Quarter and final examinations. Academic marks and credits are reported promptly following the close of ( each Quarter. In the undergraduate disciplines, the work of each Quarter is a completed unit of instruction. This provision does not affect the �- 3 sequence of Quarters in a course that is required by the Faculty of a musical discipline. HOLIDAYS Recognized holidays falling within the four instructional periods will be respected according to the academic calendar of Lakehead University. Special arrangements will be made for students whose religious holidays fall within registration, orientation or instructional periods. It will be the individual student's responsibility to inform his teachers of the circumstances and to comply with the special arrangements that are made. GENERAL ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS ( UNDERGRADUATE MUSIC STUDIES Admission to the baccalaureate programme will be based upon the chronological order of receipt of the completed applications on a gradepoint system and by the heard evidence of particular preliminary training or talent. The grade-point average of the applicant will be computed on the basis of such factors as high school rank and programme, college placement scores if any, achievement tests, special talent or ability, and the high school counsellor's recommendation or private instructor in his major instrument. Any student who meets the qualifications listed under Part II of this Section may be assumed to have the equivalent of the required grade-point system. It will not always be possible to accept prospective students from out of the Province of Ontario who ( barely meet the minimum requirements. �- 4 Admission to an appropriate undergraduate music programme is open to any high school graduate who is a resident of Ontario, completing application before the closing date of the programme. An entering student may be assigned to a general music education programme as a prerequisite for possible transfer to specialized curriculum after the first year. Non-residents of Ontario who possess the qualifications set forth in Part II of this Section and complete their applications before the closing date of the desired programme will be eligible for admission as long as space permits. ADMISSION MATERIALS ( Application for Admission blanks and high school transcript forms may be secured from the: 1. University Admissions Office, 2. Thunder Bay Symphony Music School. APPLICATION FEE A fee of $15.00 (non-refundable) will be charged for the processing of each Application for Admission. PHYSICAL EXAMINATIONS A physical examination is required of each applicant. Admission may be denied for failure to meet the physical and health requirements. A tuberculin chest x-ray is required within three months of ( registration. �- 5 REGISTRATION FEE A Registration Fee of $30,00 is payable when the applicant for admission receives notice of acceptance. Payment of the fee when due assures the applicant that a place is reserved for him and is considered as evidence of his good faith in expecting to register. This fee is required for all full-time entering undergraduate students. This fee is a separate charge and is not a deposit or advance payment of other fee charges. This fee is paid only once. Any currently involved but previously classified or non-registered student, after having been processed through the Office of Admissions and tentatively accepted, must pay the fee as a condition Qf admission to a Degree Programme. The Registration Fee will be refunded only if the student is denied admission through failure to: ( 1. acquire the necessary credits, 2. be graduated from high school or 3. meet physical and health requirements. In cases of extreme personal emergency, as interpreted by the Director of Admission, the fee may be refunded. It may be refunded also if the applicant is called to active military duty. Application for either refund or credit must be made in writing at the time of the admission cancellation. The Registration Fee is valid for a four-year period. The Director of Admissions is authorized to make decisions on these matters in accordance with University Regulations. ( ADVANCE PLACEMENT PROGRAMME In normal procedure, consideration will be given to students who �- 6 - have taken college-level courses in high school under the Advanced Placement Programme. Advanced placement or credit, or both, may be granted in appropriate music courses to students who have distinguished themselves on previous placement examination. High school students who have taken such examination for programmes and desire to attend this institution should request that their papers be referred to the Director of Admissions. TRANSFER OF CREDITS Students who wish to transfer credits to aqother Faculty of the University should seek counsel in the University Admissions Office and consult the appropriate advisor in the Faculty to which transfer is requested, in order that they may be certain that the courses taken ( will satisfy the advanced standing rules of that Faculty. Similarly, credits from other faculties and universities are subject to the advanced standing rules of the section or instrument to which transfer is requested. GRADING SYSTEM At the end of each Quarter, the school registrar mails an official report on each student's academic achievement. Reports are given in terms of grades and quality points as indicated. GRADING AND POINT SYSTEM GRADE A: GRADE B: GRADE C: GRADED: GRADE F: ( Excellent - 4 Good - 3 Fair - 2 Poor - 1 Failure - 0 GRADE I: GRADEY: GRADE W: GRADE U: GRADE T: GRADEN: Incomplete - 0 Withdrawal (unofficial) - 0 Withdrawal (official) - 0 Unsatisfactory - 0 Audit - 0 No Grade Reported (see Instructor) - 0 �- 7 REGISTRATION A student nrust be formally admitted (See Admission Requirements). Under University Regulations, a student's registration is completed when his application for admission has been approved, his registration forms have been completed properly and returned to the Registrar's office and his student fees have been paid. A student may not attend classes until he has completed his registration. Instructions concerning registration for each Quarter or Term will be published as far in advance as is practical. Students are urged to take advantage of the earliest opportunity for them to complete their registration, as assignment in class section is determined in the order in which students register. ( New students will be notified by the office concerning the registration periods and continuing students should be alert to announcements concerning registration for succeeding Quarters. LATE REGISTRATION FEE On the day following the period set aside for registration and thereafter until the registration completion date, a Late Registration Fee of $10.00 is assessed. LATE REGISTRATION COMPLETION DATE All registrations must be completed, including clearance through the cashier's office, by noon of the first day of classes of any Quarter of all the sections of the music programme. ORIENTATION All new students, freshmen and transfer, are urged to attend either �- 8 the summer or autumn orientation programmes. The new student will receive all the necessary information regarding this programme at the appropriate time. WITHDRAWALS Official withdrawals from courses must be made to the Registrar's Office in person or by letter, according to the University's rules. Unofficial withdrawal may occur any time during the Quarter. When a student has incurred excessive absence and has not completed an official withdrawal form, he may be withdrawn, unofficially, by the instructor and is not eligible for academic credit or refund of fee. A student who is withdrawn unofficially, because of excessive absence, cannot be ( reinstated as an auditor. STUDENT RECORDS The academic record of a student is confidential and an official transcript of such record is sent only at the request, or with the consent, of the student or alumnus. The only information that will be released without the student's permission is name, dates of attendance, and degrees awarded if any. ATTENDANCE AT GRADUATION Graduating students are expected to be in attendance at the exercises to receive their diplomas. If, due to unforeseen circumstances, attendance would impose an unreasonable hardship upon the student, he may request permission from the Dean of his section to receive his ( degree in absentia. �- 9 - PART II GENERAL REGULATIONS COMMON TO ALL INSTRUMENTS 1. General Regulations The General Regulations for the Conservatory shall be as those contained in Lakehead University Calendar for 1972-73, P. 37; (a), (b), (c), (d), (e), (f) and under "Faculties of Arts, Science and Education" (g), (h), (i). 2. Registration - Common P. 38; (c), (e), (f), (g), (h). 3. ( Programmes of Study - Common P . 38 ; 4. (a) , (b) , ( c) . Regulations and Examinations - Common P. 38; (a) with change to be effected to read "The Faculty of Music or the Music Faculty constitutes the examining body for all music examinations", (b), (c), (d), (e), (f) to read as: i. "Quarterly Examinations as read in Part I ( 45-4 7) practice days plus one week for Quarterly Examinations" and ii Final Examinations to read "The provisional timetable for the June examinations shall be published by December 20th and a corrected timetable by February 10th". The rest of the paragraph as in ii. Final Examinations. P. 39; (h) , (j) . ( 5. Standing - Common P. 39; (a), (b) under "Faculty of Arts" to read "A student who �- 10 attains 55% in each of the courses prescribed for his year, and an average of 65% in his major course, will be eligible to proceed to the next higher year without condition". The rest as reads. P. 40: (a) under "Faculty of Arts" to read the same, except as NOTE: "An average of at least 65% is required in the courses of the major subject", (d), (e). 6. Reappraisal - Common Sarne. 7. Supplemental Examinations P. 40; (a) under "Faculty of Arts" to read "That supplemental examinations be limited to three for the total degree programme and that a mark of 50% be required for supplemental rights in a course"; ( (b) - Common to read "Normally, only one supplemental performance examination can be given in each course but in exceptional circumstances permission may be given to give a supplemental performance examination in a course for the second time. Applications should be sent to the Registrar and will be referred to the appropriate Faculty member and Department for consideration"; (c) to read "A student may give one supplemental performance examination to raise his standing in courses already passed, provided an average of 55% of the marks assigned to all the courses of his annual examinations has been attained"; (e), P. 41: (f) to read "Supplemental Performance Examinations are held in August and April. Applications must be filed by July 15th or March 14th at the ( Registrar's Office and must be accompanied by the prescribed fee. This fee is not refundable"; (g), (h) . �- 11 - 8. Deficiency - Common P. 40; (a), (b) under "Faculty of Arts" to read" . . . less than 55% . . . . "; (c), (d) under "Faculty of Arts" to read "A student who has failed his year is eligible to apply for readmission to the University. ~ A student will be granted the privilege of repeating year only"; (e) to read "The Conservatory may, at any time, ask any student whose work is unsatisfactory to withdraw from the Conservatory and University"; (f), (g) as follows: "A student who has failed to complete workshop work, performance and field practice work will be denied supplemental examination privileges. (Field work is to be taken as compulsory clinics, concerts and lessons in school in and out of the community). ( 9. Withdrawal - Common (a) , (b) , ( c) , ( d) . ( �- 12 - SECTION II ( ( ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS �- 13 - REQUIREMENTS FOR ADMISSIONS (For General Information on Admission Requirements, see Section I, Part I). Applicants for entrance to the Bachelor of Music (Performance) Degree Programme must meet the following additional requirements: 1. Graduation from an accredited high school, generally in the upper third of the graduating class (Only exceptionally gifted students will be accepted prior age 16 - See 5). 2. Sixteen units are required: English - 4; Social Studies - l; Mathematics or Languages - 2; additional college preparatory subjects - 6. ( NOTE: A unit to be taken as a semester study in high school. Three units of music ensemble or courses are recommended, including one unit in theory. 3. Auditions to determine satisfactory potential for music. 4. Scores for any type of college entrance examination are used for counselling purposes for criteria in the computation of gradepoint systems as may be required for admission. Therefore, any such scores must be submitted before final acceptance for admission. 5. Prospective students must be 15 years of age minimum and must pass all the normal tests required. ADMISSION MATERIALS Applications for Admission, high school transcript forms, and ( audition and interview application forms for undergraduate admission may be secured from the Office of Admissions of the �- 14 Conservatory of Music or from the Thunder Bay Symphony Orchestra. ENTRANCE AUDITIONS In addition to the admission requirements listed above, each new and transferred music student must appear before the Examination Board during the opening days of the academic year in September. This entrance audition permits the Applied Faculty of Music to check the student's proficiency development since the initial audition (sometimes nearly a year previous). A student should perform the same composition performed on his original audition, but he may choose to perform new works. Minimum required points for each applied area are listed in the Applied Music Section on later pages of this proposal. C TRANSFER STUDENTS All transfer students will submit a full transcript of their previous study. In the case of transfer from member schools in related music or other properly accredited instructors, credits previously earned with a Grade of C or better in the course paralleling those of this Conservatory School of Music curriculum will generally be accepted. CLASS ATTENDANCE A policy of unlimited cuts is approved by the Faculty of the College Conservatory of Music. Class attendance is then the responsibility of the individual student. This policy will not apply in the following areas: Technique or major instrument, or ensembles involving major ( instrument, all Applied M.lsic areas and the student teaching assignment. In these specific areas, regular attendance is required, and the �- 15 instructor is free to penalize excessive absence. will be permitted for private lessons. No unexcused absence A student with a valid reason for non-attendance at a scheduled lesson is required to give the instructor twenty-four (24) hours notice, except in emergencies. If this notice is not given, a student is not entitled to a make-up lesson. It is the student's responsibility to meet with his private instructor at the beginning of each period of enrolment to arrange for his lesson times. Unexcused absence from a final examination will result in an F, or failure, for the course. If a student has such a valid excuse, it is his responsibility to notify the instructor immediately. An instructor is under no obligation to provide a substitute or make-up examination for an unexcused absence from regularly scheduled hour examinations. ( Unexcused absence from such a regular examination will result in an F, or failure, for that examination. PROBATION A student shall be placed on a scholastic probation when his quality point average for any single Quarter falls below 2.0, or when his cumulative quality point average at the end of any given Quarter falls below 2.0. The student's non-academic activities will be restricted and his course load reduced as a result of this action. Formal notice of this action will be given to the student and appropriately-interested persons. A student shall be placed on performance probation when a majority of the Applied Faculty of his Department, at a scheduled Applied Board Examination, determines that the performance of the student ( does not meet the minimum standards for which he is being examined. �- 16 SUSPENSION AND DISMISSAL The records of students on probation will be reviewed at the end of each Quarter by the Probation Committee. The following conditions will render a student subject to suspension or dismissal: 1. Failure to achieve 2.0 average for the Quarter on which he is on probation. 2. Failure to achieve a 2.0 average for any three Quarters of his undergraduate work. 3. Inability to raise his cumulative quality point average to 2.0. 4. Quality point average in any given Quarter so low that his continuing would be detrimental to the best interests of the student and/or the University. ( 5. If determined by the Faculty to be on performance probation at two successive Applied Board Examinations. APPEAL The Conservatory of Music believes that the student's r _ight of due process should be assured. Any student has the right to appeal any academic decision adversely affecting his status in the University. His appeal is to be filed within two weeks with the Faculty Member as designated below. The Faculty Member will review the basics of the student's appeal and determine the appropriate body to consider the appeal. He will constitute a committee of Faculty Members, including members outside of the Department as appropriate , ( in person. The student has the right to appear Because of the time consumed in the appeal process, a student's status will remain as indicated in the original decision until �- 17 the Appeal Committee renders its decision. A student dismissed or suspended is not eligible to enrol or re-enrol for a Quarter in which an appeal decision is pending. HONOURS CURRICULUM The Honours curriculum of the Conservatory of Music is designed to enrich the educational experience of the exceptionally-gifted undergraduate student. The Programme allows for certain flexibilities of curriculum, in-depth studies on a tutorial basis, admission to specific courses or sections which are designated as Honours Courses, special lecture recitals and interdisciplinary projects. Performance instruction, on an individual basis, constitutes a de facto schedule. Therefore, the Honours curriculum is primarily limited to academic ( electives, Music Education, Music History and Theory. All entering freshmen are required to be examined in Music Literature and Theory. On the basis of these examinations, students are invited to enrol in specially designated sections. GENERAL ELIGIBILITY 1. Any student who has completed two full Quarters may apply. 2. A grade-point average of approximately 3.6 is required. 3. Admission to the Programme should be for a specific academic and curricular purpose. 4. Applications made to the Associate Dean for Undergraduate Studies and the Honours Council by the fourth week of the spring Quarter in any given academic year. ( �- 18 - HONOURS CURRICULUM COUNCIL 1. Comprised of the Director, three Faculty Members and two senior members of the Student Tribunal. 2. The Director and the Faculty Members are appointed by the Dean of the Conservatory of Music or the Music Director and the Advisory Committee. areas: 3. Faculty representation includes each of the following Music Education, Performance, History - Theory. Student members are elected by this Tribunal. COMPLETION OF PROGRAMME Completion of the Honours curriculum includes: ( 1. Election for a mininum of one Quarter of an Honours curriculum. 2. An oral report to the Council on the programme and projects. 3. A certificate of recognition will be awarded by the Faculty of the Conservatory of Music. EXAMINATIONS IN APPLIED MUSIC All undergraduate degrees conferred by the Conservatory of Music signify more than satisfactory completion of a minimum number of prescribed credits. The Faculty requires evidence of growth and accomplishment in performance. Periodic examinations in Applied Music I before the members of an appropriate Department provide regular evaluation of the student's progress. As a general rule, students are heard on their major instrument twice each year (See Entrance Audition earlier in this Section). ( The student's progress in his secondary Applied Music field is evaluated at the end of the spring Quarter of each academic year. �- 19 SECONDARY PIANO REQUIREMENTS Students must enrol in Secondary Piano until all required examinations have been passed. FRESHMAN MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS (All Bachelor of Music Programmes except Music Education) 1. Technique (a) scales 1 major and minor (harmonic and melodic), two octaves, hands together. (b) arpeggios - 1 major and minor, root position, two octaves, hands together. 2. Sight read - a single piece at sight. 3. Improvisation: (a) parallel period using Roman Numerals I, IV, v7 chords in root ( position and/or inversions. (b) a short "A-B-A" form, using the chords listed above as well as Form II supertonic triad. 4. Repertoire: Two pieces of contrasting styles, comparable in difficulty to those found in Telemann's Klavier Buchlein, Bartok for Children, Forms I and II; or No.'s 13 to 18 of Kabalevsky's Twenty-four Little Pieces, Op. 39. One piece nust be performed from memory. SOPHOMORE MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS 1. Technique: (a) scales - 1 major and minor (harmonic and melodic). ( (b) arpeggios - 1 major and minor, root position and inversions. �- 20 2. Sight read - a piece of a more difficult level than that required at the freshman year. 3. Improvisation: (a) a short prelude including modulations, using common chords and/or some form of 7th chords. (b) a short theme with variations - at least four variations, using non-chord tones - 8 bars minimum. 4. Repertoire: Two pieces of contrasting styles, comparable in difficulty to Kabalevsky's Toccatina, Op. 27, or the Easy Pieces from Bach's Short Preludes and Fugues. MINIMUM FUNCTIONAL PIANO REQUIREMENTS FOR MUSIC MAJORS ( (Music Education - no requirements, as this course will not be presented in the first year). COMPOSITION MAJORS Composition - Piano requirements: No requirements as this subject will not be presented in the first year. OPERA MAJORS Opera Class - Piano requirements: will not be presented in the first year. ( No requirements as this subject �- 21 - SECTION III ( ( DEGREES AND DIPLOMAS OFFERED �- 22 - DEGREES AND DIPLOMAS OFFERED 1. UNDERGRADUATE PERFORMANCE IN MUSIC DEGREE PROGRAMME Degrees offered: Bachelor of Music (Performance) A Degree of Bachelor of Music in Performance with a major in piano, harp, orchestral instruments, theory or history, may be earned upon completion of the programme of studies described below. The minimum number of credit hours required for this Degree shall be 196 Quarter hours. In order to complete the specific degree requirements, it will be necessary for the student to accumulate more than the required number of hours. ( All students majoring in Applied Music shall present an acceptable senior recital in public, to be graded by the Applied Music Faculty. The Bachelor of Music (Performance) Degree, with a major in Music Education meets all requirements for teacher's certification in Ontario, as well as the majority of other Provincial Departments of Education. The candidate for this degree may specialize in instrumental music, secondary vocal music or general music (This course or specialty may not be offered in the first year). Students who wish to combine professional training in performance with a Music Degree in Education may complete the requirements in both major fields. This will enable them to meet certification requirements in Music Education while maintaining professional performance standards in Applied Music. ( Normally, this Programme requires five years. �- 23 Bachelor of Music (Performance) - Major in Piano Autumn Winter Spring Freshman Year - Credits per Quarter: CM-010 - 101, 2, 3 - Piano (includes Functional Keyboard) CM-000 - 101, 2, 3 - Theory CM-001 - 101, 2, 3 - Music History and Literature CM-002 - 211 - Introduction to Conducting LU - 101, 2, 3 (Arts Faculty Electives) English LU Arts Faculty Electives) - Academic CM,-003 - Ensemble - 4 4 4 4 4 2 1 or 2 1 or 2 1 3 3 3 3 3 1 4 1 3 1 17-18 17-18 17-18 4 1 4 1 4 1 1 4 1 4 1 2 2 2 3 1 16 3 1 3 1 16 16 4 1 2 4 1 2 4 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 Sophomore Year - Credits per Quarter: C 201, 2, 3 - Piano Major 121, 2, 3 - Secondary Applied Music 201, 2, 3 - Theory 201, 2, 3 - Piano Sight Reading 301, 2, 3 - Music History and Literature LU (Arts Faculty Electives) ... Literature or Languages CM-003 - Ensemble CM-010 CM CM-000 CM-002 CM-001 - 4 Junior Year - Credits per Quarter: CM-010 CM CM-001 CM-003 CM-002 CM-000 CM-002 LU (Arts 3 - Piano Major 3 - Secondary Applied Music 6 - Piano Repertoire 2 - Piano Ensemble OR ) 3 - Accompaniment Class) 301, 2, 3 - Analysis of Music 307, 8, 9 - Studio Accompanying I Faculty Electives) Academic 301, 221, 304, 310, 301, 2, 2, 5, 1, 2, 2 1 2 1 6 6 6 IT IT IT 4 4 2 2 4 2 2 Senior Year - Credits per Quarter: CM-010 CM-000 CM-005 CM-002 LU (Arts 401, 2, 307, B, 401, 2, 407, B, Faculty 3 - *Piano Major 9 - Orchestration 3 - Piano Pedagogy 9 - Studio Accompanying II Electives) - Academic ( *A Senior Recital is required. 2 2 2 2 2 6 6 6 16 16 16 �- 24 Bachelor of Music (P~rfor~ance) - Major in Harpsichord Autumn Winter Spring 3 CM-009 - 101, 2, 3 - Harpsichord CM 1 121, 2, 3 - Applied Music (Secondary) CM-000 - 101, 2, 3 - Theory 4 CM-001 - 101, 2, 3 - Music History and 2 Literature 1 CM-002 - 211 - Introduction to Conducting LU - 101, 2, 3 (Arts Faculty Electives) English 3 3 LU (Arts Faculty Electives) - Academic CM-003 - Ensemble 1 17-18 3 1 4 3 Freshman Year - Credits per Quarter: or 1 4 2 2 1 or 1 3 3 3 3 1 1 17-18 17-18 4 1 4 4 1 4 2 2 2 3 Sophomore Year - Credits per Quarter: ( CM-009 CM CM-000 CM-002 CM-001 - 201, 2, 3 - Harpsichord Major 221, 2, 3 - Applied Music (Secondary) - 201, 2, 3 - Theory - 201, 2, 3 - Piano Sight Reading - 301, ·2, 3 - Music History and Literature LU (Arts Faculty Electives) - Literature or Language CM-003 - Ensemble 4 1 4 1 1 1 3 1 3 1 T6 T6 T6 4 4 2 2 2 2 4 2 2 1 6 2 1 6 6 IT IT IT 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 6 2 6 2 6 T6 16 T6 1 Junior Year - Credits per Quarter: CM-009 CM-001 CM-000 CM-000 - 301, 2, 3 - Harpsichord Major 304, 5, 6 - Piano Repertoire 301, 2, 3 - Analysis of Music 501, 2, 3 - Sixteenth Century Counterpoint CM-003 - Ensemble or Accompanying W (Arts Faculty Electives) - Academic 2 2 1 Senior Year - Credits per Quarter: ( CM-009 - 401, 2, 3 -*Harpsichord Major CM-000 - 504, 5, 6 - Eighteenth Century Counterpoint CM-000 - 307, 8, 9 - Orchestration CM-000 - 514, 15, 16 - Advanced Keyboard Harmony and Through Bass Playing LU (Arts Faculty Electives) - Academic *A Senior Recital is required. �- 25 - Bachelor of Music (Performance) - Major in Orchestral Instrument Autumn Winter Spring Freshman Year - Credits per Quarter: CM 101, 2, 3 - Applied Music CM-010 - 161, 2, 3 - Functional Piano CM-000 - 101, 2, 3 - Theory CM-001 - 101, 2, 3 - Music History and Literature LU - 101, 2, 3 - (Arts Faculty Electives) English CM-002 - 211 - Introduction to Conducting LU (Arts Faculty Electives) - Academic CM-003 - Ensemble - 3 1 3 1 3 1 4 4 4 2 2 2 3 1 or 3 1 3 1 or 3 1 1 3 1 17-18 17-18 17-18 4 1 4 4 1 4 4 1 4 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 Sophomore Year - Credits per Quarter: ( CM 201, 2, 3 - Applied Music (Major) CM-010 - 261, 2, 3 - Functional Piano CM-000 - 201, 2, 3 - Theory CM-001 - 301, 2, 3 - Music History and Literature LU (Arts Faculty Electives) - Literature or Language CM Music Electives CM-003 - Ensemble 1 IT IT IT 4 6 1 4 2 2 3 6 1 4 2 2 3 6 1 Is Is Is 4 2 2 6 4 2 4 2 2 6 1 Junior Year - Credits per Quarter: CM CM-000 CM CM LU (Arts CM-003 - 301, 2, 3 - Applied Music (Major) 301, 2, 3 - Analysis of Music Instrumental Ensembles Mlsic Electives Faculty Electives) - Academic Ensemble 2 2 3 Senior Year - Credits per Quarter: CM CM-000 CM LU (Arts CM-003 - ( 401, 2, 3 - *Applied Music (Major) 307, 8, 9 - Orchestration Instrumental Ensembles Faculty Electives) - Academic Ensembles *A Senior Recital is required. 1 IT 2 6 1 IT IT �- 26 Bachelor of Music (Education) - Major in Theory Autumn Winter Spring Freshman Year - Credits per Quarter: 4 4 4 CM-010 - 101, 2, 3 - Piano CM 121, 2, 3 - Secondary Applied (1) (1) (1) Music (Optional) 4 4 4 CM-000 - 101, 2, 3 - Theory CM-001 - 101, 2, 3 - Music History and 2 2 2 Literature LU (Arts Faculty Electives) - English 3 3 3 3 3 3 LU (Arts Faculty Electives) - Foreign Language 1 CM-003 - Ensemble 1 1 1 or 1 CM-002 - 211 - Introduction to Conducting 1 or 17-19 17-19 17-19 Sophomore Year - Credits per Quarter: ( CM-001 - 211, 2, 3 - *Piano Concentration 2 CM 221, 2, 3 - Secondary Applied Music (1) (Optional) 4 CM-000 - 201, 2, 3 - Theory CM-001 - 301, 2, 3 - Music History and 2 Literature LU (Arts Faculty Electives) - Foreign Language 3 3 LU (Arts Faculty Electives) -**Academic 1 CM-003 - Ensemble 15-16 2 2 (1) 4 (1) 4 2 2 3 3 3 3 1 15-16 1 15-16 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 Junior Year - Credits per Quarter: CM-010 - 311, 2, 3 - Piano Concentration CM-000 - 301, 2, 3 - Analysis of Music CM-000 - 504, 5, 6 - Eighteenth Century Counterpoint CM-000 - 307, 8, 9 Orchestration LU (Arts Faculty Electives) - Foreign Language LU (Arts Faculty Electives) - Academic CM-001 Music Literature Elective IT IT IT 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 Senior Year - Credits per Quarter: ( CM-010 - 411, 2, 3 - Piano Concentration CM-000 - 501, 2, 3 - Sixteenth-Century Counterpoint CM-000 - 511, 2, 3 - Score Reading CM-000 - 411, 12, 13 - Composition for Non-Majors CM-002 - 501, 2, 3 - Instrumental Conducting 2 2 2 3 3 3 �- 27 Bachelor of Music (Education) - Major in Theory (Continued) Autumn Winter Spring 3 3 3 3 3 Senior Year - Credits per Quarter: (Cont.) LU (Arts Faculty Electives) - Foreign Language or Academic CM-001 - Music Literature Elective * ( ( IT IT 3 IT By graduation the student must achieve the equivalent of Junior standing as a Piano Major. ** Recommended areas of study: Art, History, Mathematics, Philosophy, Psychology, Literature, Comparative Literature, History. *** A Junior Comprehensive Examination is required; a senior analytical project and oral examination are required in the terminal year. �- 28 Degrees in Music Education (Not Available for First Year): General Resulations: 1. Music Education Majors are expected to display those personal characteristics and habits typical of the dedicated teacher. The Music Education Faculty will not recommend for graduation the student who demonstrates a lack of readiness or willingness to assume the responsibilities of a teacher. 2. Ensemble experience is required for 11 out of the 12 Quarters of a normal music education curriculum. At least three Quarters must be in a choral ensemble. 3. During the freshman and sophomore years, all Music Eduction Majors take a common curriculum. ( Prior to the beginning of the junior year, each · Music Education Major will select an area of specialization, and will take specific courses relating to that specialization during the junior and senior years. areas of specialization are: The three vocal music, instrumental music and general music. 4. Near the end of the freshman year, the student who wishes to major in Music Education will: 5. a) Complete an Application Form. b) Submit a recommendation from his Applied instructor. c) Submit a recommendation from a high school music director. Near the end of the sophomore year, the student will be evaluated by the Music Education Faculty, in order to guide him in his career choice. ( 6. The student's Applied Music study is termed a "concentration". The Faculty expects that the student will perform with fluency, �- 29 - security and artistic insight. A student concentrating in Applied nrusic receives one hour of private instruction weekly. 7. At the end of his Functional Piano study, the Music Education Major must pass the Functional Piano Examination (Out lined on Page 18). This examination nrust be attempted by the end of his sophomore year. Double Majors may choose which of the two secondary piano examinations to attempt at this time, but they must have attempted both by the end of the third year. 8. A student who is approved by the Faculty of the College Conservatory of Music for the Major in Performance may complete the requirements in both the areas of Music Education and Applied Music. ( This programme requires five years and is a composite of both programmes of study. 9. Music Education Majors are required to participate in the opening of school at one of the co-operating Thunder Bay elementary or secondary schools. In this September experience, the student is given an invaluable opportunity for observation and participation in a typical public school situation. Unless otherwise approved by the Music Education Faculty, the student will participate at the beginning of his senior year. 10. Student teaching, under the guidance of a co-operating teacher in the climax of these programmes. To be eligible for a student teaching assignment, the student nrust meet the following requirements: ( a) He must have removed all unsatisfactory grades from his record (I, U, F, N. , etc.). b) He must be in good standing, free from academic disciplinary �- 30 - or nusical probation. c) He must achieve and maintain the following quality point averages: i) ii) iii) d) 2.5 in all music and music education courses, 2.0 in academic courses, 2.0 composite average. The student must have passed all categories of the Functional Piano Examinations. Bachelor of Music - Double Major (Music Education and Performance) The course to be offered on the second year of successful operation of Conservatory of Music, including Bachelor of Arts (Music Education and Performance). ( Freshman Year: During the freshman year, the student will follow the core curriculum of his Applied Music area. Sophomore and Junior Years: The student should plan carefully to ensure that certain basic courses in each curriculum pattern are taken during the sophomore and junior years. The student is expected to consult with the Heaa of the Music Education Division and with the Chairman of his Applied Department, to avoid late-schedule conflicts in his course offerings. Senior Year: Most students complete the performance programme of studies and ( schedule their senior recital in this fourth year of work. Fifth Year: The remaining programme requirements are scheduled. Student �- 31 - teaching is blocked out for an entire Quarter, and the Double Major student is a candidate for the baccalaureate. GRADUATE PROGRAMMES IN MUSIC All pertinent information and requirements if Programme approved and in successful operation for three years. ( ( �- 32 - SECTION IV ( ( FINANCIAL BREAKDOWN �- 33 - FEES Application Fee (non-refundable) Registration Fee (once) Placement Examination Fee (once) General Fee (Quarterly) Concert Fee (Quarterly) Minimum Tuition Fee (Quarterly) - part-time - full time Private Instruction (Quarterly) - part-time(½ hour per week/credit) - full time (1 hour per week/credit) $ TOTALS: $ 665.00 $1,075.00 First Year - part-time - full time Placement Tests and Audition for Applied Music Majors ( ( 15.00 30.00 20.00 25.00 5.00 120.00 200.00 50.00 100.00 $ Out-of-Province students and alien - surcharge of 10% Out-of-Town students (Province of Ontario) - 2-5% additional 20.00 each �FINANCIAL uREAKDOWN PROPOSED PERFORMANCE DEGREE IN MUSIC - LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY CONSERVATORY OF MUSIC PAGE 34 PROJECTED ENROLMENT - TO READ 60% FULL TIME; 40% PART TIME TOTALS INCOME: TOTALS 1973-74 100 1974-75 llO 90 80 1975-76 90 90 _80 1976-77 120 80 80 65 100 200 260 345 1977-78 120 90 70 70 50 400 238,500.00 321,675.00 374,650.00 $1,075.00 FULL TIME; $665.00 PART TIME 91,100.00 184,150.00 EXPENDITURES AND STAFF: 1973-74 2 Full-Time Professors (Theory - History Literature) @ $8,000.00 ea. $16,000.00 13 Part-Time Professors @ $2,500.00 ea. 32,500.00 1 Music Director - Professor Part-Full Time@ $5,000.00 5,000.00 1 Business Manager Part/Full Time@ 5,000.00 5,000.00 2 Secretaries - Full-Time 10,000.00 @ $5,000.00 $68,500.00 $ 4,500.00 3 Grand Pianos 5 Upright Pianos 7,500.00 1,500.00 1 Harpsichord Instrument Fund 3,000.00 2,000.00 Stereo &Tapes 300.00 5 Cassettes Library Assets 3,800.00 2nd Year - 3rd Year As before X 2 As before 1 X 1,500.00 = 4 X 1,500.00 = 1 X 1,500.00 = Inst. X 3,000 = Stereo &Tapes= Cass. X 300.00= Lib. X 3,800 = 6,000.00 6,000.00 1,500.00 3,000.00 2,000.00 300.00 3,800.00 4th Year As before, i.e. 3rd Year 5th Year If enrolment justifies, 3 X t hE requirements of tt first year. 6,uuu.oo 6,0uu.oo 6,000.00 1,500.00 3,000.00 2,000.00 3,000.00 2,000.00 1,000.00 3,800.00 3,800.00 3,800.00 1,500.00 TOTALS $22,600.00 $22,600.00 $16,300.00 $14,800.00 $12,300.00 TOTALS $91,100.00 $91,000.00 $153,300.00 $151,800.00 $217,800.00 --- �- 35 - SECTION V ( ( COURSES OF INSTRUCTION �- 36 COURSE NUMBERING All courses are assigned a six (6) digit code number. The first three (3) digits designate the general area of study responsible for the course, i.e. instrument or subject. The last three (3) numbers represent the specific course designation, i.e. theory, instrument, etc. All courses given in the Conservatory will carry the prefix CM as identification of the Conservatory. The approximate level of the course is indicated by the first of the last three (3) digits: 101 - freshman courses 201 - sophomore courses 301 - junior courses 401 - senior courses 500 and 600 courses carry either a graduate or undergraduate credit. The first group of digits indicates the area of study as follows: ( 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 - Theory History and Literature Technique Ensembles Sacred Music (N/A) Music Education (N/A) Opera and Music Theatre (N/A) Dance (N/A) Harpsichord Piano Voice (N/A) Organ (N/A) Violin Viola Violoncello 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 - Double Bass Harp (N/A) Flute Oboe Clarinet Bassoon Saxophone (N/A) French Horn Trumpet Trombone Tuba (N/A) Percussion (N/A) Lute (N/A) Guitar (N/A) Recorder (N/A) APPLIED MUSIC MAJORS The following repertoire lists indicate the approximate level of difficulty of material for each of the first four years as a Major in Applied Music. These are not intended to be restrictive or exhaustive listings, but rather a sampling of material for study. All applied music majors should consult the minimum entrance �- 37 requirements for his/her instrument. audition programmes. This will help in selecting their It must be remembered that these are minimum programme requirements and should be surpassed if possible. Applied music study carries a variable number of Quarter hours. Most major study is for four (4) credit hours, graduate or undergraduate. Undeclared freshmen majors (except pianists) carry three (3) credit hours per Quarter; Concentration students carry two (2) credit hours per Quarter; Secondary and Elective studies carry a one (1) credit hour per Quarter. The distinction in number of credits earned is based on the number of lessons, extent of repertoire, and amount of preparation on the part of the student. ( The level of a student's enrolment must be determined by the time he/she registers for the course, and cannot be changed without the permission of the Applied Department involved. All credits earned on Applied Music represent twelve (12) half-hour lessons. In any period of enrolment, one (1) credit hour automatically represents twelve (12) half-hour lessons; two (2), three (3), or four (4) credit hours represent eighteen - twenty-four (18-24) half-hour lessons, and no student shall be permitted to enrol for a number of lessons differing from the above in any given Quarter. Applied Music Course numbers carry further significance; each of the last three digits has a specific meaning. Digit 1 indicates the student's class standing (1 - freshman; 2 - sophomore; 3 - junior; 4 - senior; 5 - fifth year student in the Double Major; 8 - Master's; 9 - Doctoral). The second digit indicates the function of the course in the student's curriculum (0 - Major; 1 - Concentration; 2 - Secondary; 3 - Elective; �- 38 - 4 - B.F.A. Concentration; 6 - class instructor). The third digit indicates the enrolment period (1 - Autumn; 2 - Winter; 3 - Spring; 4 - Summer). DEFINITION OF TERMS Major - refers to students, undergraduates or graduates, who are approved by the Faculty to receive their Degree in Performance. Concentration - refers to the primary applied music study of students in Music Education, Conducting, Accompanying, Theory, or who are following the B. A. Programme (The B. A. Programme will not be offered first year). Secondary - refers to Applied Music study as a tool to achieve a certain degree of professional proficiency. ( All Music Majors will study Secondary or Functional Piano (if Piano is not their major instrument), unless another instrument is approved. Secondary Piano Requirements are found earlier in this Programme. Elective - refers to Applied Music Study outside the student's required programme of courses. Elective students must be degree candidates. Functional Piano - refers to group or laboratory keyboard classes. �- 39 PIANO MINIMUM ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS TO THE BACHELOR OF MUSIC (PERFORMANCE) PROGRAMME 1. Three contrasting compositions which will demonstrate pianistic and general musicianship. These compositions should be performed from memory. 2. Scales and arpeggios with security and control. 3. A brief evaluation of aural perception; a short sight-reading test. 4. CM-010: 101, 102, 103 - Freshman Major Study. Technical requirements: All major and minor scales - four octaves in parallel motion. Arpeggios, triads, dominant and diminished seventh chords four octaves. Works from the Baroque period, Classic and Romantic periods and some 20th Century. CM-010: ( 201, 202, 203 - Sophomore Major Study. A basic technique examination must be passed by the end of this year, including sight-reading, scales in thirds, sixths, and tenths in para.llel and contrary motion, triad and seventh-chord arpeggios and all inversions. J. S. Bach - Three-Part Inventions and Preludes and Fugues from the W.T.C. Classical Sonatas of the difficulty of Beethoven Sonata in C Major, Op. 2, No. 3. 19th Century compositions comparable in difficulty to Schumann-Papillons. CM-010: 301, 302, 303 - Junior Major Study. Technical requirements: continuation of above, with improved technical facility. J. S. Bach - Preludes and Fugues from W.T.C. and the Partitas. F. Chopin - Etudes. L. Beethoven - Sonata Op. 26. J. Brahms - Intermezzi Op. 118. S. Prokoffiev - Sonata No. 3, or works of comparable difficulty. CM-010: ( 401, 402, 403 - Senior Major Study. Advanced technical studies, preparation of Senior recital. Works of comparable difficulty to: J. S. Bach - Italian Concerto. W. Mozart - Sonata in A minor, K. 310. C. Debussy - Preludes. A. Copland - Passacaglia. �- 40 PIANO cont'd. The student must perform a representative Baroque or Classical composition at his/her final Faculty Examination. He will also prepare two (2) pieces in fifteen (15) days with no help from his teacher. A full recital (65 - 75 minutes) is required. All students must appear in partial recital throughout their four years. CM-010: 501, 502, 503 - Graduate Major Study. Preparation of two (2) full recital programmes, one (1) to be performed in public. Selection of compositions should reflect mature musicality, knowledge of different styles and advanced keyboard facility. J. S. Bach - Preludes and Fugues W.T.C. Book II and the Chromatic Fantasy and Fugue. Compositions comparable in difficulty to Beethoven late Sonatas and Schumann Etudes Symphoniques. A composition written after 1920. ( ( �- 41 HARPSICHORD MINIMUM ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS TO THE BACHELOR OF Ml.SIC (PERFORMANCE) PROGRAMME 1. As previous harpsichord experience is not required, the prospective student may choose harpsichord or piano to demonstrate competent finger dexterity and basic musicianship in performing the following: (a) One of the Two-Part Inventions by J. S. Bach. (b) A sonata movement by Clementi, or a work of comparable difficulty. CM-009: 101, 102, 103 - Freshman Major Study. Technical requirements: facility in major-minor scales, arpeggios, etc. and special exercises designed and guided by the teacher. Works by J. S. Bach - Two and Three-Part Inventions, W.T.C. Book I, French Suites, etc., F. Couperin and D. Scarlatti. CM-009: 201, 202, 203 - Sophomore Major Study. Continuation of the above. Also works by L. Couperin, Froberger, Handel, Rameau, etc. ( CM-009: 301, 302, 303 - Junior Major Study. Further expansion of the repertoire mentioned above plus English virginal music. Works by Chambonnieres, D'Anglebert, Fischer, Frescobaldi, . Purcell and modern composers. J. S. Bach flute sonatas, violin sonatas, gamba sonatas, concerti, etc. CM-009: 401, 402, 403 - Senior Major Study. Major works of J. S. Bach (Partitas, English Suites), F. Couperin, D. Scarlatti, etc. Preparation of a Senior recital. For the final examination, students must prepare a piece in fifteen (15) days without the heip from their teachers. Concentration students do not require a full recital but must also work by themselves and prepare a piece on fifteen (15) day's notice, without aid from their teacher. CM-009: ( 501, 502, 503 - Graduate Major Study. Preparation of two (2) recital programmes, one (1) to be performed in public. In perfol'll)ance, the student must demonstrate not only highly poli~hed technical skill but also musical maturity and insight. In the course of study, he is also expected to become acquainted with most of the keyboard works written before 1770. �- 42 VIOLIN MINIMUM ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS TO THE BACHELOR OF MUSIC (PERFORMANCE) PROGRAMME (a) Major and minor scales and arpeggios. (b) A baroque, Classical, or Romantic sonata, concerto, or solo piece. CM-013: 101, 102, 103 - Freshman Major Study. Technical facility in scales, arpeggios, and violin studies. Sonatas and concerti of the Baroque, Classical and Romantic repertoire. CM-013: 201, 202, 203 - Sophomore Major Study. Violin studies. Baroque, Classical and Romantic concerti and sonatas. Other compositions for the instrument including some of the Caprices by Paganini and works of similar difficulty. CM-013: ( 301, 302, 303 - Junior Major Study. Violin studies and caprices. Concerti and sonatas from the Baroque, Classical, Romantic and Modern periods. Contemporary pieces and literature from the Chamber music repertoire. CM-013: 401, 402, 403 - Senior Major Study. Advanced technical studies. Preparation of Senior recital, including major compositions from all periods and major styles. One (1) piece to be worked on fifteen (15) day notice without the help from the instructor. CM-013: 501, 502, 503 - Graduate Major Study. Preparation of two (2) recitals. One (1) to be performed in public. Graduate repertoire to include the major violin literature, all major styles and some Chamber music. ( �- 43 - VIOLA MINIMUM ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS TO THE BACHELOR OF MUSIC (PERFORMANCE) PROGRAMME (a) Major and minor scales and arpeggios. (b) A Baroque, Classical, or Romantic sonata, concerto or solo piece. CM-014: 101, 102, 103 - Freshman Major Study. Technical facility in scales and arpeggios. Viola studies, sonatas, and concerti of the Baroque, Classical and Romantic repertoire. CM-014: 201, 202, 203 - Sophomore Major Study. Viola studies and caprices, Baroque, Classical and Romantic sonatas, concerti and other compositions original for the instrument. CM-014: 301, 302, 303 - Junior Major Study. Continuation of the above. Unaccompanied works for the instrument. Contemporary works and works from Chamber nrusic literature. ( CM-014: 401, 402, 403 - Senior Major Study. Advanced technical studies. Preparation of Senior recital, including works of all major styles. One (1) piece must be learned without the help from the instructor on a fifteen (15) day notice. CM-014: 501, 502, 503 - Graduate Major Study. Preparation of two (2) recitals, one (1) to be performed in public. Graduate repertoire includes the major viola literature in major styles, and some Chamber music also. ( �- 44 VIOLONCELLO MINIMUM ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS TO THE BACHELOR OF MUSIC (PERFORMANCE) PROGRAMME (a) Major and minor scales and arpeggios. (b) A Baroque, Classical, or Romantic sonata, concerto or solo piece. CM-015: 101, 102, 103 - Freshman Majo! Study. Technical facilities in scales, arpeggios and violoncello studies. Sonatas, concerti, and works from the Baroque, Classical and Romantic periods. CM-015: 201, 202, 203 - Sophomore Major Study. Violoncello studies and solo works. Baroque, Classical and Romantic concerti and sonatas. Bach solo works, and other pieces for the instrument. CM-015: ( 301, 302, 303 - Junior Major Study. Violoncello studies, Baroque, Classical and Romantic sonatas, concerti and solo pieces. Contemporary works and Chamber music literature. CM-015: 401, 402, 403 - Senior Major Study. Advanced technical studies. Preparation of Senior recital, including compositions of all major styles, one (1) piece to be prepared without the aid of the instructor on a fifteen (15) day notice. CM-015: 501, 502, 503 - Graduate Major Study. Preparation of two (2) recital programmes, one (1) to be performed in public. Graduate repertoire includes the major violoncello literature in all major styles and some Chamber music. ( �- 45 DOUBLE BASS MINIMUM ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS TO TI-IE BACHELOR OF MUSIC (PERFORMANCE) PROGRAMME (a) Major and minor scales and arpeggios. (b) Technical studies, sonata or solo pieces for the instrument. CM-016: 101, 102, 103 - Freshman Major Study. Major and minor scales and arpeggios. Technical studies for the instrument and orchestral repertoire. CM-016: 201, 202, 203 - Sophomore Major Study. Further advanced studies for the instrument, compositions covering the different styles and orchestral repertoire. CM-016: 301, 302, 303 - Junior Major Study. Further advanced studies and solo works. Major works from the different styles and orchestral repertoire. ( CM-016: 401, 402, 403 - Senior Major Study. Advanced nrusic studies written for the instrument. Orchestra repertoire and preparation of the Senior recital. one (1) piece nrust be worked without the aid of the instructor, on a fifteen (15) day notice. The recital must include contrasting compositions from the major styles. CM-016: 501, 502, 503 - Graduate Major Study. Preparation of two (2) recitals, one (1) to be performed in public. Graduate repertoire includes the major double bass literature in all major styles and some Chamber music. ( �- 46 - FLUTE MINIMUM ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS TO THE BACHELOR OF MUSIC (PERFORMANCE) PROGRAMME (a) No specific requirements. appreciated. (b) Admission to be decided upon audition/interview before the woodwind department. CM-018: Some previous experience greatly 101, 102, 103 - Freshman Major Study. Technical requirements: studies for the development of tone quality; major and minor scales. Studies of the difficulty of Cavally: Melodious and progressive studies. Book I and II, Anderson, Garibaldi, Kochler-Terschak, Kumner, etc. Solo pieces, concert pieces, and wo~ks from the major styles. CM-018: 201, 202, 203 - Sophomore Major Study. Technical requirements: continuation of tone studies, application and study of vibrato, major and minor scales. Handel sonatas, concerti by Mozart, Bach Suite in B minor, etc .• works of comparable difficulty. ( CM-018: 301, 302, 303 - Junior Major Study. Technical requirements: further tone and vibrato studies, more difficult scales and arpeggios, increased facility and velocity studies and major works from the Baroque, Classical and Romantic periods, solo pieces and orchestra repertoire of the difficulty of the Dvorak Symphonies. CM-018: 401, 402, 403 - Senior Major Study. Technical requirements: advanced technical studies; preparation of Senior recital. Orchestral studies and sight-reading exercies. Virtuoso etudes, and pieces of the difficulty of Ibert-concerto for flute, Piston-sonata etc. CM-018: ( 501, 502, 503 - Graduate Major Study. Preparation of two (2) recitals, one (1) to be performed in public. One (1) work to be prepared without the help of the instructor, fifteen (15) day notice, all by memory. Orchestral studies, Chamber music, and solo technique adapted to the individual student. �- 47 OBOE MINIMUM ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS TO THE BACHELOR OF MUSIC (PERFORMANCE) PROGRAMME (a) No specific requirements. (b) Admission to be decided upon audition/interview before the woodwind department. CM-019: Some previous experience greatly appreciated. 101, 102, 103 - Freshman Major Study. Technical requirements: major and minor scales and arpeggios. Reed making. Solo, studies works; comparable in difficulty to Barret-Oboe method; Andraud-Practical and progressive Oboe method; Barlow-The Winter's Past; Bakaleinikoff-Pastorale, etc. CM-019: 201, 202, 203 - Sophomore Major Study. Continuation of technical studies and reed making. Solos comparable in difficulty to Labate-Rondinella, etc. ( CM-019: 301, 302, 303 - Junior Major Study. Continuation of the technical studies, orchestra repertoire, sight reading. Solos of comparable difficulty to Handel-Krenek Andante and Allegro, Ravel-Piece en forme de Habanera, etc. Concerti and sonatas selected according to the student's ability. CM-019: 401, 402, 403 - Senior Major Study. Advanced technical studies; concerti by Marcello, Haydn, Mozart, or other of comparable difficulty. Senior recital preparation. Study of the English horn and orchestral repertoire. CM-019: 501, 502, 503 - Graduate Major Study. Preparation of two (2) recitals, one (1) to be performed in public. One (1) piece to be prepared by the student without the help from the instructor, fifteen (15) days prior to the concert. Repertoire of advanced difficulty, adapted to the needs of the individual students. Orchestral studies, Chamber music, sight reading. ( �- 48 - CLARINET MINIMUM ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS TO THE BACHELOR OF MUSIC (PERFORMANCE) PROGRAMME (a) No specific requirements needed but previous experience greatly appreciated. (b) Admission will be decided upon audition/interview with the woodwind department. CM-020: 101, 102, 103 - Freshman Major Study. Technical requirements: major and minor scales and arpeggios, development of embouchure, articulation, hand and finger positioning, breath support, reed preparation, tone studies. Studies of similar difficulty to: Rose, Lazarus, Rode, etc., repertoire selected from works by Von Weber, Karl Stamitz, etc. CM-020: 201, 202, 203 - Sophomore Major Study. Technical requirements: continued emphasis on tone production, transposition, intonation, refinement of articulation. Studies in the difficulty range of: Capelle, Klose, Uhl, etc .. Introduction to orchestral repertoire, major works by Weber, Schumann, Spohr, etc. ( CM-020: 301, 302, 303 - Junior Major Study. Technical requirements: continued development of technique through studies of the difficulty of Jean-Jean, Lazarus, etc., selected repertoire from the works by Mozart, Hindemith, Beethoven, and some Chamber Music literature. CM-020: 401, 402, 403 - Senior Major Study. Advanced technical materials. Orchestral repertoire, Chamber music, Concerti by Mozart, Spohr. Sonatas by Mozart, Brahms, etc. Preparation of senior recital. One (1) work must be prepared with fifteen (15) day notice. CM-020: ( 501, 502, 503 - Graduate Major Study. Preparation of two (2) recital programmes, one (1) to be performed in public. Graduate repertoire includes such works as Stravinsky-L'histoire du soldat; Bartok-Contrasts, etc., and works of advanced difficulty approved by the instructor to the facility of the students. �- 49 BASSOON MINIMUM ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS TO TilE BACHELOR OF MUSIC (PERFORMANCE) PROGRAMME (a) No specific requirements needed but previous experience greatly appreciated. (b) Admission will be decided upon audition/interview with the woodwind department. CM-022: 101, 102, 103 - Freshman Major Study. Technical requirements; tongue placement, guttural and dental air release, reed making, function of the air column, lip technique, use of the diaphragm, special exercises and studies incorporating these basic techniques. Studies of the difficulty of: Wiessenborn-studies Op. 8, solos of the difficulty of the Galliard sonatas. CM-022: 201, 202, 203 - Sophomore Major Study. Continuation of technical requirements, studies in the difficulty range of Jancourt-26 melodious studies. Solo works of the difficulty of Telleman sonata in F minor. ( CM-022: 301, 302, 303 - Junior Major Study. Technical requirements: special studies in the development of vibrato, continuation of the previous studies, in the difficulty range of Piard-90 Etudes, Vol. III. Introduction to the orchestral repertoire. Concerti by Vivaldi, Hindemith sonata, etc. CM-022: 401, 402, 403 - Senior Major Study. Technical studies by Milde and Stadio. Complete coverage of the important orchestral repertoire of advanced difficulty, materials for teaching the Bassoon, etc. Works by Sait-Saens, Villa-Lobos, Hindemith, etc. Concerti by Weber, etc. Preparation of Senior recital. CM-022: ( 501, 502, 503 - Graduate Major Study. Preparation of two (2) recitals, one (1) to be performed in public. One (1) work to be prepared by the student without the aid of the instructor and with fifteen (15) days notice. Orchestral studies, repertoire of further technical difficulty requiring maturity of interpretation. �- so FRENCH HORN MINIMUM ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS TO THE BACHELOR OF MUSIC (PERFORMANCE) PROGRAMME (a) No specific requirements needed, although previous experience is greatly appreciated. (b) Admission will be decided upon audition/interview with the brass department. CM-023: 101, 102, 103 - Freshman Major Study. Technical requirements: all the transpositions commonly Studies of the difficulty of etc. Solo works of the difficulty CM-023: major and minor scales, study of used for the instrument. Maxime-Alphonse, Pattag-Andraud, of Mozart concerto No. 2. 201, 202, 213 - Sophomore Major Study. Technical requirements: continuation of above, transposition, introduction to the orchestral repertoire. Studies in the difficulty class as Maxime-Alphonse Book III and IV, Pattag-Andraud Books I and II, etc. Solo works of the difficulty of Mozart concerti I and III, etc. ( CM-023: 301, 302, 303 - Junior Major Study. Sight-reading exercies. Continuation of technical development. Orchestral repertoire. Solo work in the range of Schumann-Adagio and Allegro, Strauss Concerto No. I, etc., some Chamber music. Sight-reading. CM-023: •01. 402, 403 - Senior Major Study. Continuation or orchestral studies, Reynolds or similar methods; Mozart Concerto No. 4, solos by Tomasi, Beversdorf, etc. Preparation of Senior recital. Sight-reading exercises. CM-023: ( 501, 502, 503 - Graduate Major Study. Preparation of two (2) recitals, one (1) to be performed in public, One (1) work must be prepared without the aid from the instructor and with fifteen (15) day notice. Repertoire of advanced technical difficulty adapted to the individual student. Orchestral and Chamber music practice. �- 51 TRUMPET MINIMUM ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS TO THE BACHELOR OF MUSIC (PERFORMANCE) PROGRAMME (a) No specific requirements needed although previous experience is greatly appreciated. (b) Admission will be decided upon audition/interview with the brass department. CM-024: 101, 102, 103 - Freshman Major Study. Technical material: major and minor scales and arpeggios, usual transpositions for the instrument; studies in the difficulty range of Clarke, Hering, Schlossber, etc.; orchestral passages, solos by Balay, Barat, Goeyens, etc. Sight-reading. CM-024: 201, 202, 203 - Sophomore Major Study. Technical material: continuation of above, studies in the difficulty of Brandt, Laurent, etc. Transposition studies by Williams, Bordogni, etc. Orchestral repertoire. Solo work by Haydn, etc. ( CM-024: 301, 302, 303 - Junior Major Study. Technical material: advanced methods by Tomasi, Bitsch, etc. Solo material by Casterade, Wal-Berg, Teleman, etc. in that difficulty range. Orchestral repertoire, some Chamber music. CM-024: 401, 402, 403 - Senior Major Study. Technical materials: Chavonne, Bozza, etc., solo works by Bohrnstedt, Honegger, etc. Preparation of Senior recital, continuation or orchestral repertoire, some Chamber music. CM-024: 501, 502, 503 - Graduate Major Study. Preparation of two (2) recitals, one (1) to be performed in public, one (1) work to be prepared by student without the aid of instructor on fifteen (15) day notice. Difficult orchestra repertoire, solo works and Cllamber music, Brass ensemble. �- 52 TROMBONE MINIMUM ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS TO THE BACHELOR OF MUSIC (PERFORMANCE) PROGRAMME (a) No specific requirements needed but previous experience is greatly appreciated. (b) Admission will be decided upon audition/interview with the brass department. CM-025: 101, 102, 103 - Freshman Major Study. Technical requirements: development of embouchure, breathing, tonguing, clef reading, transposition usual for the instrument. Studies in the difficulty range of Arban, Cornette, etc., major and minor scales and arpeggios. Solo material by Barat, Nux, Busser, etc. CM-025: 201, 202, 203 - Sophomore Major Study. Technical requirements: continuation of the above. Solos by Pfeiffer, Saint-Saens, etc. Galliard-six sonatas; orchestra repertoire, brass ensemble. ( CM-025: 301, 302, 303 - Junior Major Study. Technical requirements: continuation of above material, and advanced studies in the difficulty range as La Fosse Vol. C-E, Kopprasch - selected studies, etc. Solos in the difficulty range of Guilmont, Gaubert, Bozza, etc., orchestral repertoire, brass ensemble practice. Concerti by Hindemith, La Fosse, Handel, Marcello, etc. CM-025: 401, 402, 403 - Senior Major Study. Technical requirements: La Fosse advanced method Vol. II, Blaxevitch-Sequences, etc. Solos by Berghmans, Defay, Salzedo, Tomasi, etc., orchestra repertoire, brass ensemble. Sonatas by Creston, Takacs, Martin, etc. Preparation of Senior recital. CM-025: ( 501, 502, 503 - Graduate Major Study. Preparation of two (2) recitals, one (1) to be performed in public. One (1) work to be prepared by the student without the aid of the instructor on a fifteen (15) day notice. Orchestra repertoire and advanced concerti, sonatas, and brass Chamber Music. Technical repertoire of a high difficulty suited to the ·individual student. �- 53 COURSE DESCRIPTION THEORY - COMPOSITION (Composition not available first year) The fundamental course in basic IlD.lsicianship, integrating the various musical skills with the development of the student's musical perception and understanding - four credits each Quarter (Undergraduate): CM-001: 101, 102, 103 - Theory 101 - Developing the understanding of the basic principles of melodic and thythmic organization, with application to sight singing and ear training techniques. 102 - A continuation of the basic approach of 101, with emphasis upon two and three voice textures. ( Consonance and dissonance, introduction to the smaller nrusical forms, beginning study of vertical sonorities. 103 - A continuation, with the emphasis shifting to homophonic textures, principles of harmonic organization, the diatonic vocabulary, harmonic thythm, and continuation of the smaller forms of music. CM-001: 201, 202, 203 - Theory A continuation of the above course - four credits each Quarter. 201 - Musical styles of the Baroque and Classical periods, correlated with sight singing, written and analytical projects. 202 - Musical style of the Romantic period; practical, written and analytical projects, exploring the harmonic and melodic vocabulary of this period. 203 - Musical style of the 20th Century. ( �- 54 CM-001: 204, 205, 206 - Honours Theory 204 - Tonality, notation, principles of melodic elaboration. Theoritical concepts of the basic principles of melodic and rhythmic organization Baroque and Classical periods. 205 - Continuation of the above. Homophonic textures. harmonic rhythm, non-chord tones. 206 - Music style of Romantic period. Diatonic vocabulary, Music styles of Romantic periods. Written and analytic works on the harmonic and melodic vocabulary of the period. Music style of the 20th Century. CM-001: 301, 302, 303 - Analysis of Music Harmonic and melodic, and formal aspects of the styles of major composers. Individual projects in style imitation - two credits each Quarter. 301 - Josquin des Pres-Scarlatti 302 Haydn - Bruchner 303 - Debussy - present CM-001: 501, 502, 503 - Sixteenth Century Counterpoint Two credits per Quarter. 501 - Plainsong, modes, historical prospective, two-part model counterpoint. 502 - Continuation of imitative counterpoint in three voices. Study of text setting analysis of representative works. 503 - Three and four voice motets, free imitation, five and six part writing polychoral writing and comparative analysis of representative works. �- 55 CM-001: 504, SOS, 506 - Eighteenth Century Counterpoint Two credits per Quarter. 504 - Two and three voice invention style, inventible counterpoint, analysis of invention type. 505 - Analysis of fugue structures, the fughetta; two, three, and four voice fugues. Choral preludes. 506 - The canon, double and triple fugues; art of the fugue. CM-001: 514, 515, 516 - Advanced Keyboard Harmony and Through Bass Playing Two credits per Quarter. CM-001: ( 551, 552, 553 - Seminars in Electronic Music Historical prospective, compositional and technical analysis, studio procedures and rel_ated matters. CM-001: 601, 602 - Pedagogy of Theory Content, literature, and methodology for the teaching of theory. Analysis of representative texts. Observation of undergraduate theory instruction. CM-001: 604, 605, 606 - Musical Acoustics 604 - Science in musical sound. Quantitative definitions and measurements concerning pitch, intensity - timbre, intervals, tuning. 605 - The sound of music; tone production and description for various instruments and voice. ( 606 - Environment and technology effects: acoustics of music rooms; sound, i.e. cording and retrieval; electronic techniques and resources. �- 56 CM-001: 641, 642, 643 - Psychology of Music CM-001 - 671 - The Sociology of Music The art of nrusic as a social phenomenon. The role of society in the development of nrusic; the social nature of nn.isic taste and attitudes; the fole of the composer and performer in contemporary society. CM-001: 704, 705, 706 - The Analysis of Contemporary Music Techniques of analysis applicable to contemporary music; study of selected compositions and recent theoretical concepts. 704 - Theories of tonality, rhythm and form; analysis of music by Bartak, Hindemith, and others. 705 - A continuation introduction to free tonality and twelve tone theory. Analysis of music by Stravinsky, Sessions, Schoenberg, and others. ( CM-002 - 101, 102, 103 - Music History and Literature Analysis and discussion of important musical works, Baroque to contemporary periods; introduction to stylistic differences of the various musical eras, Antiquity to 1600 - 2 Undergraduate credits each Quarter. CM-002 - 201, 202, 203 - Introduction to Music. The basic elements of nusic and a historical survey of Western music. For non-music majors - three credits each Quarter. CM-002 - 207, 208, 209 - Music History and Literature Honours Accelerated programme. Admission to course by examination only. Music in Western Civilization from the Greek Period to the present. Emphasis on composer's styles in relation to the cultural background of various eras. Correlated to Honours Theory. Four credits each Quarter. �- 57 CM-002: 301, 302, 303 - Music History and Literature. Music in Western Civilization traced from its primitive sources to the present; emphasis on composer's styles in relation to the cultural backgrounds of the various eras; 1600 to the present. Two credits each Quarter. CM-003: 304, 305, 306 - Piano Repertoire Survey of lite - nature for stringed keyboard instruments; performance practices, aesthetic values, technical problems, fonnal structure. Two credits each Quarter. CM-003: 501, 502, 503 - Brass Orchestral Repertoire. Reading and study of standard orchestral repertoire. to symphonic instrumentation. ( of instructor. CM-003: Class limited Admission by audition and/or recommendation One credit each Quarter. 516, 517, 518 - Symphonic Literature. The symphony from Haydn to the present; emphasis upon fonnal structure, thematic sources; analysis of selected compositions. Two credits each Quarter. CM-002: 519, 520, 521 - Survey of Chamber Music Literature A historical survey of Chamber music with emphasis on string literature; performance practices; formal structure and aesthetic values. Two credits each Quarter. CM-002: 611, 612, 613 - Aesthetics in Music. The philosophy of art, with illustrations drawn chiefly from music; ( an historical survey of writing on aesthetics from Plato to Sartre. Two credits each Quarter. �- 58 CM-002: 644 - Music Criticism Historical study of music criticism; practical work in writing reviews and articles appropriate for publication. Two credits each Quarter. CM-002: 820 - History of Musical Instruments Development of the principal instruments from their primitive forms to the present. CM-002: Three credits each Quarter. 821, 822, 823 - Interpretation of Seventeenth and Eighteenth Century Keyboard Music Three credits each Quarter. TECHNIQUE ( CM-003: 201, 202, 203 - Piano Sight-Reading Specialized training in the techniques of fluent sight-reading at the piano, including prepared reading and transposition. playing. CM-003: Introduction to score One credit each Quarter .. 204, 205 - Brass Classes I and II Tone production, playing and teaching techniques of all brass instruments; care of instruments; study of materials; laboratory sessions. Two credits each Quarter. CM-003: 207, 208 - Woodwind Classes I and II Instruction on the basic woodwind instruments; techniques, materials, care of the instruments, basic instruments repair, curriculum planning. ( Two credits each Quarter. �- 59 CM-003: 224, 225 - String Classes I and II Beginning string class techniques on all orchestral string instruments, evaluation of methods and materials, elementary orchestral organization, micro-teaching. CM-004: Two credits each Quarter. 245 - Instrumental Ensemble, Orchestra Performance experience in orchestral playing utilizing functional performance skills developed in instrumental classes. Study of repertoire of orchestra appropriate for use with elementary, junior and senior high school orchestras. CM-004: Two credits each Quarter. 246 - Instrumental Ensemble, Band Performance experience in band utilizi_ng functional performance skills ( developed in instrumental classes. Study of repertoire of band appropriate for use with elementary, junior and senior high school bands. Two credits each Quarter. CM-004: 301, 302, 303 - Accompanying Class Practical training in the tradition, interpretation, and execution of accompaniments; vocal and instrumental style. CM-004: One credit each Quarter. 310, 311, 312 - Piano Ensemble. One credit each Quarter. CM-004: 507, 508, 509 - Contemporary Music Ensemble An ensemble/repertoire course devoted to the study and performance of representative and experimental works of the twentieth centure. ( Undergraduate credit each Quarter. One �- 60 CM-004: 511, 512, 513 - Philharmonic Orchesta A full symphony orchestra; symphony concerts, concerto programmes, opera and ballet performances, sight-reading of representative symphonic compositions from all periods. One Undergraduate credit each Quarter. CM-004: 517, 518, 519 - Baroque Music Ensemble Study and performance of selected instrumental Chamber works from the Baroque era. One Undergraduate credit each Quarter. CM-004: 521, 522, 523 - Wind Ensemble A highly select ensemble of approximately sixty (60) players. One Undergraduate credit each Quarter. CM-004: ( 524, 525, 526 - Symphonic Band A training ensemble with full symphonic band instrumentation, performing representative band compositions and serving. as a laboratory programme for the nusic education major. One undergraduate credit each Quarter - Winter, Spring,. Quarters. CM-004: 531, 532, 533 - Brass Choir A small virtuoso organization for brass and percussion players, performing music from the Renaissance to the present. One undergraduate credit each Quarter. CM-004: 561, 562, 563 - Chamber Music Ensemble Membership in one of the standard chamber organizations (string quartet, piano trio, etc.): coaching in representative repertoire by members of the LaSalle Quartet. Two undergraduate credits each Quarter. �- 61 CM-004: 574, 575, 576 - Flute Ensemble One undergraduate credit each Quarter. CM-004: 581, 582, 583 - Collegium Musicum Performance of music of historical significance upon the appropriate ancient instruments; harpsichord, organ, viola, recorders, cornetti, krummhorns, ranket, rauschfeife, and others. One undergraduate credit each Quarter. CM-004: 591, 592, 593 - Concert Orchestra A full symphony orchestra performing standard symphonic repertoire, opera perfonnances, concerto programmes. Quarter. ( ( One undergraduate credit each �- 62 - SECTION VI ( CULTURAL OPPORTUNITIES IN THUNDER BAY (_ �- 63 - CULTURAL OPPORTUNITIES IN THUNDER BAY In addition to its Artists-Faculty and Degree Programme, the Conservatory of Music has the advantages of its location. its musical life and intense interest in the Arts. Noted for By attending and participating in the activities listed below, the student can enrich immeasurably his musical education. THE THUNDER BAY SYMPHONY ORCHESTRA The Thunder Bay Symphony Orchestra, under the distinguished direction of Manuel Suarez, presents subscription concerts during the season as well as extensive music events throughout the community and Northwestern Ontario. Guest soloists and guest conductors are head in these concerts, bringing to Thunder Bay internationally-known concert artists of the highest calibre. MAY-JUNE FESTIVAL A programme developed (1974-75) to constitute one of the great musical events in the life of Thunder Bay. Faculty, T.B.S.O., resident ensembles, resident musicians and gifted students to be featured. ENSEMBLES IN RESIDENCE The following distinguished resident ensembles will perform regularly at the Conservatory of Music, at Lakehead University, on schedule season concerts for the benefit of the community as well as on tour. These concerts will provide an opportunity for students of the Concervatory of Music to hear of Chamber Music. ( �- 64 CANADIAN CHAMBER MUSIC ENSEMBLE AT THUNDER BAY Thunder Bay Baroque Trio: Thunder Bay String Ensemble Thunder Bay Quintet: Thunder Bay Brass Ensemble: Musicians-in-Residence: Manual Suarez: violin, Director, Conductor, Professor, T.B.S.O. Michael Edwards: clarinet, Director Chamber Music, Professor, T.B.S.O. Joseph Shufro: cello, Director School of Music, Professor, T.B.S.O. Peter Samuelson: french horn, Conductor, Thunder Bay Youth Symphony Gregory Schulte: piano, Pianist, Professor, T.B.S.O. Other M..lsicians-in-Residence will be announced after course is launched, for period 73-74. RECITAL ATTENDANCE The Faculty and Administration of the Conservatory of Music believe that attendance at school concerts and recitals forms an important part of the student's development, both as a performer and as a critical listener. Therefore, a planned programme of recital attendance has been developed. The fulfillment of this requirement is necessary for graduation in all undergraduate degree programmes. Music Majors are required to attend 25 recitals yearly. Students will pay a $5.00 Quarterly fee for recital tickets. ( CONCERT DRESS Since all music majors perform regularly with the Conservatory of Music Ensemble, it is necessary for them to obtain formal concert �- 65 - dress. This dress varies somewhat with the several ensembles. Hence, students are advised to plan to purchase the required apparel after arriving in Thunder Bay and when their ensemble assignement is known. LIBRARY At the present time the facilities for publications in music are handled through the Public Library, Thunder Bay, Lakehead University Library and the Faculty of Education Library. It is hoped that in the near future grants and donations will make possible an exclusive library for the private use of the Conservatory of Music, its Faculty and student body. FACILITIES AND SERVICES 1. Employment Facilities The Thunder Bay office of the Canada Manpower Centre, in co-operation with the University authorities, maintains a student placement office on the campus of Lakehead University, with two objectives: (a) to integrate the highly trained University student into suitable employment in the labour market as quickly and as efficiently as possible. (b) to refer to the employer the best qualified in accordance with his requirements. The Canada Manpower Student Placement Office is located in the University Centre Building and provides services to employers and students on a full-time basis. P. 45 - Lakehead University Calendar 72-73. �- 66 2. Accident Insurance - P. 45 - Lakehead University Calendar 72-73, 3. Health Services - P. 45 - Lakehead University Calendar 72-73 -- As applicable. 4. Bookstore - P. 46 - Lakehead University Calendar 72-73. 5. Shopping Mall - P. 46 - Lakehead University Calendar 72-73. PERSONAL PROPERTY INSURANCE All music students are prompted to carry insurance on personal property. It is recommended that students having articles of value (as all instruments normally are) in the University, should contact their Insurance Agent and see that such articles are insured. ( � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Lakehead University Collection Description An account of the resource Photographs from Lakehead University's history: people, events, and campus. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Bachelor of Music (Performance) Degree Programme Subject The topic of the resource Universities Description An account of the resource Bachelor of Music (Performance) Degree Programme, Lakehead University Conservatory of Music Proposal, by Manuel Suarez, Director and Conductor of the Thunder Bay Symphony Orchestra. The proposal includes an overview of the academic information, admission requirements, registration, and regulations with course descriptions, degrees and diplomas offered. Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Lakehead University Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1972 Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource PDF Language A language of the resource English Type The nature or genre of the resource Text Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context lu-15f Coverage The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant Canada - Ontario - Thunder Bay https://digitalcollections.lakeheadu.ca/files/original/337bc9dd943d7b26151e437370f3d775.pdf ef2347338e3d4a2d85242c28f27cd4b4 PDF Text Text TO rmr: cm-rnTTr'.1'~ Q;-l u~nv:nsrry AFi'FI\.I°l\S Prmv1~:1c'f~ OF ON'"P/\1HO SRP~1r;·.11rnn 30 , 19 63 Swnmn.ry of pror~rams and ob;jecti ves 19Ga-1975 with supportinf': docurnenta.r~r �Cff nJi:7-ITS Historical De1v clopmcnt - School of Business Administration 1 - 3 Current Proc;rn.ms of Business Sturlics 3 Objectives Pcdar,orr:,y 4- 6 Research 6 - 1 Physical Paci.lities 1 Exhibit //I Enrohr.cnt - Historical and Forcast Exhibit //II Addi tion~.l Courses anu Faculty Heq_u1.rerr1ent.s ExhiM t #III Lccturf' IIours !)Cl' Pror;~·am of Study Exhiuit /!IV Graclu.ate Dipl rnw1. in Business Administration Exhibit #V Honor[, ·na.ch~lor of Co1!1r11ercc Dc~ree F..xhi bit #VI D:i ploma in Business Ad'llini r.tra tion Exhi ui t //VI I Diplo~n. in Bucj ncss Cor'1pu.ter 8ystrn:1s �Hlstorical Dew~lonment 'J.1i:ie School of Business !i.cl'ninistration Wa:> foun:-l~d. in 19Gl➔, at which ti.me a . three y0.ar pro1;ram of td,ucly lead.in[': to a dipl01:1(➔. in }3wdm·sn Administrn.tirJn was offered to stuckmts who ha.cl successfully corrrpletcd requirements for the Ontn.rio Secondary School Gradm.tion Di}')J.om:1 ~~ra11ted upon co.-:-iplet.ion of the fourth yen-r of ~my one of the •ri vc year courr;cs ot this recoGnizecl proc;rmn. Admlsshm on an i.nclividual bn.nin was f;rnnted to students hnvj nr; graduated. with hieh stanclinr~ in the four · year Ontario Secondary School pro~ram. Basically, the Diplo,r:-t in nusi.ness Administration was pattr!rned on the Hyerson concept of business education, which 9.t that time nlncecl heavy cr:ip}w.rd s upon the quru1t:i.tntive disc:i.11lines of nccounti nr.~, r~~1thcm!l.-Lfc;;, economics and stn.tir.t.tcs. In 19G7, LaJ:eheacl Univers:t ty 's Business Di.c,lorr·i. program of studies wn.s bro~tdencd by cncorpora.tine courses in busin~ss pol j cy, hurnan relations, personnel, sales maJJP.gement and. induRt:r~ al rela.ti.ons. At this time the '.'case method of ntucly" wa.s s.dopted to a.cvelo:ne probJ.c·,1--s0lvi n'."i; ahi.li ties in the studPnt within the context of a chanlr,i.nr, social, econcmic and· politicnl envir01rnent. 'l"''ne School of Bu~iness Administration expand.ec1 to fo'J.r full-tj.r11r~ faculty members and four sessional lecturers in the l966-6r-( acad.emic vcn.r. With this growth in faculty resources it wn.s possible to offer the first two years of an Honors Bachelor of Comnerce proeram to stud~nts \•Tho, '!'la.vine_,; successfully co:n_plcted their wor~~ at Lakeheaci Uni vers:i ty transfe!.":".'ed to t :1c UniverHi ty or We8tern Ont.aria for 'the final two ye~.rs of the f01rr ~rear program. 'l'he dtffj_culty encountered in n.ttr::icti1~r~ stw1errti; to the nnrti::i.l �.. 'I·(. School Graduu.tiou !Hplo,:1'.1. granted upon co:npJ ct.ion of the fou:rth yc~i-r.' of with a sound. gr,rnp of the priuc.i.~nJes of accountin_r;, m~lth,~ 11;1.ti.cs and syste:·1s anul:ys1s. T1H:~se principle~; n.:ce devcJope<l within a busincs~; contey_t f!.nc1 appliec...1 Un:ough the utilization of the C'Om~nler. 'I'he· s-t.:-..;.rknt :.1.criuirr;f; fan1il:iar:ity with the ca~ab:i.J iti.eB and limitations of all c1.1r:r,~nt,ly 8..Vn.il::?,l>le co!nputers an,'l upon grad.w'l.tion in able to assist in the adninistro.ti.on of rl'he most rec1.:nt devc.ilop1 1cnt in the brief history of School of 1 Business i\,J.nii.nis~ratio·1 is the :i.nt:r:oduetion of a Gra~lu.ate Diplor1:--L i11 Busj ner,; s Adminl strn.U on "',.,rhich will be orfered fo1· the~ fj rs t ti 1:1e in the graduates vrho~;e carer!rs will le:u1 the:•1 :i.nto the .fi.cld:.-i of bus·:.!1css 0-r �of the lnrniner,s errtc:l'!)i'j se, and is CCJi\ J-ir::..rnhle to the:~ f.Lri;t year of study bus·jness eclucat.ion witnessed in Cnn::.dn. in i.hc recent pH.st am1 forcast. for education surr,o:rt.s the d.evelO!lr;:cnt of the Grnclu'.1te Di"rjloria pror:r2.1:: of husiucsH stucly nt Lakchen.d tfn:i.versi.ty. In summary tl1e School of Bufd.ne::w AclrnJn:lstrai..i.on hav<-; evolved ancl. prov.i ncinl need:.-, for 'businens educn.tio.:i. at three dis U.nct an(1 ~H:-:pcr:;.te tll'.: Rec) ~~terell Indusb·j :.:1.l /\cc ounts, the In~-.U.i..utc of Char Lere1 :1 cc Olli1t,1.nts and the I1lstitrrte of Canadi~~ Bankers in provtdin~ s~eci~lizcd courses wlthin en.ch Ol'f'/tn izatio:i' s curric:ul r.w. Business School faeulty also proviJc instrncU.on in courF:f!S sponso1·e(1 by 1ocal lm!:; i nens orgnrd.1/.atim~s as for t.'XD.mple the I.nJ~che:v1 Chn:1bcr of Con•r,1r-~rcc. Current Pro;~ram~ of H11sincss AllJ1riui.strat.ion :i.s attn.clv.:d U'...x1libits //T_'/, ,1, ·,r, 1 !,'VJ, !f'HT.) 'l'hese summn.:de s list progrnr:1 ob,icctivcs, P.d.rnt ~s:ton r_erp.1ircTT-2nt~-;, c curs 0 �Gcllool of ~3u ~;:i.n,~:, :-; /\cl 1:1 :i_11 i f:tr~Lti on Ob:i (.• ,. : u v (''.J 19G]-.. J. 97 5 rrhe ob;jectives of the Gc:1001 of nuslnr.~ss fvl r:·drd strn.t:ion will be prc~-;enLc-•.1 un.Jer two sepa rate h 211dLne s, pechr,or:;y a.nd resenxch. Joa.cl~ desi:~nc,1 to meet exi. r;t.i.nr enrolml:rrt. :t:1(1 prt:sent cou:!:'se offcrln~f;. r11 he decisions to c;rant the:: Di9l0~n in J3us.i neGs Co:r1putcr Syster.~r-5 and the llonor3 Bachelor of Co1mrieree clee;n~-"~ made in J.9G7 and 196/J reBpecti vely, by the ScnHte, were e nRctcu on the as rn1 ,11Jtion that nev faculty woul•1. be 1 oJ' t,1c Corn !le.t·ee pror~ra:.1. I1heBe as srn:mt ·tons have ·been ~-,uJl t., iuto t be 1 1971-'"(5 faculty requh:•1.-:t10.nt.s out.1-i.ncd .in 1~xrd.bit !!1I. period. By 197l~ the C':chool of Business 1\chinist:r-·:-i.t~o~1 1.~Hl h<:1.vc, throw:h t.he acqui sH,ion of new fa.cttlt:'-t anc1 conU.md 11·~ acadc:.11.c clevelop ·1m1t of' cxi f:tin:3 f,t1..f:F=-, evol v1~d the competence ncces!,-::.:r·y- to offer n. two ::,c:- .r cour=ie of stil,1y leadinG to nn :.I.J.A. At thj_s tb,e the one :rr:::r:,r Gradu'=ltr:! Diploun i.n Business A(l,ninif;~ratirn1 wllJ be (liscontinu:~j_. Enrolrncnt fi~ur.es for the second ye :1r of the ~1.B .. \. pl'.'O:~rsm are SL°llY,m th-Jrc ror <! in the J 9·r1~-7:> a.c[d•::mic ye~1.r pro.iectionH. (Gxhi bit I/I ) 1 To !ncc'L the rf!r,ion:tl ni.1e,J.'j for m::ma ri-c:f:1en-L cl-2 v r-~ lonment the School of Bt.ls.Lness !\.J --,:ini.:~tr -1 .tion wi ll of·~~1· hoth b::1.r;k int.:roductory cmu·~;i•:..; within t :1c .funct :L cnnJ. are ,:w ..>f b~·- ,E~o...?ss as ·-reJ.l us sped.:-] i~r~ll cnu .. sc ::; rlcs i-'"'; n cc1 to !'1 :1i.ntq,Jn an.d �-·5- up-elate thl:) p:rof('!=~L;iorrn.l busj i·1i:,,ssyr1n..11 1 [: kn0·..rJ 1~:1c:--:~ oJ' A.nrl. ap-i:;>lici1tion -Lo hfr, particulnr f:ield of cnc3en.vnur. A p,olicy ~.rill be aclopt.ed ·.:hr:rel•:1 T-~usir1ess School fn.cnl Ly wi] l provide j m~t:ruct-:i.on in t'ilese e·veninn; cou:i:-ses, tor:,:ther w.tth lcci.n:·:-~; to 1,e r;-J.v1..~n ~JY ou!·,stn.n~Hnr~ .1.co:.le-nic md 1.m:d.ncss pcrsonali ties co11 L1... acJved for Uu=: mor., t part from out;;; ·Lde the i'fort1rne~jl.,..:rn bw:; in.::>s~; corr,ntun:ity, con'1 cndnG in the -('n.11 of 1970. Err.p'!rni~ :is will lie pl:ic1:'d on sue h thrirr,er., ::Ls Computer concepts of m:1naw!rr1cnt, trarnrportation, business law, productio!1 an<l m,:1.r~~et:i.11~-: resea.rc~1 to na~:1e only a fe,,7 of the subjects pertinent to the pee~s of business~en in 1~~ lfor t1n11::s tern Ont 2.-d o community. A pro,i('ctio(1 of enroh18;it in part ti,n-:::: 13us:i.ncss cou.:r~;cs will be !:i•..!en h1 r~Y.hibiL !II. Ap:9rox:i 1·ntely 20,i of toLal Ix.tkehead University ::-~usiner;s School enroll·aent ·1 1ill co'1s -i. st of part time students by 1975 re r]ectinc the trends to1,,.•g_rd aclult educatio:1 evid.enCt-!d in recently yiublished J.}3.8. statlntics. 'L\iaching loa:.f a avera;-i;:i.n~ 10 hours pe·r week i)cr faculty me-rnl)er in the 19C S-G9 acud.emi.c year a.re chnrn.ctc:d ritlc of the uniriue position which 1 proc;ranu_;. will be'! Hi th the offerinc of the third o.nd fourth years of the Cor:,t H:re;e nccr~ss'lry. Course load:--:; for t~10se t.e::1chlnc; in the c-lcerec and grwluate pro.:;rams will 1Je in the orckr of 9· 'h~)urs pc,,. man week. 1 'J he tld.cr b~~si~_.; the 9 and 1-4 hour 1e>~!.cl fHcLors, the School of Business will �The rap.id r,ro',•Jt.h of crn·1)l1 ·1C'nt ancl tlit~ bcu1.:lf:nl1,(~ of prnr:r:t 1:1s of ~rtudy that h~ts trnnspircJ wit-.hin Vw b1·:Lc-f hj sLor;.r or 1..1v~ GchooJ. of lhrn:i.n:::-.:r., Adm-i.ni::;trat.i.on, has rernLl l.1:J in thc: ,1e,;clojJ'll(!nt of te:=J.chinc co 11r,.::tent.:e. ~ ~;tron!~ 0p-n1.,rtunitivs t.o :intcr~rat.,; uith the local Ad.minis L.rat:i.on. 'ril(! vn.:l:iclity of La~~che.!J,cl UnivcrsH.y as an instjtntion, de:,J.icr>.ted to th~ adv:1nce:acnt of kno-,rlc..l~~e and to the i11l-cr}we-Lation of that kno 1,.rlcc'ln;e within a reclonal, provittci:::1.J and nn.t..:onn.l cont.ext ha~; as onP. of it~3 fournlin.:..~ l1dnciples, t.he dcvclo1nc~nt of a souitd bu:-dncss n~scarch C!:1,nri.bility. Furtherrr,m·c j t ls contcn,,c~d tlmt the search for 801.Ht ions to the cnltm.· ,,.l, pol:i U.cal, ~c,eio-econo,nic prol>le,:rn of norl.11crn. rcr•io11s of C::vvt:l'L en..-1 bi~ best, undertal:cn by those acnde'.n·i.ca]] y trn.i ned'. ancJ pr!1.ci.. ic ally fanrU. b.~· with t:ne complex challenges of the northern envircmnen-t:.. It is to\.rnrd the 8.dv:-rnc0.,ri.--m t of eur.r.ent knowJ.eclr~e and the sp~1ere l,h.:i:t, the School of nusi.ness t\clninis~ration ulan to u:1<lert3.ke I'(?uearch stud.Les commend.n:_-; in ttw Sp!·j nr: ')f 1971. rJ~hesc studies ,.-,ill initially be dire2t,~d. toward a SUl"VCY of reg-j_m1al business vractices, which will serve as a l>::rni.s for subsequent in-o.cpth rescarc}1 in incti.cF1.te :l arens. Th~ udcU tion of full-ti:nc rcM~archer·s to trv::- Bw:d ncss School �W(HJetJ. Th(• broad.en ins of or stuuy tor~ethcr with r:,rowinc: pro.:~n 1.J'!S Husi11e :-, s :--k hool curolnenL •..Jill m(! all l:.h::1.t Born0 18 to 3_5 classroorr1s ',.rill be utilh0d through trw yeo..r;.;; l963--G9 to 1971+-75 res·_occti vely. Over one-half of these cla.ssroo?'lS :nust be dcni3ned for serdn 1.1:r and case discussion tea.chins mcthodolorry. It ir; belicvc•c1 that optimum effectiveness sc_~rv<.-,1 tiwun;)t the ce1d,r1.•.l loc:1L i.c,n of a Businc:rrn ;';chool co!' plex. 1 Don:~l • 1_: ; H. •\ lc·x :1,11 \kr C}n:tr~r,:,1,l) ::;c hoc l o ·r Busi ne r3 s .l\.(bd. ni str--Lt ion 1 I I �-( C EXHIBIT III ( f' f' SCHOOL OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION ENROL'IBNT (1964-1968 ACTUAL, 1968-1975 FORCAST) ! 1964 1965 45 ! YEAR I I I ADMINISTRATIOll I BUSI'NESSDI'?LO~IA YEAR III I I I I i I TOTAL YEAR I YEAR II YEAR III TOTAL ! I BUSINESS CONFUTER SYST&'-1S DIPLOMA 45 ' i - I I { YEAR I YEAR II YEAR III YEAR IV TOTAL I 91 I *:?ART TI~E MANMJE!·!ENT I I 1967 1968 79 ! II 44 24 147 29 ! : I 91 131 6 - 13 I' l l 29 ! II 26 ., 13 I I I f ! I i i I f 60 I ! ; 26 ! . l I 40 18 · l I !I I I I 58 30 I : ! iI I I I. 97 i 144 I 40 I I I 123 70 50 35 155 303 355 I ! i I I I I 50 37 25 13 125 ·4u r !' 200 60 38 25 I I 55 38 30 22 145 q.j j I 165 50 I 190 75 "-? 1 - ( ( i I' I ' 1973 1374 120 80 50 258 ! 395 I I i I 55 I 2"'0 I I • : 55 ! ; 210 235 405 460 505 65 45 35 30 175 70 50 ·i 40 ! : 60 40 35 25 160 i .JO I 210 ! I i ! i i j I I I l i i : I I I ! ' l so ).) ! I 130 j 705 620 l I I ; 1 230 i 90 ; 35 195 l i : I I t ; 25 280 160 I • 820 I : 60 I 518 I II 100 80 I 306 ! 125 90 90 70 ! 80 60 40 180 I 202 1974 1J75 i j *DENOTES NEW PROGRAMS OF STUDY ---- I I I : I 130 ! 1972 1973 110 70 45 225 j Il I i 60 ! 88 I I 1971 iI 90 Il 55 35 f j 180 j l 26 I 45 95 35 1971 'rj 1972 ! 100 i I I 50 30 15 l I I I 1970 265 I TOTAL BUSINESS SCHOOL E~ROLMENT 30 15 95 ! f 1969 1970 85 50 35 170 ·so 218 II 13 I 40 20 ! I •I 6 ' 1968 1969 80 50 28 158" I I I I I I I 6 t 176 I I I• Ii I l I l ! I STUDENTS i I I ! I I I YEAR I *~IASTERS DEGREE IN I BUSINESS AD}HNISTRATIO~ YEAR II I TOTAL DEGREE STUDENTS (COMMERCE & GRADUATE) i I j 45 I· i.,~WJ..;AIE DIPL0.:1A i I TOTAL DIPLO~ PROGRAM HO~ORS BACHELOR OF .cmmERCE 1966 1967 84 29 18 131 1965 1966 68 23 YEAR II I I I I I - I 945 : : �( ( C ( 9' EXHIBIT #II SCHOOL OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION ADDITIONAL COURSES AND FACULTY REQUIRED FOR THE ACADEMIC YEARS 1968-69 TO 1974-75 PROGRA.'1S (a) (b) ALREADY ESTABLISHED: GRADUATE DIPLOMA, BACHELOR OF COMXERCE, BUSINESS COMPUTER SYSTEMS, BUSINESS ADXINISTRATION DIPLO~l~ MASTERS DEGREE IN BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION (M.B.A.), NON-CREDIT MANAGEMENT COURSES NUMBER OF COURSES OFFERED PREVIOUS YEAR YEAR NEW COURSES NUMBER OF COURSE-SECTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR TE!S YEA..~ ADDITIONAL COURSESECTIONS l FULL-TIME FACULTY PREVIOUS YEAR THIS YEAR NEW FACULTY ' I ! ! THIS YEAR f I i I THIS YEAR I 20 ! I ' 1· I ( i 31½ 34½ 49½ 11!1 3 10 5 49½ 3½ 53 53 5 0., 21 37½ 40½ 53½ 65½ 31½ 34½ 44½ 49½ 53 58 67 69½ 76 16½ 3 13 12 4 6½ 2 37½ 40½ 53½ 65½ 69½ 76 78 I I 4 9 11 17 21 22 26 5 2 11 6 4 i 4 1 17 21 22 26 27 9 I Ii i I l i i II I 306 395 518 620 705 820 945 i THE EQUIVALENT OF TWO FULL TIME FACULTY X~BERS WILL BE REQUIRED AS SESSIONAL LECTURERS THROUGH THE PERIOD 1968-75, TO SE~VICE S~ECIALIZED DISCIPLINE (e.g. BUSINESS LAW) . • --· ----------------- !i I I I II [ I · N~B. BUSINESS RESEARCH FACULTY {ONE REQUIRED 1971, 1972, 1973, TWO REQUIRED 1974) ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THE ABOVE TEAC~I~G REQUIREMENTS -- · ·· -- --- •---···-- i ·1 I! I I STUDE~T/FACU:TY ESTIMATED STL"I)ENT ENROLMENT ·-(-·--- -1 34:l 3~:l 30:l 30:: 33:: . 33: l 36:l ?-A.TIC �/() LXIIJ BlT //J J l SCHOOL ~ OF BllSJNl:SS AU~IJ NJ STl{J\TlON LECTUIU: JIOURS Pm PIWGl{:\~1 OF STUDY ----- -·-··---- •·---·~·-·----··---·· ---- 1) ----- 1968--69 J\CAl)IJIJC YEAR DIPLO~IA IN BUSINESS ADmNISTl~/\TlON FIRST YEAR: Course Number Busin~ss Tla Business Tlb Business Tlc Economics Tla English Tla Geography Tla Mathematics Tlc Subject_ Accounting Business Law Business Organization Intro<luctory Introduction to Contemporary Literature Political &Economjc Business Mathematics Total Fall Lee. 3 3 Term Lab. Syring Lee. Term Lab. 2 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 3 3 3 4 0 0 4 0 0 0 23 2 23 2 4 3 3 3 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 3 3 3 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 1 3 1 0 0 3 1 0 0 3. 0 3 0 26 1 26 1 4 3 3 0 0 0 4 3 3 0 0 0 3 3 O· 0 3 3 0 0 4 3· 3 3 o. SECOND YEAR: Course Number ~ Business T2a Business T2b Business T2c Business T2d Business T2c Business 200 Economics T2a English T2a English T2h Subject, Accounting Marketing Finance Human Relations Production Managerial Statistics North American Economic Development Report Writing Introduction to Types of Literature Total THIRD YEAR: Compu 1sory: Course Number Business T3c Business T3d Economics T3a Political Science T3a On~ Arts Course at ~ r Subject Management Systems and Procedures Money, Cr~<lit, &Banking Principles of Government the la6 level The student must select, as his major option, either A or B. If Option A is selected the student must take: - (1) The compulsory courses listed (2) Business T3a, Accounting (3) Any two 0£: Business T3b, Cost Accounting Rusincss T3c, Auditing Business T3f, Operations Research (4) Any two of: The courses listed in Option B. If Option Bis selected the student must take: (I) The compulsory courses listed (2) Either: Business T3a, Accounting Or two of: Business T3b, Cost Account.hr; Business T3c, Auditing . Business T3f, Operations Research (3) Any four of the courses listed in Option B. ..._,, ,- t �( I i. OPTJ--·()N A: ---·- ----·. -· --Course Number .. ~ · - - - - ------ Business Business Business Business T:fa T3b T:fo T3f Subj~_c~_ Accounting Cost AccounUng Auclj ting Opcrat'ions Research Spdng Lee. Term Lab. 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 Term Sprjng Lah. Lee. Foll Term Lee. Lab. 3 3 0 3 -- 0 OPTION B: ---C.otE:s~ Number Business Business Business Busfoess Business Business T3g T3h T3i T3j T3k T3L Subject_ ·3 0 3 0 AdvcrU sing Industrial Relations Personnel Purchasing Retailing Sales Management 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TOTAL .... 25 hours 2) ~ DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS cmtPUTER SYSTE~IS FIRST YEAR: Course Number Business Tla Business Tlc Computer Tla Economics Tla English Tla Mathematics Tlc Mathematics Tld SECOND ~ (\ Business T2a Business 200 Computer T2a Computer T2b English T2a English T2b THIRD Fall ?.Ub_j~!_ cc-c-~ Accounting Busjness Organization Unit Record Introductory Introduction to Contemporary Literature Business Mathematics Computer 3 3 Term Lab. 2 0 1 0 3 3 2 0 1 0 3 4 0 0 0 0 4 2 0 0 0 Total 20 3 22 3 St~_c-:__~ Fall Lee. 4 4 3 3 3 YEAR: Course Number Accounting Managerial Statistics Digital Co~putcrs Programming Report \\'ri ting Introduction to Types of Literat11rc 4 Te7:m ~rin 6 Term Lab. Lee. Lab. 0 1 0 4 3 3 0 1 0 4 4 1- 0 4 1 0 3 0 3 0 Total 18 5 18 5 Suh j_c_5:.t Fall Lee. Term Lab. Spring Lee. Term Lab. 3 3 0 4 3 0 0 6 3 0 0 6 4 4 4 3 4 0 0 4 0 0 -./17 10 14 10 3 3 4 YEAR: CouTse Number Business Business Computer Computer Computer Computer T2d T3b T3a T3b T3d ' ri 4- lluman Relations Cost Accounting Ficl d l\'ork Programming Man:1gcmcnt Systems Total o· 0 f �/-2 I t _, 3) t ! llONOI~S P,.'\CIIELO!i OF cm101l:J,C:E l)F(;JtFI: --.. - - ------·-- . - ·- - -- •--·-·-· -· ·- • --- ~- - FIRST YEAR: Course --Number ----------- St~bjcc1:__ Fall ~ring Term Lab. Lee. Term lc-c. ·eriT>-:---- -- --3 Orgnnjzatjon Int J:oduc tory Survey of English Literature Introductory Psychologyla6 *Two full courses in Arts or Science Bu~incss 100 Economics la6 English la6 3 3 3 0 0 - 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 3 ------ ----- Total 18 0 18 Subject Fall Term LcC Lab-:- 3 3 3 3 0 0 3 0 SECOND YEAR: Course Nrn.,u0r ..,. Managerial Statistics Business 200 Accounting Business 201 One Advanced Course in Economics *Three full courses in Arts and Science Spring Te_!m Lee. Lab. 3 3 3 3 ·3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 0 18 -- - - Total 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 0 *Estimated average lecture and laboratory hours. ~ r't ·- • 4 !.=-~:1 �IJ ' LAKEHEAD r;UNIVERSITY School of Business Administration GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION , 1 I • I I �GRADUATE DlPLOMA IN BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Objectives: The graduate diploma program in Business Administration is designed to meet the needs of university graduates whose careers will lead them into the fields of business or public administration, but whose undergraduate courses have not included basic studies in business administration. Company executives throughout the Canadian business community continue to confirm that the formal education provided by such a course of study is more meaningful to the student than the on-the-job training acquired by a graduate of , other than business disciplines in his first year of employment. This program, designed to cover one academic year, provides the student with an introduction to the basic functions and purposes of the business enterprise. Admission Requirements: To be admitted to the program leading to the Graduate Diploma in Business Administration a candidate must hold a recognized undergraduate degree from an accredited university. Formal admission to the program will be granted upon approval of the candidate's application by the School of Business Administration. Program Outline: The program of studies leading to the Diploma consists of seven courses listed below. Completion of the program requires (a) a minimum period of study of one full academic year, or (b) if taken on a part-time basis, upon completion of the full course program. Classes will be given during the regular winter session of the University. To qualify for the Diploma, a student must obtain a minimum average of 66% and at least 60% in every course. Supplemental examinations normally will not be granted. The case method is the principal method of instruction used by the School. Text books and other reading materials are used to supplement the cases. ' Business · 501 - Finance: A study of the role of the financial manager and his responsibilities. Planning for funds, capital budgeting, management of short, intermediate and long-term funds. 3 hours �-2- Business 502 - Administrative Practices: This course is designed to increase the student's awareness of, and skill in acting toward, the many varied and complicated problems that arise in business organizations, as a result of the relationships people have with one another. Available knowledge in the field of organizational behaviour and training in administrative action are covered in the course. 3 hours Business 503 - Law (half course): A study of co11D11ercial law to assist the administrator in understanding the legal framework in which he must make his decisions. 3 hours, one term Business 504 - Marketing: An introductory course in which marketing is studied primarily from the consumer's point of view. An intensive examination is made of the more important marketing functions. 3 hours Business 505 - Producti~n (half course): A course which emphasizes the management of manufacturing activities; use of concepts and techniques to solve problems ranging from job design through to the planning and operation of production systems within the company organization. 3 hours, one term Business 550 - Managerial Accounting: In the first part of the course the student is exposed to basic accounting concepts and techniques. The major part of the course is then devoted to management uses of accounting information. Planning and control aspects of information systems are emphasized. 3 hours J Business 551 - Quantitative Methods: The collection, analysis and presentation of business data with emphasis on modern quantitative techniques. 3 hours �-3- Applications: Application for admission to the program, together with supporting docwnents, should be submitted to the Registrar, Lakehead University, before September 1st. Application forms and additional information may be secured from the office of the Registrar. �LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY School of Business Administration · HONORS BACHELOR OF COMMERCE DEGREE �HONORS BACHELOR OF COMMERCE Objectives: The program leading to the degree, Bachelor of Connnerce (B. Comm.) is designed to provide the student with an understanding of his environment in order that he can successfully challenge business problems. In line with this objective, the School of Business Administration recognizes that it is essential for the student to have a good background in the arts and sciences and accordingly the first two years of the program have been arranged to provide for such a background. The last two years of the program allow the student to concentrate his studies in business. Emphasis is on the development of approaches to and techniques for the solving of business problems within a decisionmaking framework. Admission Requirements= A student may be admitted to the Honors Bachelor of Commerce program in either Year I or Year II. Program for students entering in Year I: Academic requirements for students enrolling in Year I directly from Grade 13 consist of the following: Ontario Secondary School Honor Graduation Diploma (Senior Matriculation) or its equivalent, showing an overall average of 60% in the following: Mathematics A English or a language At least two other subjects, comprising three credits. The program is as follows: Year I Business 100, Organization Economics la6 English la6 Psychology la6 Two full courses in Arts and Science selected after consultation with the Chairman of the School of Business Administration. Year II Business 200, Managerial Statistics Business 201, Accounting An advanced course in Economics Three full courses in Arts and Science selected after consultation with the Chairman of the School of Business Administration. �Year III ..... Business Business Business Business Business Business 300, 301, 302, 303, 304, 305, Control Finance Administrative Practices Law(½) Marketing Production (½) Year IV Business 400, Operations Research - Theory and Computer Applications Business 401, Policy Business 402, Systems and Procedures (½) The equivalent of two and one-half full courses from among the following optiona~ half-year courses offered by the School of Business Ad~inistration. Business 403, Advanced Accounting (full course) Business 404, Advanced Financial Management(½) Business 405, Personnel(½) Business 406, Industrial Relations (½) Business 407, Purchasing(½) Business 408, Advertising(½) Business 409, Sales Management (½) Business 410, Retailing (½) Business 411, Cost Accounting (½) Business 412, Auditing (½) Business 413, Transportation(½) Business 414, International Marketing (½) Business 415, Insurance (½) Business 416, Financial Institutions (½) Business 417, Marketing Research(½) One elective in Arts and Science selected after consultation with the Chairman of the School of Business Administration. In each year the student must maintain an average of at least 66% in the business courses with an overall average of 60% or greater. Program for students entering in Year II To be admitted to the Honors Commerce program in Year II the student must have passed the first year of an Arts or Science program with an overall average of at least 60%. The program is as follows: Year II ,; Business 100, Business 200, Business 201, Economics la6 program). Organization Managerial Statistics Accounting (or an elective if taken in Year I of an Arts or Science �Year II (cont'd) Two full courses in Arts and Science selected after consultation with the Chairman of the School of Business Administration. (Note that English la6 and Psychology la6 must be included in either Year I or Year II of the student's program.) The program for third and fourth years is identical to that previously described. It should be noted that prior to graduation at least one course in Economics at an advanced level must be taken. �f ,,I Courses Offered by the School of Business Administration for the Honors Bachelor of Commerce Degree Business 100 -- Orianization This is an introductory course to business and deals with the forms of ownership and the organizational structure of the business firm. Lectures - 3 hours. Business 200 - Managerial Statistics Methods of obtaining, classifying and analysing business data. Lectures - 3 hours. Business 201 - Accounting This course is concerned with the principles of accounting and some of their applications in modern business. Sole proprietorships, partnerships and limited· companies are discussed in some detail; consideration is given to the managerial aspects of accounting with emphasis upon departmental accounting, budgets and various specialized or supplementary statements. Lectures - 4 hours. Laboratory - 1 hour. Business 300 - Control This course emphasizes the preparation and use of figure data in making business decisions and in appraising the results of business operations. Lectures - 3 hours. Business 301 - Finance A study of the role of the financial manager and his responsibilities; planning for funds, capital budgeting, management of short, intermediate and long-term funds. Lectures - 3 hours. Business 302 - Administrative Practices This course is designed to increase the student's awareness of and skill in acting toward the many varied and complicated problems that arise in business organizations as a result of the relationships people have with one another. Available knowledge in the field of organizational behaviour and training in administrative action are covered in the course. Lectures - 3 hours. Business 303 - Law (half course) A study of commercial law to assist the administrator in understanding the legal framework in which he must make his decisions. Lectures - 3 hours, one term only. �Business 304 - Marketing An introductory course in which marketing is studied primarily from the consumer's point of view. An intensive examination is made of the more important marketing functions. Lectures - 3 hours. Business 305 - Production (half course) A course which emphasizes the management of manufacturing activities; the use of concepts and techniques to solve problems ranging from job design through to the planning and operation of production systems within the company organization. Lectures - 3 hours, one term only. Business 400 - Operations Research - Theory and Computer Applications The methods and uses of operations research in business using the computer as a practical tool. Lectures - 3 hours. Business 401 - Policy The principles and practices of business management in their application to the organization and operation of enterprises; the management of the three major functions of business - production, finance, and marketing. Lectures - 3 hours. Business 402 - Systems and Procedures (half course) Business systems as applied to computers including flow-chart analysis of problems, programming and coding using various computer languages. Lectures - 3 hours, one term only. Business 403 - Advanced Accounting The course is concerned with communication of financial facts to outsiders. Considerable attention is therefore devoted to company annual reports and to the bulletins and regulations of the professional accounting bodies, the securities exchanges and various government agencies. Business 404 - Advanced Financial Management (half course) The course is concerned primarily with the financial impiications of the various kinds of business decisions. Lectures - 3 hours, one term only. �Business 405 - Personnel (half course) This course is designed to help the student acquire an understanding of the techniques, principles and procedures involved in personnel administration. Lectures - 3 hours, one term only. Business 406 - Industrial Relations (half course) This course deals with the administration and negotiation of labour management contracts. Lectures - 3 hours, one term only. Business 407 - Purchasing (half course) The organization, methods and policies of the purchasing department and its relationship with other departments of the business. Lectures - 3 hours, one term only. Business 408 - Advertising (half course) A study of advertising within the framework of marketing. Advertising principles and techniques are illustrated by the discussion of specific cases in advertisements. Lectures - 3 hours, one term only. _ Business 409 - Sales Management (half course) The purpose of the course is to develop ability in dealing with problems involved in the management of outside salesmen. Lectures - 3 hours, one term only. Business 410 - Retailing (half course) A study of retailing in the Canadian economy, its structure, origin and development. Lectures - 3 hours, one term only. Business 411 - Cost Accounting (half course) A study of cost accounting as a tool in analysing, planning and controlling operations. Lectures - 3 hours, one term only. Business 412 - Auditing (half course) This course will emphasize internal control, particularly over assets with some consideration given to liabilities and shareholders' equity. Some consideration will also be given to the role of ext.e rnal auditor. Lectures - 3 hours, one term only. �Business 413 - Transportation (half course) The economics of major transport methods with special reference to Northwestern Ontario's requirements. Lectures - 3 hours, one term only. Business 414 - International Marketing (half course) A study of the problems faced by the marketing manager in selling his products abroad. Lectures - 3 hours, one term only. Business 415 - Insurance (half course) • A study of the principles of insurance including the historical development; types of policies and coverage available are discussed at some length. Lectures - 3 hours, one term only. Business 416 - Financial Institutions (half course) A study of the objectives of various financial institutions and the demand for funds by the business community, the requirements of supervisory authorities and the public interest. Lectures - 3 hours, one term only. ·B usiness 417 - Marketing Research (half course) The tools available to the marketing manager to provide him with the fac't s he needs in making his decisions. Besides becoming acquainted with the tools, the student is given practice in the handling and interpretation of the research results. Lectures - 3 hours, one term only. Applications Application for admission to the course, together with supporting documents, should be submitted to the Registrar, Lakehead University, before September 1st. Application forms and additional information may be secured from the office of the Re8istrar. .,\ • I �LAKEHEAD UNIVERS.ITY ' ': ,; , I School of Business Administration ' •1', I / • DIPLO~A IN BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION I I' �D I PLl)MA 1 N IW S nms S ADM lN TS 'I' RATION OhJectives: The diploma p1ogram 1n Business Admini.stration at the undergraduate level Js designe<l to expose tl10 student to a hroad cross-section of- business studies t rnm winch he can make an ,intel 1 tgent choice of the particular field ol specialization in which he is most interested and for which he has the greatest aptitude. The Schoo]. of Business Administration recognizes that it is essential for the student 1nten<ling to make a career in business to have a gouJ background in tl1e arts and sciences. Consequently, the undergradu,1te student i.n Business Administration at Lakehead University is required to stu<ly a number of arts and science courseb to develop this background. Gradu,Hes enter c1 wide variet>' of f i. rms and occupations. Some · are placed immediately 1n training programs to give tl1em, as quickly as possible, experience 1n ditferent departments; others go directly to a specif 1c department; still others register with professional societ 1es. \vi th experience, they w i 11. occupy responsible positions in sales, m;1rketing, accounting, statistics, purchasing, credit, production, personnel, advertising and office management. Admission Requ·t t emen~_~: Applic1nts must 11:-ive completed successfully the requirements for the Ontario Secondary Sch(lol Graduation Diplon1c1 granted upon the comp let Lon Pl tile fnurth yt.....lr nf .-my one of the five ·-y0nr courses of the· reorganized program. Applicants must have passed English and Mathematics in Gradei;.. 11 ~md 1:? and two of History, Geography or Ecoth>tnics in Grade 12 and lme other nppropriate subject, with an over a 11 average of at least 60~{.. Students who have obtained the Ontario Secondary Schoo] Gradn.-Hi<,n D1pluma with hq~h st.111<.l1ng in the four-year program may he t · Pns .id(•tt>d for admissiPn nn an i. ndividual basis. Program Out.}__-!_ne: . FIRST YEAR: FALL TERM Lecture Lab Business Tla, Accounting Business T]b, Business Law Business Tlc, Business Organization Jkonom.tcs Tl a, Lnt roduc to ry t-:ngLish Tl.-1, lntruduc.t1on to ~omtempordry Literature Geography T 1a , Pol i t i r .a l & Economic Mathematics Tlc, Business Mathematics SPRING TERM Lecture Lab 3 2 3 3 0 3 4 0 () 4 3 0 J ·3 0 0 3 J L~ () L~ 0 0 0 23 2 23 2 - 3 2 0 0 �\. , FALL TERM Ll'cture Lah I 'II Lab 0 0 () 4 1 1 () J () 3 0 0 l ] 1 0 J l 0 Ac c , , u n t I n g () l~11i:;jnc'!-.s T:~h, ~1:irkl't () Business T:?c, F j 11:1 rn. ' <.' Bus i n C's s T :~ ;1 , ing Business T '. ~d, llum:rn RL'l.1t I011s Business T2e, Production Business 200, Mandgerial Statistics l~conomics T2a, North American Economic Development English T:2:i, Report \vrit.ing J 1 SPRINC TERM Lecture () () 0 English T:?h, Jntroduction to Tvpes I of Literaturtc• () 0 1 1 = TlllRD YEAR: Comp u 1 so r .v : Hu s i nt•ss T"h , ~l:11ugl',nl'11 l 1311sinl~ss Tld, :~ystcms :md Pr<H'L·dures Econom i.c s TJ.i, Money, Crcd it ;-111d Bank i.ng Political :.;cience T"~a, Princi.plcs of Government One Arts Course at the la() lC'vel () 4 () 1 0 0 0 3 () () 3 3 0 0 0 ( 'l'ltt' :-;t11d('nf If O p l i O II 111u::t i :--i /\ .1:.; :.;Pll'('l, I 1 • <• I :..; < ' C' d l I I l' Iii:; 111 .- 1jn1· opt ion, S l ll d l ' 11 l Ill ti:.; I; l k l L' <.'itl1('l" /\ or IL : (J) the l'Ompu I so rv u.,,1 rsr•s I is U•d Bustnc:>ss Tt,, :\cco11nting (3) Any two ot: Busin1'ss T "\h, Cl,st 1\<'counting lh1sin0ss T~e, Auditing Hus in0ss Oper;1t icms RPsearch U•) Anv two ( i f : TIit.' <'Purses I i ~- t e<I in Option B. (2) 'J " l 1 op t i l) 11 H I s s e I l .' c t H., l' d l Ii '-' s I 11 d L' n t mu i-. t ta kc : ( 1 ) T Ii c com r u l s n r v l' nu s L's . I i s t L' d (?) Eitl\('r: lh11,i1wss T'\:1, Accounting Or two <."'I : ne::;s T"3h, Cost Accounting Business ·ne, Audi Business T3f; Opcrat ions Research A 11 y f L) l I r l IJ C l' 0 i t(~ i Or i On r l h 1 s ·i Ling ( 1 ) r P.11~111l'~s B11sin1.•s~; Business Busi1wss n u rs es 1 s d n Tkt, J\1·1·nunli.ng 'l'~h, CPst Accounting T'h·, Audi Ling TH, Op(•rat ions Rcse:trch t B . () '3 () () () () '3 () 0 0 0 0 !,, t �Opt i ( ~ : ':.ii,....- Rusinc>s~ T'3g, Business '1"3h, Business T'H, Business '1''3•.1 , Business T1k, Business T3 l, Advertising Industri:11 Relations Personnel '! () () () ·3 0 Purchasing () () Retailing Sales M.1n.-1gemPnt 1 () () 0 TotaJ fn ec1ch year ;1 the pass mark being () 0 J 0 J 0 0 0 0 0 1 () 25 hours. student must pass all nf the courses in that year, 50'1(.. Excepti.ona.l students with liigli standing in the program may be considered for ricimiss ion t0 the llonors Haclwlnr of Commerce program or the general arts progr.1m wit.h ,1dva11ce credits. Further particulars in this regard may he obtained from the Chairman or the School of llusiness Administration. ( �C<HIRSI•: DJ·'. SCfUP'J"I ONS Bus in es s 'I' I a - 1k c o u n t i t~: The accounling eye le for b(lllt serv ic(:• and mercllan<l i sing enterprises including c1d_itJStments t 01 dL•I erred :ind accrued itL'ms~ m.;e of spec Lal journals and subs1d1ary ledger~: valuation of ;1ccounts receivable, merch~ndise inventory and fixed assets: payroll accounting; introduction to internal c0ntrol procedures with special emphasis on the control of cash; account-ing concepts and principles. Business Tlh -· Business Law: A s11mm,nv nt nur l.-1ws l'I ,·ont rat·L. 1'mpll\Vtr1Pnl. ,tgPncv, sale nf goods, li.-11 lments, inliPr 1 L,111cv, rv .- 11 c·st;Itt>, nc-gut i;1hle instruments, partnerships, c0rporat ions, h,mkruptl·v, tr,1de tnilrks, business crimes and in~urance, torts. 11usiness Tl1 - Bus111<.~ss Organizntion: Forms pf lHvtH."rship; the nrg:1111;/,,ltion;:il st:nJl'Lure pf ;i husincss firm: mnnul,11 · turing, wliol('s:1l 1ng, rvt :11 I ing, p11hl i1· nl i I iti<:>s ;111d co--npc>ratives; tile s1:opt' nl tlH' oft ice, nffil'<.' organi;,:,ttion, procedures and equipment: location ~nLI layout of a business Pnterprise; pcrsonn~J and labor problems; consumer and hus j ness finance; f i nanc i il J i. ns t j tut ions: business risks and insurance. ( Economics 'l'la This L'llttr!-.<' Tntroduc.tl,ry: dp;1ls with '.,11c!i ;1:-,fH'1'l!~ of thL' country's r•conomic ;iffairs as husi1wss organi,rnlit,n, deL:isiun 111;1king in the individu.-ll f ·irm, supply and demand, mnn0:v and h,1nk i ng, n:1 ti. ona 1 i.ncome and gross rm t ion:.11 product. Englj_sh Tin - Introduction tn CL,11tempor,1rv Literature: 'I' r •t 111 i. n µ, t o w r .i t e mo r c• c l) r re~ r. t 1y and more f or c L' f u .11 y , an <l t o read with appreciation and discernment in conu~mporary literature. Geography Tia - PoUt tca·1 ;rnd l•:connmic: Tl1is course :-qms ,-lt understcinding ti1e political and economic state of pres~11t--day Etirorw hy stndving tile interplay of the vari.ous geogr;:1phical L1e:tors involved. 1 ts content includes: geographic. regions; the location, size and shc:1pe of states; popuL1t ion dynmnics and the changing balance of rower: resources and , industrv, t 1·:rni-::portation and trade: Europe ns ,·l n agricultural continent: l'(donLJlism past and presC'nt:; tl1e post-·war division of Europe; development ol supra-natio1 al organi,.ations. I i �Mathematics Tlc - Business Mathematics: A review of arithmetic and short methods applicable in business; a review and extension of algebra; linear mathematics and programming; logarithms; simple interest and dlscount with reference to partial payments, invoices, accounts, installment plans and personal loans; calculations required for inventories, insurance, business finance, partnerships and taxation; compound interest; annuities; sinking funds. Business T2a - Accounting: Partnerships and limited companies; departmental and branch accounting; budgeting, funds statements, statement analysis, special analyses and internal reports, introduction to cost accounting. Business T2b - Marketing: An introductory course in which marketing is studied primarily from the consumer's point of view. An intensive examination is made of ·the more important marketing functions - selecting channels of distribution, packaging, branding, produ~t planning, marketing research, and analysis of the Canadian market Ln general. Business T2c - Finance: A study of the role of the financial manager and his responsibilities; planning for funds, capital budgeting, management of short, intermediate and long-term funds. Business T2d - Human Relations: A study of people at work and how they may be motivated to work together in greater harmony. Focus is upon the manager and his operating relationships with people in the organization. Business T2e - Production: A use of design within course which emphasizes the management of manufacturing activities; concepts and techniques to solve problems ranging from job through to the planning and operation of production systems the company organization. Business 200 - Managerial Statistics: Methods of obtaining, classifying and analysing business data. Economics T2a - North American Economic Development: This course traces the economic growth of Canada from the colonial period to the present. ( �English T2a ·- Report Writing: A study of the different aspects of report writing and business correspondence. This study will include effective expression of ideas, the psychological implications of business co~respondence, and the planning and writing of letters and reports. English T2b - Introduction to Types of Literature: A study of drama, poetry, and the novel for the purpose of increasing the student's appreciation of the different types of literature. Business T3a - Accounting: A study at an advanced level of the valuation of assets and financial statement disclosure; liabilities and shareholders' equity; statements from incomplete records; reorganizations, income taxes. Business T3b - Cost Accounting (half course): The elements of cost, material, labor, and overhead; the application of cost to work done under job cost and process cost systems~ standard costs, including the analysis and accounting treatment of variances; cost and profit analysis for decision-making, including gross profit analysis, break-even analysis; profit-volume analysis and differential cost analysis; budgetary control and the flexible budget. ( Business T3c - Management: The principles and practices of business management and their application to the organization and operation of enterprises; the management of the three major functions of business - production, fjnance and marketing. Emphasis is placed on the philosophy and general approach rather than on details of techniques and procedures, with the aim of developing through classroom participation and written assignments on practical business situations the ability to recognize problems, assemble facts, make decisions, and present recommendations convincingly and concisely. Business T3d - Systems and Procedures: Uses and limitations of digital computers for business applications; flow chart analysis of problems, programming and coding using Fortran and SPS languages, discussion of business language Cobol; data processing equipment and techniques; business systems as applied to computers; management decision techniques using computers. Students will write several programs which will be run on a computer. ( �Business T3e - Auditing (half course): This course is studied from the management control point of view. Internal control and audit will be emphasized, particularly control over assets with some consideration given to liabilities and shareholders' equity. Case studies will be used to complement the ijevelopment of methods which aid the control and planning functions. Some consideration will be given to the role of the external auditor. The primary emphasis will be on the various services available from a public accounting firm, and the development ~f relations with external auditors. Business T3f - Operations Research (half course): The method and uses of operations research in business, including inventory control, linear programming, simulation, queuing and games and strategies. Business T3g - Advertising (half course): A study of advertising within the framework of marketing. Advertising principles and techniques are illustrated by the discussion of specific cases and advertisements. Business T3h - Industrial Relations (half course): The course deals with the administration and negotiation of labormanagement contracts. Part of the material is centered around the problem of the administration of industrial relations after the contract has been written, while part of the material deals with the task of negotiating contracts. Business T3i - Personnel (half course): This course is designed to help the student acquire an understanding of the techniques, principles and procedures involved in personnel administration both as a specialized function of the organization and as a co-ordinating function in general administration. Case materials are used to deal with such areas as company organization, personnel policies, selection and placement, training and executive development, appraisal, wage and salary administration, motivation, communication, safety and health, union and non-union relations, employee services, personnel research and public relations. Business T3j - Purchasing (half course): The organization, methods and policies of the procurement function; . ordering, clerical procedures, receiving and warehousing; the relationship between the department and the other departments of a business. I. �Business T3k - Retailing (half course): Importance of retailing in our economy; structure of retailing in Canada; origin and development of retailing; direct retailing - and consumer co-operatives; large and small-scale retailing; store locations, layout and equipment; organization of retail stores; retail advertising and sales promotion, window and interior display; store service; essentials of retail mathematics. Students ~ill be given practical assigrtments that relate retailing principles to actual situations. Business T31 - Sales Management (half course): The purpose of this course is to develop ability in dealing with ·the problems involved in the management of outside salesmen. Thus, the "case" is used in involved situations which ~onfr6nt sales executives of manufacturing and distributing enterprises in their day-to-d,y operations. Economics T3a - Money, Credit and Banking: This course deals with such aspects as functions and supply of money; credit and its· uses; the banking system and aims of monetary policy. Political Science T3a - Principles of Government: A study of the basic principles of government, with reference to the governments of selected countries. ( Applications Application for admission to the course, together with supporting documents, should be submitted to the Registrar, Lakehead University, before September 1st. ,Application forms and further information may be secured from the office of the Registrar. . I i I ,t / 'j; ·' ' 1' I �LAKEHEAD UNIVERS,ITY School of Busines~ Administration .. ,, I{ ,j I • DIPLOMA IN B.USINESS COMPUTER- SYSTEMS . . ' . . �DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS COMPUTER SYSTEMS Objectives: For a number of years now there has been an acute shortage of computer progrannners and systems analysts. The industry is experiencing a growth rate of 20% per annum and the demand for specialists in this field continually exceeds the supply. While manufacturers' training courses provide a good grounding in progrannning and systems work, the School of Business Administration recognizes the need for graduates with a broad background in business subjects which will enable them to understand the business enterprise , in its entirety and to eventually assume managerial responsibilities in the computer department. Lakehead University's IBM 360 Model 40 Computer will be used extensively by students during the three-year program. It is hoped that in the summer months between the second and third years of the program students will be able to supplement classroom and laboratory work with employment in computer departments of industrial and commercial concerns. , Admission Requirements: (1) Applicants must have completed successfully the requirements for the Ontario Secondary School Graduation Diploma granted upon the completion of the fourth year of any of the five-year courses of the reorganized program. Applicants must have passed English and Mathematics in Grades 11 and 12 and any two of History, Geography or Economics in Grade 12 and one other appropriate subject, with an overall average of at least 60%. (2) In addition, the applicant must obtain a satisfactory score on a test designe~ to evaluate an individual's aptitude for computer work. Program Outline: FIRST YEAR: Business Tla, Accounting Business Tlc, Business Organization Computer Tla, Unit Record Economics Tla, Introductory English Tla, Introduction to Contemporary Literature Mathematics Tlc, Business Mathematics Mathematics Tld, Computer FALL TERM SPRING TERM Lecture Lab Lecture Lab 3 3 1 3 4 3 3 0 3 0 3 4 0 0 0 3 4 0 0 0 2 0 4. 0 20 - - 3 2 22 - 2 0 1 - 3 ,. �FALL TERM Lecture Lab SECOND YEAR: ~ Business T2a, Accounting Business 200, Managerial Statistics Computer T2a, Digital Computers Computer T2b, Programming English T2a, Report Writing English T2b, Introduction to Types of Literature Q, 4 1 0 3 0 1 3 0 4 4 1 0 3 18 0 5 4 3 3 4 1 0 3 0 18 5 3 3 0 0 4 4 - SPRING TERM Lecture Lab 4 - = THIRO YEAR: Business Business Computer Computer Computer Computer T3b, T2d, T3a, T3b, T3c, T3d, Cost Accounting Human Relations Field Work Programming Management Systems 6 3 0 4 0 10 17 - 0 - 0 0 6 4 0 3 0 4 3 4 14 - 0 0 10 - In each year a student must pass all of the courses in that year, the pass mark being 50%. �COURSE DESCRIPTIONS Business Tla - Accounting: The accounting cycle for both service and merchandising enterprises including adjustments for deferred and accrued items; use of special journals and subsidiary ledgers; valuation of accounts receivable, merchandise inventory and fixed assets; payroll accounting; introduction to internal control procedures with special emphasis on the control of cash; accounting concepts and principles. Business Tlc - Business Organization: Forms of ownership; the organizational structure of a business firm, manufacturing, wholesaling, retailing, public utilities and co-operatives; the scope of the office - office organization, procedures and equipment; location and layout of a business enterprise; personnel_and labor problems; consumer and business finance; financial institutions; business risks and insurance. Computer Tla - Unit Record: Card format; elementary unit record programming, key punch and verifier, card sorter, collator, interpreter, reproducer, accounting machine, calculator; basic computer concepts. Economics Tla - Introductory: This course deals with such aspects of the country's economic affairs as business organization, deGision•making in the individual firm, supply and demand, money and banking, national income and gross national product. English Tla - lntr6duction to Contemporary Literature: Training to write more correctly and more forcefully, and to read with appreciation and discernment in contemporary literature. MathematicR Tlc - Business Mathematics: A review of arithmetic and short methods applicable in business; a review and extension of algebra; linear mathematics and programming; logarithms; simple interest and discount with reference to partial payments, invoices, accounts, installment plans and personal loans; calculations required for inventories, insurance, business finance, partnerships, and taxation; compound interest; annuities; sinking funds. Mathematics Tld - Computer: Topics,in mathematics concerning use and operations of computers including introduction to numbers, decimal and binary, converting from one base to another, use of complements in numbers, computer addressing principle, fixed and floating point arithmetic, logical · operations. �Business T2a - Accounting: Partnerships and limited companies; departmental and branch accounting; budgeting, funds statements, statement analysis, special analyses and internal reports, introduction to cost accounting. Business 200 - Managerial Statistics: Methods of obtaining, classifying and analysing business data. Computer T2a - Digital Computers: The use of digital computers; programming _and basic circuitry; organization and operation of complete digital machines. Computer T2b - Programming: Elementary and intermediate programming using IBM PL/I language. Emphasis will be given to the commercial aspects of this language. The student will write programs in PL/I and run them on the !RM 360 computer. English T2a - Report Writing: A study of the different aspects of report writing and business correspondence. This study will include effective expression of ideas, the psychological implication of business correspondence, and the planning and writing of letters and reports. English T2b - Introduction to Types of Literature: The study of drama, poetry, and the novel for the purpose of increasing the student's appreciation of the different types of literature. Business T3b - Cost Accounting (half course): The elements of cost-material, labor and overhead; the application of cost to work done under job cost and process cost systems; standard costs, including the analysis and accounting treatment of variances; cost and profit analysis for decision making gross profit analysis, break-even analysis, profit-volume analysis and differential cost analysis; budgetary control and the flexible budget. Business T2d - Human Relations: A study of people at work and how they may be motivated to work together in greater harmony. Focus is upon the manager and his operating relationships with people in the organization. Computer T3a - Field Work: Practical experience in a commercial or industrial concern. �2c c,7·· Computer T3b - Programming: Advanced concepts of computer programming are considered with emphasis on the language PL/I. Application on the computer of these concepts is done in laboratory sessions. Computer T3c - Management: The principles and practices of business management and their application to the organization and operation of enterprises are discussed with emphasis placed on the philosophy and general approach rather than on d~tails of technique and procedures. Computer T3d - Systems: Systems analysis with special emphasis on EDP systems; systems functions, survey techniques, charting, layout, installation procedures, forms design, work measurement, records management, office equipment, information retrieval, EDP feasibility studies, equipment selection, file layout, controls. Applications Application for admission to the program, together with supporti~g documents, should be submitted to the Registrar, Lakehead University, before September 1st. Application forms and further information may be secured from the office of the Registrar. 1 � https://digitalcollections.lakeheadu.ca/files/original/a0502223d70ca2292d30c1aadd923776.pdf c03db5b4cbf6942e5d15cb35d49df640 PDF Text Text LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY SCHOOL OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION TRANSFER PROGRAM DIPLOMA TO HONOURS COMMERCE DEGREE �Part I: General Policy • The objective of th·e transfer program is to provide a means of upward mobility for the best graduates of diploma programs in Business Administration at Lakehead University and the CAAT system. The program will not attempt to equate co~rses taken at the diploma level to courses at the degree level. Thus, successful comple- tion, with the requisite average, of any diploma program in Business Administration will qualify students for admission into the transfer program leading to the degree Honours Bachelor of Commerce. Accor- dingly, advanced standing will not be granted on an individual basis but rather on a program basis. The courses involved in the program will be the same as those taken by students entering the Honours Bachelor of Commerce program directly from high school. Students will be governed by the same academic standards applied to regular Commerce students. Part II: Admissions Graduates of the Business Administration Diploma program at Lakehead University applying for admission into the transfer program must have a 60% overall average with a 60% average in Business subj_ects. These averages will be _three-year · cumulative averages. Graduates of a three-year Business Administration diploma program from a CAAT applying for admission into the transfer program must have a "B" average overall with a "B" average in Business subjects (three year cumulative averages). Graduates of a two-yea! Business Administration diploma program from a CAAT applying for admission into the transfer program must ... .,..,.__ ,_ _ ·----------·---·~-~--..,.,.. - ... - - - - - ...... _ ..., - .... -· -· - --- ----------= .. �cont'd ... -2- have an "A" average overall with an "A" average in Business subjects (two-year cumulative averages)". All other applicants for admission with advanced standing into the Commerce program must be considered on an individual basis. Part III: Program of Study Program for LU Diploma Graduates General Diploma: Business 300 Business 400 Business 401 Business 402 (½) l½ full courses from Business options 5 Arts or Science Research paper in Business 200 Business 204 Business 301 Business 302 A total of 10 courses plus 4 research papers. Computer Systems: Business 300 Business 303 (½) Business 400 Business 401 l½ full courses from Business options 5 Arts or Science Research paper in Business 200 Business 204 Business 301 Business 302 A total of 10 courses plus 4 research papers. ~ Economics la6 and an advanced course in Economics are required. Program for three year CAAT Graduates 2 full courses selected from Business 200 Business 201 Business 204 3 full courses selected from Business Business Business Business Business Business 400 Business 401 Business 402 (½) . l½ full courses from Business options Economics la6 Advanced course in Economics 1 Arts or Science A total of 12 courses 300 301 302 303 (½) 305 (½) �Cont'd ... Note: -3- Courses shall be selected in consultation with a representative of the department. Program for~ year CAAT Graduates 2 full courses selected from Business 200 Business 201 Business 204 3 full courses selected from Business Business Business Business Business 300 301 302 303 (½) 305 (½) Business 400 Business 401 Business 402 (½) 2½ full courses from Business options Economics la6 Advanced course in economics 6 Arts or Science A total of 18 courses Note: Courses shall be selected in consultation with a representative of the department. Part IV: Research Pauers 1. A student should be required to demonstrate that he has grasped concepts that are stressed at the d~gree level but not at the diploma level. 2. The form and content of the research paper will be left to the discretion of instructor of the degree course. 3. A supervisory system of instruction will be used. Students are not necessarily required to attend regular classes. 4. When a diploma course plus a research paper are used as the equivalent of a degree course, the mark given to the student would normally be weight.e d as follows: 50% of the diploma mark plus 50% of the research paper mark. When choosing optional courses; students who have taken courses at the diploma level and who wish to take similar courses at the Commerce level, may fulfill the requirements for these courses by doing a research paper for the instructor of the appropriate Commerce course. I The level \ �cont'd ... -4- of difficulty of these r~search papers will be such that awarding a halfcredit will be justified. � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Lakehead University Collection Description An account of the resource Photographs from Lakehead University's history: people, events, and campus. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource School of Business Administration Submission Subject The topic of the resource Universities Description An account of the resource School of Business Administration Submission to the Committee of University Affairs, Province of Ontario, September 30 1968. Includes a summary of programs and objectives for 1968 - 1975 with exhibits on enrolment, courses and program paths. The School of Business Administration Transfer Program and Diploma to Honours Commerce Degree is included in the submission. Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Lakehead University Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1968-09-30 Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource PDF Language A language of the resource English Type The nature or genre of the resource Text Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context lu-15e Coverage The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant Canada - Ontario - Port Arthur Canada - Ontario - Thunder Bay